7102-Fleet Service Bay Expansion - Specifications00010 - 1
Project Consultant Information
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PROJECT MANUAL
ISSUE FOR BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION
A New Service Facility Expansion
For
City of Denton
Fleet Services Department
City of Denton RFP # xxx
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Date: April 15, 2019
Project No. 18014
Nelson+Morgan, Architects ARCHITECTS
2717 Wind River Lane, Suite 230
Denton, Texas 76210
Contact: Alan Nelson, Principal in Charge
anelson@nelsonmorgan.com
Phone: (940) 566-0266
HPMB Consulting Engineers, Inc. MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
2828 E. Trinity Mills Rd., Suite 210
Carrollton, Texas 75006
Contact: Dennis Hergenrether, Principal in Charge
dhergenrether@hpmbengineers.com
Phone: (214) 483-6202
Lobsinger & Potts Structural Engineering STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
1723 E. Southlake Blvd., Suite 200
Southlake, Texas 76092
Contact: Cory Potts, P.E.
potts@lpse.net
Phone: (817) 488-9933
Civil Point Engineering CIVIL ENGINEERS
3102 Maple Ave., Ste. 400
Dallas, TX 75201
Contact: John Bezner
john@civilpt.com
Phone: (972) 554-1100
ISSUED FOR PERMIT
SEPTEMBER 16, 2019
DNCILSEE
00050 - 1
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE BAY EXPANSION
To The
FLEET SERVICES FACILITY
for the
City of Denton
Denton, TEXAS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects
Project No. 18014
CITY of DENTON BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Exhibit 1 Pricing Sheet 1 page
Exhibit 2 General Provisions, Terms and Conditions 103 pages
GENERAL INFORMATION
00010 Project Information and Professional Seals 1 page
00050 Table of Contents 3 pages
00310 Proposal and Alternates 1 pages
DIVISION ONE: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of Work 3 pages
01060 Regulatory Requirements 1 page
01096 TAS and ADA Guidelines 3 pages
01100 Job Requirements 7 pages
02110 Allowances 2 pages
01250 Contract Modification Procedures 3 pages
01290 Payment Procedures 4 pages
01295 Schedule of Values 2 pages
01310 Project Management and Coordination 8 pages
01320 Construction Progress Documentation 2 pages
01340 Submittal Procedures 8 pages
01360 Alteration Project Procedures 2 pages
01420 References 4 pages
01450 Quality Control 3 pages
01600 Materials and Equipment 10 pages
01731 Cutting and Patching 2 pages
01740 Cleaning 2 pages
01770 Closeout Procedures 2 pages
01780 Closeout Submittals 5 pages
DIVISION TWO: SITE WORK
02070 Selective Demolition 2 pages
02100 Site Preparation 3 pages
02110 Geotechnical Report 26 pages
02260 Soil Poisoning 1 page
02270 Erosion and Sediment Control 3 pages
02300 Drilled Piers 2 pages
02310 Grading 2 pages
02610 Concrete Paving 3 pages
Not included in permit
set
00050 - 2
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02618 Pavement Marking 1 page
DIVISION THREE: CONCRETE
03200 Concrete reinforcement 2 pages
03300 Cast in Place Concrete 9 pages
03366 Concrete Sealer and Hardener
03420 Precast Concrete Panels 4 pages
DIVISION FOUR: MASONRY
04210 Masonry CMU 5 pages
DIVISION FIVE: METALS
05100 Structural Steel 4 pages
05200 Steel Joists 3 pages
05300 Steel Roof Deck 4 pages
05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 7 pages
05500 Miscellaneous Metals 4 pages
DIVISION SIX: WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry 3 pages
DIVISION SEVEN: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION:
07421 Formed Metal Wall Panels 7 pages
07530 Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roofing System 21 pages
07600 Misc. Accessories for Fully Adhered Multi-ply Roofing Systems 7 pages
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 4 pages
07900 Sealants 3 pages
DIVISION EIGHT: DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 HM Doors and Frames 4 pages
08330 Overhead Coiling Door 5 pages
08710 Door Hardware 10 pages
DIVISION NINE: FINISHES
09110 Non load bearing metal studs 5 pages
09250 Gypsum Wallboard 5 pages
09900 Painting 5 pages
09961 High Performance Coatings 8 pages
DIVISION TEN: NOT USED
DIVISION ELEVEN: EQUIPMENT
11001 Equipment Provided and Installed by Owner 3 pages
11003 Equipment by Contractor Installed by Contractor 2 pages
DIVISION TWELVE thru DIVISION FOURTEEN: NOT USED
Division 15
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
15075 Mechanical System Identification
15140 Hangers and Supports
15260 Piping Insulation
15290 Ductwork Insulation
15330 Automatic Fire Protection System
15410 Plumbing Piping Systems
15440 Plumbing Fixtures
15480 Domestic Water Heaters
15570 Gas-Fired Makeup Air Units
15580 Gas Fired Heaters
15651 Refrigerant Piping
15675 Ductless AC Split Systems
15760 Electric Heaters
15830 Power Ventilators
15850 Air Inlet and Outlet Devices
15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
END
00050 - 3
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE BAY EXPANSION
To The
FLEET SERVICES FACILITY
for the
City of Denton
Denton, TEXAS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects
Project No. 18014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000 General Electrical Requirements .......................................................................................
16060 Grounding and Bonding .....................................................................................................
16070 Supporting Devices ............................................................................................................
16080 Electrical Identification .......................................................................................................
16120 Conductors and Cables ......................................................................................................
16130 Raceways and Fittings .......................................................................................................
16140 Wiring Devices ...................................................................................................................
16405 Enclosed Motor Controllers ................................................................................................
16410 Enclosed Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers ........................................................
16420 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards .................................................................................
16460 Dry Type Transformers ......................................................................................................
16490 Fuses.….. ...........................................................................................................................
16500 Lighting Fixtures .................................................................................................................
16990 Special Systems .................................................................................................................
00310 - 1
Proposals and Alternates
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
Section 00310
PROPOSALS AND ALTERNATES
A. General:
It is the intention of the owner to award the contract for this project on the basis of the lowest and/or
best proposal for which funds are available and as may be accepted by the owner.
The owner reserves the right to select the proposal that will be most beneficial to the overall building
program, and in the event that multiple bid items are required, the owner is not bound to accept the
items in the order in which they are listed. All bid items awarded will be to a single prime contractor.
Each bidder must submit a bid on each bid item for his proposal to be accepted.
In the event that alternates are required, and though they may be listed together following the base
bid proposal, each alternate is directly related to the proposal and there will be no interchanging
between base bid proposal and alternates. That is, a base bid proposal will not be accepted from
one bidder and an alternate pertaining to that proposal accepted from another bidder.
B. Bid Procedures:
Base bid: Work shall include all items as indicated on the plans and in the specifications.
Alternates: None required for this project.
Procedure:
1. Provide alternative bids to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base
bid if the corresponding change in scope is accepted by the owner.
2. Include within the alternative bid prices all costs, including materials, installations,
and fees.
3. Show the proposed alternative amounts opposite their proper description on the
proposal form.
C. Base Bid and Alternate Bid Items descriptions:
Base Bid: Work will include all items as indicated on the plans and in the specifications.
Alternate bid items : None
END OF SECTION
Division One
General Requirements
01010 - 1
Summary of Work
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
01010 SUMMARY OF WORK
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Construct work as described in the Contract Documents.
1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the project completely and
fully operable.
2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete project.
3. Provide the civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and all other
work required for a complete and operable project.
4. Test and place the completed project in operation.
5. Provide the special tools, spare parts, lubricants, supplies, or other materials as indicated in
Contract Documents for the operation and maintenance of the Project.
6. Install Owner provided products and place in operation.
7. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the
project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be
provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Architect.
1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements apply to each
specification section.
B. Comply with all applicable state and local codes and regulations pertaining to the nature and
character of the work being performed.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: The work in this project consists of the
construction of site improvements, building, mechanical, electrical, plumbing work and all
appurtenances identified by the Contract Documents as work to construct an addition to the Fleet
Services Building for the City of Denton, Texas.
B. Work includes, but is not limited to the following general items:
a. Site rough grading and finish grading
b. Selective demolition
c. Site concrete and concrete paving
d. Concrete foundation and drilled piers
e. Precast concrete panels
f. Structural Steel
g. Rough carpentry
h. Built up roofing
i. Hollow metal doors and frames
j. Overhead coiling doors
k. Door hardware
l. Glass and glazing
m. Painting
n. High performance coatings
o. Electrical service rough-in and installation
p. Ventilation and heating systems
01010 - 2
Summary of Work
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
q. Plumbing rough-in and installation
1.04 INTENT OF THE SPECIFICATIONS:
A. The intent of these specifications is to describe the materials and methods of construction
required for the performance of the work. In general, it is intended that the drawings shall
delineate the detailed extent of the work. When there is a discrepancy between drawings,
referenced specifications, and standards and this specification, this specification shall govern.
B. Material names or manufacturers that have been named in the specification have been selected
to establish a standard of quality and minimum performance criteria. Other manufacturers and
products may be considered for substitution. It is the bidder's responsibility to research and
locate suppliers that meet the performance specifications required by these specifications.
1.05 WORKS BY OWNER
A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this contract, but
may impact construction scheduling, testing, and start up. These items will require coordination
efforts during construction by the contractor:
1. Existing built up roof on remainder of facility will be removed and a new roof installed. GC will
coordinate work efforts with Owner’s roof contractor.
2. Existing fire hydrant to be relocated. Coordinate with Owner.
B. Completion of the work described in this contract may impact the construction and testing of the items
listed above.
1. Coordinate construction activities through the Owner.
2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the project or any specified
milestones.
C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction,
unless otherwise stated.
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PROJECT SITE
A. Limit the use of project site for work and storage to the areas at the site designated and approved by
the Owner.
B. Coordinate the use of the premises with the Architect
C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the site.
D. Store products to allow owner access for maintenance and operations.
E. Obtain and pay for the use of any additional storage or work areas needed for construction.
F. Any damage to existing facilities, including contamination, caused by the Contractor's personnel,
visitors, materials, or equipment, shall be repaired or corrected at the Contractor's expense.
G. No alcoholic beverages or illegal substances shall be permitted on the site at any time.
H. No concealed or illegal, weapons shall be permitted on the site at any time.
1.07 OCCUPANCY
A. As soon as any portion of the structure is ready for use, the Owner shall have the right to occupy or
operate that portion upon written notice to the Contractor.
B. Testing of equipment and appurtenances including specified test periods, training, and start up does
not constitute acceptance for operation.
01010 - 3
Summary of Work
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Owner may accept the facility for continued use after start-up and testing at the option of the Owner.
If acceptance is delayed at the option of the Owner, shut down facilities per approved Operation and
Maintenance procedures.
D. The execution of bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions.
E. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting occupancy of t he structures and use of
equipment during the remaining period of construction.
F. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and products per the individual sections of the specifications.
3.00 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION
01060 - 1
Regulatory Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01060
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Requirements, bidding documents and drawings.
1.2 TAXES:
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required by law.
1.3 PERMITS AND FEES:
The Contractor shall apply for and secure all incidental permits, governmental fees and licenses
necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work.
1.4 GOVERNING CODES:
Work performed under this specification shall be in compliance with applicable codes, laws, and
ordinances of the municipal, state, and federal departments concerned. Materials and
workmanship required by such regulations shall be provided by the Contractor whether or not
specifically noted herein or shown on the drawings.
1.5 NOTICES:
The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and
orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If Contractor performs
any Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, without
providing notice to building owner's representative, Contractor shall assume full responsibility
and shall bear all costs.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
State and local building codes.
END OF SECTION
01100 - 1
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01100
JOB REQUIREMENTS
1.1 COOPERATION WITH BUILDING OFFICIALS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for access into specific work areas and to
make arrangements for time to shut down services pursuant to contract work.
1.2 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine specifications, drawings and job site
for all construction requirements in connection with this work.
B. The Contractor shall examine the general construction conditions and shall familiarize himself
with all such limitations caused by such conditions and to take cognizance of same in
submitting bid.
1.3 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. Comply with all local, state, and federal laws, regulations, and ordinances applicable to this
construction.
B. Use the following published codes as minimum requirements in the absence of other
applicable more stringent codes:
1. International Building Code, Current Edition
2. National Electrical Code
3. National Plumbing Code
4. ASHRAE Handbook
5. ASTM Standards
6. Americans with Disabilities Act, Architectural Guidelines (ADAAG)
7. Texas Accessibility Standards.
8. City of Denton Codes and Ordnances
C. General Contractor shall verify, secure and pay for all permit and inspection costs, impact
fees, government fees, and licenses directly or indirectly related to the project.
1.4 COORDINATION AND CONDUCT OF THE WORK
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of all work, and for the coordination
of the operations of all trades, subcontractors and material suppliers, engaged upon or in
connection with the work, as well as the Contractor's employees. He shall exercise every
effort to assure a harmonious, cooperative attitude on the part of all concerned, and be
prepared to guarantee to each subcontractor and foreman the dimensions which they may
require for the fitting of their own adjoining work, and do all fitting and adjusting necessary to
make the several parts of the work come together properly and to fit the work to receive, or to
be received by, the work of other Contractors.
1.5 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials furnished under this contract shall be new and free from defects and approved
by Architect.
01100 - 2
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. All work is to be accomplished in a quality workmanship manner and be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of his work. All
cutting shall be carefully and neatly done so as not to damage or cut away more than
necessary of any existing portions of the structure. All patching shall be done in a neat
workmanlike manner such that patched areas be restored to their original condition.
D. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to keep the work areas in a clean and safe
condition.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. The General Contractor shall submit for approval seven (7) sets of shop drawings in addition
to the number of sets required by Contractor for his use.
B. Any time delay caused by correcting and submitting shop drawings will be the responsibility
of the Contractor.
C. Consecutively number each transmittal letter for shop drawing submissions.
D. Samples and finishes of materials as required shall be furnished with promptness and will be
accepted or rejected under same conditions as outlined above.
E. Submit schedule of Shop Drawings and sample submittals per Section 01340.
1.7 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Form: Use AIA Document G702A-Continuation Sheet for AIA G702 Application and
Certificate for Payment.
B. Refer to Specification Section 01295 for additional information. Before the first application for
Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect one (1) electronic copy of the schedule
of values of the various portions of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum divided so
as to facilitate payments to subcontractors. This schedule, when approved by the Architect
shall be used as a basis for the Contractor's Application for Payment.
1.8 SUPERINTENDENT
A. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall
be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall
represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding
as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other
communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case.
1.9 SUBCONTRACTORS
A. Subcontracts shall be made with contractors whose organizations are experienced in their
field of construction, and the subcontractors shall be required to thoroughly familiarize
themselves with the General Conditions and to portions of the Specifications applying in any
way to their work. The Contractor's superintendent shall review these documents with the
01100 - 3
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
subcontractor's superintendents on the job before that portion of work involved is
commenced.
1.10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. The General Contractor shall, at his expense, provide and maintain telephone service during
the entire construction period.
B. Temporary Utilities:
1. The Owner will pay the cost of all water, gas and electricity used during and expressly for
the prosecution of the construction described herein.
2. The Contractor shall provide for a power welder for welding operations.
3. The plumbing contractor shall provide, protect and maintain an adequate water supply for
the use of all contractors on the project for construction purposes by means of the
permanent water supply shall be made available within fifteen (15) days after written
request has been made to the plumbing and Subcontractor by any Contractor requiring it.
Submit copies of the request to all interested parties including the Architect.
C. Temporary field office:
1. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain a weathertight and safely heated
building at the project site with floors raised well above the ground and of sufficient size to
accommodate his needs. He shall provide the building with light fixtures for night work and
electrical receptacles for the use of business machines.
2. The General Contractor shall, at his expense, extend temporary electrical power to the
office building and shall connect all light fixtures and receptacles, and provide such other
power as required for construction tools, and equipment.
3. The General Contractor shall, at his expense, provide and maintain telephone service for
the field office during the entire construction period.
D. Temporary Toilet Facilities:
Provide single-occupant self-contained toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell
or similar non-absorbent material.
E. Temporary Open-Mesh Fencing:
Provide No. 11-gauge galvanized chain link fabric fencing 6 feet high with galvanized
steel pipe posts, 1-1/2" I.D. for line posts, and 2-1/2" I.D. for corner posts in locations as
indicated on Drawings. Enclose substantially the entire site or portion thereof
determined to be sufficient to accommodate the entire construction operation. Install in
manner that will prevent persons, dogs, and similar animals from easily entering the
site, except by way of the entrance gates when open.
01100 - 4
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.11 MEASUREMENTS
A. Before doing any work or ordering any materials, the Contractor shall verify all measurements
of any existing and new work and shall be responsible for their correctness. Any differences,
which may be found, shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding
with the work. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual
dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings.
1.12 CONFLICTS
A. Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, specifications, codes, ordinances, and
drawings, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Install all manufactured items, materials, and equipment in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommended specifications except that the Specifications herein, where
more stringent, shall be applicable.
B. At completion of the project and prior to final acceptance by the Owner, provide the Architect
with three complete bound sets of operating and maintenance instructions, and demonstrate
to him procedures for proper operation and maintenance of all equipment. Refer to Section s
01771 Closeout Procedures and Section 01780 Closeout Submittals for additional closeout
procedures and requirements.
1.14 JOB MAINTENANCE
A. During the course of their work, all crafts and trades shall protect all work which precedes
theirs from damage and they shall make repairs or replacements to any damage caused
either directly or indirectly by them.
B. Site housekeeping and final cleaning shall be done in accordance with Article 5.15 of the
Uniform General Conditions.
C. The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to the interior of the building, ceiling
system, or any mechanical or electrical equipment or systems resulting from the demolition or
construction operations, and at completion he shall replace, at his own expense all such
damages.
1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Certain materials, equipment, methods, and services are required by these specifications to
establish the required standard of quality, function and appearance. Generally, other
materials, equipment, methods and services, which are proven by evidence satisfactory to
the Architect to meet the required standards, will be acceptable, in accordance with
Paragraph 5.13 of the Uniform General Conditions and as outlined in Section 01600
Materials and Equipment.
B. Conditions governing substitutions are as follows:
1. No substitution will be allowed without the approval of the Architect in writing.
2. Architect's approval of any substitution does not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of providing the specified item. For example, if the substituted item, in the
01100 - 5
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
opinion of the Architect, proves to be inferior to the specified item, in any manner, during
the construction period or the guarantee period, the Contractor shall provide, at no extra
cost, the specified item completely installed including repairs or damages to other
materials necessitated by the change.
3. The phrases "approved, as approved, in an approved manner, satisfactory, approved
equal, similar, equal" and like works and phrases refer to items which, in the opinion of the
Architect, are similar and equal in all respects to the items indicated in the drawings or
specifications.
4. Except as otherwise required by the specifications, substitution requests may be
submitted at any time providing the Contractor allows ample lead time for Architect's
investigation, and for the preparation of shop drawings or submittals, fabrication and
without delaying the work. When not allowed sufficient lead time, the Architect will not
consider substitutions. It is the Contractor's responsibility to accurately ascertain the
amount of lead time required. Proposed substitutions shall be submitted prior to bid
opening if possible, and particularly if they necessitate the changing of design functions,
structural elements, construction details, major dimensions or major parts of the
specifications. Such proposed substitutions shall be submitted for approval prior to bid
opening allowing ample time for the Architect to investigate them, make changes in the
drawings and specifications (if approved), and publish them in an addendum prior to bid
opening. The Architect must receive such substitution requests at least seven (7) days
prior to bid opening or they will not be considered.
5. After execution of the contract agreement, proposed substitutions will be considered only
if the Architect receives the advantage of less cost with no decrease in quality, and only
when submitted by or through the General Contractor.
6. The Architect will reject any materials and/or workmanship, either before or after
installation is completed, which is not indicated in the drawings or specifications or the
substitution of which has not been approved by Architect in writing.
1.16 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Deliveries of materials to the site of the work shall be so scheduled as to cause a minimum of
interference with construction operations.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of all materials,
equipment, etc., delivered at the site. Building materials, contractor's equipment, etc., may
be stored on the premises but the placing of same shall be subject to the approval of the
Architect. When any room in the building is used as a shop, storeroom, etc., the Contractor
will be held responsible for any repairs, patching or cleaning arising from such use. The
Contractor shall protect and be responsible for all damage to his work or material, from the
date of the Contract until the final payment is made, and shall make good without cost to the
Owner, any damage or loss that may occur during this period. The Contractor shall handle all
material as directed, so that the Architect may inspect it.
C. All cement, lime, gypsum, finish lumber and other materials affected by the weather shall be
covered and protected to keep them free from damage while they are being transported to
the job site. The Contractor shall provide the necessary weathertight temporary storage
building, sheds, platforms, etc. No materials shall be stored directly on the ground.
1.17 EQUIPMENT, SCAFFOLDING, ETC.
01100 - 6
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish at his own cost and risk, all special
and power tools, scaffolding, apparatus, hoists, derricks including power for same, and all
temporary work and materials required for the proper execution of his work.
1.18 JOB SIGN
A. The General Contractor shall provide a job sign, substantially built and finished to remain in
good condition for the duration of the project.
B. The location and general design shall be as directed by the Architect. The sign shall be four feet
high and eight feet long and shall contain the following:
a. Name of the Project
b. Name of the Architect and Engineers
C. Other signs will not be allowed on the site without the written approval of the Architect.
1.19 USE AND OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER - Refer to Article 9 of the
Uniform General Conditions.
1.20 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. General: Where any part of the General Conditions is modified or voided by this section, the
unaltered provisions of that part shall remain in effect.
B. Related Documents: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in the
section.
C. Final Cleaning:
1. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning.
2. In preparation for substantial completion, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed exterior
surfaces.
3. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent
surfaces.
4. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is accepted by Owner.
1.21 GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES AND BONDS - Refer to Article 12 of the General Conditions
of the Contract.
1.22 LIST OF REQUIRED GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. Prior to submittal of guarantees and warranties, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect,
in duplicate, a list of required guarantees and warranties. This list shall designate the names
and addresses of the several Subcontractors or parties responsible to the General Contractor
for execution of the work.
01100 - 7
Job Requirements
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Include with the above list a time schedule designating periods of time within which the
General Contractor will accomplish any corrective work necessary that would preclude
Owner's use of equipment or use of the facility.
C. The Architect will review and approve the time schedule in order that the project closeout will
not be delayed.
1.23 AS-BUILT RECORDS - Refer to Article 3.11 of Uniform General Conditions.
1.24 POST CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
A. Prior to expiration of one year from date of substantial completion, Owner and Contractor will
jointly make visual inspection of the project to determine whether correction of work is
required in accordance with provisions of the Contract.
B. Owner will promptly notify Contractor, in writing, of any observed deficiencies.
END OF SECTION
01250 - 1
Contract Modification Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions
of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively
applicable to this Section.
2 Section Includes: Procedures for processing Change Orders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1 Submit name of individual authorized to accept changes, and to be responsible for
informing others in Contractor's employ of changes in the Work.
2 Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order.
1.3 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM AND CONTRACT TIME
1 Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. Provide full
information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of
changes in the Work.
2 Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow
evaluation of the quotation.
a. Identify the costs for all subcontractor and vendor furnished items.
b. Identify the cost for any self performed labor.
1. No additional time for general project supervision or coordination will be
allowed unless proposed work scope extends the project thru the critical path
process.
c. Maximum amount allowed for General Contractor overhead markups will be 10%
of Proposed Change subtotal.
d. Maximum amount allowed for General Contractor profit markup will be 5% of
subtotal of Proposed Changes including the overhead markup.
3 On request, provide additional data to support computations:
e. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.
f. Overhead and profit.
g. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
h. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
4 Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis,
with additional information
a. Origin and date of claim.
b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
c. Time records and wage rates paid.
d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly
documented.
1.4 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
1 Architect may submit a Proposal Request including:
a. Statement for the reason for the change.
b. Detailed description of change with supplementary or revised Drawings and
Specifications.
c. Projected time for executing the change.
d. Period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid.
01250 - 2
Contract Modification Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2 Prepare and submit an estimate within 10 days.
1.5 CHANGE PROCEDURES
1 Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to
Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form
G710.
2 Proposal for a change may be made by submitting a request for change to Architect,
describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement
describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and
Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by
separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance
with Section 01600.
1.6 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and
Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop
work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified,after
receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the
Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish
times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form
13.6C,
f. "Proposal Worksheet Detail." or other forms acceptable to Architect.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the
effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or
system specified.
01250 - 3
Contract Modification Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request
(Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary,"
and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." or other form acceptable to
Architect.
1.7 LUMP SUM CHANGE ORDER
1 Based on Proposal Request and Contractor’s sum quotation, or Contractor's request for
Change Order as approved by Architect.
1.8 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
1 For predetermined unit prices and quantities, Change Order will be executed on a lump
sum basis.
2 For unit costs or quantities of units of work, which are not predetermined, execute Work
and utilize standard Public Works prices. Changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time
will be computed as specified for time and material Change Order.
1.9 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
1 Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed
with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
2 Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work.
It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time.
3 Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required
by the Construction Change Directive.
4 After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.10 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS
1 Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of
the Contract.
1.11 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
1 Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each
authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum as shown
on Change Order.
2 Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-
schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.
3 Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01290 - 1
Payment Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Payments for Work shall conform to the provisions of the City of Denton General Conditions, the
Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Section. Apply provisions for payments in the
Section to all Subcontractors and suppliers.
B. Submit Applications for Payment at the amounts indicated in the Agreement:
1. Amounts for each item in the Agreement shall include but not be limited to cost for:
a. Mobilization, demobilization, cleanup, bonds, and insurance.
b. Professional services including but not limited to engineering and legal fees.
c. The products to be permanently incorporated into the Project.
d. The products consumed during the construction of the Project.
e. The labor and supervision to complete the Project.
f. The equipment, including tools, machinery, and appliances required to complete the Project.
g. The field and home office administration and overhead costs related directly or indirectly to
the Project.
1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND PAYMENTS
A. Submit a detailed schedule of values for the work to be performed on the project.
1. Submit schedule within 10 days prior to submitting t he first request for payment.
2. Line items in the proposal are to be used as line items in the schedule.
3. Payment will be made on the quantity of Work completed per Contract Documents during the
payment period.
B. Format:
1. Type Schedule on AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet for Application and Certificate for
Payment, or use media driven printout upon prior approval.
2. Follow Table of Contents of Project Manual for listing component parts. Identify each line item by
number and title of major Specifications section.
C. Content:
1. List installed value of each major item of Work and each subcontracted item of Work as a
separate line item to serve as a basis for computing values for Progress Payments. Round off
values to nearest dollar.
2. For each major subcontract, list products and operations of that subcontract as separate line
items.
3. List allowances in the specified monetary amount for each allowance.
4. Coordinate listings with Progress Schedule.
5. Include a directly proportional amount of Contractor's general office overhead and profit for each
component listing. Use separate line for bonds, insurance, temporary facilities and controls, and
superintendence.
6. Sum of values listed equals total Contract Sum.
1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01290 - 2
Payment Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with
previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for
Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the last day of the
month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the 25 day
of the month.
1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by
Architect.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment.
E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for
Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.
F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or
not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of
Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project
acceleration.
G. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment
purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-
site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety
to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead
and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous
Applications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for
Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining
stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
H. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
01290 - 3
Payment Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to
the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
J. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every
entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully
entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.
K. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. Schedule of values.
2. Schedule of unit prices.
3. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
5. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
6. Copies of building permits.
7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of
the Work.
8. Initial progress report.
9. Report of preconstruction conference.
10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
11. Performance and payment bonds.
12. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
L. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for
portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
M. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
01290 - 4
Payment Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that
taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date
of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for
corresponding elements of the Work.
6. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01295 - 1
Schedule of Values
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01295
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Providing a Schedule of Values to be used as a basis for payments.
B. Paragraph 9.2 - General Conditions.
1.02 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit to Architect a Schedule of Values at least 20 days prior to submitting first Application for
Payment. No payments will be made until schedule is submitted and reviewed in form outlined
below.
B. Upon request by Architect, support values given with such data that will substantiate their
accuracy.
C. Review and resubmittal:
1. After review by Architect, revise and resubmit Schedule as required.
2. Resubmit revised Schedule in same manner.
D. Form of Submittal:
1. Submit typewritten Schedule of Values on AIA Form G702A, "Continuation Sheet" of
Application and Certificate for Payment.
2. Use Table of Contents of this Project Manual as an outline for determining itemized cost of
Divisions 2-32. In general, itemize each division by section titles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. In addition to line item costs of sections in Divisions 2 thru 16, furnish line item costs for each of
the following general cost items:
1. Bonds
2. Insurance
3. Field Superintendence
4. Temporary Facilities
5. Allowances (itemized in accordance with Section 01210)
6. Project Close Out
7. Trench Safety
8. Contractors Overhead and General Conditions
9. Contractor’s Fee
10. USE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS from DIVISION 2 thru 16 for LINE ITEMS
11. Mechanical
a. Units
b. Controls
c. Ductwork and Rough-In (by floor)
d. Grilles and Diffusers (by floor)
12. Plumbing
a. Service to Building including meter
b. Rough-In (by floor)
c. Top-out
d. Fixtures (by floor)
13. Fire Protection
a. Service of Building
b. Rough-in (by floor)
c. Finish-out (by floor)
01295 - 2
Schedule of Values
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
14. Electrical
a. Service to Building
b. Switch Gear
c. Wiring, Conduit (by floor)
d. Panels (by floor)
e. Fixtures (by floor)
f. Fire Alarm (by floor)
B. List quantities of materials specified under unit price allowance.
C. Use Schedule of Values only as basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment.
D. Sum of total costs of all items listed in Schedule shall equal total Contract Sum.
END OF SECTION
01310 - 1
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.
2. Coordination drawings.
3. Requests for Information (RFIs).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence
of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and
by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or
after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
01310 - 2
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required
for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary
utilities to minimize waste.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into,
the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as
Owner's property.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required
to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate
and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include
the following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural,
civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of
components during the life of the installation.
c. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
d. Indicate required installation sequences.
e. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to
be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide
alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor
dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the
Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings
with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and
electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
01310 - 3
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict
between light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and
elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar
items.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation,
bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors,
cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
7. Electrical Work: Show the following:
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm
locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.
9. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements
in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following
requirements:
1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system
as original Drawings.
2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as file
preparation format.
3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing
coordination digital data files.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data
files as they relate to Drawings.
b. Digital Data Software Program: Refer to Section 011000 "Summary" for digital data
software program.
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement
acceptable to Owner and Architect.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with
no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or
work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
01310 - 4
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe
items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
acceptable to Architect.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow
seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00
p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
01310 - 5
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including
Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
C. Sustainability Coordination Conference: Owner will schedule and conduct a LEED coordination
conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner Architect, and Contractor.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent and Sustainability
coordinator; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect meeting requirements for
Sustainability certification, including the following:
a. Sustainability Project Checklist.
b. General requirements for Sustainability-related procurement and documentation.
c. Project closeout requirements and Sustainability certification procedures.
d. Role of Sustainability coordinator.
e. Construction waste management.
f. Construction operations and Sustainability requirements and restrictions.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
D. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect ,
and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.
01310 - 6
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Options.
b. Related RFIs.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Sustainable design requirements.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
E. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents.
b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
inspection for acceptance.
01310 - 7
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
c. Submittal of written warranties.
d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation.
e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
g. Requirements for demonstration and training.
h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
for final payment.
j. Coordination of separate contracts.
k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
F. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.
Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Status of submittals.
3) Status of sustainable design documentation, including review of action plans.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
01310 - 8
Project Management and Coordination
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01320 - 1
Construction Progress Documentation
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01320
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively
applicable to this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Procedures for preparation and submittal of construction Progress Schedules and
periodical updating.
1.2 PROGRESS SCHEDULES
1. Format:
1. Submit a computer generated, horizontal bar chart with separate line for each
major section of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.
2. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of Work.
3. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions.
4. Sheet Size: Minimum 11 by 17 inches.
2. Content:
1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and
completion of each element of construction.
2. Identify each item by major Specification section number.
3. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.
4. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.
5. Provide sub-schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section 01100.
6. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire Schedule.
7. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of
Work completed, as of the first day of each month.
8. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and
product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances.
9. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products and products specified under
Allowances.
10. Coordinate content Schedule of Values specified in Section 01290.
3. Revisions to Schedules:
1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion
date of each activity.
2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and
other identifiable changes.
3. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on
Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.
4. Distribution:
1. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to job site file, subcontractors, suppliers,
and other concerned entities.
2. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections
shown in Schedules.
01320 - 2
Construction Progress Documentation
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Progress Schedule:
1. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days from Notice to Proceed. After review,
resubmit required revised data within 15 days.
2. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment.
3. Submit the number of opaque reproductions, which Contractor requires, plus 2
copies retained by Architect.
4. Submit under transmittal letter specified in Section 01330.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01340 - 1
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01340
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's
responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from
another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An
FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and
external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals
required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain
orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for
manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for
submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
01340 - 2
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings
for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data
drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form
acceptable to Owner and Architect.
c. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:
1) Floor plans.
2) Reflected ceiling plans.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial
submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. The right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals
until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will
be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit
processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Will advise Contractor when a submittal
being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 21 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner,
or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may
be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 28 days for
review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to before being returned to Contractor.
01340 - 3
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall
include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings
and action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g. Category and type of submittal.
h. Submittal purpose and description.
i. Specification Section number and title.
j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of
multiple items.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Related physical samples submitted directly.
n. Indication of full or partial submittal.
o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
q. Other necessary identification.
r. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
e. .
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by
Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related
submittal.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
01340 - 4
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1. Send electronic submittals as PDF electronic files to Architect.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.
2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.
3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by
an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates
and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where
indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Color charts for full available range of colors.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
01340 - 5
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in
one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property,
are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
01340 - 6
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product
line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following:
partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of
materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and
pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project
record sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100
"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section
012900 "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification
and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel
certified.
01340 - 7
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements
in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation
of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on
comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of
product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before
installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
01340 - 8
Submittal Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed
and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically
assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these
services.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other
Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of
Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will
mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it
if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
END OF SECTION
01360 - 1
Alteration Project Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01360
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively
applicable to this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Procedural requirements.
2. Rehabilitation and renovations of existing spaces, materials, and surfaces.
3. Patching and extending work and repair of damaged surfaces.
4. Installation of products removed in Section 01735.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK
1. New Materials: As specified in individual Sections.
2. Match existing products and work for patching and extending work.
3. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing,
and workmanship by use of existing as a standard.
4. Presence of a product, finish, or type of work, requires that patching, extending, or
matching shall be performed as necessary to make Work complete and consistent with
existing quality or specifications if more stringent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
1. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work.
2. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations
work; replace and restore at completion.
2. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals,
and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished work.
3. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.
4. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new
work and new finishes.
5. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from
weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to
prevent condensation in exposed areas.
3.3 INSTALLATION
1. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and
to accommodate Owner occupancy.
2. Project shall be complete in all respects, including operational mechanical and electrical
systems.
3. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of
restoring products and finishes to specified condition.
01360 - 2
Alteration Project Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified
condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes.
5. Install products as specified in individual Sections.
3.4 TRANSITIONS
1. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition.
Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.
2. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible,
terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make
recommendation to Architect.
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
1. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors,
walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. Where a
change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a
smooth transition for Architect review.
2. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes; refinish trimmed areas.
3. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Section 01731.
3.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES
1. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or
showing other imperfections.
2. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.
3.7 FINISHES
1. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Sections.
2. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish
cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.
3.8 CLEANING
1. In addition to cleaning specified in Section 01740, clean owner-occupied areas of work
daily.
END OF SECTION
01420- 1
References
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01420
REFERENCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Reference standards.
2. Explanation of project manual content.
3. Abbreviations and symbols.
4. Definitions.
5. Metric measurements.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with association, trade, federal, commercial, standards generating organization (such
as ANSI and ASTM), and other similar standards referenced within Specification sections,
except where more explicit or stringent requirements are indicated or required by
Specification or applicable codes.
B. Reference standards include their associated amendments and supplements.
C. Except where a specific date is indicated, date of standard is latest edition in effect at date of
Contract Documents, or date of standard required by code.
D. Reference standards have same force and effect as if bound into or copied directly into
Contract Documents; standards are made a part of Contract Documents by reference.
E. Contractual relationship of parties to the Contract shall not be altered from Contract
Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference standards.
F. Names and titles of standards are frequently abbreviated. Where acronyms or abbreviations
are used in Specifications, they are defined to mean the recognized name of trade
association, standards generating organization, governing authority, or other entity applicable
to context of text provision.
G. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Architect before proceeding.
H. When indicated by individual Specification section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at
Project site during submittals, planning, and progress of specific work, until Substantial
Completion.
I. Units of measurements required by specifications govern regardless of units of measurement
used in reference standards.
1.3 EXPLANATION OF PROJECT MANUAL CONTENT
A. Section Numbering and Titles: Sections are placed in Project Manual in numeric sequence;
refer to Table of Contents at beginning of Project Manual for complete listing of sections and
titles.
B. Page Numbering: Pages are numbered sequentially within each section. Page number is
shown together with section number at bottom of each page.
C. Project Identification: Project name, architect’s project number and date of Contract
Documents are recorded at bottom of each page to minimize possible misuse or confusion
with other project specifications.
01420- 2
References
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D. Specifying Methods: Techniques or methods of specifying varies throughout text and may
include "prescriptive," "generic-descriptive," "compliance with standards," "performance,"
"proprietary," or a combination of these.
E. Language:
1. Imperative mood of sentence structure is generally used which places verb as first
word in sentence. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively
are to be performed by Contractor.
2. In certain circumstances, the language of specifications and other contract documents
are of abbreviated type. It implies words and meanings that will be appropriately
interpreted. Words such as "the," "shall," "shall be," "Contractor shall," "a," "all," "an,"
"any," and other similar words are eliminated.
3. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as
singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicates.
4. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or
phrase.
F. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities
must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to
tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.
G. Specialist Assignments:
1. In certain circumstances, Specification text requires or implies that specific elements of
Work are to be assigned to specialists who must be engaged to perform that element
of Work. Such assignments are special requirements of Contract.
2. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific
element of Work is considered as being sufficiently experienced in indicated
construction processes or operations to be recognized as "expert" in those processes
or operations. Nevertheless, ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements
remains with Contractor.
3. These requirements should not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building
codes and similar regulations governing the Work. They are also not intended to
interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
H. Minimum Quality and Quantity: In every instance, quality level or quantity shown or specified
is intended to be minimum for Work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise
specifically indicated, actual Work may either comply exactly with that minimum within
specified tolerances, or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with
these requirements, indicated numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted,
or as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for
decision before proceeding.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Explanation of metric abbreviations is located in ASTM E 380 Practice for Use of the
International System of Units (SI).
1.5 SYMBOLS
A. List of Symbols:
# Number.
% Percent.
°F Degrees Fahrenheit.
°C Degrees Celsius.
’ Feet.
" Inches.
± Plus to Minus; Plus or Minus.
01420- 3
References
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
+/- Plus to Minus; Plus or Minus.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. And: Conjunction indicating that items in a series are to be taken jointly. It may also mean
plus or in addition to the preceding items in the series.
B. Approved: Where used in conjunction with Architect’s response or action, the meaning will
be held to limitations of Architect’s responsibilities and duties as specified in General and
Supplementary Conditions. In no case will Architect’s approval be interpreted as release of
Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of Contract Documents.
3. Custom Color: Refers to color selection by Architect that is not limited to a manufacturer’s
standard color or a manufacturer’s color that is designated by the manufacturer as “custom”,
“premium” or any other designation. Custom color means any color selected by Architect.
4. Directed, Requested: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected,"
"approved," "required," "accepted," and "permitted" mean "directed by Architect," "requested
by Architect," and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning shall be interpreted to
extend Architect’s responsibility into area of construction supervision.
5. Finish: The manner or method of completion. The final appearance of a surface, including
texture, smoothness, sheen, and color, after finishing operations have been performed.
Finishing operations include preparation of substrate and application, curing, and protection
of specified finish materials.
6. Furnish: Means to supply, purchase, procure and deliver complete with related accessories,
ready for assembly, application, installation, and similar operations, as applicable in each
instance.
7. Indicated: Refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings, or other
paragraphs or Schedules in Specifications, and similar requirements in Contract Documents.
Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help reader locate
the reference. Location is not limited.
8. Install: Means to construct, assemble, erect, mount, anchor, place, connect, apply and
similar operations, complete with related accessories, as applicable in each instance,
connected, operable, and ready for service or intended use.
9. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged to perform a particular unit of Work at Project site,
including installation, erection, application, repair, patching, and similar required operations.
Such entities must be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform.
10. Or: Used to introduce any of the possibilities in a series. Items in the series are not required
to be taken jointly. It does not mean that individual items in the series are optional
requirements.
11. Product: Includes natural and manufactured materials, components, machinery, fixtures,
equipment, devices, furnishings, systems, and their associated accessories to be
incorporated into the Work.
12. Provide: Means to furnish and install, complete and ready for operations and use for
purpose intended.
13. Regulations: Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities
having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within construction industry
that control performance of the Work.
14. Similar: Interpreted in its general sense and not as meaning identical. Elements defined as
"similar" shall be coordinated in relationship to their location and connection with other parts
of the Work.
15. True To Line, Plumb, Level, and Flat: Install Work within following tolerances, except where
indicated otherwise:
1. True to line: Allowed deviation from straight line within plus or minus 2 mm (1/16 inch)
in 300 mm (1 foot); plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 3000 mm (10 feet); plus or minus
01420- 4
References
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
6 mm (1/4 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet); and plus or minus 10 mm (3/8 inch) in lengths
over 6000 mm (20 feet).
2. Level: Allowed deviation from horizontal plane within plus or minus 2 mm (1/16 inch) in
300 mm (one foot); plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 3000 mm (10 feet); plus or minus
6 mm (1/4 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet); and plus or minus 13 mm (1/2 inch) in lengths
over 6000 mm (20 feet).
3. Plumb: Allowed deviation from vertical plane within plus or minus 2 mm (1/16 inch) in
300 mm (one foot); plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 3000 mm (10 feet); plus or minus
6 mm (1/4 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet); and plus or minus 13 mm (1/2 inch) in lengths
over 6000 mm (20 feet).
4. Flat: Allowed deviation from flat plane in any planar direction within plus or minus 2
mm (1/16 inch) in 300 mm (1 foot); plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 3000 mm (10
feet); plus or minus 6 mm (1/4 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet); and plus or minus 10 mm
(3/8 inch) in lengths over 6000 mm (20 feet).
5. Tolerances are not accumulative.
1.7 METRIC MEASUREMENTS
A. Specifications contain metric units of measurement and conventional inch-pound units of
measurement.
B. When specifications contain metric and inch-pound measurements, inch-pound
measurements are shown in parentheses.
C. Governance of metric and inch-pound measurements, when both appear in individual
specification sections:
1. When Drawings use inch-pound units of measurement, inch-pound measurements
govern over metric measurements; metric measurements are for information only.
2. When Drawings use metric units of measurement, metric measurements govern over
inch-pound measurements; inch-pound measurements are for information only.
3. When metric measurements appear without corresponding inch-pound measurements,
metric measurements govern.
4. When inch-pound measurements appear without corresponding metric measurements,
inch-pound measurements govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01450 - 1
Quality Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01450
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively
applicable to this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Quality control of products and workmanship.
2. Manufacturer's instructions.
3. Manufacturer's certificates and field services.
4. Mockups.
5. Field samples.
6. Owner provided testing laboratory services.
7. Selection and payment.
8. Laboratory responsibilities.
9. Laboratory reports.
10. Limits on testing laboratory authority.
11. Contractor responsibilities.
12. Schedule of inspections and tests.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
1. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers,
products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce Work in accordance
with Contract Documents.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Workmanship:
1. Comply with industry standards of the region except when more restrictive
tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise
workmanship.
2. Provide suitably qualified personnel to produce Work of specified quality.
3. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.
4. Provide finishes to match approved samples.
2. Manufacturer's Instructions:
1. Require compliance with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
2. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
3. Manufacturer's Certificates:
1. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's
certificate, in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified
requirements, executed by responsible officer.
4. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. When required in individual Specifications section, have manufacturer or his
authorized representative provide qualified representative to observe field
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up
of equipment test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to make
written report of observations and recommendations to Architect.
01450 - 2
Quality Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written
instructions.
3. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for
review.
1.4 MOCKUPS
1. Perform tests under provisions of this Section and requirements within individual
specification sections.
2. Assemble and erect complete, with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
3. Acceptable mockups in place may be retained in completed Work.
4. Remove mockup and clear area when work of that section is complete, when approved
by Architect.
1.5 FIELD SAMPLES
1. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for
review.
2. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
3. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after
Architect has accepted field sample.
1.6 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
1. Selection and Payment:
1. Owner will employ services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
specified inspection and testing.
2. Employment of testing laboratory in no way relieves obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor will pay testing
required by local authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Laboratory:
1. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E 329 and ANSI/ASTM D 3740.
2. Maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
3. Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located.
4. Calibrate testing equipment once each year with devices of an accuracy traceable
to either NBS Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
5. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
6. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Contractor and Architect in
performance of services.
7. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with
specified standards.
8. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract
Documents.
9. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or
non-conformance of Work or products.
10. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect.
11. Attend Preconstruction Conference.
3. Laboratory Reports:
1. After each inspection and test, promptly submit 2 copies of laboratory report to
Architect and one to the applicable consultant and one to Contractor.
2. Include: Date issued, project title and number, name of inspector, date and time of
sampling or inspection, identification of product and Specifications section, location
in the Project, type of inspection or test, date of test, results of tests, and
conformance with Contract Documents.
3. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results.
01450 - 3
Quality Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority:
1. May not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. May not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. May not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Has no authority to stop Work.
1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Deliver to laboratory at designated location adequate samples of materials proposed to
be used, which require testing, together with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to Work and to manufacturer's
facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to work to be tested, to obtain
and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests
and inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify laboratory of material sources and furnish necessary quantities of representative
samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested.
5. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
inspection and testing services.
6. Advise laboratory in a timely fashion to complete required inspection and testing prior to
subsequent work being performed.
7. Pay for subsequent re-testing of products or systems found to be defective or otherwise
not in accordance with specification requirements. Remove rejected products and
replace with products of specified quality.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01600- 1
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01600
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of
products for use in the Project.
2. Packaging, transportation, delivery, receiving, storage, protection and other product
handling requirements.
3. Product options and substitutions including:
1) Contractor's options in selection of products.
2) Products list.
3) Requests for substitution of products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in
the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes,"
"accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized
meanings in the construction industry.
1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for
the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the
terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1) "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including
make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.
2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished,
refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
3. "Equipment", is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually
operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.
1.3 PRODUCT LIST
1. Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Architect.
Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and
proprietary product names for each item listed.
2. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalog designation, and reference standards.
3. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
4. Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under
the following column headings:
1. Related Specification Section number.
2. Generic name used in Contract Documents.
3. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations.
4. Manufacturer's name and address.
5. Supplier's name and address.
01600- 2
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
6. Installer's name and address.
7. Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period.
5. Initial Submittal:
1. Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial
product list schedule.
2. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from
Contract requirements.
3. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in the Contract period.
6. Completed Schedule:
1. Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the
completed product list schedule.
2. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from
Contract requirements.
7. Architect's Action:
1. Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the
completed product list schedule.
2. No response within this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or
products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with
Contract Documents.
3. The Architect's response will include the following:
1) A list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of
reasons for this action.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a
single source.
1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce
a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with
the Architect for a determination of the most important product qualities before
proceeding. Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength,
durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from
sources that product products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent
possible.
2. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two
or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with
products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
3. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint
manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products
which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where
required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not
conspicuous.
2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of
service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible
surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the
following information and other essential operating data:
1) Name of product and manufacturer.
2) Model and serial number.
3) Capacity.
4) Speed.
01600- 3
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
5) Ratings.
4. Matching of Colors:
1. When a product is listed in the specifications with an accompanying color, pattern,
texture, or sheen, provide only that product, or one that is identical in color, pattern,
texture, and sheen to the product specified, regardless if the color, pattern, texture, or
sheen of the alternate manufacturer's product is a standard or option.
2. On finished materials and products, verify that colors, patterns, textures, and sheens
are identical for the entire project and that there are no visual differences between
batches, packages, bundles, or shipments, due to differing production runs. Architect
reserves the right to reject products and materials installed, which have, in the sole
opinion of the Architect, a significant enough difference in color, pattern, texture, or
sheen, from other products on the project, so as to be visually distracting.
1.5 OPTIONS
1. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting
those standards.
2. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named within time
frame specified herein.
3. Products Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers: Products of named manufacturers
meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions.
4. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No option; no substitution allowed.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
1. Limitations:
1. During Bidding period, Instructions to Bidders govern times for submitting requests for
substitutions under requirements specified in this Section.
2. Requests for substitutions of products will be considered only within 30 days after date
established in Notice to Proceed. Subsequent requests will be considered only in case
of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor.
3. Substitutions will not be considered:
1) When indicated on shop drawings or product data submittal without separate
formal request.
2) When requested directly by subcontractor or supplier.
3) When acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
4. Do not order or install proposed substitute products without written acceptance.
5. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When
substitution is not accepted, provide specified product.
6. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions.
2. Requests for Substitutions:
1. Submit separate request for each substitution. Document each request with complete
data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract
Documents. Utilize substitution request form attached.
2. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide manufacturer's
name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List
fabricators and suppliers as appropriate.
3. Attach product data as specified in Section 01330.
4. List similar projects using product, dates of installation, and names of Architect and
Owner.
5. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing
variations, and reference to Specifications section and Article numbers.
01600- 4
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
6. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and the
specified product.
7. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product, and amount of
net change to Contract Sum.
8. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials.
9. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other
work or products.
3. Contractor Representation:
1. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has investigated
proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to
specified product or that the cost reduction offered, if any, is ample justification for
accepting the offered substitution.
2. Provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product.
3. Coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be
required for Work to be complete in all respects.
4. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes related costs under this
Contract.
5. Waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become
apparent.
4. Submittal Procedures:
1. Submit 3 copies of request for substitution.
2. Architect will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable
promptness.
3. During the bidding period, Architect will record acceptable substitutions in Addenda.
4. After award of Contract, Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept
or reject requested substitution, generally within 14 days.
5. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under
provisions of Section 01330.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
1. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other
devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and
effect.
2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have
been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
2. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents
and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing
product selection include the following:
1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer
is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
2. Semi-Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or
manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will
be permitted.
1) Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, comply with the
Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for
use of an unnamed product.
01600- 5
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or manufacturers
that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the
Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available
product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document
provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or
assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade
name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise
complies with Contract requirements.
5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance
with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements,
and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General
overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific
application.
1) Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product
literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
6. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only
require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that
complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.
7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
1) Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily
and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of
the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching
product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified
requirements.
8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase,
select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements.
The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.
9. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in
Division 1 for allowances that control product selection, and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION
1. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment,
handling, and storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and
moisture.
2. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion, and other damage.
3.2 DELIVERY, RECEIVING, AND HANDLING
1. Deliver, receive, and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and
loss, including theft
2. Delivery:
1. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction progress schedules.
Allow time for inspection prior to installation.
01600- 6
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site; work of Owner;
limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment; and
Owner's use of premises.
3. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
4. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other
losses.
5. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or
packaging with identifying labels intact and legible, complete with labels and
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.
6. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment
and contents to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly.
3. Receiving and Handling:
1. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, including those provided by
Owner, by methods to prevent soiling and damage.
2. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise
damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces.
3. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or overstressing. Lift large and heavy
components only at designated lift points.
4. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure:
1) Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed
submittal.
2) Quantities are correct.
3) Accessories and installation hardware are correct.
4) Containers and packages are intact and labels legible.
5) Products are protected and undamaged.
3.3 STORAGE
1. General:
1. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, with seals and labels intact. Protect until installed.
2. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for
inspection.
3. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not
endanger the supporting construction.
2. Enclosed Storage:
1. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, in substantial weathertight
enclosures.
2. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in manufacturer's instructions.
3. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products as required by
manufacturer's instructions.
4. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items.
3. Exterior Storage:
1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids, to support fabricated products above
ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining.
2. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements,
cover with impervious sheet material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
3. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid
sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water.
01600- 7
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.
4. Maintenance of Storage:
1. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis.
2. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements.
3. Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually.
4. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected;
that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract
Documents.
5. Maintenance of Equipment Storage:
1. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's
service instructions to accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions
shown on exterior of package.
2. Service equipment on a regularly scheduled basis, maintaining a log of services;
submit as a record document.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in
the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and
aligned with other Work.
2. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
01600- 8
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
Attachment: Substitution Request Form
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
DATE: _____________________
Architect's Project No: _____________________
Project: _____________________________________________________________________________
To: _______________________________________ From: __________________________________
__________________________________________ _______________________________________
__________________________________________ _______________________________________
==============================================================================
Contractor (Bidder) hereby request acceptance of the following product or system as substitution in
accordance with provisions of Section 01600 of the Specifications:
1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM:
Substitution request for : ____________________________________________________
Specification Section No : __________________________________ Article: __________
2. SUPPORTING DATA:
________ Product data adequate for evaluation of the request for proposed substitution is
attached (description of product, reference standard, performance and test data,
specifications, drawings, photographs).
________ Sample is attached.
________ Sample will be sent if requested.
3. QUALITY COMPARISON
SPECIFIED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION
Name, Brand: ________________________ _______________________
Catalog No.: ________________________ _______________________
Manufacturer: ________________________ _______________________
Vendor: ________________________ _______________________
Significant
Variations: ________________________ _______________________
01600- 9
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
(Add Additional Sheets If Necessary)
Maintenance Service Available: Yes _________ No _________
Spare Parts Source: ______________________________________________________
Warranty Provided: Yes ________ No ________ Years _______
By Whom: _______________________________________________________________
4. PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS:
Identification of similar projects on which proposed substitution was used:
Project: ________________________ Architect: __________________________________
Address: ________________________ Owner: __________________________________
_________________________________ Date Installed: ___________________________
5. REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS:
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
6. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION:
Does the proposed substitution affect other work (adverse or otherwise):
No ________ Yes ________ (if yes, explain)
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
Substitution Changes Contract Time: No __________ Yes ___________
Add/Deduct ________Days
Substitution requires dimensional revisions or redesign of the work: No ______ Yes ______ (if yes,
attach explanation data)
Saving of credit to Owner: $ _______________________________________________
Extra Cost to Owner: $ _______________________________________________
01600- 10
Materials and Equipment
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
7. CONTRACTOR'S (BIDDER'S) STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED
SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
I/we have investigated the proposed substitution. I/we:
- believe that it is equal or superior in all respects including function, appearance and
quality to specified product, except as stated above;
- will provide same warranty and servicing requirements as specified for specified
product;
- have included complete cost data and implications of the substitution;
- will pay for changes to the building design and special inspection costs caused by the
use of this product;
- will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution in the work;
- waive future claims for added cost to Contract caused by the substitution.
Contractor (Bidder): ____________________________________________________________
Date: _____________ By: _______________________________________________________
Answer all questions and complete all blanks - use "NA" if not applicable. Unresponsive or
incomplete request will be rejected.
==============================================================================
ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION
______ Resubmit substitution request
______ Provide more information in the following areas:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
______ Sign Contractor's (Bidder's) Statement of Conformance
______ Substitution is accepted.
______ Substitution is accepted, with the following comments:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
______ Substitution rejected.
______ Substitution Request received too late.
____________________________________________ Date: _________________
Architect
01731- 1
Cutting and Patching
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section establishes general requirements pertaining to cutting (including excavating),
fitting, and patching of the Work required to:
1. Make the several parts fit properly;
2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work;
3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents; and
4. Remove and replace defective work.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
2. In addition to other requirements specified, upon the Architect's request uncover
work to provide for inspection by the Architect of covered work, and remove
samples of installed materials for testing.
3. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contracts without the Architect's
written permission.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Request for Architect's consent:
1. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit written request to the
Architect for permission to proceed with cutting.
2. Should conditions of the Work, or schedule, indicate a required change of materials
or methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Architect and secure his written
permission and the required Change Order prior to proceeding.
B. Notices to the Architect:
1. Prior to cutting and patching performed pursuant to the Architect's instructions,
submit cost estimate to the Architect. Secure the Architect's approval of cost
estimates before proceeding.
2. Submit written notice to the Architect designating the time the Work will be
uncovered, to provide for the Architect's observation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
01731- 2
Cutting and Patching
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. For replacement of Work removed, use materials which will result in equal to/or better than
the Work being replaced, in terms of performance and including the aesthetic appearance
as applicable.
2.2 PAYMENT FOR COSTS
A. The Owner will reimburse the Contractor for cutting and patching performed pursuant to a
written Change Order, after claim for such reimbursement is submitted by the Contractor.
Perform other cutting and patching needed to comply with the Contract Documents at no
additional cost to the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Inspection:
1. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage
during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling.
B. Discrepancies:
1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify the Architect and
secure needed directions.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING
A. Provide required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and
support to maintain structural integrity of the Work.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Perform required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent other Sections of
these Specifications.
1. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other
portions of the Work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair
and new work. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished
installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes.
END OF SECTION
01740- 1
Cleaning
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01740
CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Cleaning during construction.
2. Final cleaning of project and related site work.
1.2 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
1. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site.
2. Keep site and construction areas clean on a daily basis.
3. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
1.3 FINAL CLEANING
1. Execute cleaning prior to inspection for Substantial Completion of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS
1. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not damage
surfaces.
2. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being cleaned.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING
1. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in other sections, clean interior and
exterior exposed-to-view surfaces.
2. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roofs, gutters, area ways, and drainage
systems.
3. Maintain cleaning until Final Completion.
4. Final Cleaning: In addition to cleaning during construction, prior to Substantial Completion
provide the following:
1. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to remain.
2. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, films and other foreign substances.
3. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition; remove foreign
substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine.
4. Vacuum clean carpeted and similar soft surfaces.
5. Clean, damp mop, wax, and polish resilient and hard- surface floor as specified.
6. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication.
7. Clean plumbing fixtures, and food service equipment, to a sanitary condition.
01740- 2
Cleaning
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
8. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters when
units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts, blowers, and
coils when units have been operated without filters during construction.
9. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
10. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds; remove stains,
spills, and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Rake clean other
exterior surfaces.
END OF SECTION
01770 - 1
Closeout Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
2. Section Includes:
1. Administrative provisions for Substantial Completion and for final acceptance.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
1. When Contractor considers Work or designated portion of Work is substantially complete,
submit written notice with list of items to be completed or corrected.
2. Should Architect inspection find Work is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify
Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies.
3. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
4. When Architect finds Work is substantially complete he will prepare a Certificate of
Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
1. When Contractor considers Work is complete, submit written certification
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and deficiencies
listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced, and are fully
operational.
5. Operation of systems has been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.
6. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
2. Should Architect inspection find Work incomplete, he will promptly notify Contractor in writing
listing observed deficiencies.
3. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of final completion.
4. When Architect finds work is complete, he will consider closeout submittals.
1.4 REINSPECTION FEES
1. Should status of completion of Work require re-inspection by Architect due to failure of Work
to comply with Contractor's claims on initial inspection, Owner will deduct the amount of
Architect and appropriate consultants compensation for re-inspection services from final
payment to Contractor.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection required for mechanical, and electrical systems.
2. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01780.
3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of Section 01780.
4. Warranties and Bonds: Under provisions of Section 01780.
01770 - 2
Closeout Procedures
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
5. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: Under provisions of Section 01780.
6. Keys and Keying Schedule: Under provisions of Section 08710.
7. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract.
8. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
9. Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: In accordance with
Supplementary Conditions.
1.6 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
1. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indicating
1. Original Contract Sum.
2. Previous change orders.
3. Changes under allowances.
4. Changes under unit prices.
5. Deductions for uncorrected work.
6. Penalties and bonuses.
7. Deductions for liquidated damages.
8. Deductions for re-inspection fees.
9. Other adjustments to Contract Sum.
10. Total Contract Sum as adjusted.
11. Previous payments.
12. Sum remaining due.
2. Architect will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum
not previously made by change orders.
1.7 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
1. Submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of Conditions of the
Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01780
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 01780
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to
this Section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples.
2. Submittal of Record Documents and Samples.
3. Format and content of operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
5. Preparation and submittal of warranties and bonds.
6. Spare parts, overages, and maintenance materials.
7. Schedule of submittals.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintenance of Documents and Samples:
1. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Owner one
record copy of:
a. Contract Drawings.
b. Specifications.
c. Addenda.
d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
e. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
f. Field test records.
g. Inspection certificates.
h. Manufacturer's certificates.
2. Store Record Documents and samples in Field Office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and
samples.
3. Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with Section number
listings in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT
RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.
4. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record
Documents for construction purposes.
5. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by Architect.
B. Recording:
1. Record information on a set of blue line opaque drawings, and in a copy of a Project
Manual.
2. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for
recording information.
3. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work
until required information is recorded.
01780
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction, including:
a. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
b. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
c. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.
d. Field changes of dimension and detail.
e. Changes made by Modifications.
f. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
g. References to related shop drawings and Modifications.
5. Specifications: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
a. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalog number of each product actually
installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.
b. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
6. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications,
field test records, and other documents required by individual Specifications sections.
1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Format:
1. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
2. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback,
cleanable, plastic covers; 3 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used,
correlate data into related consistent groupings.
3. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project identify subject matter of
contents.
4. Arrange content by systems, under section numbers and sequence of Table of
Contents of this Project Manual.
5. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
6. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.
7. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.
B. Contents, Each Volume
1. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers
of Architect/Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of
products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
2. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of
subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement
parts.
3. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component
parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
4. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of
equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project
Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
5. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of
instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in
Section 01450.
6. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each.
C. Manual for Materials and Finishes:
01780
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog
number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information
for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for
cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods,
and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
3. Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: Include product data listing
applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation.
Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
4. Additional Requirements: As Specified in individual Specifications sections.
5. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space
for insertion of data.
D. Manual for Equipment and Systems:
1. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and
component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and
complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.
3. Include as-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating
instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and
emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating
instructions.
5. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for
trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment,
adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
6. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
7. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
8. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
9. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
diagrams required for maintenance.
10. Provide as-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
11. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as- installed color coded piping
diagrams.
12. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and control diagrams.
13. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
14. Include test and balancing reports as specified in individual specification sections.
15. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections.
16. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space
for insertion of data.
E. Instruction of Owner Personnel:
1. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation,
adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon
times. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other
seasons within 6 months.
2. Refer to Section 01820.
F. Submittals:
1. Submit 2 copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
01780
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction
and operated by Owner, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
3. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection.
Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments, and Engineer’s
comments where applicable. Revise content of documents as required prior to final
submittal.
4. Submit 2 copies of revised volumes of data in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
1.5 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Form
1. Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three-ring binders, with hardback,
cleanable, plastic covers.
2. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS,
with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of
responsible principal.
3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the
Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification
section in which specified, and the name of Product or work item.
4. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents
listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List
subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone
number of responsible principal.
B. Preparation
1. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of
work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning
of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.
2. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
3. Co-execute submittals when required.
4. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
C. Time of Submittals:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction
with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to
final Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as
the beginning of the warranty period.
1.6 SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Products Required:
1. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance
materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that
required for completion of Work.
2. Products: Identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities in original
purchase from manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture.
B. Storage, Maintenance:
1. Store products with products to be installed in the Work, under provisions of Section
01600.
2. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining
conditions required for storage and not required for Contract work or storage, or for
Owner's needs, spare products may be stored in available space.
01780
Closeout Submittals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until
delivery to Owner.
C. Delivery:
1. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project site
and obtain receipt prior to final payment.
2. For portions of Project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial
Completion, deliver a proportional part of spare products to Owner; obtain receipt.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. At Contract closeout, deliver Record Documents including samples, Operation and
Maintenance Manuals, and Warranties and Bonds under provisions of Section 01770.
B. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number.
4. Number and title of each Record Document.
5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Division Two
Site Work
02070- 1
Selective Demolition
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Requirements, bidding documents and drawings.
1.2. DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE
A. SUMMARY
1. This portion of the specification governs the demolition, salvaging (to the extent specified by
building owner), and disposal of materials resulting from the demolition.
2. Refer to drawings for full extent of areas identified for demolition.
B. AREAS OF BUILDING DEMOLITION AND MATERIAL REMOVAL:
1. Existing wash bay roof structure, columns, prefinished metal fascia.
2. Car wash equipment to be removed and saved for reuse.
3. Concrete paving.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not allow the spread of dust and debris during demolition work.
B. Contractor shall keep existing area cleared of all debris at all times.
1.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect existing, fixtures, equipment and all building components not designated to be removed.
B. Do not interfere with adjacent business operation. Maintain free and safe passage to and from.
C. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately, if safety of any structure appears to be
endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume operations until
safety is restored.
D. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting, and guard rails as required by applicable
regulatory advisory to protect occupants of building and worker.
E. Do not allow any materials to obstruct the site drainage at any time.
F. Existing Electrical service shall be maintained at all time.
1.5 EXISTING SERVICES
A. Arrange and pay for temporarily disconnecting, removing and capping utility services within areas
of demolition.
B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services.
C. If cut-off of utilities is required to perform demolition work, coordinate with demolition work,
coordinate with Architect and Owner with minimum three days advance notice to minimize cut-off
time.
D. Disconnect and remove all existing abandoned pipes, conduits, etc.
E. Work shall be scheduled and coordinated to minimize any interruption of service.
02070- 2
Selective Demolition
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Meet all rules and regulations pertaining to the handling and disposal of roof material, which may
contain hazardous materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Except where noted otherwise, maintain possession of materials being demolished. Promptly
remove from site.
B. If existing materials or objects designated to remain are damaged, they shall be repaired with
materials equal in all respects without additional cost to Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION & PREPARATION
A. Examine site and all objects designated to be removed. Verify with Architect objects to be
removed and objects to remain prior to beginning this Work.
B. Schedule work with all necessary consideration for Owner's use of existing facilities and adjacent
operation.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of property during course of work. Lawns,
shrubbery, paved areas, and building shall be protected from damage. Repair damage at no
extra cost to owner.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Remove fixtures and building components designated for demolition.
B. Proceed with demolition in a systematic and orderly manner from top to bottom.
C. Remove only non-structural elements.
D. Do not allow partially demolished sections, etc., which may pose a hazardous condition to exist
when discontinuing work for the day.
E. Salvageable items not claimed by the Owner shall be removed from the site. Storage and/or
sale of items on the site is not permitted.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove all debris from site.
B. Leave premises broom clean and suitable for subsequent work by other trades.
END OF SECTION
02100- 1
Site Preparation
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 02100
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 : GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Scope of this section includes all clearing and grubbing, excavation, filling and grading necessary for
proper execution and completion of the project.
B. The Building Pad and related site preparation shall be performed in conformance with the
recommendation of the geotechnical report no. Project No. 14-0126 by D&S Engineering Labs.
Dated April 29, 2014. A copy of this report is bound at the end of this specification section.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL
A. Materials used as select fill should be very sandy clay or clayey sand with a liquid limit of less than
thirty-five and a plasticity index between five and fifteen. Some on site soil may be suitable for use
as structural fill. Select fill shall be spread in loose lifts, less than eight inches thick, and uniformly
compacted to a minimum of ninety-five percent Standard Proctor Density at a moisture content
between -1 and +3 percentage point so of its optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM
Standard D-698.
B. All sub-grades shall be thoroughly inspected by the testing laboratory and soils engineer before the
placement of fill thereon. Unsuitable material shall be removed. Verification inspection and testing
of sub-grades shall be performed by a Testing Agency. The Testing Agency will conduct and
interpret tests and state in a report whether the Work complies with or deviates from
requirements. Copies of the inspection and tests reports shall be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer, Owner and Contractor in a timely manner.
1. The Testing Agency will be selected and designated by the Architect.
2. Payment to the Testing Agency will be made by the Contractor from the project allowance as
established in Section 01210 Allowances.
3. Contractor shall provide access to work as required to accomplish testing. Contractor shall
correct deficiencies in or remove and replace material that inspections and tests reports
indicate do not comply with the specification requirements.
4. Additional testing of deficient Work will be performed at Contractor’s expense to determine
the compliance of the corrected Work with the specification requirements.
C. Contractor to provide testing to verify proper compaction by an approved testing laboratory at a rate
of one test per 3000 square feet or a minimum of three tests per lift.
PART 3: EXCAVATION
3.1 SOIL PREPARATION UNDER THE BUILDING AREA:
A. The building site shall be stripped of all topsoil, vegetation, roots, old construction debris, or
02100- 2
Site Preparation
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
other organic material.
B. Refer to Soil Report and Foundation Notes for soil preparation under building area.
3.2 SOIL PREPARATION UNDER PAVEMENT
A. Remove all vegetation, organic material or other deleterious materials.
B. Perform any cut operations as needed and proof roll the pavement areas with a fully loaded
tandem axle dump truck. Any areas which rut excessively or pump shall be undercut and
replaced with compacted fill.
C. Perform all fill operations. All fill shall be installed in maximum 8 inch lifts and compacted to
between 95 and 100% of Standard Proctor at a moisture content at or above optimum.
D. Do not use any sand as fill under the pavement.
E. The following tests shall be run per 5000 square feet:
a. Density and moisture control
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate as necessary to permit execution of the plans.
3.4 GRADING
A. Grade to site plan requirements. Compact filled areas mechanically to allow for settlement.
Maintain site grades to conduct water away from the building site. Keep building site and
excavations free of ponded water at all times.
END OF SECTION
02110- 1
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 2
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 3
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 4
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 5
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 6
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 7
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 8
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 9
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 10
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 11
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 12
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 13
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 14
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 15
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 16
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 17
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 18
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 19
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 20
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 21
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 22
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 23
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 24
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 25
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02110- 26
Geotechnical Report
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
02260- 1
Soil Poisoning
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 02260
SOIL POISONING
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This work comprises furnishing and applying soil chemicals for the prevention of termite
infestation.
l.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: This work shall be performed by a licensed, reputable, pest control operator
with experience in this work.
B. Applicator shall provide documentation that he is, in fact, licensed by the state of Oklahoma for
approval by Architect.
l.3 GUARANTEE
A. Upon completion of the soil poisoning and as a condition for its acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish
a written and insured guarantee for the effectiveness of the soil poisoning against termite infestation for
a period of 5 years from date of treatment. Any evidence of reinfestation within the guarantee period
will require retreatment without extra cost to the Owner. The guarantee shall be non-cancelable by all
parties to the contract except the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.l MATERIALS
A. Toxicants: Only water-based emulsion soil chemicals may be used.
Cyren TC
1. Active Ingredient: Chlorpyrifos - O, O-diethyl O-(3,5,6-trichloro-2-pyridinyl) phosphorodithioate.
Cyren TC - 43.2% a.i.
2. Registered for use on: Preconstruction termite treatment at 0.5%, utility poles and fence
posts.
3. Pests controlled: Subterranean Termites and other wood infesting insects.
B. Mixes: If combinations of toxicants are used, at least one of them must be at or above the minimum
percentage listed above:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.l APPLICATION
A. Applying Chemicals: Apply the solution approximately 48 hours prior to placing concrete slabs and at
such time as there is reasonable assurance that no rain will fall until after the slabs have been placed.
a. Apply an over-all treatment under the entire building area, including covered passages and
entrance platforms. Apply at a rate not less that l gallon per 7 sq. ft.
b. Apply to critical areas along both sides of grade beams and around piers at a rate of l gallon per 2-
l/2 linear feet.
c. Unless the treated areas are covered immediately, take precautions to prevent disturbance of the
treatment by human or animal contact with the treated soil.
END OF SECTION
02270 - 1
Erosion and Sediment Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 02270
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR
STORM WATER RUNOFF DURING CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Project Construction Drawings
C. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The intent of this specification is to provide guidelines for the Contractor to adhere to all state,
federal, and local environmental regulations. It is also the intent to provide preventive measures to
keep sediment from entering any storm water system, including open channels. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to adhere to all state, federal, and local requirements. While the Owner
may require the Contractor to install erosion control devices during construction, this will in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.
1.3 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements of all governing authorities having jurisdiction. These Contract
Documents are not represented as being comprehensive, but rather to convey the intent to provide
complete slope protection and erosion control for both the project site and the adjacent property.
B. Erosion control measures shall be established at the beginning of construction and maintained during
the entire length of construction. On-site areas which are subject to severe erosion and off-site
areas which are especially vulnerable to damage from erosion and/or sedimentation are to be
identified and receive additional erosion control measures as directed by the Owner.
C. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted to minimize the size of the area to be
exposed at any one time and to minimize the time of exposure.
D. Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed area shall be controlled to reduce erosion and
sediment loss during the period of exposure.
E. When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm water runoff resulting from a land-disturbing
activity is sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the receiving ditch or stream, the Contractor
shall install measures to control both the velocity and rate of release so as to minimize accelerated
erosion and increased sedimentation of the stream as directed by the Owner.
F. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted so as to minimize off-site sedimentation
damage.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for periodically cleaning out and disposing of all sediment once
the storage capacity of the drainage feature or structure receiving the sediment is reduced by one-
third. The Contractor shall also be responsible for cleaning out and disposing of all sediment and
removal and disposal of all erosion control products at the time of completion of the Work.
Biodegradable erosion control products may be left in place or mulched at the site if approved by the
Owner.
02270 - 2
Erosion and Sediment Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hay bales shall be either wire bound or string tied with bindings orientated around sides rather than
over and under.
B. Erosion netting shall be North American Green S75 with Cell-O-Seed or approved equal.
C. Silt fence shall be Mirafi "Envirofence" preassembled silt fence, AMOCO Silt Stop prefabricated silt
fence, or approved equal.
D. Temporary cover for graded areas shall be undamaged, air dry threshed hay free from weed seeds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HAY BALE BARRIERS
A. Excavation shall be to the width of the bale and the length of the proposed barrier to a depth of 4
inches.
B. Bales shall be placed in a single row, lengthwise on proposed line, with ends of adjacent bales tightly
abutting one another. In swales and ditches, the barrier shall extend to such a length that the
bottoms of the end bales are higher in elevation than the top of the lowest middle bale.
C. Staking shall be accomplished to securely anchor bales by driving at least two stakes or rebars
through each bale.
D. The gaps between bales shall be filled by wedging hay in the gaps to prevent unfiltered runoff from
escaping between the bales.
E. The excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill shall conform to ground level on the
downhill side and shall be built up to 4 inches above ground level on the uphill side. Loose hay shall
be scattered over the area immediately uphill from a hay barrier.
3.2 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE
A. The length of a construction entrance shall be a minimum of 50' or as directed by Engineer’s
representative.
B. The minimum depth of stone in a construction entrance shall be 12". The construction entrance shall
be maintained as specified herein.
C. The minimum width of a construction entrance shall be 30' or as directed by the City of Corsicana.
D. When necessary, construction equipment shall be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto
public right-of-way. When washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with crushed
stone which drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin. All sediment shall be
prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch or water course through use of sand bags, gravel,
boards or other approved methods.
E. The construction entrance shall be maintained in a condition which will prevent tracking or flowing of
sediment onto public rights-of-way. This may require periodic top dressing with additional stone as
conditions demand and repair and/or clean-out of any measures used to trap sediment. All
sediment spilled, dropped, washed or tracked onto public rights-of-way shall be removed by the
Contractor immediately at no cost to the Owner.
3.3 SILT FENCING
A. The Contractor shall excavate a 6 inch by 6 inch trench for silt fence bedding along the lower
perimeters of the site where necessary to prevent sediment from entering any drainage system.
02270 - 3
Erosion and Sediment Control
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. The Contractor shall install the silt fence in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and
instructions.
3.4 EROSION NETTING
A. The erosion netting shall be placed as required or directed by the Owner. The area to be covered
shall be properly prepared and fertilized before the blanket is applied. When the blanket is unrolled,
the netting shall be on top and the fibers in contact with the soil over the entire area. In ditches, the
blankets shall be applied in the direction of the flow of water, butted snugly at ends and side and
stapled. On slopes, the blankets shall be applied either horizontally or vertically to the slope. Ends
and sides shall be butted snugly and stapled. The erosion netting shall be installed within strict
accordance to manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.
B. The staples shall be driven vertically into the ground, spaced as specified in the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Use common row of staples on adjoining blankets.
3.5 DUST CONTROL
A. Dust Control of the Contractor's performance of the Work, either inside or outside the right-of-way
shall be performed by the Contractor by applying water.
B. Water shall be provided in the amounts and locations as required or as ordered by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 02270
02300- 1
Drilled Piers
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 02300
DRILLED PIERS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances
required in conjunction with or properly incidental to drilled pier foundations complete.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Prepare a record showing the actual elevation of the bottom of each drilled pier and the difference in
linear feet between actual and plan depths.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCING STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Refer to Section 03300
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 LABORATORY SERVICES
A. The owner shall retain the services of a materials testing lab to view all concrete pier drilling
operations.
3.2 EQUIPMENT
B. Drill pier holes with a power auger foundation drilling rig designed for that purpose. Bid shall be
based on drilling to depths indicated.
3.3 WORKMANSHIP
A. Accurately locate foundation pier holes and drill to sizes and depths shown. Sink pier holes
vertically. Out of plumb pier holes of more than one inch in ten feet with a maximum of 3 inches will
be rejected. Clean bottoms of pier excavations of loose material and foreign matter.
3.4 PLACING CONCRETE
A. If temporary casings are required, leave same in place until concrete is placed in the respective
piers. Provide steel dowels, as detailed or scheduled. Do not place concrete with a tremie, freefall
method is to be used. NO PIER HOLES WILL BE ALLOWED TO REMAIN OPEN OVERNIGHT.
Place all concrete and reinforcing in piers the same day they are drilled.
B. Pier reinforcing shall be properly positioned within the drilled shaft by a positive means, equal to
Centralinger pier sleds and Hijacker pier bolsters manufactured by Pierearch, Arlington, Texas,
817-265-0980 or 800-342-2409.
02300- 2
Drilled Piers
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.5 TEST CYLINDERS
A. The contractor shall notify the testing laboratory to take test cylinders according to the following
schedule:
1. Four cylinders every 75 cubic yards of concrete, or
2. Four cylinders for each days work for quantities under 75 cubic yards.
END OF SECTION 02300
02310 - 1
Grading
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 02310
GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
Provide rough grading and finish grading for the Project Site.
B. Related Documents:
Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Drawings apply to the
Work of this Section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submit samples of materials as required below. Samples of earth materials shall be delivered
to job site in sufficient quantity necessary for Architect and laboratory to adequately evaluate the
soil.
1.03 BASIS FOR BIDS
Materials at site are expected to be in accordance with materials indicated on logs and test
holes included. Bids shall be based on excavating and filling with materials encountered at site
except where special fill or backfill materials are specified herein or indicated on Drawings. No
allowance or extra payments will be made by reason of variation in types of soil encountered or
variations in their moisture contents. Additional fill material required shall be furnished and
included as a part of the work. Removal of excess or objectionable materials shall be included
as a part of the work.
1.04 COORDINATION
Coordinate excavation work with other trades for proper scheduling of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STOCKPILING
Material cut from building and site areas which is suitable for fills and backfilling may be stored
on site to be distributed later. Fill material required to be hauled in may be stockpiled at site
until used, provided it is properly handled to prevent contamination with undesirable materials.
Location of stockpiles shall be subject to approval of Architect. Stockpile topsoil separate from
excavated sub-soil.
2.02 SURPLUS MATERIALS
Excavated materials not to be used in fills and backfills on this project shall be removed from
site immediately. Materials containing rubbish, debris (fractured limestone), or rocks shall be
removed.
2.03 MATERIALS
Suitable existing excavated on-site soil free from vegetable matter, debris, and other deleterious
matter, unless otherwise noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Explosives:
Use of explosives is strictly prohibited.
B. Removal of Contaminated Soil:
02310 - 2
Grading
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Storage Expansion to the
NMA 13014 Household Chemical Collection Building
Prior to finish grading, remove soil contaminated with lime from lawn and plant bed areas.
Replace with clean, approved top soil.
3.02 GRADING
A. Rough:
Excavation and rough grading shall be made to lines and grades shown. Planting and lawn
areas shall be overcut to allow a layer of topsoil not less than 6" thick. Excavations shall be
maintained to drain and shall be kept free of excess water. Ponding of water on site will not
be permitted. Remove objectionable and excess materials from site when excavated.
Exercise extreme care in grading around existing trees. Do not disturb existing grades
around existing trees except as otherwise noted.
B. Finish:
After rough grading has been completed and site cleared of construction debris, areas
disturbed by construction or graded to provide new finish grades shall be covered with a
layer of topsoil not less than 6" thick. Reuse stockpiled topsoil, cleaned of foreign matter, or
provide additional approved topsoil as required. Final grades shall be as shown or as
directed by Architect and shall slope away from building and shall provide drainage for area.
Ponding of water on site will not be permitted. Compact topsoil sufficiently to prevent
washing and sinking. Degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable with blade grader or
scraper operations. Finish surfaces shall be not more than 0.10 foot above or below
established grade elevation.
3.03 PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP AND EXCESS MATERIAL
A. Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting, and
repair such damage that occurs.
B. Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water.
C. At locations where lime, concrete or other foreign matter has penetrated or been mixed with
earth, remove damaged earth and replace with clean material.
D. Remove excess stockpiled material, debris, waste, and other material from site and leave
work in clean finished condition for final acceptance. Contractor is responsible for disposal
of debris and excess materials.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
In-place density testing as specified in Section 01400.
END OF SECTION.
02610- 1
Concrete Paving
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 02610
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Perform all work required to complete the Portland Cement Concrete Paving indicated by the
Contract Documents and furnish all supplementary items necessary for its proper installation.
1.2 DELIVERY OF CONCRETE
A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered in conformance with ASTM C94.
B. The supplier of ready-mixed concrete shall have a plant of sufficient capacity and adequate
transit-mixing or agitator truck facilities to assure continuous delivery at the rate required and
shall so schedule his commitments as to avoid conflicting simultaneous operations.
C. Discharge at site must be within 90 minutes after water is introduced into mixer if ambient
temperature is less than 90 degrees F. If ambient temperature is more than 90 degrees F.,
mixing time shall be reduced.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portland cement-ASTM C150, Type I.
B. Aggregates-ASTM C33. Coarse aggregate crushed limestone, or equal, maximum size 1 1/2".
C. Admixtures – refer to the plans for specified admixtures.
1. Air entraining admixture - ASTM C260.
2. Mid Range Admixture- the mid range water reducing agent admixture shall be chosen from
one of the following:
Boral x-20 by Boral Mti (210-349-8512)
Sikament MP by Sika (800-933-7452)
Plastimix MR by Promix Technologies (972-772-6010)
Daracem 65 by WR Grace and Co. (214-502-2128)
Polyheed 997 by Master Builders (800-627-2929)
D. Mixing water-clean, fresh and grease from oil and injurious amounts of vegetable matter, alkalies
or other impurities.
E. Reinforcing steel bars-newly rolled billet steel ASTM A615, Grade 60.
F. Concrete accessories-Including bar supports, chairs, spacers, etc. required for support of
reinforcing, shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Fabricate from cold-drawn wire in
accordance with Chapter 7 of ACI Standard 315-65, with heights as required. Bar supports for
concrete resting on grade shall be INDIVIDUAL HIGH CHAIRS NO. HCP with welded plates on
bottom, as manufactured by HOHMANN & BARNARD, INC., or approved plastic equal.
G. Form release agents-No stain or cause imperfections on concrete surfaces.
H. Asphalt impregnated fiberboard expansion joint filler-conform with ASTM D1751 of required size
and thickness. (Use of wood material for expansion joints will not be allowed).
I. Curing Materials:
1. Polyethylene sheeting-Commercial Standard CS 238, white, not less than 10 mil nominal
thickness, meeting water retention requirements of ASTM C171.
2. Membrane curing compound-ASTM C309, Type I.
J. Forms:
1. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces-No. 2 Common Southern Yellow Pine lumber
02610- 2
Concrete Paving
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
or other materials of equal qualifications of sufficient thickness to be capable of sustaining
the loads to be imposed thereon, dressed to uniformly smooth contact surfaces.
2. Wood forms for exposed concrete surfaces-Commercial Standard Douglas Fir,
moisture-resistant, concrete form plywood, with one smooth face.
2.2 MIXING
A. Ready mixed concrete shall be mixed in conformance with ASTM C94.
B. Minimum cement shall be six (6) sacks per cubic yard.
C. Maximum water-cement ratio shall be seven (7) gallons per sack, including water contained by
the aggregate other than by absorption.
D. Slump shall not be less than 2 1/2 inches nor more than 4 1/2 inches. Any truck arriving at the
job site not in these limits shall be refused.
E. Compressive strength of test cylinders shall not be less than 3500 psi at 28 days.
F. Entrained air-concrete mix shall contain 4-6% entrained air.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTAINING SUBGRADE PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE
A. The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition at the required section and
grade until the concrete pavement is ready to be placed.
B. Only sufficient amount of subgrade shall be prepared in advance of the placing of concrete, to
enable the work to proceed smoothly and effectively.
C. Placing of equipment or hauling equipment over completed subgrade shall be avoided until
placement of concrete has been completed.
D. A maximum of 2 inches of sand may be used for fine grading purposes.
3.2 FORMS
A. Set forms accurately to the required grade and alignment. Forms shall be of ample strength and
adequately braced to withstand loads applied during the concrete placement operation. Use
flexible or curved forms of wood or metal for curves with radius of 300 foot or less.
B. Forms shall remain in place for minimum of 12 hours after completion of the finishing operation.
3.3 DISTRIBUTED STEEL
A. Reinforcing steel shall be installed in accordance with ACI 617, paragraph 611. Steel shall be
free of rust or mill scale, dirt or oil.
B. All welded wire mesh shall be delivered in flat sheets and held in place with mesh chairs made
specifically for mesh support. These are available from National Wire or equal.
3.4 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINT FILLERS
A. Expansion or isolation joints shall be placed wherever slab abuts adjacent structures and
elsewhere as indicated.
B. Joint filler shall be accurately shaped to the concrete section, securely fastened in place and in
contact with the subgrade for its entire length.
C. Holes for dowel bars shall be not more than 1/8" larger than dowel bar diameter.
3.5 PLACING AND FINISHING
A. Place and finish concrete in accordance with Chapter 10 of ACI 617.
B. Deposit concrete so that specified slab thickness will be obtained after vibrating and finishing
operations. Minimize handling to prevent segregation. Care should be taken to prevent
disturbance of forms. Use a mechanical vibrator on all concrete.
C. After vibrating and screening, the concrete shall be floated and a straight edge shall be used to
02610- 3
Concrete Paving
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
level and test the surface in the longitudinal direction to required grade. The straightness of the
surface shall not vary over 1/4" in 10 feet.
D. For all horizontal slab surfaces, all bull floating shall be done before bleeding occurs. Use
magnesium floats and trowels on air entrained concrete. Use a darby at all edges of slabs. No
troweling is to be done until after bleeding is complete. Do not use a fresno before bleeding is
complete. Use mechanical trowel from left to right only. No jitterbugging will be allowed without
approval of Engineer.
E. The finished surface shall have a light broom finish.
F. All edges shall be finished to provide a smooth, dense surface with 1/8" radius.
G. Intentional stoppage of concrete placing shall be at the planned location of either an expansion
joint, contraction joint, or dummy joint. When the stoppage occurs at an expansion joint, the joint
assembly for an expansion joint shall be installed with a bulkhead of sufficient section and drilled
to accommodate the required dowels.
H. The Contractor shall furnish a bulkhead of sufficient section to prevent deflection and shaped to
the concrete section. Bulkhead shall be drilled to permit the continuation of all longitudinal
reinforcing steel through the construction joint.
I. Immediately upon the unintended stoppage of the placing of concrete, the Contractor shall place
the available concrete to a line, and install the above described bulkhead perpendicular to the
surface of the pavement and at required elevation.
J. Concrete shall be placed and finished to the bulkhead. Any concrete remaining on the subgrade
ahead of the bulkhead shall be removed and disposed of.
K. Concrete shall not be placed when the temperature of the air is below 35 degrees F. or is
expected to fall below 32 degrees F. 72 hours after placing.
3.6 CURING
A. The membrane-curing compound shall be applied at a uniform rate of approximately 200 sq. ft.
per gallon or as recommended by the manufacturer as soon as the finishing operation has been
completed and the concrete has lost its water sheen.
B. The curing procedure must protect the concrete; including concrete edges and curbs, against the
loss of moisture and rapid temperature change for a period of not less than four days form the
beginning of the curing operation and without damage of marking of the the finished concrete
surface.
C. Traffic shall not be allowed on the concrete for a minimum period of seven days.
3.7 CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Contraction joints and dummy joints shall be spaced and sawn as shown on the drawings.
B. The sawing of contraction and dummy joints shall be accomplished after completion of the
finishing operations as soon as the concrete has hardened to the extent necessary for operation
of the saw without serious raveling of the joint or damage to the adjacent concrete surface.
C. Joints shall be sawed the same day that the concrete is poured except that the sawing of joints in
concrete poured late in the day may be delayed to the morning of the following day. In all cases,
joints will be sawed before 8 hours after the placing of the concrete.
D. Provide sealant in contraction and expansion joints as specified in Section 07900 Sealants.
3.10 TEST CYLINDERS
A. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory to take test cylinders according to the following
schedule:
1. Three cylinders every 75 cubic yards of concrete, or
2. Three cylinders for each days work for quantities under 75 cubic yards.
B. Material testing will be paid from the Allowance established in Section 01210.
02610- 4
Concrete Paving
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
END OF SECTION
02618- 1
Pavement Marking
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 02618
PAVEMENT MARKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This work comprises painting of pavement marking on the parking area to indicate
handicapped and regular parking spaces
1.2 MATERIALS
A. Paint shall be in containers showing manufacturer's name and directions. Paint shall be
homogeneous, easily stirred to smooth consistency, and show no hard settlement. Paint shall
conform to Federal Specification TT-P-115, colors to be white.
B. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Sherwin-Williams
2. Chemrex Coatings
3. Technical Coatings, Inc.
4. Approved equal
1.3 EQUIPMENT
Paint applicator shall be pneumatic spraying machine with suitable atomizing nozzles to apply to
width shown at uniform thickness and clear-cut edges.
1.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
Pavement surface shall cure for at least 30 days. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly
clean. If oil or grease removed, the surface must be sealed with "cut" shellac.
1.5 APPLICATION
Paint shall be applied evenly to the pavement at a rate of 100 to 150 sq. ft./gallon to achieve a
total minimum thickness of 2 mil. Surfaces shall be clean and dry, and at a temperature of more
than 40 and not over 95 F. Adequate guidelines and /or templates shall be provided to produce
accurate and clear-cut markings. Adequate drying time shall be allowed to insure no
displacement or tracking. If paint does not dry in accordance with manufacturer's directions,
painting shall be discontinued until cause corrected. If discoloration of paint occurs, the paint shall
be applied in multiple coats. No traffic shall be allowed on painted areas until surface dry to
prevent tracking.
1.6 RE-INSPECTION AND RE-STRIPING
Prior to expiration of one year from substantial completion of the project, Owner, Contractor and
painting subcontractor shall make a visual inspection of the project site. Painting sub-contractor
shall re-coat all painted stripes and zone markings as specified.
END OF SECTION
Division Three
Concrete
03200 - 1
Concrete Reinforcement
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: This Section specifies reinforcing steel and welded wire mesh for cast-in-place or
precast concrete structures.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 03100 "Concrete Formwork"
2. Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
3. Section 03410 "Precast Concrete Structures"
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, all materials, workmanship, and practices shall meet all
requirements of the current editions of the following standards:
1. Standard Building Code
2. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
3. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
4. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-2
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be submitted to the County/Professional for review and acceptance prior to
construction in accordance with the General Conditions and specifications Section 01300
"Submittals."
B. Complete shop drawings shall be submitted for comment, including bar lists and placing
drawings. Drawings shall show the type, spacing, and location of metal bar supports, the grade
of the reinforcing and the name of the manufacturer. The type of coupler splice devices shall be
designated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All material supplied shall be one of the products specified in Appendix D "List of Approved
Products" appended to these technical specifications.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed billet steel bars of a USA manufacturer.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, galvanized.
03200 - 2
Concrete Reinforcement
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Metal Bar Supports: CRSI MSP-2, Chapter 3, Class 2, Type B, Stainless Steel Protected Bar
Supports.
D. Coupler Splice Devices: Cadweld tension couplers capable of developing the ultimate strength of
the bar, as manufactured by Erico Products, Incorporated, Solon, Ohio, or equal where
acceptable to the County.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication shall meet all requirements of the specified standards. Unless otherwise indicated,
the following shall apply:
1. Hooks shall be standard hooks.
2. Bottom bars shall extend a minimum of 6-inches into supporting members.
3. Minimum cover shall be measured to the outermost stirrup, tie or bar.
4. Splices are permitted only where indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Supporting Reinforcing: Bar supports shall be provided as required by CRSI MSP-2 and AC1315.
Top and bottom bars in slabs formed on earth shall be supported on precast concrete block
supports except where such bars are properly supported from formwork. Precast concrete block
supports are not required in slabs formed on tremie concrete but may be used at the Contractor's
option.
B. Placing Reinforcing: Placing of reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric shall conform to CRSI
MSP-2, ACI 315, and the Drawings. Reinforcing shall be securely tied and supported to prevent
displacement during concrete placement.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: Splices in welded wire fabric shall be such that the overlap between
outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than the spacing of the cross wires, plus 2-
inches. Fabric shall not be extended through expansion joints or construction joints in slabs on
grade except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
D. Coupler Splice: Unless indicated on the Drawings or where conventional lap splices cannot be
achieved, full positive tension connections shall be provided. Such devices shall be installed in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
E. Dowels: Dowels shall be wired in position prior to placing concrete.
F. Field Bending: Heat shall not be used to bend bars. Bars shall not be bent after being embedded
in concrete.
G. Welding: Welding of reinforcing will not be permitted.
H. Place reinforcement a minimum of 2-inches clear of any metal pipe or fittings.
END OF SECTION
03300 - 1
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required to install the Cast in Place Concrete,
including:
1. Cast-in-place concrete complete, including concrete and reinforcing in drilled piers and bases for
mechanical equipment.
2. Expansion joint filler strips and sealers
3. Forms, ties and shoring
4. Reinforcement, complete
5. Finishing, curing and protecting concrete.
6. Shop drawings
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 03420 Precast Concrete Wall Panels
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise
specified or shown:
1. ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.”
2. ACI 305 “Hot Weather Concreting.”
3. ACI 306 “Cold Weather Concreting.”
4. ACI 315 “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.”
5. ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.”
6. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork."
7. CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice.”
8. CRSI “Placing Reinforcing Bars.”
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Approval of drawings will only cover the general scheme, design and character of details,
03300 - 2
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
but not checking of dimensions or quantities. Contractor shall be responsible for omissions and
errors and conformity with the contract documents and specifications. Submit four copies of
submittals for review by the engineer, unless otherwise noted in the general conditions.
B. Shop Drawings – Submit the following shop drawings to the Owner.
1. Reinforcement placement – including all dowels, corner bars and other miscellaneous rebar.
Include clear indication of reinforcement splice lengths and splice locations.
2. Curing compound, evaporative reducer, floor hardener, leveling compound and waterstops.
3.Void boxes and backfill retainers.
4. Construction joint locations.
C. Concrete Mix Designs - The concrete plant shall submit mix designs for approval. Provide sieve
analysis of each type of aggregate used in the concrete mix. Each design submittal shall include
data sheets on all admixtures proposed for the mix.
1. Any statements or letters from the concrete plant which state that they will not guarantee
strengths according to the ACI 318 code will not be allowed or accepted. The cement
contents are a minimum. If the concrete plant must increase the cement or otherwise modify
the mix to achieve a mix which they will warranty, they shall coordinate this with the engineer
and obtain his approval prior to submitting the mix design.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. CONCRETE MATERIALS
1. Portland cement - ASTM C-150, Type 1
2. Aggregates - ASTM C-33. Coarse aggregate, crushed limestone or equal, maximum size 1 1/2"
for grade beam and piers; 1” for slabs. No sieve percentage shall vary more than 20% from an
adjacent sieve.
a. Provide an optimized aggregate combination for all exposed concrete floors.
3. Admixtures - no admixtures will be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. Refer to the plans
for specific requirements for admixtures for each classification of use.
a. Air entraining admixture - ASTM C-260
b. Mid Range Water Reducer – ASTM C-494, Type A or F
1. Do not use air entrainment over 3% with lignin type water reducing admixtures in any
slab to receive a hard toweled finish.
4. Water - clean, fresh and drinkable, free from oil and injurious amounts of vegetable matter,
03300 - 3
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
alkalis or other impurities.
B. REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
1. Reinforcing Steel Bars - newly rolled, domestic billet steel conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60.
2. Reinforcing Wire – ASTM A-82
3. Deformed Bar Anchors – ASTM A-496
4. Headed Concrete Anchors – ASTM A-108
5. Concrete bar supports, chairs, spacers, etc. required for support of reinforcing, shall be equal to
the Dayton/Richmond types listed below. Maximum spacing shall be 48 inches on center, each
way.
a. Under Grade Beam Reinforcement: R21- 2 ½” high with round base.
b. Under Slab over Fill: R20 – With round base and height to have 1 ¼” cover on top.
C. CURING MATERIALS:
1. Polyethylene Sheeting - Commercial Standard CS 238, white, not less than 6 mil nominal
thickness, meeting water retention requirements of ASTM C171. This may be not be used in
exposed concrete areas.
2. Membrane Curing Compound - ASTM C-309, Type 1, compatible with resilient floor coverings.
D. FORMS:
1. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces-No. 2 common Southern Yellow Pine lumber or
other materials of equal qualifications of sufficient thickness to be capable of sustaining the loads
to be imposed thereon, dressed to uniformly smooth contact surfaces.
2. Forms for exposed concrete surfaces -- Commercial Standard Douglas fir, moisture resistant,
concrete form plywood, with one smooth face, or steel.
3. Form ties for exposed surfaces - Manufactured to allow a positive breakback of not less than one
inch inside the concrete surface. Ties shall be equipped with a plastic cone of not less than 5/8"
diameter and one inch long which will completely cover the hole and prevent the leakage of any
mortar.
4. Form Release Agents - Form release agents shall not stain or cause imperfections on concrete
surfaces. All form release agents shall be paint compatible.
E. ACCESSORY MATERIALS
1. Non-shrink Grout – ASTM C1107, Grades B or C
a. Masterflow 713 Plus, Non-Shrink Grout, or approved equal.
03300 - 4
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Vapor Retarder –
a. Typical floor slab: 10 mil, ASTM E-1745, Class A or better.
1) Stego Wrap by Stego Industries, LLC.
2) Vapor Block by Raven Industries.
3) Perminator by W.R. Meadows.
3. Expansion joint fillers -- Sponge rubber conforming to ASTM D-1752.
4. Evaporation Reducer: - Confilm by Degussa Admixtures, or approved equal.
5. Concrete Sealers, Hardeners and Coatings:
a. Exposed concrete floors with light traffic:
1) Lapidolith by Sonneborn
2) Super Rez-Seal by Euclid
6. Bonding Agent – SikaDur 32 by Sika Corporation, or approved equal, two-part, 100% solids
epoxy conforming to ASTM C-881.
F. FIBER-BOARD FORMS (void boxes) – Void boxes shall be equal to those manufactured by
Surevoid products, inc. of Fort Worth, Texas (888-803-8643). The boxes shall be capable of
sustaining a load of 1000 pounds per square foot, shall have an interior uniform cellular
configuration, shall be rectangular in shape, and shall be coated, not impregnated, with moisture
resistant compound. Any boxes damaged by moisture shall be replaced prior to placing concrete.
Refer to the plans for the depth of the boxes. Any gaps between void boxes shall be covered with
cardboard bridging. Archvoid pier void pieces or pier voids shall be installed at the piers under the
grade beams. Any gaps between piers and archvoids shall be filled with a material to be
approved by the Engineer. Do not use poly on top or bottom of boxes or wrap the boxes in poly.
Cover all boxes under the slab with ¼” masonite.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 GRADE CONTROL
A. Establish and maintain lines and grades for concrete items. Construct concrete items to the shapes,
dimensions and elevations indicated.
3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. Rough grading will have been completed. Complete any fine grading operations to prepare
subgrades.
3.3 VAPOR RETARDER MEMBRANE
A. General - Start membrane under perimeter grade beam and over subgrade. All joints and seams,
lateral and butt, shall be overlapped 6 inches and taped using the manufacturer’s recommended
tape system. All penetrations must be sealed using specified membrane and tape. Any area
03300 - 5
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
damaged after installation shall be repaired using manufacturer’s product and tape. Cover any
damage by a minimum overlap of 6 inches in all directions and tape carefully around entire
perimeter of repair.
B. Provide a 10 mil vapor retarder under all interior slabs-on-grade.
3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General - Metal reinforcement shall be free from loose flaky rust, mud, oil or other coatings that will
reduce bond. Thickness of concrete cover shall be in accordance with Chapter 7, ACI 318 “Building
Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” Welding of reinforcement shall not be permitted.
B. Bar placing - Support and wire bars together to prevent displacement beyond the following
tolerances:
1. Concrete cover to formed surfaces: +/- 1/4".
2. Minimum spacing between bars: +/- 1/4".
3. Top bars in slabs and beams:
a. Members 8" deep or less: +/- 1/4".
b. Members more than 8" but not over 2 feet deep: +/- 1/2".
4. Crosswise of members space evenly within 2".
5. Lengthwise of members: +/- 2".
6. Move bars as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded
items. If bars are moved to exceed above tolerances, resulting arrangements of bars must be
approved by the Engineer.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. General - Locate construction joints in concrete as indicated. Construction joints not shown on the
construction documents shall be made and located to least impair the strength of the structure. Joint
locations shall be approved by the engineer. The surface of all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and
all laitance removed prior to placing the adjoining concrete. Reinforcing steel and wire mesh shall be
continued across all joints, unless detailed otherwise. Provide longitudinal keys at least 1 1/2" deep in
wall joints.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Proportioning and Design of Concrete Mixes – Refer to the drawings for the required 28 day
concrete compressive strength, minimum cement content, required air content and required slump.
1. Measuring ingredients for concrete - Measure ingredients for concrete separately for each batch,
by weight, except that water may be by weight or volume. Mix and transport ready-mix concrete
in accordance with ASTM C94 "Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete" (Alternate No. 1).
B. Preparation before placing concrete -- Remove hardened concrete and foreign material from
conveying equipment. Formwork must be complete, installed with ice and excess water removed.
Reinforcement must be secured in place. Expansion joint material, anchors and other embedded
items in position. Sprinkle subgrades sufficiently to eliminate suction. Seal extremely porous
subgrades in an approved manner. Completely clean forms of foreign matter immediately prior to
placing concrete.
C. Weather Conditions:
03300 - 6
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Protection - Do not place concrete during rain, sleet or snow unless adequate protection is
provided and approval by the engineer is obtained.
2. Cold Weather - In cold weather, concrete placement shall conform to the provisions ACI 306
“Cold Weather Concreting." Do not place concrete when the temperature is forecast to be 32
degrees or below for the next 72 hours.
3. Hot Weather - If the air temperature is greater than 90 degrees or the concrete temperature
greater than 85 degrees, use hot weather concreting procedures in conformance to ACI 305
“Hot Weather Concreting," and as approved by the engineer. The contractor may submit his
preferred procedure, but all procedures must be approved by the engineer. These
procedures may include but the following:
a. Placing the concrete in the early morning hours.
b. The use of evaporation reducer (see below).
c. The use of misting as a curing method.
d. The use of wet blankets as a curing method.
e. The modification of the concrete mix to add a retarder (not the preferred method and will
be approved only under special conditions).
D. Concrete slump - Do not place concrete when its plasticity, as measured by slump tests, is different
from those listed in the drawings. Any concrete which comes to the jobsite other than these slumps
will be rejected. Do not add water to the concrete on the jobsite without the approval of the engineer
or the testing laboratory.
E. Deposit concrete as close as practical to its final destination to avoid segregation due to rehandling or
flowing. Do not subject the concrete to any procedure that will cause segregation. Vibrators shall not
be used to transport concrete.
F. Deposit concrete continuously, or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on
concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or cold joints. Placement
shall be at a rate such that the concrete being intergraded with the fresh concrete is still plastic.
G. Consolidate all concrete by mechanical vibration supplemented by spading, tamping and rodding to
secure a dense, homogeneous mass, thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items
and into the corners of the formwork. Where concrete is placed in layers, vibrators shall be extended
into the layer below.
3.8 FINISHING CONCRETE SLAB SURFACES
A. General - For all horizontal slab surfaces, all bull floating shall be done before bleeding occurs. Use
wooden floats and trowels on non-air entrained concrete. Use magnesium floats and trowels on air
entrained concrete. Use a darby at all edges of slabs. No troweling is to be done until after bleeding
is complete. Do not use a fresno before bleeding is complete. Use mechanical trowel from left to
right only. No jitterbugging will be allowed. Level the surface to a tolerance of 1/8” in ten feet when
tested with a ten foot long straight edge.
B. Brush Finish:
1. Location: a. all exterior concrete
b. all interior slabs that will receive ceramic tile
03300 - 7
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Method of finishing - Steel trowel smooth. Brush the surface immediately after troweling with a
soft bristle broom to create a uniformly textured, non-skid surface. Brush lines shall be parallel to
the direction of the slope.
C. Trowel finish:
1. Location - all interior slabs and interior face of precast panels.
2. Method of finishing - Steel trowel smooth with mechanical trowel.
D. Evaporation Reducer - Use an approved evaporation reducer after each finishing operation on the
cast in place concrete floor slab unless the conditions do not require its use. Prior approval from
the engineer must be obtained to omit the use of this product.
E. Concrete Hardener - Provide a hardener on all interior exposed concrete surfaces. Apply in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.9 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General - Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the required period
of time. Curing shall immediately follow finishing operations.
B. Membrane Curing Compound - Cure all concrete slabs with a one coat application of membrane
curing compound. Minimum coverage rate of 400 square feet to the gallon. Apply strictly in
conformity with manufacturer's recommendations. Curing compound shall be compatible with the
sealer used on the concrete.
C. Concrete densifier, sealer, hardener-(Shop Building only): All exposed concrete surfaces to be
treated with alkaline siliconate solution to harden, seal and densify exposed concrete. Reduction of
abrasion, ASTM-C-779, greater than 50%. Applied by an Approved Applicator - 10 year warranty.
"SEAL HARD" by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
D. Temperature:
1. Cold Weather - When mean daily temperature of atmosphere is less than 40 degrees F.,
maintain temperature of concrete between 50 and 70 degrees F. for the required curing period.
When necessary, make arrangements for heating, covering, insulating, or housing in advance of
placement. Arrangements shall be adequate to maintain required temperature and moisture
conditions. Do not place concrete when the temperature is forecast to be 32 degrees or below
for the next 72 hours.
2. Hot Weather - If the air temperature is greater than 90 degrees or the concrete temperature
greater than 85 degrees, hot weather concreting procedures shall be used as approved by the
engineer. The contractor shall submit a procedure to the engineer for approval. Refer to
section 3.7.E.3 of this specification section for acceptable procedures.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Formwork for columns, walls sides of beams and other parts not supporting weight of concrete may
03300 - 8
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal
operations.
B. Repair all surface defects immediately after form removal including, but not limited to the following:
1. Remove all honeycombed and other defects down to sound concrete. Clean and thoroughly
dampen the honeycomb holes and fill solid with patching mortar.
2. If the repaired surface is exposed to view, the patching mortar shall be blended to produce a
color matching the color of the surrounding concrete.
3.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General – Verification inspection and testing of all cast-in-place concrete Work shall be
performed by a Testing Agency. The Testing Agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in a
report whether the Work complies with or deviates from requirements. Copies of the inspection
and tests reports shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer, Owner and Contractor in a timely
manner.
1. The Testing Agency will be selected and designated by the Architect.
2. Payment to the Testing Agency will be made by the Contractor from the project allowance as
established in Section 01210 Allowances.
3. Contractor shall provide access to work as required to accomplish testing. Contractor shall
correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and tests
reports indicate do not comply with the specification requirements.
4. Additional testing of deficient Work will be performed at Contractor’s expense to determine
the compliance of the corrected Work with the specification requirements.
B. Inspection and Testing – The testing laboratory shall be responsible for the quality assurance of
the concrete. The laboratory shall perform all required concrete tests, and shall observe the
placement of the concrete to enforce the requirements of this specification. Any discrepancies shall
be immediately reported to the General Contractor for correction, and prominently noted in the
laboratory reports. Reporting shall include the location of the discrepancy.
C. Compression Tests - The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory to take test cylinders in
accordance with the provisions of ASTM C172 and ASTM C31, and according to the schedule below.
One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days, two at 28 days and the last one held.
1. Three cylinders every 75 cubic yards of concrete, or
2. Three cylinders for each days work for quantities under 75 cubic yards.
D. Slump Test - The testing laboratory shall perform a slump test in accordance with the provisions of
ASTM C143 with each set of cylinders.
E. Air Content Test - The testing laboratory shall perform an air content test in accordance with the
provisions of ASTM C143 with each set of cylinders.
F. Concrete Temperature - The testing laboratory shall record the temperature of the concrete in
accordance with the provisions of ASTM C23 with each set of cylinders.
3.12 NONCOMPLIANCE
A. Any concrete which does not meet the American Concrete Institute standards for compliance with the
03300 - 9
Cast in Place Concrete
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
design strengths shall be field tested by a testing laboratory at the Contractor's expense if required by
the Engineer. Field tests shall be by coring or non-destructive testing approved by the Engineer.
B. Any concrete which fails to meet specifications by field testing shall be replaced at the Contractor's
expense.
END OF SECTION
03366 - 1
Concrete Sealer
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 03366
CONCRETE DENSIFIER/SEALER/HARDENER
Part 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Summary of Work:
1.Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and service for all concrete
sealer/densifier/hardener application as indicated, in accordance with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2.Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3.Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to, or necessary for sound,
secure and complete installation.
4.See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work:
1.Section 03300: Cast in Place Concrete
1.02 SYSTEM
A. Description: A sealer/densifier/hardener that will react with concrete surfaces to produce a
dense, hydrophobic, insoluble, moisture barrier to seal out contaminants, while hardening
and densifying surface.
B. Location of work: Warehouse concrete floor slabs.
1.03 REFERENCES AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References:
1.Corps of Engineers Spec: CEGS 03300 4-79
2.USDA approved
3.Dept. Of Navy, GSA, VA approved
B. Design criteria:
1.ACI 302 Class 1 through 4 concrete floors.
2.May be used on Class 5 and 6 floors when used with mineral or metallic aggregate
hardeners and toppings, and Class 9, Super-flat floors.
3.Complies with all Federal and State VOC requirements.
4.Independent Test Data, ASTM C 779, Procedure A, reduction of surface abrasion by
50% or more at the 30 minute time interval.
C. Applicator qualifications:
1.Approved in writing by manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Product data:
1.Furnish if required by A/E.
B. Samples:
1.Furnish if required by A/E.
C. Project information:
1.Test reports
2.Certificate of rate of application
D. Project closeout data:
1.Signed 10-year warranty
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
03366 - 2
Concrete Sealer
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
A. Deliver to jobsite in sealed, labeled containers.
B. Store and handle to prevent damage to product and environment.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing conditions, prior to installation:
1.Assure concrete has been cured a minimum of 3 days.
2.Assure concrete is clean and free of membrane forming curing compounds and/or other
sealers.
3.Concrete is free of laitance, grease, oil and contaminants.
B. Environmental requirements:
1.Comply with all VOC and EPA requirements.
C. Protection:
1.Protect adjacent surfaces/areas from damage due to over spray; especially glass and
painted surfaces.
2.Comply with 1.06 A above.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. At the engineer's request, technical personnel shall be available for a pre-job conference to
review installation procedures.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Written warranty signed jointly by applicator, manufacturer and contractor.
B. Warrant installation for a period of 10 years from date of substantial completion against
dusting from abrasion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE SEALER/DENSIFIER/HARDENER
A. Acceptable manufacturers: L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., 14851 Calhoun Road,
Omaha, NE 68152 (800-362-3331).
1.Product:
a.Base: SEAL HARD; a solution of 100% active ingredient chemicals which
penetrate concrete to seal, densify, dustproof and harden to resist water and oil
penetration, and contamination.
Active ingredients: 100%
Type: Alkali Siliconate
Flash Point: None
Specific Gravity: 1.155
VOC: gm/L: 0
Solids minimum: 30%
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION
A. Assure surfaces are clean and free of all contaminants, and any film forming curing
compounds or sealers.
03366 - 3
Concrete Sealer
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Assure concrete has been cured a minimum of 3 days before application.
C. Protect concrete from construction activity staining.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. A. Apply in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
1.Apply directly from sealer container onto prepared surfaces, undiluted.
2.Application equipment: Mechanical "walk-behind" or riding scrubber.
3.Apply at minimum rate of 1 gallon per 150-200 sq. ft.
4.Allow surfaces to remain wet with sealer for 30-60 minutes.
5.Remove excess sealer at end of application procedure by water flushing and then
squeegee dry.
6.Apply in 1 coat.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Have applicator certify rate of application.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Leave area broom clean.
END OF SECTION
03420 - 1
Precast Concrete Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 03420
PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This work comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, incidentals and the
performance of all operations necessary to complete the installation of all Precast Concrete Wall
Panel work indicated or reasonably inferred from the drawings and specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Engineer for review which show precast unit
erection anchorage. Drawings are supplied as a part of the structural plans for embed items and
reinforcement, but it is the Contractor's responsibility to check and verify. No additional money
will be allowed for errors on the precast panel drawings. They are the Contractor's responsibility.
B. Coordinate all imbed and connection plates with pre-engineered metal building framing
components.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place concrete when the temperature is below 35 degrees
F. except by special authorization of the Engineer, based on a favorable weather forecast or on
adequate arrangements for protection and heating. No concrete shall be placed when the
forecast is for the temperature to be below 32 degrees F. within the next 72 hours.
B. Co-ordination: Notify other trades and contractors well in advance of placing concrete to allow
them sufficient time in which to install work which is to be built or cast into the concrete.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Concrete:
1. All concrete shall conform with Section 03300
2. Concrete panels shall conform to ACI Specifications (ACI 318-89).
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement detailed is for in place stresses. Contractor to add reinforcement as required for
erection purposes.
B. Reinforcement and Accessories:
1. Reinforcement shall be accurately positioned and held in place during casting by supporting
with hangers, metal chairs, bolsters and spacers. Chairs, bolsters, and spacers shall be
equal to "Sure-Grip" reinforcing bar supports as manufactured by the Dayton Sure-Grip and
Shore Company. Supports shall have hot-dipped galvanized legs or plastic coated legs.
2. Reinforcing bars shall be tied at each intersection with annealed iron wire of not less than No.
03420 - 2
Precast Concrete Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
18 gauge or suitable metal clips.
C. Anchors and Incidentals:
1. Anchor bolts shall be ASTM A307 steel bolts, hot-dipped galvanized or cadmium plated.
2. Lifting devices shall be provided as necessary for lifting, handling and setting units. They
shall be of adequate strength and anchorage to support entire weight of unit during all
handling operations and shall be so placed as to facilitate setting, avoid stress concentrations
in units.
2.3 PRECASTING TREATMENT PRODUCTS
A. Concrete treatment shall be as specified in Section 03300 and/or as specified herein below.
B. Bond Breaker: Sealtight "Tilt-Crete" bond breaker or approved equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Supervision: All Precast Concrete Panel work shall be done under the direct supervision of
General Contractor's superintendent. This Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent
experienced in panel erection and all panels shall be erected by workmen qualified to perform
assigned tasks.
B. Examine all related work prepared by other trades; report any conditions considered detrimental
to or inadequate for proper installation; make report in writing to Engineer in ample time to allow
correction without delaying the project.
C. The General Contractor shall be completely responsible for the casting, erecting and installation
of all precast units.
D. No damaged or imperfect units shall be set in place.
E. Protection of Finish Work: Protection of adjacent surfaces and finish work from damage due to
the operations of this Section if the responsibility of the Contractor. Any damage to other
operations as a result of this work shall be corrected, repaired and/or restored at no additional
expense to the Owner.
3.2 CASTING
A. The forming and casting of these units shall be done by craftsmen skilled and experienced at
concrete precasting of this type.
B. Cast in molds designed to withstand high frequency vibration without distortion and designed to
provide shapes, sizes and details as shown on the drawings.
C. Cast-in all reinforcing, anchors, lifting devices and incidentals as indicated. Provide concrete
coverage over all reinforcing steel as shown on the drawings, and where not otherwise shown, as
required by Section 808 of the ACI Code, ACI 318-89.
03420 - 3
Precast Concrete Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D. Provide adequate form anchorage to withstand casting and forming procedures. Holes placed in
slab shall be maximum 3/16" in size. All holes and/or anchorage placed in slab shall be filled and
finished to provide a smooth, finished surface.
E. Prepare floor slab at areas to be used for precasting with Bond Breaker in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Vibrate concrete in forms with care to avoid undesirable displacement of forms or steel
reinforcement.
G. Panels shall be poured with exterior face down.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Concrete panels shall achieve a minimum strength of 2700 psi of the required 4000 psi at 28
days before lifting, erecting and installation work my begin.
B. Provide and erect all scaffolding as necessary, in and adequate and safe manner and in
accordance with all local laws and ordinances. Maintain during installation and remove after
completion.
C. Adequate bracing of the panels is the responsibility of the Contractor. Temporary bracing to
resist all wind and construction loads must be used.
D. After all units are in place, they shall be adjusted to proper elevations by raising low panels until
proper alignment is attained, and final connection is made
E. After units have been final leveled, positioned and aligned, true to line and plane, final connection
shall be made.
F. In placing units, joint fillers (furnished by other sections) shall be applied at each unit before
successive unit is placed in position. This filler shall be secured to the initial unit with mastic to
prevent its displacement.
G. During installation of units, extreme care shall be taken to prevent damage to the units or to the
work of other trades. If such damage should occur, damaged materials shall be replaced or
repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
H. After final adjustment of all panels is complete and all joint fillers are properly in place, joint
sealant will be applied.
I. Fill holes from lifting inserts on the warehouse north wall with plastic caps. Fill all other holes
from lifting inserts with either plastic caps or non-shrinking grout.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP
A. Protection: The General Contractor shall take the necessary measures to protect the units after
installation. Any units defaced or damaged after installation shall be repaired. If the damage is
such that the unit (s) cannot be restored, it shall be replaced with new unit (s).
END OF SECTION 03420
Division Four
Masonry
04210 - 1
Unit Masonry - CMU
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 04210
UNIT MASONRY-CMU
PART I: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services to install all masonry units, mortar, masonry
ties, masonry reinforcing anchors and nailers as required to complete all masonry work.
B. Set all loose lintels, shelf angles, bolts, anchors, frames, etc., that require building into masonry
whether furnished under this or other sections of the Specifications.
PART II: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit: ASTM C-90, Lightweight, Grade N1.
B. Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit: ASTM C-145, Lightweight, Grade N1.
2.2 ANCHORING AND REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Ties and reinforcing for walls shall be as manufactured by AA Wire Products, Hohman and Barnard,
Inc., or Dur-0-Wall Manufacturing Company, hot-dip galvanized wall reinforcement, material in
conformance with requirements of ASTM A-82 for high tensile steel. Both side and transverse rods
shall be 9 gauge, with side rods deformed so as to develop a minimum surface bond of 527 psi
when cast in standard ASTM Class A mortar cubes. Size shall be required and manufactured for
each wall thickness. Adjustable rectangular wall ties shall be used to bond face brick to backup wall.
2.3 MORTAR
A. Use ASTM C270, Type "S" mortar for load bearing walls.
B. Use ASTM C270, Type "N" mortar for non-load bearing walls.
C. Materials:
1. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type II
2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150
3. Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes: ASTM C270, Type "S"
4. Sand: Shall conform to ASTM C144
5. Water: Potable
D. Mortar Proportions (by volume)
1. Type "N"
1 part Portland Cement
1 part Hydrated Lime
4 1/2 to 6 parts sand
04210 - 2
Unit Masonry - CMU
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
Or Contractor's Option
1 part Masonry Cement
2 1/2 to 3 parts sand
2. Type "S"
1 part Portland Cement
1/2 part Hydrated Lime
3 1/2 to 4 1/2 parts sand
Or Contractor's Option
1/2 part Portland Cement
1 part Masonry Cement
3 1/2 to 4 1/2 parts sand
2.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All masonry and mortar materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in such a manner as to
prevent damage by water, breakage, staining, inclusion of foreign matter, or other detrimental
damage. Materials damaged during shipment, storage, and handling will be rejected and replaced
with new. Patching of any defective parts will not be permitted. Concrete masonry units shall be
protected from rain and water absorption during transportation and storage.
PART III: EXECUTION
3.1 LAYING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Do not dampen units before laying, and do not lay units which have surface water or contain frost.
Lay units plumb, level, and true to a line in running bond, or as indicated. Align on exposed face or
as indicated.
B. Lay first course of masonry in full bed of mortar. Lay all other hollow units in a full mortar bed on
shell surface and at ends.
C. Lay hollow units with the thicker edge of the face shell up and make all joints 3/8" thick. Lay corners
prior to laying mid-portion of wall. Rock closures into place with the head joints shoved against the
two adjacent units in place.
D. Cut units with power saw through the unit to insure straight, evenly cut edges. Do not use fractional
parts of masonry units in the work where whole units can be used. Chinking of interstices with
fragments and bats will not be permitted.
E. Provide all special precast lintels, fillers, closures, control joint units, trough tile, etc., required to form
all corners, returns, openings, jambs, offsets, etc., to maintain a proper bond throughout all masonry
work.
F. Protect all sills, ledges, off-sets, etc., from droppings of mortar and protect doorjambs and corners
from damage during construction.
G. Stop off longitudinal run of masonry only where absolutely necessary by racking one-half block
length in each course. Remove loose mortar before new work is started.
H. Cover tops of walls at end of day's work and when rain or snow is imminent, with waterproof
membrane. Overhang two feet on each side of wall and anchor securely. Protect masonry from
04210 - 3
Unit Masonry - CMU
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
weather or construction damage.
I. Finish joints that will remain exposed with a tool slightly larger than the width of the joint to form a
concave surface. Tool vertical joint first. Finish flush, joint that will not remain exposed.
J. Do not extend reinforcing through control joints when anchorage is provided on each side of joint. If
no anchorage is provided at joint, extend reinforcing through control joint at 48" on center.
K. Locate 3/8" wide control joints as indicated but do not exceed 21 feet on centers for exterior walls
and 21 feet on center for interior partitions. Keep vertical joints straight, true and continuous from
top to bottom of masonry.
L. Use sash units to form control joints and install continuous control joint filler with sash units tightly
butted to compress neoprene flanges and completely seal joint. Where masonry abuts structural
concrete or steel and control joint filler cannot be used, keep joint clean of mortar as work
progresses. Use AA Wire Products Titewall Control Joint Spacer.
1. Tool and work exposed joints to a hard, dense surface with a sled runner and leave without
any shrinkage cracks. Delay tooling until the mortar has set thumbprint hard.
2. Provide 3/8" concave tooled vertical and horizontal joints.
3. Rake out the joints to be sealed and keep them free of mortar as the work progresses. This
includes the control joints as detailed.
M. Chases: Form chases and recesses to the required dimensions and lines, cut the joints flush, and
remove excess mortar. Before closing up any chases or similar inaccessible spaces with masonry,
remove all rubbish and sweep out the area.
N. Lintels and Beams: Provide lintels and beams where detailed and as required for openings in masonry
walls. This includes lintels at masonry openings for ducts. Verify duct layouts on the mechanical
drawings.
a. Reinforced Masonry Lintels: Construct and reinforce masonry lintels as follows:
i. Make the masonry lintel units of the same material and by the same process as the
other concrete masonry units used in this building.
ii. Build lintels in place where possible and cure at least 14 days before subjecting them
to load. Provide at least 6" bearing at each jamb.
iii. Where reinforcing is not specifically called out for masonry lintels, use not less than a
4" thickness of wall.
b. Bond Beams: Provide bond beams in masonry walls where detailed. Bond beams shall be
continuous where possible.
c. Steel Lintels: Build steel lintels into the masonry where shown. Where reinforcing or steel
shapes are not specifically called out for lintels in brick walls, use one steel angle for each 4"
thickness of wall. Steel lintel angles are specified in Section 05500.
O. Flashing: Build in all flashings which enter the masonry, using the materials and following the
instructions of the pertinent section of the Specifications.
P. Thru-wall flashings required to be built into masonry will be furnished under other Sections of this
Specification for installation by the Masonry Contractor.
Q. Miscellaneous Work:
a. Cooperate with other trades in installing their work in masonry. Furnish bedding mortar and
set loose lintels. Cooperate in setting bucks and frames, maintain them in position and build
them in with anchors properly placed. Do not distort frames by crowding.
b. Cut and form openings for recessed items and for electrical and plumbing installations so
that wall plates and escutcheons will completely cover the openings. Cut edges shall be
04210 - 4
Unit Masonry - CMU
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
clean, sharp and straight.
c. Fill spaces around and behind metal door frames and other built-in items solid with mortar.
Point openings around flush-mounted electrical outlet boxes in wet locations solid with mortar.
3.2 GROUTING OF CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Where indicated on plans, fill cells and bond beams with grout consisting of the following proportions
per cubic yard:
5 sacks cement
1500 lbs. fine aggregate
1500 lbs. 3/4 max. size coarse aggregate
8" slump
B. Grout vertical cells in lifts not to exceed 2'-8". Stop grout where necessary to mid-point of unit but
not over openings, when filling trough unit and provide suitable dam to retain grout. Stop grout one
and one half inches below the top of the last course when filling vertical cells to form key for next
pour.
3.3 OPENINGS, HOLES, ETC.
A. Provide all openings and holes in block masonry. Provide all sashes and recesses in walls and
other masonry of all types as shown, and as required for pipes, ducts, and other work of mechanical
or other trades. Such work shall be accurately located by the Contractor requiring the work, but the
Mason shall not construct such parts without giving other trades due notice and opportunity to lay out
or install such items as may be required for their work.
B. Where required for installation of the work of the mechanical trades or Owner's equipment, the
Mason shall leave openings as shown or directed ready to receive a later installation. After the final
work has been installed, the Mason shall mortar in, or close up parts with block.
C. After work of other trades is in place, these openings shall be neatly filled with masonry of the same
type as in the adjoining surfaces.
3.4 SETTING AND BUILDING-UP
A. The Mason shall build-up in materials occurring in any type of masonry construction, which are
furnished by other trades. All built-in work shall be accurately placed, securely held in position and
located as directed in all cases.
1. Set and build-in items of miscellaneous iron such as loose lintels and anchors required to
complete all parts not connected to steel.
2. Set all anchor bolts required for the attachment of woodwork to masonry.
3. Install and build-in all metal cabinets, sleeves, access panels required for mechanical and
electrical trades and as shown or noted when they occur in masonry.
4. Doorframes shall be built-in by the Mason, they shall be well braced and secured to insure
against displacement. All hollow metal frames set in masonry shall be grouted full with mortar.
5. Build-in recesses, flashings, slots, anchors, reinforcing, sleeves and other work required by the
drawings.
3.5 POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Keep face of brick free from excess mortar while laying brick. Brush with dry fiber brush prior to wet
04210 - 5
Unit Masonry - CMU
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
cleaning.
B. After the completion of laying and the completion of adjacent work, all masonry work that is to
remain exposed shall be pointed as necessary and thoroughly cleaned. The cleaning shall be done
with cleaning solutions which will not be detrimental to brick, mortar joints or other adjacent
materials.
C. The cleaning operations shall in all cases start at the top and work downward.
D. Repair and re-point defective work and line pin holes to match adjacent work. Replace broken,
damaged or discolored brick.
E. After cleaning is completed, the surfaces shall be free from mortar, or other stains, and all defects in
joints shall be nearly pointed.
3.6 POINT & CLEAN
A. Pointing: On completion of the masonry work, see that line nail holes and other defects are filled and
neatly pointed and mortar droppings removed from projecting surfaces.
B. Cleaning:
1. Exposed masonry shall be kept clean during construction.
2. Clean down face brick with a commercial cleaner. Test the cleaner on an inconspicuous area of
face brick to ensure that it performs as intended without leaving any scum or residue. Before
the solution is applied, soak the brick surface with clean water. Apply the cleaner in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and rinse the surface thoroughly with clean water to remove
all traces of the cleaner. Protect metal and concrete surfaces from contact with the cleaner.
END OF SECTION 4210
Division Five
Metals
05100- 1
Structural Steel
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART I: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Supply and install all Structural Steel Work as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop and erection drawings based on Contract Documents clearly showing each piece
required for fabrication and erection.
B. Approval of drawings will cover only general scheme, design and character of details but not
checking of dimensions, nor will such approval relieve Contractor from responsibility for
executing work in accordance with Contract Drawings.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Standard Specifications for the Design and Fabrication of Structural Steel for Buildings, of the
American Institute of Steel Construction.
B. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, of A.I.S.C.
C. Code of Welding in Building Construction, D1.0 of the American Welding Society.
D. “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts,” of the Research Council
on Structural Connections.
E. “Painting Manual,” of the Steel Structural Painting Council (SSPC).
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Structural Steel Fabricator – Not less than 5 years experience in the fabrication of structural steel
buildings.
B. Structural Steel Erector - Not less than 5 years experience in the erection of structural steel
buildings.
C. Welders - Make welds only by operators who have recently been qualified by tests, as prescribed
in the "Standard Qualification Procedure" (AWA Designation B3.0) of American Welding Society.
This provision need not apply to tack welds not later incorporated into finished welds carrying
calculated stress.
PART II: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All structural steel and bolts shall be new and of basic open hearth process steel of domestic
05100- 2
Structural Steel
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
manufacture. Structural steel angles, plates, etc shall conform to the A.S.T.M. A36 requirements.
Structural steel W and C shapes shall conform to A.S.T.M. A572 (50 ksi). Hollow steel shapes
shall conform to ASTM A-500, Grade B (46ksi). Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A-36 or
equivalent. Heavy Hex Steel Structural Bolts shall conform to ASTM A-325, Type 1, uncoated.
B. All arc-welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM A-233 for Steel Arc-Welding Electrodes.
Electrodes shall be as recommended by their manufacturers for the positions and other
conditions of actual use.
C. Paint shall be gray oxide type similar to Sherwin-Williams Kemfast-Dri Primer E 61 A1.
D. Non-shrink Grout shall conform to ASTM C-1107, Grade C.
2.2 MISFITS, ALTERATIONS AND REJECTIONS
A. Any material found missing, or material rejected because of misfits or faults of material or
workmanship, shall be supplied forthwith by the Contractor from local sources, if possible. Misfits
or errors discovered during sorting or erection shall be corrected, or new fabricated material shall
be furnished by the Contractor. Defective work and fasteners shall be replaced at the expense of
the Contractor.
2.3 WORKMANSHIP
A. Work shall comply with A.I.S.C. "Manual of Steel Construction" unless more exacting
requirements are specified in the Contract Documents.
2.4 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, and City codes and regulations for performance of the
work of this section including erection safety regulations.
2.5 WELDING
A. Perform shop and field welding in every detail in accordance with all applicable provisions of
above referenced A.I.S.C. Specifications and with "Code for Welding in Building Construction" of
the American Welding Society.
2.6 WELD DETAILS
A. Comply with all of the requirements for joints which are accepted without qualification tests under
the "Code for Welding in Building Construction" (AWA Designation D1.0) of the American
Welding Society, and in addition, to specific requirements of the drawings.
2.7 QUALIFICATIONS OF WELDERS
A. Make welds only by operators who have recently been qualified by tests, as prescribed in the
"Standard Qualification Procedure" (AWA Designation B3.0) of American Welding Society,
except this provision need not apply to tack welds not later incorporated into finished welds
carrying calculated stress.
2.8 TEMPLATES
A. Furnish, together with instructions for setting of anchors, anchor bolts and bearing plates.
05100- 3
Structural Steel
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
Ascertain that items are properly set during progress of the work.
PART III: EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Report any errors in shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and transportation
that prevent proper assembly and fitting of parts immediately to Owner, and obtain approval of
method of correction. Approved corrections shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Locate anchor bolts and anchors and build into connection work. Pre-set by use of templates or
other methods as required to locate accurately.
C. Provide any temporary shoring and additional bracing of steel framing necessary to adequately
and safely support any or all loads imposed on structure during construction. Before proceeding
with work submit drawings for review of any proposed temporary shoring and bracing. Review of
drawings shall not relieve Contractor of sole responsibility for safe execution of work.
3.2 SHOP PAINTING
A. Shop paint all structural steel work except zinc-coated surfaces and work to be embedded in
concrete or mortar. Contact surfaces to be welded shall not be coated within three inches of the
weld, prior to welding. Contact surfaces for joints at high-strength shall not be painted.
Thoroughly dry and clean surfaces when paint is applied. Coat all joints and crevices thoroughly.
Paint any surfaces concealed or inaccessible after assembly, prior to assembly.
1. Cleaning-Remove all mill scale, rust, dirt, grease and other harmful materials prior to coating.
2. Priming-Soon as possible after cleaning, coat all exposed surfaces with primer. Apply to
uniform dried film thickness of not less than 1.5 mil. Promptly repair any damaged coating
with primer.
3.3 FIELD PAINTING
A. After erection of steel, coat all exposed surfaces of bolts, nuts, and welds required for field
assembly of shop painted steel. Repair abraded and damaged coating to approved condition.
3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General – Verification inspection and testing of all structural steel Work shall be performed by a
Testing Agency. The Testing Agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in a report whether
the Work complies with or deviates from requirements. Copies of the inspection and tests reports
shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and Contractor in a timely manner.
1. Contractor shall provide access to work as required to accomplish testing. Contractor shall
correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and tests
reports indicate do not comply with the specification requirements.
2. Additional testing of deficient Work will be performed at Contractor’s expense to determine
05100- 4
Structural Steel
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
the compliance of the corrected Work with the specification requirements.
B. Field Bolted Connections – All bolted connections shall be visually inspected in accordance with
the Research Council on Structural Connections, “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 and A490 Bolts.”
1. The Testing Laboratory shall randomly test ten percent of all bolts torqued to proof load with a
torque wrench if no tension control bolts are used.
2. Visually verify that all Tension Control Bolts have been torqued to proof load.
C. Field Welded Connections:
1. Fillet Welds - All field fillet welds shall be visually inspected in accordance with the applicable
parts of the American Welding Society’s AWS D1.1, Section 6, Inspection.
2. Full Penetration Welds - In addition to visual inspection, the engineer of record may request
that any or all of the full penetration welds be tested in accordance with AWS D1.1 inspection
procedures. One of the inspection procedures listed below shall be chosen at the testing
agency’s option:
a. Liquid Penetration Inspection – ASTM E-165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection – ASTM E-709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Radiographic Inspection – ASTM E-94 and ASTM E-142; minimum quality level “2-2T.”
d. Ultrasonic Inspection – ASTM E-164.
3.5 CLEAN-UP
A. Per Supplementary General Conditions.
END OF SECTION 05100
05200- 1
Steel Joists
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 05200
STEEL JOISTS
PART I: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required to install the Steel Joists.
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise
specified or shown:
1. “Standard Specifications for Open-Web Steel Joists" of the Steel Joist Institute (SJI).
2. “Code of Welding in Building Construction, D1.0” of the American Welding Society.
3. “Painting Manual,” of the Steel Structural Painting Council (SSPC).
B. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, and City codes and regulations for performance of the
work of this section including erection safety regulations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General - Approval of drawings will only cover the general scheme, design and character of
details, but not checking of dimensions or quantities. Contractor shall be responsible for
omissions and errors and conformity with the contract documents and specifications. Submit four
copies of submittals for review by the engineer, unless otherwise noted in the general conditions.
B. Shop Drawings - Submit shop and erection drawings based on Contract Documents clearly
showing each piece required for fabrication and erection. Indicate joist type, size, spacing,
bridging, connections and erection details.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Steel Joist Fabricator – Steel Joist Institute member with not less than 5 years experience in the
design and fabrication of open web steel joists.
B. Structural Steel Erector - Not less than 2 years experience in the erection of steel joists on
projects of similar or larger size.
C. Welders - Make welds only by operators who have recently been qualified by tests, as prescribed
in the "Standard Qualification Procedure" (AWA Designation B3.0) of American Welding Society.
This provision need not apply to tack welds not later incorporated into finished welds carrying
calculated stress.
05200- 2
Steel Joists
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver steel joists to the Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of
installation.
B. Joist stored on the jobsite shall be clear of standing water, and supported sufficiently for the joists
to remain straight and plumb.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel – Comply with Steel Joists Institute specifications.
B. Steel Prime Paint – SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide or manufacturer’s standard shop primer
conforming to the performance requirements of the red oxide.
C. Joist Accessories – ASTM A-36 for bridging, sidewall anchors and wall connectors.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General - Fabricate steel joists according to SJI specifications referenced in this section of the
following types:
1. LH Series
B. Holes in Chord Members – Provide holes in chord members for securing to other work and as
noted on plans. Hole size and location must be approved by the joist manufacturer so as not to
impair the strength of the joist.
C. Bottom Chords – Joist bottom chords shall be double angles.
D. Accessories – Provide accessories for joists complying with the SJI specification, load tables and
as indicated on the drawing:
1. Bridging and bridging anchors
E. Shop Painting – Remove loose scale, rust and other foreign matter from fabricated joists and
accessories prior to the application of shop paint. Apply paint to provide a continuous dry paint film
thickness of not less than 0.50 mils.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. General – Place and secure steel joists in accordance with the SJI specifications. Do not start
05200- 3
Steel Joists
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
placement of joists until supporting work in place and secured. Provide temporary bridging,
connections and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction.
B. Field Repairs - Repair or replace damaged joists. Do not field cut of alter joists without the prior
written approval of the Architect/Engineer. Repair all locations where the joist top chord has been
penetrated by deck welding.
C. Bridging – Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection prior to the application of construction
loads. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or
beams. Do not permit the erection of decking until joists are bridged and braced.
D. Anchorage – Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing
before permanently fastening. Provide a minimum of 4 inches of bearing on masonry or concrete
and a minimum of 2 ½ inches of bearing on steel.
E. Erection Tolerances:
1. Maximum Variation from Plumb – 1/2 inch
2. Maximum Sweep along Length – ½ inch or L/360, whichever is greater
3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General – Verification inspection and testing of all structural steel Work shall be performed by a
Testing Agency. The Testing Agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in a report whether
the Work complies with or deviates from requirements. Copies of the inspection and tests reports
shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and Contractor in a timely manner.
1. Contractor shall provide access to work as required to accomplish testing. Contractor shall
correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and tests
reports indicate do not comply with the specification requirements.
2. Additional testing of deficient Work will be performed at Contractor’s expense to determine
the compliance of the corrected Work with the specification requirements.
B. Field Bolted Connections – All bolted connections shall be visually inspected in accordance with
the Research Council on Structural Connections, “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 and A490 Bolts.”
C. Field Welded Connections - All field welds shall be visually inspected in accordance with the
applicable parts of the American Welding Society’s AWS D1.1, Section 6, Inspection.
3.3 CLEAN-UP
A. Touch Up Painting – Immediately after erection of steel joists, clean all abraded areas field welds
and rust spots. Apply paint to exposed areas using the same material as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION
05300- 1
Steel Roof Deck
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 05300
STEEL ROOF DECK
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Work under this heading consists of furnishing all materials, tools, supplies, equipment,
transportation and facilities and performing all labor and services necessary for, required in
connection with, or properly incidental and/or specified herein.
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Comply with the provisions of the latest edition of the following codes, specifications and standards,
except as otherwise specified or shown:
1. “Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members,” of the American
Iron and Steel Institute.
2. “Manual of Construction with Steel Deck,” of Steel Deck Institute.
3. “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Metal, D1.3” of the American Welding Society.
B. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, and City codes and regulations for performance of the
work of this section including erection safety regulations.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit complete shop drawings in accordance with requirements as set forth under
another section of these project specifications. Such drawings shall indicate size and location of
roof framing supports, and location, lengths and markings of deck units, accessories closure
pieces, fittings, and type and sequence of welded connections. Indicate welds by standard
welding symbols adopted by the American Welding Society. Indicate reinforcing members
around openings.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer – Member of the Steel Deck Institute.
B. Welders - Make welds only by operators who have recently been qualified by tests, as prescribed
in the "Standard Qualification Procedure" (AWA Designation B3.0) of American Welding Society.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deck bundles must be stored off the ground with one end elevated to provide drainage. Protect
bundles from condensation with a ventilated, waterproof covering. Check bundles periodically for
tightness, and retighten so wind cannot loosen sheets.
B. Place deck bundles on the building frame near a main supporting beam at a column or wall. Do
not place bundles on unattached or unbolted frames or joists. The structural frame must be
05300- 2
Steel Roof Deck
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
properly braced to receive the bundles.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers-In order to define requirements for quality, function, sizes, gauges, grades, colors,
etc., material specifications designate manufacturers brands, and other pertinent data describing
products that conform to this project's requirements.
1. Products of the following manufacturers may also be acceptable, provided that such products
are equivalent to or better than those specified, and further provided that use of such
substitute products will not involve additional cost to Owner due to possible required structure
changes to accommodate them, and further provided that such substitute products will not
materially alter basic architectural design concepts:
a) Armco Steel Corporation, Steel Division
b) The Ceco Corporation
c) Steel Deck Manufacturing Company
d) H. H. Robertson Company
e) Wheeling Corrugating Company
f) Vulcraft Corporation
2. Equivalent or better products of other unnamed manufacturers may be proposed for
Rolled-formed from steel sheets not lighter than 22 U.S. Standard Gauge.
3. Phosphatized treatment and factory-primed paint finish over hot-rolled carbon steel sheets of
commercial quality.
4. Deck units shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with current "Basic Design
Specifications for Steel Roof Deck Construction" as adopted by the Steel Deck Institute
(SDI), and with modifications as indicated on drawings and specified herein.
5. Section design properties shall be computed in accordance with applicable requirements of
current edition of the American Iron and Steel Institute's specifications for the Design of Light
Gauge Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. Deck units shall conform to manufacturer's
published load tables.
6. Decking shall safely support a uniformly distributed live load of 25 pounds per square foot
plus dead loads of construction loads. Deflection shall not exceed 1/240 of maximum span
shown for live loads specified. Do not support ceilings from deck units. Unit design strength
shall not exceed minimum yield strength of steel divided by 1.65. Maximum working stress
shall not exceed 20,000 psi.
7. Fabricate deck units to sizes and details indicated. Cut deck units to required lengths so that
end joints will occur on supporting members and be lapped a minimum of 2 inches.
8. Typical lengths shall extend over three or more spans with joints staggered. Provided steel
reinforcing members around openings through decks wherever required for structural
purposes, even though details on drawings may not be explicit in their description.
05300- 3
Steel Roof Deck
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
9. Ends of lapped sections shall be swaged or otherwise formed so that matching ends at laps
will fit tight and prevent roofing bitumen from dripping through joint.
10. Provide closure fittings of metal, composition, neoprene or rubber to fit the underside of steel
deck to seal the ribs or corrugations in decking that will be left exposed at outside walls, over
interior partitions and any similar points. Seal underside of decking at overhang eaves or
outriggers with corresponding metal.
B. Any roof deck penetrations without deck support angles shown on the plan with an consideration
by adhering to procedures set forth in another specification section.
C. Decking Materials-Decking shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Basic Type: Type B, 36 inches wide with lap joints.
2. Opening wider than 6 inches shall have 3x3x1/4 inch angles added between the joist and all
around the opening for deck support.
3. Sheet Steel for Painted Roof Deck and Accessories- ASTM A-611 (33 ksi).
4. Sheet Steel for Galvanized Roof Deck and Accessories - ASTM A-653 (33 ksi).
D. Accessories-Furnish with decking all necessary accessories such as cant strips, saddle plates,
ridge and valley plates, insulation cleats, closure pieces, roof drain pans, anchor clips, and other
items as indicated and/or required. Accessories shall be of same material and finish as deck
units and of manufacturer's standard design and recommended gauges.
E. Protective Coating:
1. Clean steel deck units of scale, rust, grease, oil, or other foreign matter, and give a
phosphate treatment and a shop prime coat of rust-inhibitive paint. Type of phosphate
treatment, type of paint, and time and temperature for drying shall conform to manufacturer's
recommended standard practice, (Asphaltic type paint not acceptable).
2. After erection, all scarred areas on both top and bottom sides of decking, including cuts, drill
holes, rust spots, welds and weld scars, shall be touched up with an air drying paint similar to
that used in shop coat.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION
A. Installation-Place steel deck units on supporting framework and adjust to final position with
proper bearings, end and side laps before being permanently secured. Install decking in
accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's specifications and erection layouts.
Secure deck units to supporting framework in a manner to resist gross uplift forces specified in
the basic design specifications of SDI.
1. Welded connections to steel supports shall be fusion type performed by competent welders
who have qualified by tests as prescribed by the American Welding Society to perform type
of work required. Sizes, spacings and welding sequence shall be as recommended by deck
05300- 4
Steel Roof Deck
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
manufacturer and indicated on approved erection layouts or shop drawings. Type and
spacing of fastenings shall be as shown on plans. Welding shall be done such that no weld
shall have more than 30% burn through of the metal deck.
B. Clean-up-At completion of operations, remove all dunnage, debris, excess materials resultant
from work on this section. Leave entire installation in condition satisfactory to receive other
trades work.
END OF SECTION 05300
05400 - 1
Cold Formed metal Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
2. Soffit framing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
2. Section 09 21 16.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior nonload-bearing,
metal-stud-framed, shaft-wail assemblies.
3. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for Interior non-load bearing, metal-stud
framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;
fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,
bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
1. Steel sheet.
2. Expansion anchors.
3. Power-actuated anchors.
4. Mechanical fasteners,
5. Vertical deflection clips.
6. Horizontal drift deflection clips
7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
D. Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel
sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength,
total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
05400 - 2
Cold Formed metal Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other
damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
2. MarinoWARE.
3. SCAFCO Corporation.
4. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop
Drawings, and other structural data.
1. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project Is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads
within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following:
a. Framing behind Brick or Stone Masonry Veneer: Horizontal deflection of L/600 of the wall
height in feet.
b. Framing Behind Metal Panels: Horizontal deflection of L/360 of the wail height in feet.
c. Framing Behind EIFS: Horizontal deflection of L/360 of the wall height in feet.
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the
insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection
failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a
maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:
a. Upward and downward movement of 1 inch (25 mm).
5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without
regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
1. Wall Studs: AIS1S211.
2. Headers: AISI S212.
3. Lateral Design: AISI S213.
D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply
with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
05400 - 3
Cold Formed metal Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G60 (Z180).
C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection or Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc
coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G60 (Z180).
2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths Indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by design and performance requirements, but
not less than 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).
2. 2. Flange Width: As required by design and performance requirements, but not less than 1-
5/8 Inches (41 mm).
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,
with unstiffened fianges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by design and performance requirements, but
not less than 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).
2. Flange Width: As required by design and performance requirements, but not less than 1-1/4
inches (32 mm).
C. Slip-Type Head Joints for Vertical Deflection: Provide one of the following:
1. Proprietary Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's proprietary head clips, capable of
accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through
positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1) Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company; "Fast Top Clip", 0.0677
Inch (1.72 mm), used in conjunction with minimum 0.033 inch (0.8 mm) deep leg
track.
2) MarinoWARE; DEFLEX slide clips, used in conjunction with minimum 0.033 inch (0.8
mm) deep leg track.
3) SCAFCO Corporation; Priceless Steel Products, Deflection Clips ESC or DESC.
4) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiClip SL Series, or VertiTrack VTX Series (0.0677 inch
(1.72 mm), used in conjunction with minimum 0.033 inch (0.8 mm) deep leg track).
2. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
a. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges
designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as
follows:
1) Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
2) Flange Width: As required by design.
05400 - 4
Cold Formed metal Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
b. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
1) Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
2) Flange Width: As required by design.
3. Substitutions: None permitted.
4. Single Slotted Deep-Leg Track: Not permitted.
D. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from
upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive
mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.
2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade,
Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicate d, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Anchor clips.
5. End clips.
6. Foundation clips.
7. Gusset plates.
8. Stud kickers and knee braces.
9. Hole reinforcing plates.
10. Backer plates.
2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A
123/A 123M.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel
nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A
153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength
design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to
the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing
agency.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel
drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B.
B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetaliic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing
selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and
water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-
minute working time.
C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed
steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
05400 - 5
Cold Formed metal Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories piumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing
members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used In correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square
tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary
framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed
to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive
materials below that are required to obtain fire resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-
resistive materials from damage.
C. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of
foundation wail locations.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
05400 - 6
Cold Formed metal Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or
riveting. Wire tying of framing members Is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with
requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
D. Install framing members In one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or
tension members.
E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both
sides of joints.
G. Install insulation, specified In Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing
members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved
or standard punched openings.
I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 Cumulative error
shall not exceed minimum mm) from plan location, fastening requirements of sheathing or
other finishing materials.
2. Vertical alignment (plumbness) of walls shall be within l/960th (1/8" in 10 feet) of the span.
3. Horizontal alignment (levelness) of walls shall be within l/960th (1/8" in 10 feet) of their
respective heights.
4. Squareness of walls shall be not more than 1/8" out of square within the length of that wall.
3.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: As required by design, but not greater than 16 inches (406 mm) on center.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped
surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads
while providing lateral support.
1. At Contractor's option, provide one of the following:
a. Connect proprietary vertical deflection track/clips to studs and anchor to building structure
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
2. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but
not more than 48 Inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. At Contractor's option, provide one of the following:
05400 - 7
Cold Formed metal Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
a. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched
studs.
b. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and
stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud
flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,
continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner reserves the right to engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field and shop welds wiil be subject to testing and Inspecting.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and In writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work where test results Indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, wiil be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
05500- 1
Miscellaneous Metals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Scope of Work: This work includes fabricating and installing miscellaneous metal work and related
items.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Applicable Standards: Conform to the following Standards:
ASTM A36: Specifications for Structural Steel
B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in
accordance with the AWS D1.1 "Standard Qualification Procedure." All welders shall be certified
in accordance with AWS D1.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36
B. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars Grade 1020, or ASTM A108
Cold-Finished Carbon Steel Bars and Shafting Grade 1020. Provide galvanized anchor bolts
for anchoring exterior galvanized materials.
2. Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A machine bolts, hexagon head type.
3. Plain Washers: Round, general assembly grade carbon steel, complying with
FS FF-W-84, galvanized.
4. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, complying with FS FF-W-84, galvanized.
5. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, galvanized.
C. Metal Primer Paint (All Interior Materials): One coat Tnemec, Series 33-77W, Chem-Prime,
Alkyd-Phenolic universal primer, color white, solids 43 percent, dry film thickness 2.0 to 3.5
mils/coat. Similar systems by Koppers or Mobil will be considered subject to submittals review.
Primer paint selected must be compatible with the required finish coats of paint. Coordinate
selection of metal primer with finish paint requirements specified in Division 9 of these
Specifications.
05500- 2
Miscellaneous Metals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL:
A. Workmanship:
1. Use materials of size and thickness shown or if not shown of required size and thickness to
produce adequate strength and durability in finished product for intended use. Work to dimensions
shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of
materials shown or specified for various components of work.
2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent
metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the
work.
3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, which are flush and smooth. Use Phillips
flathead (counter-sunk) screws or bolts for field connections and for bolting and for anchoring
abrasive threads.
4. Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with recommendations of
AWS D1.1 Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
5. Provide for anchorage of type shown coordinated with structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use
of work.
6. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as may be required to receive finish
hardware and similar items of work.
7. Use hot rolled steel bars for work fabricated from bar stock, unless work is shown or specified to
be fabricated from cold-finished or cold-rolled stock.
8. Connections: All connections shall be welded, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or
specified herein.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for
installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having
integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to project site.
B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing miscellaneous metal items to in-place construction; including, threaded
fasteners for concrete, toggle bolts, through-bolts and other connectors as required.
C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of
miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level,
true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or
anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.
05500- 3
Miscellaneous Metals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D. Connections: Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of
shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade
surfaces of units that are galvanized and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. All finished,
exposed welds shall be ground and filed smooth.
3.2 FIELD PAINTING:
A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint.
Wire brush and sand as necessary to obtain a smooth surface. Touch-up abraded areas in
galvanized surfaces with Galv-Weld. Field painting in accordance shall be performed with Section.
3.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS:
A. GENERAL:
1. List of the metal work to be furnished under this section of the specification. Other items of
miscellaneous metal work shown and noted on the drawings, and not mentioned elsewhere in the
specifications, shall be furnished as though specifically described herein.
2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required
dimensions to receive adjacent work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown,
fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of all welded construction using
mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and a minimum number of joints for field
connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to work.
B. MISCELLANEOUS METAL SCHEDULE:
1. Structural Bracing:
a. Braces of steel angles, channels and plates as detailed to reinforce and stiffen the
roof openings and framing as indicated on the drawings.
2. Rough Hardware:
a. Furnish bent or custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes required for framing, supporting, anchoring or
securing fixtures, accessories and furnishings.
b. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required.
c. Furnish steel washers, except use malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts which
bear on wood structural connections.
d. Finish: Same as item being supported or anchored.
3. Loose Bearing and leveling Plates:
a. Steel plates and bars.
b. Finish: Galvanized.
4. Canopy and Fascia Framing: Steel tubes and channels of the types and sizes detailed.
05500- 4
Miscellaneous Metals
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
5. Thresholds: Thresholds and saddles of the types and sizes detailed, sized and coped to fit
the intended openings.
6. Roof Curbs: Curbs of steel angles, channels and plates as detailed at roof openings for
ducts, exhaust fans, skylights, vents and the like.
7. Bollards: Steel pipes of the types and sizes indicated.
END OF SECTION
Division Six
Wood and Plastics
06100- 1
Rough Carpentry
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required for the complete installation
of Rough Carpentry work as indicated by the Contract Documents.
B. This Section includes, but is not limited to: Framing with dimension lumber, Wood blocking and
nailers, Utility shelving, Wood furring, Sheathing, Sub-flooring and underlayment, Building wrap.
1.2 STANDARDS:
A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of Standards listed:
1. Product Standards PS
2. American Plywood Association APA, DFPA
3. Architectural Woodwork Institute AWI
4. American Wood Preservers Institute AWPI
5. National Forest Products Association NFPA
6. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPIB
1.3 MATERIAL GRADING:
A. The grades of materials used shall be defined by the rules of the recognized associations of lumber
manufacturers producing the material specified, but the maximum defects permissible in any specific
grade shall not exceed the limitations of the American Lumber Standards.
B. Lumber shall comply with DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by
the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
C. Defects expressly prohibited by this Section shall not appear in the material used, even if permissible
in the grade specifications.
D. The sizes specified are nominal board measure dimensions unless otherwise noted.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Certification:
1. Pressure treated wood: Submit certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process
used, net amounts of salts retained, and conformance with applicable standards.
2. Preservation treated wood: Submit certification for water-borne preservative that moisture
content was reduced to 19% maximum, after treatment.
3. Fire retardant treatment: Submit certification by treating plant that fire retardant treatment
materials comply with governing ordinances, and that treatment will not bleed through finished
surfaces.
06100- 2
Rough Carpentry
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Immediately upon delivery to jobsite, place materials in an area protected from the weather.
B. Store materials a minimum of 6" above the ground on framework or blocking, and cover with a
protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation.
C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp areas.
D. Protect fire retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection.
E. Protect sheet materials from corner breakage and surface damage, while stored or unloading.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Wood: Wood for framing and general carpentry work shall be sound, well manufactured, and with
moisture content limit of 19%. Lumber shall be dressed S4S unless otherwise indicated. Green
lumber shall not be used.
B. Framing lumber: Grade marked, No. 2 commercial Southern Yellow Pine or construction grade
Douglas Fir, moisture content under 19%, free of warp that cannot be corrected by nailing, S4S.
Provide wolmanized, preservative treated lumber at all sill plates and other similar locations where
material is likely to come in contact with moisture.
a. Dimension: SPIB grade marked No. 2 dimension southern pine or WCLB grade marked
No.2 Dimension Douglas fir, S4S.
C. Sheathing:
1. Dens-Glass Gold Sheathing: Georgia Pacific Products
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Widths: 4’ wide x 8’, 9’ or 10’ lengths
D. Bracing, Blocking, Nailers, and Grounds: Grade marked, No. 2 commercial Southern Yellow Pine or
construction grade Douglas Fir, moisture content under 19%, S4S.
E. Rough hardware: Nails, spikes, screws, bolts, etc shall be of the proper types and sizes, and used in
such numbers and quantities as is the usual custom in good practice for securing the various items
and members.
a. Joist Hangers, Hold down, stud to plate ties: Provide per the plans and notes on the
drawings.
b. Provide stainless steel screws in Baptistry subfloor attachment.
F. Preservatives:
1. Use lumber pressure treated with water borne salts preservative, Wolman, Erdalith, or
Chenowater Zinch Cloride in accordance with AWPI Specification P-5 for abutting concrete or
masonry in damp locations.
2. Reduce moisture content to 19% or less after treatment for 2" thick lumber.
06100- 3
Rough Carpentry
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Reduce moisture content to 23% or less after treatment for lumber larger than 2" nominal
thickness.
4. Furnish certificate from lumber treating company showing treatment amount, and moisture
content after drying.
1. Brush coat with preservatives, surfaces that have been cut after treatment.
2. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
a. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
b. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with
earth.
c. Mezzanine framing and stairs associated with baptistry.
G. Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Use fire retardant pressure treated wood for all wood blocking and framing where required by
code or the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. Method of treatment: Equal to that manufactured by Osmose Flame Proof, to comply with UL
requirement for a flamespread of 25 or less, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion
when tested for 3 minute duration under the standard test method for fire hazard classification of
building materials (ASTM A-84).
3. Indicate on each piece of wood the UL Fr-5 Label, indicating compliance with the fire hazard
classification.
4. Dry all lumber 2" nominal or less, after treatment, to an average moisture content of 19% or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Cutting and Repairing: Do such work as normally required and done for mechanical and other
trades.
B. Blocking: Furnish and install blocking, furring, brackets, etc., as required to properly carry out all
work shown and reasonably inferred by the Drawings and Specifications.
C. Nailers and Wood Cants: Nailers, 2" stock unless otherwise noted, of the proper widths. Bevel
nailers for concrete 1/2" both sides and properly place in forms. Bolt nailers in place on steel or
masonry. Furnish ledgers bolted to wall in locations shown and as required. Where bolt sizes
are not specifically indicated, use not less than 3/8" bolts at 32" o.c. staggered.
D. Shoring: Furnish and place all necessary shoring and bracing of types and sizes best suited for the
conditions to be met. Shoring must comply with all governing requirements.
E. Roof Curbs: Provide wood curbs to frame openings, support expansion joint bellows and to support
flashings as detailed. Use preservative treated lumber.
F. Bucks: Provide wood bucks for frames as required. Members shall be at least 2 x 4 material and
shall be securely spiked together.
G. Parapet Extensions: Provide wood plates as indicated to extend roof parapets. Use preservative
treated lumber.
06100- 4
Rough Carpentry
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
END OF SECTION
Division Seven
Thermal and Moisture Protection
07421 - 1
Formed Metal Wall Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 07421
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fluted-profile, concealed fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels for fascia siding at awnings with
related metal trim and accessories.
B. Pre-finished metal ceiling and soffit in wash bay.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05400-Cold Formed Metal Framing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): www.aamanet.org:
1. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil
Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) & Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel
Substrates.
2. AAMA 809.2 Voluntary Specification Non-Drying Sealants.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org/codes-standards:
1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
C. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org:
1. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. ASTM A755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and
Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products.
3. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
4. ASTM C920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
5. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally
Measured Color Coordinates.
6. ASTM D4214 - Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.
7. ASTM E1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof
and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
D. International Accreditation Service (IAS):
1. IAS AC472 Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal
Building Systems, Part B.
07421 - 2
Formed Metal Wall Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal panel assemblies and accessories from a single
manufacturer accredited under IAS AC472, Part B.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five
years experience in manufacture of similar products in successful use in similar applications.
C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer [certified by metal panel manufacturer] with
minimum of five years experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and
scope.
1. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic [certified by metal panel
manufacturer] supervising work on site whenever work is underway.
D. Steel Construction Publications: Comply with published recommendations in the following,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): "Steel Construction Manual."
2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual."
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for specified products. Include data indicating
compliance with performance requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation,
panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per
foot of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings,
penetrations, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work.
1. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system
installation.
2. Include structural data indicating compliance with performance requirements and
requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide
representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Samples for Verification: Provide 12-inch- (305 mm-) long section of each metal panel profile.
Provide color chip verifying color selection.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements.
B. Qualification Information: For Installer firm and Installer’s field supervisor.
C. IAS Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under provisions of IAS
AC472 Part B.
D. Manufacturer's warranty: Unexecuted sample copy of manufacturer's warranty.
07421 - 3
Formed Metal Wall Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer's warranty.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent
staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim
bundles during shipping.
1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panels and accessory items without misshaping
panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations.
2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instruction. Provide wood collars for
stacking and handling in the field.
3. Shield foam insulated metal panels from direct sunlight until installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: On manufacturer’s standard form, in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace metal panel assemblies that fail in materials and workmanship within
one year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System:
a. Basis of Design System: MBCI, Signature 300.
b. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D2244.
c. Chalking in excess of No. 8 rating per ASTM D4214.
d. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking.
e. Warranty Period: 40 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group,
Inc.; Houston TX. Tel: (877)713-6224; Email: info@ecoficientseries.com; Web: www.mbci.com.
1. Provide basis of design product
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide metal panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by
application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard
assemblies.
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of
indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined by
ASTM E1592:
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure
category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings.
07421 - 4
Formed Metal Wall Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
a. Wind Negative Pressure: Certify capacity of metal panels by actual testing of
proposed assembly.
2. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind-load design pressures in
accordance with applicable building code with maximum deflection of 1/120 of the span
with no evidence of failure.
3. Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7 Sections 9, "Earthquake Loads."
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal
temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and
contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature
differences from one side of the panel to the other.
2.3 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
A. Canopy Fascia Panels: Mechanically Seamed, Concealed Fastener, Trapezoidal Seam Metal
Roof Panels: Structural metal roof panel consisting of formed metal sheet with raised
trapezoidal ribs at panel edges, installed by lapping and mechanically interconnecting edges of
adjacent panels, and attaching panels to supports using concealed clips and fasteners in a
weathertight installation.
1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Double-Lok, www.mbci.com/doublelok.html.
2.Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality,
Grade 50, Coating Class AZ50 (Grade 340, Coating Class AZM150), prepainted by the
coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M.
3.Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality,
Grade 50, Coating Class AZ55 (Grade 340, Coating Class AZM165) unpainted
Galvalume Plus coating.
a. Nominal Thickness: [26 gage] [24 gage] [22 gage] coated thickness.
b. Panel Surface: Smooth with minor ribs in pan.
c. Exterior Finish: Modified silicone-polyester two-coat system.
d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
4. Panel Width: 18 inches (457 mm).
5. Panel Seam Height: 3 inch (76 mm).
6. Joint Type: Double folded.
2.4 SOFFIT PANELS:
A. Panels shall be a premium quality, 24 gauge panel with vertical ribs spaced 12" o.c.. Equal
to MBCI Classic Series, smooth finish,12" wide.
1. Panels shall be secured with a concealed fastener clip designed to allow for expansion and
contraction of roof panels, located at each purlin. Exposed fasteners will not be allowed except at
eave, ridge, and rakes.
2. Panel coating shall be a silicone polyester coating system. Interior shall be a wash coat of
primer. Color shall be selected from the manufacturers full range of standard colors.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide complete metal panel assemblies incorporating trim, copings, fasciae, gutters
and downspouts, and miscellaneous flashings. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, and
sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panels.
07421 - 5
Formed Metal Wall Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Panel Clips: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized, one-piece clips, configured
for concealment in panel joints, enabling installation of fasteners from exterior, and identical to
clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable fasteners recommended by metal
panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply corrosion-resistant
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating, with
weathertight resilient washers.
E. Panel Sealants:
1. Concealed Joint Sealant: Non-curing butyl, AAMA 809.2.
2. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Urethane sealant, single-component, ASTM C920 Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, A, M, G, O.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels, trim, and accessories meeting
performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Finishes, General: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2 – 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF
fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621[, meeting solar reflectance index requirements].
1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Signature 300.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine metal panel system substrate with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances
and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panels.
1. Inspect framing that will support insulated metal panels to determine if support
components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings and are within
tolerances acceptable to metal panel manufacturer and installer. Confirm presence of
acceptable framing members at recommended spacing to match installation
requirements of metal panels.
2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that metal panel supports are within tolerances
acceptable to metal panel manufacturer but not greater than the following:
a. At Girt Spacing 10 feet (3048 mm) or More: 1/4 inches (6 mm) out only.
B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with insulated
metal panel installation.
07421 - 6
Formed Metal Wall Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Concealed-Fastener Formed Metal Panels: Install metal panel system in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install
metal panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Anchor panels and other
components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement.
B. Install fascia panels and trim to match the fabrication details of the existing awning.
C. Attach panels to metal framing using clips, screws, and sealants recommended for application
by metal panel manufacturer.
1. Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each location indicated on approved
shop drawings, at spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
2. Cut panels in field where required using manufacturer's recommended methods.
3. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels.
4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with
dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as
recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
5. Interior Fastener Attachment: Nest panel flanges and drill through support framing and
overlapped panel flanges, and secure to structure using manufacturer's expansion
fastener.
6. Exterior Clip Attachment: Attach leading panel flange to structural support using
manufacturer's standard clip secured with self-tapping screw faster. Nest panel flange of
subsequent panel fully in secured panel flange, ensuring panel faces are flush, and
secure subsequent panel to previous panel using manufacturer's recommended fastener.
7. Vertical Panel Joint Sealant: Apply continuous bead of manufacturer's recommended
elastomeric joint sealant in concealed joint between panels.
D. Attach panel flashing trim pieces to supports using recommended fasteners and joint sealers.
E. Joint Sealers: Install liquid sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof
performance of metal panel assemblies.
1. Seal panel joints, panel base assembly, openings, panel head joints, and perimeter joints
using joint sealers indicated in manufacturer's instructions.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal panel accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight
mounting; provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings,
flashings, sealants, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance
requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that
will be permanently weather resistant.
07421 - 7
Formed Metal Wall Panels
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
END OF SECTION
07530 - 1
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 07530
FULLY ADHERED ELVALOY® MULTI-PLY ROOF SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes: Installation of new white thermoplastic EIP membrane roofing with related
projection/penetration flashings and accessories.
1.02 AREAS COVERED
A. New Construction
1.03 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Roofing Installer must be:
1. Currently prequalified with the Owner in accordance with Owner's prequalification
requirements.
2. Currently in good standing with the manufacturer for manufacturer's warranty
requirements.
3. Installer must be an experienced single firm specializing in the type of roofing repair
and/or removal and replacement work required, employing only experienced workers
for the class of work in which they are employed, having at least five (5) years
successful experience on projects similar in size and scope and acceptable as
applicators by the Owner's representative.
4. Contractor must have successfully completed previous projects warranted by the
manufacturer.
B. It shall remain each Contractor's responsibility to determine his current status with the
manufacturer's certification plan.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Laboratory Services: Test results shall meet or exceed established standards.
B. Underwriters Laboratory (Roofing Covering): Class A fire hazard classification.
C. Code Compliance: Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety
standards, and codes.
D. Industry Standards
1. The National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and Waterproofing
Manual
2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) -
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
3. American Society of Civil Engineers – ASCE 7
E. Manufacturer’s Observation Reports: Beginning with the commencement of the roofing
system installation for the project and continuing through the completion of the roofing system
installation and all its associated components, the Roofing System Manufacturer or their
appointed representative will provide written quality assurance observation reports as follows
and this shall be confirmed in writing by the manufacturer and made part of the roofing
submittals.
07530 - 2
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Keep the Architect /Owner informed as to the progress, status, and quality of work as
observed.
2. Provide jobsite observations no less than (2) times per week throughout the installation
of the roofing system and its associated components. Reports shall include detailed
weekly reports to the Architect, Contractor, and Subcontractor along with digital
photographs of work in progress. These reports and photographs shall be descriptive
of actual work in progress, status, and condition, and be presented in a written format
with digital color photographs.
3. Report to the Architect /Owner in writing any refusal or failure of the Contractor to
correct unacceptable practices or conditions called to the Contractor’s attention.
4. Confirm, after completion of the project and based on manufacturer’s observations and
tests (if necessary), that manufacturer has observed no deviations from application
procedures in conflict with the plans and specifications or the manufacturer’s installation
requirements for warranty other than those that may have been previously reported or
approved.
5. The roof system manufacturer shall, perform (annual/periodic) observations of the roof
system at no additional cost to the Owner. These inspections shall include a written
report with photographs for presentation to the Owner. Observations are to be
scheduled and coordinated with the Owner and performed by the manufacturer’s
representative. Nothing shall be required of the Owner other than providing access to
the roof system.
6.It will be the sole responsibility of each bidder to ensure these conditions are to
be met by the roofing system manufacturer or their appointed representative
prior to bidding.
1.05 REFERENCES (INCLUDING LATEST REVISIONS)
A. The manufacturer's Technical Specifications and current NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory,
and IBC guidelines shall be considered a part of this specification and shall be referred for
general application procedures and recommendations.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM B 209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
2. ASTM C 719, Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants
Under Cycle Movement (Hockman Cycle)
3. ASTM C 794, Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants
4. ASTM C 920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
5. ASTM D 312, Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing
6. ASTM D 1863, Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used on Built-up Roofs
7. ASTM D 2178, Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
8. ASTM D 2824, Specification for Aluminum - Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coatings
9. ASTM D 4586, Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free
10. ASTM A 361, Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galv.) by the Hot-Dip Process for Roofing and
Siding
11. ASTM C 177, Test for Thermal Laboratory Services
12. ASTM C 728, Perlite Thermal Insulation Board
B. Federal Specifications:
1.LLL-I-535B
2.SS-A-701B
3.SS-C-153
4.SS-C-153C
5.SS-R-620B
6.TT-C-498C
7.TT-P-320D
07530 - 3
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
8.TT-S-00227E
9.TT-S-00230C
10. SS-S-001534 (GSA-FSS)
11. L-P-375
C. Industry Standards:
1. The National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and Waterproofing
Manual
2. Single-ply Roofing Institute (SPRI) - A Professional Guide to Specifications Manual
3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) -
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
4. American Society of Civil Engineers – ASCE 7
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in compliance with Section 01340 Submittals Procedures.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and rolls with all labels
intact and legible including labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot
numbers, and usage instructions. Materials damaged in shipping or storage shall not be
used.
B. Manufacturer's packaging and/or roll plastic is not acceptable for exterior storage.
Tarpaulin with grommets shall be minimum acceptable for exterior coverings. All materials
stored as above shall be four inches (4") minimum off the substrate, and the tarpaulin tied
off with rope.
C. Deliver materials requiring fire resistance classification to the job with labels attached and
packaged as required by labeling service.
D. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work.
E. Handle and store material and equipment in such a manner as to avoid damage. Liquid
products shall be delivered sealed, in original containers.
F. Handle rolled goods so as to prevent damage to edge or ends.
G. Select and operate material handling equipment so as not to damage existing construction or
applied roofing.
H. Moisture-sensitive products shall be maintained in dry storage areas and properly covered.
Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and moisture absorption. Store
roofing and flashing materials on clean raised platforms with weather protective covering
when stored outdoors.
I. Store rolled goods on end.
J. Protect materials against damage by construction traffic.
K. The proper storage of materials is the sole responsibility of the contractor and any wet or
damaged roofing materials shall be discarded, removed from the project site, and replaced
prior to application.
L. Comply with fire and safety regulations, especially with materials which are extremely
flammable and/or toxic. Use safety precautions indicated on labels.
07530 - 4
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
M. Products liable, such as emulsions, to degrade as a result of being frozen shall be maintained
above 40° F in heated storage.
N. No storage of materials shall be permitted on roof areas other than those materials that are to
be installed the same day.
O. The contractor is to erect a temporary chain link fence, minimum six feet (6') in height,
around work area stage and kettles. Fence is to be secured on a daily basis.
1.08 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Job Condition Requirements:
1. Apply roofing in dry weather.
2. Do not apply roofing when ambient temperature is below 45° F.
3. Coordinate the work of the contractor with the work to be performed by the Owner's
personnel, to ensure proper sequencing of the entire work. The Owner's personnel will
be erecting interior protection for equipment, if required. The contractor is to schedule
his work so that adequate time is allowed for the Owner’s personnel to perform the
work. No roof work shall be performed until the Owner’s personnel have completed
erection of the interior protection in that area.
4. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with
manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to
proceed in accordance with specifications.
5. Schedule the work so the building will be left watertight at the end of each day. Do not
remove more roofing material than can be reinstalled in any working day.
6. All surfaces to receive new roofing shall be smooth, dry, and free from dirt, debris, and
foreign material before any of this work is installed. Competent operators shall be in
attendance at all times equipment is in use. Materials shall be stored neatly in areas
designated by the Owner. Load placed on the roof at any point shall not exceed the
safe load for which the roof is designed.
7. The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the roof mat and deck
from damage. The contractor shall be responsible for repairing all new areas of
damage caused by the negligence of the contractor, at the contractor's expense. The
Owner's on-site representative shall determine damage caused by contractor
negligence.
8. The contractor is to be aware of the potential for roof leaks on the existing roof as a
result of ruptured blisters and/or roof mat damage caused by the vacuum process,
foot traffic, or material and equipment storage. The contractor is to take all
necessary precautions to prevent damage to the existing roof. All damage to the
existing roof that could result in roof leaks is to be repaired on a daily basis by the
roofing contractor.
9. The contractor shall follow local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and
codes for the removal, handling, and disposal of asbestos containing materials, if
present. When a conflict exists, use the stricter document.
10. Follow insurance underwriter's requirements acceptable for use with specified products
or systems.
11. Due caution should be exercised so as not to alter the structural integrity of the deck.
When cutting through any deck, care should be taken so as not to damage the deck or
any part of the deck, such as post tension cables, etc.
12. All kettles shall have an automatic thermostat control, and temperature gauge, all in
working order.
13. The contractor is to verify the location of all interior ducts, electrical lines, piping,
conduit, and/or similar obstructions. The contractor is to perform all work in such a
manner as to avoid contact with the above mentioned items.
07530 - 5
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
14. Surface and air temperatures should be a minimum 45° F during applications of cleaner
and waterproof coating and remain above 45° F for a minimum of four (4) hours
following applications. Verify compatibility of cleaner with coatings, paints, primers and
joint sealers specified. Advise Owner's representative of any problems in this regard
prior to commencing cleaning operations.
B. Protection of Work and Property:
1. Work: The contractor shall maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage
and shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from injury or loss arising from this
contract. He shall provide and maintain at all times any OSHA required danger signs,
guards, and/or obstructions necessary to protect the public and his workmen from any
dangers inherent with or created by the work in progress. All federal, state, and city
rules and requirements pertaining to safety and all EPA standards, OSHA standards,
NESHAP regulations pertaining to asbestos as required shall be fulfilled by the
contractor as part of his proposal.
2. Property: Protect existing planting and landscaping as necessary or required to provide
and maintain clearance and access to the work of this contract. Examples of two
categories or degrees of protection are generally as follows: a) removal, protection,
preservation, or replacement and replanting of plant materials; b) protection of plant
materials in place, and replacement of any damage resulting from the contractor's
operations.
3. Twenty-four Hour Call: The contractor shall have personnel on call 24 hours per day,
seven (7) days per week for emergencies during the course of a job. The Owner's
Project Manager is to have the 24 hour numbers for the contact. Contractor must be
able to respond to any emergency call and have personnel on-site within two (2) hours
after contact. Numbers available to the Owner's Project Manager are to be both home
and office numbers for:
a) Job Foreman
b) Job Superintendent
c) Owner or Company Officer
C. Damage to Work of Others: The contractor shall repair, refinish, and make good any damage
to the building or landscaping resulting from any of his operation. This shall include, but is not
limited to, any damage to plaster, tile work, wall covering, paint, ceilings, floors, or any other
finished work. Damage done to the building, equipment, or grounds must be repaired at the
successful contractor's expense holding the Owner harmless from any other claims for
property damage and/or personal injury.
D. Measurements: It will be the contractor's responsibility to obtain and/or verify any necessary
dimensions by visiting the job site, and the contractor shall be responsible for the correctness
of same. Any drawings supplied are for reference only.
E. Use of Premises:
1. The contractor is advised that the Owner will occupy the building at all times, and the
contractor must provide all safeguards required to protect personnel and to keep noise
levels as low as reasonably possible for each operation.
2. The contractor shall:
a) Coordinate work in such a manner as to not interfere with the normal operation of
the building.
b) Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on
premises.
c) Agree to hold the Owner harmless in any and all liability of every nature and
description which may be suffered through bodily injuries, including death of any
persons by reason of negligence of the contractor, agents, employees, or
subcontractors.
07530 - 6
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
F. Cleaning and Disposal of Materials:
1. Contractor shall keep the job clean and free from all loose materials and foreign matter.
Contractor shall take necessary precautions to keep outside walls clean and shall allow
no roofing materials to remain on the outside walls.
2. All waste materials, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the Owner's premises as
accumulated. Rubbish shall be carefully handled to reduce the spread of dust. A
suitable scrap chute or hoist must be used to lower any debris. At completion, all work
areas shall be left broom clean and all contractor's equipment and materials removed
from the site.
3. All bituminous or roofing related materials shall be removed from ladders, stairs,
railings, and similar parts of the building.
4. Debris shall be deposited at an approved disposal site.
1.09 WARRANTIES
A. Roofing - Manufacturer: Project shall be installed in such a manner that the roofing material
manufacturer will furnish a written twenty (20) year NDL type warranty with no exclusion for
hail events containing hail stones up to and including four inches (4") from the date of
substantial completion of the completed project. Manufacturer issuing warranty shall
provide historical data supporting hail resistance.
B. Roofing - Contractor: The contractor, jointly with any subcontractors employed by him, shall
guarantee the work required and performed under this contract will be free from defects in
workmanship and materials, and that the building will be and remain waterproof for a
two (2) year warranty period, after the Owner accepts the work as substantially complete.
The warranty shall be in approved notarized written form, to obligate the contractor and his
subcontractors, if any, to make good the requirements of the warranty.
C. Warranty repairs shall be performed by a certified installer. The repairs shall be performed
in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommended procedures
so as to not void the warranty. Repair of the system, including materials and labor, shall be
done at no cost to the Owner.
D. During the proposal period each Bidder shall make arrangements with the material
manufacturer to provide the required warranty. Refer to Section 01335 Submittals
Procedures for requirements concerning submittals of warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials shall be furnished, specified, or approved in writing by the manufacturer
issuing the warranty.
B. The roofing membrane manufacturer is defined as a company which makes the primary
roofing membrane and flashing membrane in its own factories from raw materials. No
“Private Label” material, in which one company’s name goes on a product manufactured by
others, is acceptable for this project.
C. The manufacturer shall have 15 years UL listing for the membrane to be used on the project.
Membrane manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years FM approval, and 15 years
manufacturing experience with the roofing membrane specified for this project.
07530 - 7
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D. Samples of all materials used on the project, which are not supplied by the membrane
manufacturer, shall be submitted to the membrane manufacturer for written approval prior
to work starting.
E. The specified roofing system shall only be applied by manufacturer-approved and trained
roofing contractors.
F. Compatibility: Provide materials that are recommended by manufacturers to be fully
compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate
contact between incompatible materials.
G. All roofing and roof accessories shall be installed in compliance with manufacturer's current
specifications and details.
H. All materials used on the project shall be asbestos free.
I. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FINISH MEMBRANE
A. The white thermoplastic EIP membrane shall be nominal one hundred ten (110) mil in
overall thickness consisting of a white sixty (60) mil EIP thermoplastic membrane with fifty
(50) mil thick backing of five ounce polyester fleece with a minimum one and one-half inch
(1-1/2") dry selvage edge for welding. The high-performance thermoplastic EIP membrane
shall be comprised of a minimum 50% of total polymer content of KEE (ketone ethylene
ester). Membrane shall be manufactured by Hyload, Inc., or pre-approved equal.
B. The thermoplastic EIP membrane shall meet the following physical properties: Elongation
105%, ASTM D 412; Tensile Strength 1300 lbs/in2, ASTM D 412; Tear Strength 380 ppi,
ASTM D 624; Density @ 70° F, 80 lbs/ft3; Low Temperature Flexibility, Pass, 37-GP-56M;
and Water Absorption less than 0.1%, 37-GP-56M.
C. Membrane manufacturer must submit a letter of certification stating that the membrane has
a minimum of 50% KEE content in the field sheet.
2.03 BASE FLASHING and VERTICAL WALL MEMBRANE
A. For 4” hail warranty, base flashing membrane shall be same fleece-backed material as the
thermoplastic EIP membrane specified for the installation in the field, as manufactured by
Hyload Inc., or pre-approved equal.
B. Non-fleeced flashing membrane shall be utilized for multi-angled intersections, stripping
ply, trim strips, and other conditions where molding/forming of the membrane is required.
2.04 BITUMEN
A. Shall be ASTM D 312 Type IV steep asphalt.
2.05 UNDERLAYMENT PLIES
A. Shall be Underwriters Laboratory approved and listed in the FM Global Approval Guide.
B. Shall be Type IV fiberglass ply sheet, Underwriters Laboratory Type G-1, meeting Federal
Specification No. SS-R-620B, ASTM D 2178, Type III, as manufactured by Schuller
International, Inc., or approved equal.
07530 - 8
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.07 INSULATION
A. All insulation shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer as to thickness,
type, and manufacturer. All insulation must be approved for the specific application,
Underwriters Laboratory approved, and be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide.
B. Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation: Insulation shall be rigid polyisocyanurate foam board;
thickness and LTTR-value shall be a minimum of 3.2" = 18.6; meeting Federal Specification
No. HH-I-1972/1 or 2 with 20 psi minimum compressive strength and 2.0 pcf minimum
density. Board shall be surfaced on two (2) sides with non-asphaltic facer material.
C. Fiberboard Insulation:
1. Shall be thickness of 25/32", R of 2.06 and C of 0.50, board size four feet by eight feet
(4' x 8'), impregnated six (6) sides with asphalt, Underwriters Laboratory approved and
listed in the FM Global Approval Guide.
2.08 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners and fastening plates or bars shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide, and
be as recommended by the fastener manufacturer for the specific application.
B. Fastener for Steel Deck: Shall be a #14 fastener, fluorocarbon coated, with CR-10 coating. A
minimum .200 diameter shank and .250 diameter thread. To be used with round pressure
plates or bar, and having a fluorocarbon CR-10 coating, when subjected to thirty (30)
Kesternich cycles (DIN 50018) shows less than ten percent (10%) red rust which surpasses
FM Global Approval Standard 4470, as manufactured by Olympic Manufacturing Group, Inc.,
or approved equal. Fasteners, plates, and/or bars shall be listed in the FM Global Approval
Guide.
2.09 CANT STRIP
A. Provide 45 degree cant strips (no partials) at all vertical and horizontal surfaces, such as
walls, parapet walls, curbs, expansion joints, etc., and as recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
B. Cants shall provide a four inch (4") rise above the roof’s surface and extend a minimum of
four inches (4") horizontally.
C. Structural: Shall be wood where used for structural purposes meeting NRCA, FM Global
and Underwriters Laboratory guidelines.
D. Non-structural: Shall be wood fiber where used for non-structural purposes, conforming to
ASTM C208 and C209.
2.10 ROUGH LUMBER
A. All rough lumber shall be in compliance with Section 06100 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry.
B. All wood nailers, structural cants, curbs, and other miscellaneous rough carpentry, shall be
lumber as recommended by NRCA, and Underwriters Laboratory guidelines.
C. Vertical Wall Shimming Material: Shall be exterior grade plywood, gypsum core board, or
concrete core board unless otherwise accepted by Project Manager/Architect. Thickness
shall be as required for attachment or to make material flashing flush or level with offsets
and/or transitions, minimum three-fourths inch (3/4"). Proper selection of material is
required to achieve UL guidelines.
07530 - 9
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.11 SEALANTS
A. One-part Urethane Sealant: Sealant for use at coping joints, reglet joints, etc., shall be a
one-component, high performance, non-priming, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric
polyurethane sealant designed for use in active exterior joints, ASTM C 920, shall meet the
following physical and performance properties, SONOLASTIC® NP 1™ as manufactured by
BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, or approved equal.
Properties Results Test Methods
Movement capability, % ±35 ASTM C719
Tensile strength, psi (MPa) 350 (2.4) ASTM D412
Tear strength, pli 50 ASTM D1004
Ultimate elongation at break, % 800 ASTM D412
Rheological, at 120° F (49° C) No sag ASTM C639
(sag in vertical displacement)
Extrudability, 3 seconds Passes ASTM C603
Hardness, Shore A ASTM C661
At standard conditions 25 – 30
After heat aging (max Shore A: 50) 25
Weight loss, after heat aging 3% ASTM C792
Cracking and chalking, after heat aging None ASTM C792
Tack-free time, hrs, (maximum 72 hrs) Passes ASTM C679
Stain and color change Passes (no visible stain) ASTM C510
Bond durability,* on glass, aluminum, Passes ASTM C719
and concrete ±35% movement
Adhesion* in peel, pli (min. 5 pli) 30 ASTM C794
Adhesion* in peel after UV radiation Passes ASTM C794
through glass (min. 5 pli)
Artificial weathering, Xenon arc, 250 hours Passes ASTM C793
Artificial weathering, Xenon arc, 3,000 hours No surface cracking
ASTM G26
Water immersion, 122° F (50° C) Passes 10 weeks with ASTM C1247
movement cycling
*Primed for water immersion dictated by ASTM C920.
B. Silyl-terminated Polyether Sealant: Sealant shall be a thermosetting, solvent free, non-
slump, self-fixturing, multipurpose structural sealant which shall meet the following physical
and performance properties, M-1 as manufactured by Chem Link, Inc., or approved equal.
Properties
Specific Gravity 1.62 (13.5 lbs./gallon)
Viscosity 800,000+ cps Brookfield RTV, TF spindle, 4 rpm
73° F.
Shear Strength (ASTM D-1002) 400 psi+ (7 day ambient cure)
Elongation @ break (ASTM D-412) 400-550% (7 day ambient cure)
Hardness Shore A (ASTM C-661) 45 ± 3
Tack free time (ASTM C-679) 20 minutes
Low temperature flex ASTM D-816) Minus 10° F pass 1/4" mandrel
Slump (sag) (ASTM C-697) Zero slump
Shrinkage (ASTM D-2453) No measurable shrinkage (after 14 days)
Service temperature -40° F to 200° F continuous service
07530 - 10
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.12 ASPHALT ROOF PRIMER
A. Quick-dry asphalt-based primer for priming of asphalt roof surfaces, as manufactured by
Hyload Inc., or approved equal.
Applicable Federal Specification SS-A-701B
ASTM D 41
Flash Point 105° F
Viscosity at 80° F (ASTM D 217) 50-60 K.U.
Weight per gallon 7.4 pounds
Drying time (to touch) Min. 4 hours
2.13 LEAD JACKS
A. Shall be four pound (4#) lead, and of dimensions required to completely cover existing
plumbing stack.
2.14 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Pipe support system shall be a prefabricated, engineered support system designed
specifically for use on roofing without adhesive, roof penetrations, flashings, or damage to
roofing system. Supports shall be as recommended by manufacturer as suitable for size
and type of conduit or pipe being supported. Shall be as manufactured by Advanced
Support Products, Inc., or approved equal.
1. Base shall be seventeen inches (17") circular base, injected molded polypropylene, with
227 square inches of surface on bottom, designed for weight disbursement;
2. Dimensions shall be three inches (3") high by seventeen inches (17") in diameter, with
molded insert for square tubing and two threaded rod couplings molded in.
3. Frame shall be pre-galvanized zinc coated 12 gauge channel meeting ASTM A653.
4. Hangers shall be clevis and/or band type as per pipe requirements.
5. Accessories shall consist of cadmium plated threaded rods, clamps, nuts, bolts, and
washers.
6. Rollers shall be non-binding heavy duty SBR rubber.
2.15 PIPE BANDS
A. Stainless steel bands with self-locking heads.
B. Tighten with hand tool for tension control and flush cut off.
2.16 SEAM SEALER
A. Special caulk compatible with Elvaloy® and thermoplastic membrane to seal exposed cut
edges.
2.17 TRIM STRIP
A. The trim strip shall have the following minimum properties, as manufactured by Hyload Inc., or
approved equal.
1. Six inch (6") wide non-fleeced 45 mil thermoplastic used for capping end laps of rolls.
2. The trim strip is seamed with the use of hot-air welding.
07530 - 11
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.18 PITCH PAN SEALANT
A. Shall be one-part, self-leveling polyurethane sealant meeting Federal Specification No.
TT-S-00230C, Type I, Class A, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for use in new pitch
pans, as manufactured by Sonneborn/BASF, or approved equal.
2.19 TERMINATION/PRESSURE BARS
A. Aluminum strip shall be extruded channel bar with a mill finish, width one inch (1"),
thickness 0.100" ± .008", leg height one-fourth inch (1/4") top and bottom, leg angle ninety
degrees (90°), for perimeter and curb anchorage, having predrilled holes six inches (6") on
center, as manufactured by Olympic Fasteners, or approved equal.
2.20 ELASTOMERIC SEALANT
A. Multi-Component Polysulfide Sealant: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
manufacturer's standard, non-modified, 2-or-more-part, polyurethane-based, elastomeric
sealant; complying with either ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, or FS TT-S-00227E, Class
A; self-leveling grade/type where used in joints of surfaces subject to traffic, otherwise
non-sag grade/type, as manufactured by Sonneborn, or approved equal.
B. Durability: Less than 0.5 square inch adhesion/cohesion loss for three (3) samples of both
mortar and aluminum; ASTM C 719 test procedure.
C. Adhesion in Peel: Fifteen pound (15#) peel strength and 10% maximum loss of bond to
substrate; ASTM C 794.
D. Bituminous Modification: Where joint surfaces contain or are contaminated with bituminous
materials, provide manufacturer's modified type sealant which is compatible with joint
surfaces (modified with coal-tar or asphalt as required).
2.21 SELF-ADHERING UNDERLAYMENT FOR TEMPORARY WATERPROOFING
A. A premium heavyweight, minimum 60 mil, self-adhering underlayment, to use as a
temporary waterproofing barrier.
2.22 OVERNIGHT SEAL
A. Hot applied asphalt bitumen shall be provided for the purpose of night sealing the roof
system.
2.23 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. All materials shall be delivered with appropriate carton and can labels indicating appropriate
warnings, storage conditions, lot numbers, and usage instructions. Materials damaged in
shipping or storage shall not be used.
2.24 PRECAUTIONS
A. Some of the indicated materials are extremely flammable and/or toxic. Use precautions
indicated on can and carton labels.
07530 - 12
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.25 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Other materials shall be as specified or of the best grade for the proposed use as
recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 REFERENCE
A. Application of materials shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and current NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines, except
where more stringent requirements (better quality or greater quantity of work) are shown or
specified.
B. In the instance of a conflict between these specifications and those of the manufacturer
and/or current NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory, and IBC guidelines, the more stringent
specifications (better quality or greater quantity of work) shall take precedence.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes.
B. Protect adjacent areas with tarpaulin or other durable materials.
C. Contractor shall prevent overspray, and be responsible for parking lot areas and/or
adjoining areas not part of this contract.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for sealing, as required, all openings that may allow bitumen
migration or drippage, i.e. pitch dams, envelopes, and filler strips.
E. Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's or applicator's published instructions. All
metal that is to receive bitumen, or come in contact with bitumen or adhesive, shall be first
primed with appropriate primer. Any prefinished galvanized sheet steel that is to receive
bitumen, or come in contact with bitumen or adhesive, shall be scored, scuffed or abraded
before receiving primer application.
F. Use cleaning materials or primers necessary to render an acceptable surface/substrate.
G. All surfaces/substrates shall be clean and dry prior to application of materials.
H. Prior to application of felts and membrane, all foreign matter, gravel, etc., shall be removed
from the insulation and/or substrate. Gravel or debris between the insulation/substrate and
plies is not acceptable.
I. Prior to application of flashing membranes, substrate shall be clean and free of any
previously installed roofing materials. Contractor shall ensure that all components of
substrate be structurally sound before application of flashing materials.
J. Bitumen kettle shall have a fume recovery system, and visible thermometer to provide
positive monitoring of the bitumen temperature when it is heated in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
K. Ambient temperature shall be 45° F and rising.
07530 - 13
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
L. The underlayment plies and field membrane are to be laid in the direction of maximum roof
slope, working from bottom of slope toward ridge.
M. All roof areas will be picture framed with the 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM)
as the system is being applied. The outer edge of the picture frame sheet shall extend
approximately two inches (2") above the top of the cant. All end laps of the field sheets of
the 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane shall lap the picture frame sheet a minimum of
eight inches (8") or the picture frame sheet side laps shall lap the field sheet a minimum of
eight inches (8").
N. Wrinkles, buckles, kinks, and fishmouths are not acceptable when laying felt and
membrane.
O. Dry voids of felt on felt or membrane on membrane are not acceptable.
P. All surfaces that are to receive the self-adhered membranes shall be primed with a fast
drying asphaltic primer. Except when self-adhered membrane is to be installed over a
CTEM surface.
3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Substrate shall be smooth and free of debris, sharp edges, and other surface irregularities
prior to work starting. Substrate repair shall be performed as required to minimum of NRCA
standards.
B. Metal Decks – New Construction:
1. All loose rust, bitumen, or other foreign material shall be removed from the deck before
applying asphalt primer at the minimal rate of one and one-half (1-1/2) gallons per one
hundred (100) square feet of area.
2. The deck span shall not exceed that recommended by FM Global Bulletin 1-28.
3. Expansion/control joints shall be installed so that no one area exceeds two hundred feet
by two hundred feet (200' x 200').
3.05 ASPHALT HEATING
A. Use low burner flames during initial melt-downs. Circulate asphalt after initial melt-down.
Maximum asphalt temperature shall be 25°F below the flash point.
B. Avoid prolonged heating of asphalt at high temperatures. Reduce the asphalt temperature
to below 500°F if asphalt is not being used for periods of four (4) hours or more.
C. Kettle shall be free of contaminants.
D. Application rates: Bitumen quantities for waterstop/tie-offs, flashings, miscellaneous detail
applications, and minimum kettle capacity are not included in application rates. To account
for these factors, add approximately 25 percent additional bitumen on a total job average
basis.
3.06 ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. All rough carpentry shall be installed in accordance with Section 06100 Rough Carpentry
B. Nailers shall be installed according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory, and IBC guidelines.
07530 - 14
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Wooden nailers shall be installed at gravel stops, drip edges, expansion joints, and on
outside perimeter of building.
D. Gravel stop and drip edge nailers shall be the same height as the new insulation being
installed where required.
E. Nailers shall be raised if necessary by anchoring an additional nailer of appropriate height to
the existing nailer if the existing nailer is not to be replaced.
F. Expansion joint nailers shall extend upward a minimum of eight inches (8") above finish roof
height.
G. Where parapet wall exists, specified vertical wall shimming material shall be installed
beginning at roof height up to a minimum of twelve inches (12”) above finished roof surface,
or as detailed, to provide substrate for horizontal termination of roof to wall flashing system.
H. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment, or to make material flashing flush or level
with offsets and/or transitions, shall be incorporated in these specifications.
3.07 NAILERS
A. All nailers shall be installed in accordance with Section 06100 Rough Carpentry
B. Wooden nailers shall be installed at gravel stops, drip edges, and expansion joints on outside
perimeter of building according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines.
3.08 CANTS
A. All cants shall be installed in accordance with Section 06100 Rough Carpentry.
B. Provide full 45 degree cant strips (no partials) at all intersections of vertical and horizontal
surfaces, such as walls, parapet walls, curbs, expansion joints, etc., and as recommended
by membrane manufacturer.
C. Cants shall provide a four inch (4") rise above the roof’s surface and extend a minimum of
four inches (4") horizontally.
D. Toe of cant shall be level with the surface to receive new roof membrane and in all cases
anchored according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory, and IBC guidelines.
E. Cant strips shall be installed at the intersection of the deck and all vertical surfaces.
F. If a wood cant is used where insulation exists, cant shall be toe nailed into treated wood
nailer under cant the same height as insulation.
3.09 WOOD CANTS
A. All wood cants shall be installed in accordance with Section 06100 Rough Carpentry.
B. Toe of cant shall be level with the surface to receive new roof membrane and in all cases
anchored according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines.
07530 - 15
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.10 INSULATION
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: In regard to attachment, the manufacturer's instructions or
specifications shall determine the suitability for an application. Installation must meet ASCE 7
criteria and meet local governing building codes.
B. Precautions: The surface of the insulation must not be ruptured due to overdriving of
fasteners.
C. Insulation shall be tapered or feathered at drains and scuppers to provide proper drainage (if
applicable).
D. No more insulation shall be installed than can be covered by the completed roof system by the
end of the day or the onset of inclement weather.
3.11 HOT APPLIED APPLICATION OF PLY SHEET
A. Recover Board / Substrate Board shall be covered with two (2) layers of fiberglass ply sheet
Type IV fully adhered as follows:
All layers shall be solid mopped at the nominal rate of thirty pounds (30#) ± 20 percent per
one hundred (100) square feet using asphalt Type III as required by slope, properly heated.
Specified layers shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
in accordance with general practices as set forth by the NRCA Roofing Manual.
3.12 APPLICATION OF FLEECE BACKED MEMBRANE
A. Fully Adhered Application: Fully adhere membrane to acceptable substrate with hot asphalt
applied at the rate specified by the manufacturer.
1. The roof surface must be clean, dry and free of foreign material.
2. Position sheets as indicated on approved shop drawings.
3. Fold one end of the Elvaloy® sheet on top of itself until both ends meet. Apply hot
asphalt to the prepared roof surface. The sheet can then be pulled and laid into the
bonding material using care not to create any wrinkles.
4. Carefully push into place from fold line to overlap, avoiding wrinkles and air pockets.
Roll or broom membrane flat. Using a minimum 200 lb water filled roller, roll
membrane into the hot adhesive. NO EXCEPTIONS.
5. Repeat procedure for other sheet half.
6. Lap seams shall be done by lapping the two inch (2") selvedge edge over the
non-selvedge edge of the previous roll. The selvedge edge seam shall be made with
the heat gun method.
7. Roll ends are butted and capped with a six inch (6") wide trim strip. The trim strip is
then seamed with the heat gun.
B. Lap Seaming Procedure: Overlap membrane for attachment method specified and hot-air
welded with manufacturer's approved equipment.
1.ALL SEAMS SHALL BE WELDED DAILY. NO EXCEPTIONS.
2. All surfaces to be welded shall be clean, dry and free of foreign material.
3. All seams must then be checked with a needle probe and any voids repaired with the
heat gun.
4. Caulk all exposed cut edges with seam sealer.
07530 - 16
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.13 BACKNAILING/STRAPPING
A. On slopes greater than one inch (1") in twelve inches (12"), refer to NRCA and/or
manufacturer's guidelines for backnailing procedures and follow the more stringent
guidelines for all specified materials.
Slope Interply& Top Pour Backnail Strap
0 - ½" per 12" Type IV No No
½" - 2" per 12" Type IV Yes Strap if possible
2" - 3" per 12" Type IV Yes Yes
3.14 PERIMETER FASTENING
A. Wood nailers are required for perimeter gravel stops or drip edges. Field membrane and all
plies shall be mechanically fastened to nailer on twelve inch (12") centers maximum.
3.15 FLASHING
1. Field fabricate flashings for vent pipes, vent stacks or other multi-angled roof
projections/penetrations.
2. Mechanically fasten flashing at terminations according to approved details.
3. Fastening membrane flashing through metal counterflashing without the use of a
termination bar is not acceptable.
B. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment or to make material flashing flush or level
with offsets and/or transitions shall be incorporated in the flashing specifications.
3.16 BASE FLASHING (APPROXIMATELY 8" IN HEIGHT MINIMUM)
A. Base flashings shall be installed using the flashing membrane, with length of run not to
exceed eight linear feet (8').
B. Wooden nailers or curbs shall be installed at all edges and openings in the roof, mechanically
fastened to the deck.
C. Cant strips shall be installed at the intersection of the deck and all vertical surfaces.
D. The roofing field membrane shall extend up over and a minimum two inches (2") above the
top of cant strips at all vertical intersections or out to the roof's edge.
E. All existing substrates receiving flashing membrane shall be clean and primed with primer,
prior to application as required.
F. Flashing membrane shall always be installed with one (1) ply of Type IV glass felt as an
underlayment. Both the Type IV glass felt underlayment and the flashing membrane shall
be set in hot asphalt or butyl adhesive.
1. NOTE: Care shall be taken to avoid asphalt contamination at end laps where the
vertical laps of the membrane must be hot-air welded.
G. All flashings shall be mechanically fastened with a termination bar a maximum of six inches
(6") on center, be a maximum of forty inches (40") above finished roof height, extend a
minimum of four inches (4") onto the field of horizontal roof membrane, and not exceed eight
linear feet (8') of run in length.
07530 - 17
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
H. After proper termination of the base flashing at a minimum eight inch (8") height (or maximum
eighteen inch (18") height), a saw cut reglet with counterflashing shall be installed according
to NRCA and SMACNA guidelines.
I. All vertical flashing butted seams of the flashing membrane shall be covered with a six inch
(6”) trim strip and hot-air welded.
J. All flashing membrane shall be adhered with flashing bonding adhesive to the vertical
substrate and hot-air welded to the field of roof membrane; hot-air weld six inch (6”) trim strip
over the butted vertical seams/laps.
K. Flashing welds shall be a minimum two inch (2") width, no maximum.
L. Hot-Air Welding of Flashing:
1. When using a hand-held hot-air welder, the seams should be pressed together using a
hand-held roller. The speed and temperature settings of the welding equipment can be
affected by the weather conditions at the site of application, therefore, these parameters
should be set by trial and error using two (2) pieces of the flashing membrane.
Minimum width of hot-air weld two inches (2"), no maximum.
2. Lay the membranes together and apply pressure to the welded seam to ensure full
adhesion.
M. All hot-air welded seams/laps shall be tested daily with a probe for integrity, no
variance.
3.17 VERTICAL WALL FLASHING (FOR USE APPROXIMATELY 8-18" ABOVE THE FINISHED ROOF
LINE AND EXTENDING UPWARD)
A. Flashing membrane shall be installed on the vertical beginning a minimum of eight inches (8")
above the finished roof line (where the base flashing is terminated), with length of run not to
exceed twenty feet (20'). Flashing shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. The termination bar used to terminate the minimum eight inch (8") high base flashing shall be
covered with the lower edge of the upper vertical flashing. This will cause the termination bar
to be buried at the termination point. The selvedge edge of the upper flashing shall be hot-air
welded to the base flashing membrane. Care should be taken to ensure the top edge of the
base flashing and bottom edge of the vertical flashing are both secured.
C. All existing substrates receiving flashing membrane shall be clean and primed with asphalt
primer, prior to application.
D. All substrates receiving welded-seam flashing membrane shall be clean and primed with
primer, prior to application when applicable.
E. The vertical wall flashing membrane shall be set in flashing bonding adhesive according to
manufacturer's guidelines.
F. All vertical flashing joints shall be butted together and covered with 6” trim strip and hot-air
welded to the flashing membrane.
G. Flashing welds shall be minimum two inch (2") width, no maximum.
H. Immediately following the laying of the flashing membrane, it shall be pressed or rolled in the
width direction of the membrane. This will prevent excessive entrapment of air beneath the
membrane. The pressing or rolling shall be in the width direction and with the laps so as not
to buck the laps.
07530 - 18
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
I. Any flashing extending further than eighteen inches (18") up onto a vertical surface shall be
installed using a hidden termination bar. The termination bar used to terminate the first
flashing shall be covered by the lower edge of the upper vertical flashing and the selvedge
edge shall be hot air welded to the lower flashing. This will cause the termination bar to be
hidden at the termination point. Care should be taken to ensure the top edge of the bottom
flashing and bottom edge of the upper vertical flashing are both secured. The upper flashing
shall be installed and extended up and over the parapet wall and fastened to the nailer on the
outside of the wall.
J. The flashing membrane shall be run up the wall in lengths not to exceed twenty (20’) linear
feet, run under the coping cap and be terminated on the outside of the wall six inches (6") on
center; then the coping cap shall be reset. All vertical butt joints are to be stripped in with the
6” trim strip and hot-air welded.
K. Hot-air Welding Laps/Joints/Seams:
1. When using a hand-held hot-air welder, the seams should be pressed together using a
hand-held roller. The speed and temperature settings of the welding equipment can be
affected by the weather conditions at the site of application, therefore, these parameters
should be set by the contractor by using two (2) pieces of flashing membrane.
Minimum width of hot-air weld shall be two inches (2").
2. Lay the laps together and apply pressure to the welded seam to ensure full adhesion.
3. Allow the seams to set fully, and probe the entire length for voids. Reseam voids
immediately with a hot-air gun and roller.
L. All hot-air welded seams/joints/laps shall be tested daily with a probe for integrity, no variance.
M. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment or to make material flashing flush or level
with offsets and/or transitions shall be incorporated in the flashing specifications.
3.18 VERTICAL WALL FLASHING (FOR USE APPROXIMATELY 8" ABOVE THE FINISHED ROOF LINE
AND EXTENDING UPWARD)
A. White thermoplastic EIP welded-seam flashing membrane shall be installed on the vertical
beginning approximately eight inches (8") above the finished roof line (where the base
flashing membrane is terminated), with length of run not to exceed the width of the material
roll. Strapped flashing method shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. The termination bar used to terminate the eight inch (8") high base flashing shall be used to
terminate the lower edge of the vertical flashing. This will cause the termination bar to be
buried at the eight inch (8") minimum height. Care should be taken to ensure the top edge
of the base flashing and bottom edge of the vertical flashing are both secured.
C. All existing substrates receiving flashing membrane shall be clean and primed with asphalt
primer, prior to application.
D. Flashing membrane shall be installed with Type IV glass felt as an underlayment. The
Type IV glass felt shall be set in hot asphalt and properly primed prior to the application of
the self-adhered welded seam membrane.
E. All vertical flashing lap seams of the vertical flashing membrane shall be hot-air welded.
1. NOTE: Once the membrane has been contaminated with hot asphalt, it is not
possible to clean the asphalt off and hot air weld it for a long term effectiveness. A
07530 - 19
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
patch of non-fleeced flashing membrane must be welded over the area large enough
to be welded one and one-half inches (1-1/2") past any contaminated area.
F. Flashing laps shall be minimum three inch (3") width, no maximum. Hot-air weld of flashing
lap shall be minimum one and one-half inch (1-1/2") width, no maximum.
G. Immediately following the laying of the welded seam membrane, it shall be pressed or rolled
in the width direction of the membrane. This will prevent excessive entrapment of air
beneath the membrane. The pressing or rolling shall be in the width direction and with the
laps so as not to buck the laps.
H. The welded seam flashing membrane shall be run up the wall in three foot (3') widths, run
under the coping cap and be terminated on the outside of the wall six inches (6") on center;
then the coping cap shall be reset. All side laps are to be hot-air welded.
I. Hot-air Welding Laps:
1. When using a hand-held hot-air welder, the seams should be pressed together using a
hand-held roller. The speed and temperature settings of the welding equipment can be
affected by the weather conditions at the site of application, therefore, these parameters
should be set by the contractor by using two (2) pieces of self-adhered welded seam
membrane. Minimum width of hot-air weld shall be one and one-half inches (1-1/2").
2. Lay the laps together and apply pressure to the welded seam to ensure full adhesion.
3. Allow the seams to set fully, and probe the entire length for voids. Reseam voids
immediately with a hot-air gun and roller.
J. All hot-air welded seams/laps shall be tested daily with a probe for integrity, no variance.
3.19 PROJECTION FLASHINGS
A. Plumbing Vents: Soil vent stack pipes shall receive new lead flashings installed in strict
accordance with practices set forth in the NRCA Roofing Manual. The lead shall be carried
up and over the top of the stack, and crimped down into the pipe to form a watertight seal.
Projections that cannot be sealed thus should be boxed in and flashed as recommended by
the roof membrane manufacturer.
B. Square Projections: Lay the field membrane up to the projection, and cut membrane so
that it will extend twelve inches (12") beyond the projection. Cut a slit in the membrane to
correspond with the position of the projection, and lay the membrane in hot asphalt. Apply
another layer of membrane in exactly the same fashion, but from the opposite direction.
For metal flange-type projections, after doing above, strip in with six inch (6") strips of
membrane.
C. Round Projections: Cut membrane square and eighteen inches (18") from perimeter of
projection. Slit square membrane with an "X" of proper size to ensure a close fit and
positive seal. Place over projection, and adhere to clean membrane already on the roof.
Cut a six inch (6") piece of membrane to apply as a collar, and secure with an all stainless
steel clamp.
3.20 CURB FLASHINGS
A. The flashing substrate shall be free of any dirt and loose material.
B. The underlayment ply or plies and the field membrane shall be brought to two inches (2")
past the top of the cant strip and adhered.
07530 - 20
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Starting on the roof at least six inches (6") from the roofside edge of the cant strip, adhere
two (2) plies of Type IV ply sheet extending over the cant and up the vertical a minimum of
eight inches (8"). Each lap of the ply sheet shall be a minimum of three inches (3").
D. Over the Type IV ply sheet starting on the roof at least eight inches (8") from the roofside
edge of the cant strip, adhere the field membrane extending over the cant and up the
vertical a minimum of eight inches (8"). Each lap of the field membrane shall be a minimum
of three inches (3"), hot-air welded, and shall not coincide with the laps of the underlayment
sheet.
E. Fasten the top edge of the flashings on six inch (6") centers using approved termination bar
and fasteners.
F. An NRCA-approved metal counterflashing shall extend down over the flashing a minimum
of four inches (4").
3.21 EDGING FLASHINGS
A. An NRCA-approved gravel stop/fascia system shall be installed in strict accordance with
published instructions to meet ES-1.
3.22 PIPING/CONDUIT
A. Piping/conduit shall be raised to NRCA recommended heights, and new supports furnished.
Permanent supports shall be installed upon pads approved by membrane manufacturer.
Coordinate work with Project Manager/Architect.
B. All gas lines, piping, and conduits shall be coated with industrial grade yellow paint.
3.23 PIPE/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. All gas lines, piping, and conduit must be supported on specified stands or hangars.
B. Supports shall be attached to pipes with oversized strapping.
C. Designated pipe/equipment supports shall be removed and replaced with new.
D. Verify that roof surface is smooth and clean to extent needed to receive materials. Surface
shall be cleaned by removing any loose gravel and any foreign matter.
E. Install support systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop
drawings. Accurately locate and align pre-fabricated pipe supports in locations specified as
per approved shop drawings. Pipe supports shall be placed not to exceed ten feet (10') on
center and within two feet (2") of all elevation changes, intersections, and corners.
F. Supports shall be set on a double layer of membrane, adhered to the roof surface using
specified silyl-terminated polyester sealant, unless noted otherwise by support
manufacturer.
G. Provide bond breaker between dissimilar metals.
07530 - 21
Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.25 DRAIN ACCESSORIES
A. Drain guards shall be installed at all drains, per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Gravel guards shall be installed at all drains. Guards shall be assembled onsite, using stainless
steel bolts, and set in hot bitumen and stripped in with roofing felts, per manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.26 EXPANSION JOINT
A. Expansion joints at walls and field of the roof shall be curbed as outlined in accordance with
NRCA and SMACNA guidelines. The curbs will be flashed as outlined above in Curb
Flashings.
3.28 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of excess cement, adhesive, sealants, mortar and paint associated
with the new work.
B. Clean work area of excess roofing materials and installation debris daily.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by the work.
3.29 MEMBRANE CLEANING
A. After all membrane has been installed, it shall be cleaned with a cleaning agent compatible
with the membrane to return the membrane to like new appearance.
3.30 PROTECTION
A. Protect all building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished, installed roofing system, protect membrane,
underlayment accessories and finishes from damage.
3.31 MEMBRANE PROTECTION
A. Where equipment pads, wood sleepers, or walkway slabs are to be installed over the roofing
membrane, an additional layer of the roofing membrane shall be installed between the roofing
membrane and the pad, sleeper, or slab. Due caution shall be exercised to prevent roofing
membrane damage during placement. Where required, membrane shall be welded to field
membrane to prevent slippage.
3.33 OVERNIGHT SEAL
A. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that
no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building.
B. Installation shall be performed according to accepted roofing practice as outlined in the
NRCA Roofing Manual.
END OF SECTION 07530
07600 - 1
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 07600
SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
FOR FULLY ADHERED MULTI-PLY ROOF SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide flashing and sheet metal components for moisture protection.
2. Related accessories.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit shop drawings, product data and mockups of all sheet metal.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
in satisfactory use in similar service for five (5) years. Use experienced installers. Deliver,
handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Reference Standards: Applicable portions of ASCE, SMACNA, ASTM and NAAMM
publications.
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product warranty
signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product
which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other
rights to correction which the Owner/Project Consultant may have under the contract
documents. Failure is defined to include product failure which leads to interruption of a
watertight installation. Correction may include repair or replacement of failed product.
B. Contractor's Warranty Period: For roofing flashing and sheet metal, provide a written warranty
which shall warrant work to be free of leaks and defects in materials and workmanship for
two (2) years, starting from date of substantial completion.
C. Defects of the sheet metal occurring during the warranty period shall be promptly corrected by
the contractor, and defects of the roofing shall be promptly corrected by the manufacturer at
no additional cost to the Owner. Upon notification from the Owner or the Owner's
representative that evidence of a defect exists, the responsible party shall immediately inform
the Owner's representative of the date on which corrective work will be scheduled, and shall
notify the Owner's representative when the corrective work has been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIAL
A. Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel for use as counterflashings (where not visible from the ground),
pitch pans and expansion joints: Minimum 24-gauge, G-90, hot-dipped galvanized metal,
commercial quality, ASTM A 525.
07600 - 2
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel for use as continuous clips: Minimum 22-gauge, G-90,
hot-dipped galvanized metal, commercial quality, ASTM A 525.
C. Prefinished Galvanized Sheet Steel (where visible from the ground): Shall be 24-gauge flat
stock, prefinished with Kynar finish meeting ASTM A 446, forty-five and one-half inches to
forty-eight inches width by one hundred twenty inches in length (45-1/2" - 48" x 120") for use
as new metal edge gravel guard, downspouts, gutters, coping and miscellaneous metal.
Standard color to be selected by Owner/Project Consultant.
D. Elvaloy® Cladded Metal: Shall be G-90 galvanized steel with 25 mil Elvaloy® membrane
lamination; width shall be four feet, length shall be eight or ten feet. Standard color to be
selected by Owner.
E. Stainless Steel: QQ-S-766, Class 301, 302, 304, or 316; or ASTM A 167, Type 301, 302,
304, or 316; form and condition most suitable for the purpose.
F. Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Plate and Sheet: QQ-A-250; form, alloy, and temper shall be
that most suitable for the purpose.
G. Sheet Lead: QQ-L-201, Grade B.
H. All existing sheet metal shall be replaced with new metal of like gauge and type, or as
specified on drawings.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners shall be same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer for the specific application. Match finish of exposed
heads with material being fastened.
B. Fasteners and fastening plates or bars shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide.
C. Fastener for Brick: Shall be one-fourth inch by two inches (1/4" x 2"), zinc with plated steel or
stainless steel nail, one piece unit, flat head.
D. Screws: Self-taping sheet metal type with neoprene washer, as appropriate.
E. Pop Rivets: Full stainless steel Series 42 or 44, as appropriate.
F. Continuous Clip: Concealed hold-down clip type; of same materials as coping, gravel guard,
sized to suit application. Use a continuous clip, minimum 20-gauge G-90 galvanized.
2.03 RELATED MATERIAL
A. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant, black color.
B. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, cutback asphalt type.
C. Solder: QQ-S-571 composition best suited for purpose; use high tin content, minimum 60/40,
for stainless steel and monel alloy.
D. Copper, Sheet, and Strip: QQ-C-576, ASTM B 370, light cold-rolled temper.
E. Lead-coated Copper: ASTM B 101, Type I or II, Class A.
07600 - 3
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
F. Sealant (for Sheet Metal): One-component polyurethane, conforming to requirements of FS
TT-S-230C, non-staining and non-bleeding.
G. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Downspout Boots: Cast iron by Neenah Foundry Company, or pre-approved equal,
provide and install.
2. Splash Blocks: Concrete, 3000 psi, 28 days. Provide and install with protection pads at
all downspouts. Dimensions shall be a minimum eighteen inches wide by thirty-six
inches long (18" x 36").
3. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with
material being installed, non-corrosive, size, and gauge required for performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set, cant
strips and reglets in place, substrates are smooth and clean and nailing strips located.
B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed and secure.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. Provide all shop drawings and
mock-ups one month prior to installation to the Owner/Project Consultant for approval.
B. Install starter and edge strips and cleats before starting installation.
3.03 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with
applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other
recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance;
with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage,
damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without
excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Fabricate gravel stops/fascia, gutters/downspouts, counterflashings, pitch pans, expansion
joints, and copings with new galvanized sheet metal as specified. Fabricate gravel guard and
fascia to size and dimensions as indicated on the drawings. Fabricate light metal coping,
gutters and downspouts as indicated.
C. Form sheet metal on bending brake.
D. Shape, trim and hand seam metal on bench insofar as practicable.
E. Form materials with straight lines, sharp angles and smooth curves.
F. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edge to form hem (1/2" minimum).
07600 - 4
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
G. Weld or solder joints on parts that are to be permanently and rigidly assembled.
H. Submit sheet metal models for approval by the Owner/Project Consultant.
I. Limit single-piece lengths to ten feet (10').
J. Fabricate corner pieces with eighteen inch (18") extensions, metered and sealed by forming
as one piece.
K. Surface sand flange prior to applying any primers on Kynar metal.
L. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint.
M. All existing or missing metal rooftop projections shall be replaced. New rooftop projection
details shall be as recommended in NRCA or SMACNA handbooks. All rooftop projections
shall be cleaned, all joints sealed, and painted with a rust inhibitive paint. Standard color to be
selected by the Owner/Project Consultant.
N. All sheet metal shall be sealed and watertight.
O. Metal work should be secured so as to prevent damage from buckling or wind. Where clips
are shown, these are to be continuous.
P. All metal to receive bitumen or adhesive shall be first primed with asphalt primer.
Q. All prefinished metal shall be sanded and/or abraded prior to receiving primer.
R. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other
than aluminum, tin edges are to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
S. Expansion Provisions: Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than
one inch (1") deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
T. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for
proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric
sealant, in compliance with industry standards.
U. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive
substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or
other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
V. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. General: All sheet metal termination to vertical wall shall have a through-wall with receiver
installed on masonry walls or prefabricated "Z" bar flashing pre-installed to fluid applied wall
finished prior to installation of sheet metal termination. This applies to edge metal, base
flashing closures and all vertical surface intersections. Refer to NRCA, SMACNA, and metal
manufacturer's guidelines.
B. Elvaloy® cladded metal shall be fabricated as needed; follow these specifications and
standard sheet metal practice for attachment to roof details.
07600 - 5
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Gravel Guard/Fascia:
1. Shall be installed with expansion joints, ten feet (10') on center, one-fourth inch (1/4")
expansion leeway, with a cover plate.
2. Secure metal flashings per specifications.
3. Lock seams and end joints.
4. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing
building.
5. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight
inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece.
6. Hem exposed edges three-fourths inch (3/4") minimum.
7. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint.
Surface sand before applying primers.
8. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing.
9. Provide and install continuous clip around perimeter.
10. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions.
11. Color as selected from manufacturer's full range of colors including metallics.
D. Coping:
1. Install new metal coping as required for a permanent watertight installation.
2. All coping shall be manufactured with low profile standing seam metal to meet ES-1.
3. Shall be minimum 24-gauge prefinished Kynar installed in ten foot (10') sections
maximum.
4. Vertical fascia shall extend minimum two and one-half inches (2-1/2") or be minimum
one and one-half inches (1-1/2") below bottom of nailer, whichever is greater.
5. Secure metal flashings per specifications.
6. Lock seams and end joints.
7. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing
building.
8. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight
inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece.
9. Hem exposed edges three-fourths inch (3/4") minimum.
10. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint.
Surface sand before applying primers.
11. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing.
12. Provide and install continuous clip, minimum 22-gauge.
13. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions.
14. Color as selected from manufacturer's full range of colors including metallics.
E. Expansion Joint Field and at Wall:
1. Shall be as outlined by details, and be in full compliance with all provisions of SMACNA
and FM Global requirements for attachment, installation and recommendations.
2. Secure metal flashings per specifications.
3. Lock seams and end joints.
4. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing
building.
5. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight
inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece.
6. Hem exposed edges three-fourths inch (3/4") minimum.
7. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint.
Surface sand before applying primers.
8. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing.
9. Provide and install continuous clip around perimeter.
10. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions.
F. Counterflashing:
1. Install new metal counterflashing as required for a permanent watertight installation.
07600 - 6
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Saw cut brick mortar joint to receive friction fit reglet and removable counterflashing as
detailed in SMACNA Figure 4-3E.
G. Gutter and Downspout:
1. Fabrication:
a) Fabricate gutter and downspout of profile and size indicated.
b) Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
c) Fabricate with required connection pieces.
d) Fabricate section square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths
and free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
e) Hem exposed edges of metal.
f) Form and seal all metal joints; provide for expansion joints per SMACNA.
2. Installation:
a) Install collector head, downspout, and accessories.
b) Join lengths with seams pop riveted and sealed watertight. Flash and seal collector
head to downspouts and accessories.
c) Seal all metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact.
d) Collector Head: SMACNA style profile; submit detail for approval.
e) Downspouts: Rectangular profile. Seal all joints, four inches by six inches (4" x 6").
f) Support Brackets, Joint Fasteners: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
g) Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. Type recommended by fabricator.
h) Collector Head Support: Kynar. Color and Finish to match, as recommended by
SMACNA.
i) Downspout Supports: Straps, Kynar. Color and Finish to match.
H. Overflow Scupper, Collector Head and Downspout:
1. Fabrication:
a) Fabricate overflow scupper, collector head and downspout of profile and size
indicated, taking care that the roof drain leader fits properly into the back of the
collector head. Seal the pipe to the collector head for watertightness.
b) Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
c) Fabricate with required connection pieces.
d) Fabricate section square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths
and free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
e) Hem exposed edges of metal.
f) Form and seal all metal joints; provide for expansion joints per SMACNA.
2. Installation:
a) Install collector head, downspout, and accessories.
b) Join lengths with seams pop riveted and sealed watertight. Flash and seal collector
head to downspouts and accessories.
c) Seal all metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact.
d) Collector Head: SMACNA style profile; submit detail for approval.
e) Downspouts: Rectangular profile. Seal all joints, six inches by six inches (6" x 6").
f) Support Brackets, Joint Fasteners: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
g) Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. Type recommended by fabricator.
h) Collector Head Support: Kynar. Color and Finish to match, as recommended by
SMACNA.
i) Downspout Supports: Straps, Kynar. Color and Finish to match.
j). Color as selected from manufacturer's full range of colors including metallics.
07600 - 7
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
I. Pitch Pans:
1. Install pitch pans of 24-gauge, G-90 galvanized steel with a 25 Mil Elvaloy® Kee
membrane lamination according to NRCA standards, minimum of six inches by six
inches (6" x 6").
2. Pitch pans shall be fabricated to a minimum of six inches (6") above the finished roof
membrane. The top vertical edge of the thermoplastic clad metal must be folded over
to conceal the uncoated side of the metal inside the pitch pan. The pitch pan flange
must be a minimum of three and one half inches (3.5”) wide in contact with the
horizontal roof plain or field of roof membrane.
3. Approved caulking or water block shall be applied under the pitch pan flange prior to
securing the flange to the deck with approved fasteners a minimum of 4” on center.
4. All projections enclosed in pitch pans shall be cleaned in any manner suitable and
coated with a rust inhibitive coating as approved by the Owner/Project Consultant.
Coating shall be allowed to dry prior to pitch pan fill.
5. Base of pitch pans shall be filled with grout or cementitious binder to proper height and
allowed to cure.
6. Top finish fill shall be self-leveling, one-part urethane, with maximum fill to within three-
eighths inch (3/8") of top of pitch pan sides.
7. Strip the thermoplastic clad metal flange of the pitch pan to the field membrane with
one strip of flashing membrane. The flashing membrane must extend from the outer
edge of the pitch pan flange onto the field membrane a minimum of three inches (3")
and butt to the vertical sides of the pitch pan on all 4 sides. The flashing membrane
shall be hot air welded to the thermoplastic clad metal pitch pan and to the field
membrane. Hot air welds shall be a minimum of two inches (2”) wide.
8. Install preformed outside corners by hot air welding in place at all four (4) corners of the
pitch pan.
9. Apply seam sealer to the edges of the flashing membrane.
J. Bonnets/Hoods:
1. Fabricate and install above all pitch pans, where necessary, or reinstall as applicable,
metal bonnets over all pitch pans, NO EXCEPTIONS.
2. Bonnets/Hoods shall be manufactured with metal compatible with metal to which
bonnet is to be attached.
3. On beams and other steel, weld in place bonnets fabricated from one-fourth inch (1/4")
steel plate.
4. Draw band bonnets fabricated from 22-gauge galvanized steel may be used on circular
projections.
3.05 FINISH
A. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact
with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. Exposed surfaces to be provided with a
factory applied fluorocarbon Kynar finish meeting ASTM A 446 and AAMA specification 605.2
for high performance coating.
B. New 24-gauge hot-dipped galvanized metal shall be painted on all locations visible from the
ground with an industrial grade paint to match existing, or standard color selected by
Owner/Project Consultant. Galvanized metal surface must be properly prepared by removing
all oil, grease, and/or protective mill coatings by solvent cleaning surface in accordance with
SSPC-SP1, and according to paint manufacturer's recommendation, to ensure proper
adhesion of paint to metal.
END OF SECTION 07600
07600 - 8
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Fully Adhered Multi-Ply Roof System
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
07620 - 1
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Shop or field-formed sheet metal work for moisture protection.
B. New metal edge, counter flashing, sleeves, hoods, gutters, downspouts, coping and fascia trim.
C. Related accessories.
D. Extent of each type of flashing and sheet metal work is indicated on drawings and by provisions
of this Section.
E. Types of work specified in this Section include the following:
1. Metal counterflashing and base flashing (if any).
2. Exposed metal trim/fascia units.
3. Roof gutters and downspouts
4. Parapet copings
5. Flashing and reglets
6. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Summary of Work - Section 01010.
B. Exterior Joint Sealers - Section 07910.
1.03 REFERENCES:
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1. ASTM A525 - Steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized), general requirements.
2. ASTM A526 - Steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized), commercial quality.
3. ASTM A167 - Stainless Sheet Steel
4. ASTM B32 - Solder metal.
5. ASTM A446 - Steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized), structural quality.
6. ASTM D 2905-78 - Color consistency.
7. ASTM D 1737-62 - Formability.
8. ASTM D 714-56 - Accelerated test for humidity.
9. ASTM D 2247-68 - Accelerated test for humidity.
10. ASTM AFS O-F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste, and Liquid.
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual, Sixth Edition 2003.
C. National Coil Coaters Association.
1. Technical Bulletin # 11-12, Hardness.
2. Technical Bulletin # 11-5, Adhesion.
3. Technical Bulletin # 11-6, Reverse impact.
D. National Roofing Contractors Association.
1. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Fifth Edition 1993.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Products data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for each product in accordance with
Section 01300.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
2. Indicate layout, profiles, anchorages, joints, types and locations of fasteners, shapes, sizes,
expansion joints, special conditions, and installation procedure for each flashing condition.
3. Note critical dimensions, gauge, and finish of sheet metal for each flashing condition.
07620 - 2
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Include major counterflashings, trim/fascia units, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, expansion
joint systems, and related details. Layouts shall be at 1/4" scale, details at 3" scale. Submit
every detail required for the project, even if it is to be installed exactly as shown in design
drawings prepared by Consultant.
C. Product Data; Flashing, Sheet Metal, Accessories: Submit manufacturer's product data,
installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and
fabricated product.
D. Samples; Flashing, Sheet Metal, Accessories: Submit 8" square samples of specified sheet
materials to be exposed as finished surfaces.
1. Submit 12" long, completely finished units of specified factory-fabricated products exposed as
finished work.
1.05 WARRANTY:
A. Contractor's Warranty: Provide Owner a written warranty which shall warrant sheet metal work to
be free of leaks and defects in materials and workmanship for 2 years after date of final
acceptance. Refer to Sections 01740 and 01742.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty by manufacturer which shall warrant the sheet
metal finish and film integrity against color fading and chalking. Provide a twenty-year warranty on
the color finish for Kynar 500 prefinished metals.
1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Stack preformed metal to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation.
C. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
D. Store sheet metal using manufacturer approved methods.
1.07 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate with related Work and ensure timely installation of Work of this Section.
B. Coordinate with installation of new metal curbs and equipment to ensure properly installed sheet
metal components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIAL:
A. New metal copings, counterflashing, expansion joint covers, sleeves, hoods, gutters and
miscellaneous sheet metal accessories: G90 galvanized steel, minimum 24 gauge, prefinished
with one of the following 70% minimum polyvinylidene fluoride (PDVF) resin coatings. Owner to
select color.
1. Kynar 500; ELF ATOCHEM NORTH AMERICA, INC.
2. Hylar 5000; AUSIMONT USA, INC.
B. Counterflashing (non exposed), sleeves, hoods and miscellaneous galvanized accessories:
ASTM A526 commercial quality, coating designation G90, ASTM A525, minimum 24 gauge.
C. Citadel Architectural Products .024 Premium Textured Acrylic Urethane metal panels for copings
located on exterior metal panel surfaces.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Peterson Aluminum Corporation "Pac-Clad".
B. ColorKlad
C. Berridge
D. NCI Building Systems, Inc. (Formerly MBCI)
E. Fabral Metal Wall and Roof Systems
F. Met-Fab Architectural Roofing & Wall Systems
G. Citadel Architectural Products
H. Substitutions: Comply with requirements of Section 01640.
07620 - 3
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.03 FASTENERS:
A. Mechanical Fasteners:
1. Nails: Compatible with material fastened, flathead, wire, barbed, slating type. For washers
use lead or neoprene.
2. Screws: Self-tapping sheet metal type.
3. Exposed fasteners shall be self sealing or gasketed for a watertight installation. All exposed
fasteners shall be stainless steel.
4. Rivets: Stainless steel and cadmium plated material, type and size as recommended by
sheet metal manufacturer.
5. Concrete and Masonry Fasteners: Round-head stainless steel screw and neoprene washer
with lead expansion anchor, FS FF-S-325, Group IV, Type II. Rawlplug by The Rawlplug
Company.
B. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed,
non-corrosive, size and gauge required for performance.
2.04 RELATED MATERIAL:
A. Solder: ASTM B32, 50% tin, 50% lead.
B. Flux: Phosphoric acid type, manufacturers standard.
C. Sealant: Refer to Section 07910.
D. Solder: For use with stainless steel, provide 60-40 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with acidchloride
type flux, except use rosin flux over tinned surfaces.
E. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal, stainless steel, or, other noncorrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being
fastened.
F. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally
free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat.
G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.
H. Reglets: Metal units of the type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing indicated,
noncorrosive.
I. Continuous metal clips for edge metal, wall coping, and similar applications shall be a minimum of
18 gauge.
J. Rust Inhibitive Paint:
1. Unpainted surfaces shall be primed. All surfaces requiring extensive cleaning shall be
primed. Prepare galvanized metals as required to receive primer.
a. One coat Kelly Moore #1722 Kel Guard Galvanized Iron Primer, or an equal product
submitted to Consultant for prior approval.
2. All surfaces to be painted shall receive a minimum of two coats enamel.
a. Two coats Kelly-Moore #1700 Kel Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel, or an equal product
submitted to Consultant for prior approval.
3. Submit color samples to Owner for selection and approval.
4. Contractor's two-year warranty shall apply to all painted surfaces. Any paint which peels or
deteriorates within two years shall be properly repainted at Contractor's expense.
2.05 FABRICATION - GENERAL:
A. Fabricate work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and reviewed
Shop Drawings.
B. Shop fabricate all work to the greatest extent possible.
C. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance, with expansion provisions for
running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the Work.
Form Work to fit substrates.
D. Make angle bends and folds for interlocking metal with full regard for expansion and contraction
to avoid buckling or fullness in metal after installation.
07620 - 4
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. Form materials with straight lines, sharp angles, smooth curves and true levels. Avoid tool marks,
buckling and oil canning.
F. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edge to form hem.
1. Hem exposed edges with ½" hem.
G. Seal and rivet joints on parts that are to be permanently and rigidly assembled.
H. General Metal Fabrication: Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of
SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Comply
with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material.
1. Make adequate provision for metal expansion and contraction without buckling or splitting.
Use cleats and watertight slip joints and expansion joints.
2. When soldering, use flux and wash off surplus after soldering has been completed. Corners
shall be shop fabricated with mitered and soldered corners. Length of corner pieces shall not
be more than two feet beyond corner in either direction. This applies to coping metal, edge
metal, counterflashing (including counterflashing at mechanical units), etc.
a. Corners at Kynar 500 finish cannot be soldered. At these locations, run underlayment
membrane continuously at corner with no cuts, carefully folding membrane around corner
to remain continuous. Underlayment membrane shall be of sufficient width to extend
completely over top of wall and down wall on both sides the full length of the coping. Seal
all joints in Kynar 500 finished metal with sealant.
3. All exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel with neoprene washers.
I. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than
aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy
seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required.
J. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in work cannot be
used, or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges, not less than 1" deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
K. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper
performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA standards. Prime surfaces and install sealant in compliance with
Section 07910.
L. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates
by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
M. Aluminum Extrusion Units: Fabricate extruded aluminum running units with formed or extruded
aluminum joint covers, for installation behind main members where possible. Fabricate mitered
and welded corner units.
2.06 FABRICATED ITEMS:
A. Copings:
1. Kynar 500 prefinished (PDVF) 24 gauge G90 galvanized sheet formed in maximum 10'-0"
lengths. Fabrication shall be similar to SMACNA configuration of Figure 3-1, Page 3.3; and
figure 3-4A, Page 3.9.
2. Joints - Backer and cover plates, provide 1/4" gap above backer plate and between sections
covered by 6" wide cover plate formed to the profile of the coping cover plate. Plate is
embedded in silicone sealant and locked to coping drip edges.
3. Corners: Corners shall be formed, mitered, lapped, notched, and sealed as necessary to
provide a continuous system that is not more susceptible to leaks than straight sections.
4. Fabricate copings for parapets located above the prefinished metal wall panels from .024
prefinished metal panels obtained from same manufacturer.
B. Expansion Joint Covers:
1. Kynar 500 prefinished (PDVF) 22 gauge G90 galvanized sheet formed in maximum 10'-0"
lengths, fabrication shall be similar to SMACNA configuration of Figure 5-5A, Page 5.11;
terminations at vertical walls shall be similar to Figure 5-1, Page 5.3; intersections shall be
07620 - 5
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
similar to Figure 5-2, Page 5.5; transitions at roof edge shall be similar to Figure 5-3, Page
5.7.
2. Joints: Provide 1" standing seam lock.
3. Secure to continuous 22-gauge cleat/flashing secured to wood blocking through horizontal
and vertical flanges.
C. Counterflashing: 24-gauge Kynar 500 Prefinished G90 galvanized steel formed as indicated and
shall be similar to SMACNA configuration Figure 4-4D, Page 4.9.
D. Cleats: 1-1/4" continuous strips, same G90 galvanized material as adjacent sheet metal item and
of 18-gauge material as a minimum.
E. Roof Penetration Flashing: 24-gauge Kynar 500 Prefinished galvanized sheet steel, fabricated as
detailed and in accordance with SMACNA configuration of Figure 4-15, Page 4.31; Figure 4-16,
Page 4.32; Figure 4-7, Page 4.35.
F. Umbrella counterflashing: 24-gauge Kynar 500 Prefinished G90 galvanized sheet steel, two piece
construction and shall be SMACNA configuration of Figure 4-15C, Page 4.31.
1. Draw and assembly shall be stainless steel with all components fabricated of stainless steel.
G. Vent Stack Flashing: 4-pound lead, fabricate and install as detailed and as indicated by SMACNA
configuration of Figure 4-15B, Page 4.31.
H. Gutters: Prefinished (PDVF) 24 & 20-gauge G90 galvanized steel.
1. Gutters shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA, Chapter 1. Gutters
shall be detailed as butt type gutters similar to SMACNA configuration of Figure 1-7A, page
1.25. Profile configuration shall be similar to SMACNA configuration Style F of Figure 1.2,
Page 1.13.
2. Where rivets are required in gutter construction, provide at intervals of 1" on center.
3. Gutters shall be designed and installed with sufficient slope to downspouts to prevent
standing water.
4. Gutters shall be reinforced with 18-gauge x 1" wide spacers and hangers at 30" on center.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Verify that substrates are smooth and clean to extent needed for sheet metal work.
B. Verify that Reglets, nailers, cants, and blocking to receive sheet metal are installed and free of
concrete and soil.
C. Do not start sheet metal work until conditions are satisfactory.
D. Field verify all dimensions prior to fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
1. Install sheet metal with lines, rises, and angles sharp and true, and plane surfaces free from
objectionable, wave, warp or buckle. Exposed edges of sheet metal shall be folded back to
form a 1/4" hem on the concealed side from view. Finished work shall be free from water
retention and leakage under all weather conditions. The use of prefabricated corners or
transitions is required at all changes in direction, elevation, or plane and at all intersections.
Field joints shall be located not less than 12", nor more than three feet from actual corner.
2. Anchor units of work securely in place so as to prevent damage or distortion from wind or
buckling. Provide for thermal expansion of metal units, conceal fasteners where possible, and
set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints and seams which will
be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
3. Install fabricated sheet metal items in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual.
4. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive
substrates by coating concealed surfaces with zinc chromate at locations of contact, or with
07620 - 6
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator. Do not use
materials incompatible with roofing system.
B. Cleat: At exposed edges of copings, fascias, edge metal, cap flashings and where shown or
required, attach 18-gauge galvanized steel continuous cleat anchored at 8" o.c.
C. Flashings, Counterflashings:
1. Extend flanges into reglet and securely fasten.
2. Where nailing is required, nail at 6" o.c.
3. Overlap 4" on base flashing, lap ends at 3".
D. Roof Penetration Hood-Pipes: Install watertight hood at multiple pipes or conduit penetrating roof.
Fully solder connections and seams.
E. Surface mounted reglets: Set reglet in sealant and attach with drive pins at 6" o.c. Seal top of
reglet with sealant. Note: Surface mounted reglets are only allowed in special conditions upon
written acceptance and approval of Consultant.
F. Umbrella Counterflashing:
1. Install at all sleeve and penetration locations.
2. Fully solder connections and seams.
3. Set umbrella in sealant and tighten stainless steel draw bands.
4. Seal top of umbrella with sealant.
5. Umbrellas shall be fabricated with hemmed edges and extended as required for proper
counterflashing.
G. Installation Requirements: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation
instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual".
Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of
metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.
Install Work with laps, joints and seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
1. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious
or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene
underlayment.
2. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement compatible with roofing
system where required for waterproof performance.
3. Install reglets to receive counterflashing in manner and by methods indicated.
4. Install counterflashing in reglets, either by snap-in seal arrangement, or by wedging in place
for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastomeric sealant, as indicated and
depending on degree of sealant exposure.
5. Install elastic flashing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where required,
provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing. Locate cover
or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage from flashing. Seam adjacent flashing
sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
6. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6". Fabricate
seams at joints between units with minimum 3" overlap to form a continuous waterproof
system.
7. Install flange and umbrellas as detailed to all penetrations through roof surface in lieu of a
standard pitch pan detail. Pitch pans shall be allowed at those penetrations deemed by
Consultant to be impractical for umbrella installation. If and when pitch pans are required,
they shall be fabricated of completely soldered construction and filled with polyurethane as
specified. Top of polyurethane shall be installed to channel water to the roof and prevent
pitch pan from holding water. Pitch pan installation shall be by Consultant approval only.
H. When pitch pans are allowed, a sheet metal hood shall be fabricated and installed as
additional protection to pitch pan, completely covering pan.
I. Prime and embed roof flanges built into roof membranes in solid 1/8" bed of plastic cement.
Fasten 3" on center, in staggered pattern.
3.04 PAINTING:
07620 - 7
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
A. All existing galvanized or previously painted sheet metal items to remain shall be cleaned and
painted with primer and two coats of enamel. This shall include counterflashing and existing metal
left as a receiver for new counterflashing.
1. Paint gas piping located above roof level.
B. All items noted in drawings to be painted shall receive primer and two coats of enamel.
3.05 CLEANING:
A. Leave work clean and free of stains, scrap and debris.
B. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
C. Protection: Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection
of flashings and sheet metal work during construction, to ensure that Work will be without
damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering, at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
07900 - 1
Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This work comprises the sealing and caulking of joints.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of all proposed sealant to the Architect for review and color selection.
B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations,
and color availability and application instruction.
C. Construct one filed sample joint, 5 feet long, illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: No caulking shall be done at temperatures below 40 degrees
Fahrenheit.
1.4 GUARANTEE
A. Furnish to the Owner a written guarantee that the caulking shall remain watertight for a period of 2
years from the date of acceptance of the building. Joints, which prove defective by leaking, cracking,
melting or shrinking of the sealant shall be re-sealed without additional expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Silicone-Sanitary: (Designation S-GP). Permapol P.C. sealant or approved equal, Federal Spec.
Number TT-S-00230C Type II, Class A. Provide and install at window frames.
B. Urethane – Multi-component. (Designation U-MC) Tremco Dymeric 511, Sonolastic NP-2, Pecora
Dynatrol II or approved equal. ASTM C 920, Type M, grade NS, Class 25. Color as selected by
Architect.
C. Urethane - Single component (Designation U-SC); Tremco Dymonic, Sonneborn Sonolastic NP-1
or approved equal. ASTM C 920, Type S, grade NS, Class 25. Color as selected by Architect.
D. Silicone-Sanitary; (Designation S-S) 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant, Dow Corning or
approved equal.
E. Urethane – Traffic Bearing: (Designation U-TB) Type M, Grade P or NS, Sonneborn SL 2 Sealant or
approved equal.
F. Acrylic Latex: (Designation AL.); Percora AC-20 or approved equal. Non-sag; non staining; non-
bleeding. Color as selected by Architect.
G. Primer: Synthetic resin solution recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
07900 - 2
Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
H. Backing Material: Expanded, closed-cell neoprene, polyurethane or polyethylene rod stock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean out joints to be caulked. Remove loose mortar and other material completely by
compressed air or brushing. Joint surfaces shall be clean and dry.
1. Joints to be caulked shall be at least l/4 inch wide. At any points where the width of joint is
appreciably less, cut or grind out the joint to that width to assure an adequate volume of sealant
along the length of the joint.
2. Pack with backing material the voids and recesses around metal frames which are deeper than
the depth required for caulking. Leave the proper depth for the sealant.
3. In open joints and where detailed, install rod stock as backup for the caulking. Roll the material
into the joints to avoid stretching. The natural thickness of the rod stock shall be approximately
twice the thickness of the joint in which it is installed.
4. Elsewhere as may be required, apply a bond-breaker strip of polyethylene or masking tape
along the bottom of the joints.
5. Particular attention shall be paid to the preparation of the horizontal joints in concrete, which are
to be filled with sealant. Adjust joint depth to comply with sealant manufacturer's
recommendations by malleting down the joint filler or filling in with rod stock as may be required.
6. Where sealant is to be applied against smooth metal surfaces, wipe these surfaces clean with a
suitable ketone solvent immediately prior to caulking.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Priming: Prime porous joint surfaces, particularly concrete. Test the primer to be used to make
sure that it causes no undue staining or discoloring of the material on which it is applied.
B. Depth of Caulk: Generally, caulk joints to a depth no greater than the joint width, but never less
than l/4" deep. Follow the sealant manufacturer's recommendations where possible.
C. Caulking: Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Application shall be
by the method best suited to the job conditions.
1. Force the sealant into the joints with enough pressure to expel all air and provide a solid filling.
Correct any flowing or sagging before final inspection is made.
2. Where adjacent surfaces permit, use masking tape to obtain straight, even lines. Remove the
tape immediately after the joints have been sealed.
3. Fill joints flush with adjacent surfaces except where a recessed joint is specifically detailed. Tool
beads with a sled runner or similar tool, using clean water as a tooling agent, to insure firm, full
contact with joint faces.
07900 - 3
Sealants
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant and other soiling due to caulking operations. This Contractor
shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of replacing any material damaged or discolored
due to caulking or the cleaning of excess caulking materials.
3.4 CAULKING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior locations:
a. Wall joints:
1. Bordered on both sides by porous building material (concrete, stone, masonry,
exterior insulation and finish systems, etc.) Designation U-MC.
2. Bordered on both sides by non-porous building material (coated and uncoated
metals, anodized aluminum, porcelain tile and glass); Designation S-GP.
3. Bordered on one side by porous building material (concrete, stone, uncoated metals,
anodized aluminum, and glass); Designation U-MC
b. Perimeter of penetrations through walls: Designation U-MC
c. Expansion joints in ceilings, soffits, and overhead surfaces: Designation U-MC.
d. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough opening: Designation U-MC.
e. Control joints and perimeter of penetrations in ceiling soffits and overhead surfaces;
Designation U-MC.
f. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation U-MC.
g. Joints and perimeter of penetration in horizontal pedestrian and vehicle traffic surfaces:
Designation U-TB
B. Interior locations:
a. Wall and ceiling joints subject to movement: Designation U-MC.
b. Interior side of exterior openings: U-MC.
c. Floor joints: Designation U-TB
d. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough opening: Designation AL
e. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation AL.
f. Interior Sanitary joints: Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining floor, wall and ceiling
surfaces; and areas subject to frequent wet cleaning, including joints between walls and
floors, joints between back splashes and wall substrates: Designation S-S.
g. Thresholds: Set all thresholds in a full bed of caulk: Designation U-SC.
h. Metal Stud tracks: set all perimeter channel tracks in a full bed of caulk. Designation U-SC
END OF SECTION
Division Eight
Doors and Windows
08110- 1
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 08110
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements: Applicable provisions of the General Conditions and of Division 1, General
Requirements, govern all work specified in this section.
B. Submittals: Prior to the fabrication of any material covered under this Section, complete shop
drawings shall be furnished in four copies, blue line prints, with reference made to door
numbers and room numbers shown on the Architectural drawings. Fabrications shall not be
started until the Consultant has approved the submittal in writing.
C. Protection: Hollow metal doors shall arrive at the job site marked to agree with the approved
shop drawings. Store material under cover on wood runners or floors, and in positions
recommended by the manufacturer, always in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Doors:
1. Hollow metal non-labeled doors shall be flush, sized as shown on the drawings or 1-3/4 inches
thick, with no seams on faces of doors. Face sheets shall be 18 ga. cold rolled steel, reinforced full
height with steel channels or Z stiffeners. Core spaces between stiffeners shall be completely filled
with insulating and sound deadening material. The cores are to be surrounded by 18 ga. cold rolled
steel channels and the face sheets will be welded to the channels. All cracks at door edges will be
filled with a metal filler. Each door will be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, scale, etc. and given a
phosphatizing treatment to insure maximum paint adherence. All doors will be primed with one coat
of high quality rust resisting, gray metal primer.
2. Labeled metal doors shall be flush, sized as shown on the drawings 1 3/4 inches thick and meet
the requirements and carry the labels of the Underwriters ' Laboratories, Inc., as shown on the
drawings. The cores will be filled with incombustible insulation specifically manufactured for
fire-rated door applications. All labeled doors shall be factory cut and prepared to receive view
panels, finish hardware, etc. No job alterations of labeled doors will be allowed. All edges of the
door will be surrounded by an 18 ga. cold-rolled steel channel. The face sheets shall be 18
ga. electro-galvanized and bonderized steel sheets which will be securely attached to the cores or
stiffeners, and welded to the edge channels around the metal filler. There will be no exposed cracks
or seams either on the surface or the edges of the doors. All doors shall be painted with one coat of
high quality, rust resisting, gray metal primer. Labeled doors shall match non-labeled doors exactly
in appearance.
3. Door reinforcement for hardware, outlined in the finish hardware schedule shall be as
follows:
a. Hinge 10 gauge Minimum
b. Lock 14 gauge "
08110- 2
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
c. Closer 12 gauge "
d. Flush bolt 14 gauge "
e. Hold-open arm 12 gauge "
f. Pull plate & bar 16 gauge "
g. Panic devices 14 gauge "
4. Locate hardware on doors and frames as follows, unless specifically detailed otherwise:
a. Locks & Latches 38" from floor to centerline of knob.
b. Push Plates 45" from floor to centerline of plate.
c. Mulls 42" from floor to centerline of grip.
d. Mortise Deadlocks 60" from floor to centerline of cylinder.
e. Panic Hardware 38" from floor to centerline of cross bar.
f. Top Hinge 5" from frame head to top of hinge.
g. Bottom Hinge 10" from floor to bottom of hinge.
h. Intermediate Hinge Centered between top and bottom hinges.
5. Exterior hollow metal doors scheduled to be insulated shall be insulated by filling core
completely with urethane, fiberglass, or Styrofoam. Refer to Door Schedule for locations.
B. Door Frames
1. Fabricated doorframes of 16-gauge cold-rolled steel for interior, 14 gauge for exterior, in sizes
and profiles as shown on Drawings. Miter corners, weld and grind smooth unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
2. Prepare frames to receive three silencers at single door openings and two silencers at
openings with doors in pairs. Omit silencers at exterior doors.
3. Apply a shop coat of baked-on rust inhibiting primer.
4. Provide a removable spreader bar welded to the bottom of frames for rigidity during transit
handling.
5. Frames over 4'-0" wide for installation in masonry walls shall have an angle or channel stiffener,
not less than 12 ga. and not longer than the opening width, welded onto the head at the factory.
Such stiffeners shall not be used as lintels or load-carrying members.
6. Fabricate frames for large openings in knocked down sections for field assembly with butt
joints and internal reinforcing sleeves. Knocked down frame assemblies shall be trial assembled
in the shop.
7. Loose glazing stops shall be 20 ga. steel, butted at corner joints and fastened with oval head
countersunk screws.
C. Frame Anchors:
1. For each jamb in masonry walls, provide 3 or more 16 ga. adjustable jamb anchors of the T-strap
type spaced not more than 30" apart. Furnish yoke type Underwriters anchors for labeled door
openings only.
2. For each jamb in steel stud partitions, provide 4 or more 18 ga. jamb anchors designed for
08110- 3
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
this type of construction. Anchors shall be welded inside each jamb and wired or bolted to the
studs.
D. Frame Reinforcement
1. Hinge: 8 gauge
2. Lock: 14 gauge
3. Closer: 12 gauge
4. Hold Open Devices: 12 gauge
2.2 CLEARANCES
A. Edge clearances shall be provided as follows:
1. Between door and frame, at head and jambs - 1/8"
2. At door sills: where no threshold is used - 3/8" maximum
where threshold is used - 3/4" max. above finished floor
2.3 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protectant
ratings as determined and scheduled by the Architect. Such doors and frames shall be
constructed as tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing agency having a
factory inspection service.
B. If any door or frame specified by the Architect to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate
labeling because of its design, hardware or any other reason, the Architect shall be so
advised before fabricating work on that item is started.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fabrication
1. General: Steel doors and frames to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp
or buckle. Wherever practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly
identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper
assembly at project site. Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for
exposed screws and bolts. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortise and concealed finish
hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware
supplier. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface applied finish hardware may be done at project site. Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces
of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces.
B. Hanging Doors:
1. General: Install steel doors and frames in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's
data, and applicable Steel Door Institute Standards. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed,
aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is
completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
08110- 4
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Anchors: Provide floor and jamb anchors standard with manufacturer.
3. Grouting Frames: In masonry construction frames shall be filled completely with grout.
4. Fitting doors: Fit doors accurately within clearances specified in SDI-100.
5. Fire rated Assemblies: Install in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to perform the following:
1. Prior to installation all frames must be checked and corrected for size, swing, squareness,
alignment, twist and plumbness. Permissible installation tolerances shall not exceed the
following:
Squareness + 1/16": measured on a line, 90 degrees from one jamb, the upper corner
of the frame at the other jamb.
Alignment + 1/16": measured on jambs on a horizontal line parallel to the wall.
Twist + 1/16" measured at face corners of jambs on parallel lines perpendicular to the
plane of the wall.
Plumbness + 1/16" measured on the jamb at the floor.
Details opposite illustrate methods of measuring above specified tolerances.
2. Proper door clearances must be maintained in accordance with these specifications,
except for special conditions otherwise noted. Where necessary, metal hinge shims,
furnished by the General Contractor, are acceptable to maintain clearances.
3. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and
instructions.
END OF THIS SECTION
08330 - 1
Overhead Service Coiling Doors
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 08330
OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS
STORMTITE 620 SERIES SERVICE DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Overhead coiling service doors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing and framed opening.
B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Product Requirements for cylinder core and keys.
C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field applied finish.
D. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes: Conduit from electric circuit to door operator and from
door operator to control station.
E. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Power to disconnect.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
B.ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
C.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
D.NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Overhead coiling service doors:
1. Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 20 psf (958 Pa)
without damage to door or assembly components in conformance with ASTM E 330.
2. Operation: Design door assembly, including operator, to operate for not less than
20,000 cycles.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one
manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable
to manufacturer of primary components.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose
specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.
08330 - 2
Overhead Service Coiling Doors
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 14004 Fleet Services Facility
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Details of construction and fabrication.
4. Installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, anchoring
methods, required clearances, hardware, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent
construction.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6
inches (150 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit lubrication requirements and frequency, and
periodic adjustments required.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a
minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of
this section with minimum three years and approved by manufacturer.
C.Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete
and dry.
C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid
damage to installed materials.
08330 - 3
Overhead Service Coiling Doors
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 14004 Fleet Services Facility
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited door and operator system, except the counterbalance
spring and finish, to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 3 years or 20,000
cycles, whichever occurs first.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200,
Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax:
(972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: info@overheaddoor.com.
B.
C. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.2 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS
A. Heavy Duty Industrial Doors: Overhead Door Corporation, 620 Series Stormtite Service
Doors.
1. Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be
attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement.
a. Flat profile type F-265 for doors between 18 feet 4 inches (5.59 m) and 25 feet
4 inches (7.72 m) wide, fabricated of:
1) 20 gauge galvanized steel.
2. Finish:
1) Powder coat: PowderGuard
(a) PowderGuard Premium: Weather resistant polyester powder coat
color as selected by the Architect.
(b) PowderGuard Weathered Finish: Industrial textured powder coat
provides a thicker, more scratch resistant coat. Applied to entire
door system including slats, guides, bottom bar and head plate.
2) Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-
inhibitive primer.
3. Weatherseals:
a. Vinyl bottom seal, exterior guide and internal hood seals.
b. Interior guide weatherseal.
c. Lintel weatherseal.
4. Bottom Bar:
a. Extruded aluminum for doors up to 15 feet 4 inches (4.67 m) wide.
5. Guides: Three structural steel angles.
a. Finish: PowderGuard Weathered finish with iron/black powder.
6. Brackets:
a. Hot rolled prime painted steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood.
7. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel,
supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03 inch per foot of span.
Counterbalance is adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel.
8. Hood: Provide with internal hood baffle weatherseal.
a. 24 gauge galvanized steel with intermediate supports as required.
9. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by
manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1
foot per second.
08330 - 4
Overhead Service Coiling Doors
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 14004 Fleet Services Facility
a. Sensing Edge Protection:
1) Electric sensing edge.
b. Operator Controls:
1) Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons.
2) Controls for interior location.
3) Controls surface mounted.
c. Special Operation:
1) Vehicle detector operation.
2) Photocell operation.
3) Explosion and dust ignition proof control wiring.
d. Motor Voltage: 115/230 single phase, 60 Hz.
10. Windload Design:
a. Standard windload shall be 20 PSF.
11. Locking:
a. Interior slide bolt lock for electric operation with interlock switch.
12. Wall Mounting Condition:
a. Face-of-wall mounting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to
be performed.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building
framing without distortion or stress.
C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to
structural members only.
D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 16150. Complete wiring from
disconnect to unit components.
F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in
Section 07900.
08330 - 5
Overhead Service Coiling Doors
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 14004 Fleet Services Facility
G. Install perimeter trim and closures.
H. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Test for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without
binding or distortion.
B. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Remove labels and visible markings.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
END OF SECTION
08710- 1
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects 651 Mayhill Road
NMA 18016 Issued for Bidding and Construction November 19, 2018
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents:
1. Provisions established within General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract,
Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this
Section.
2. Section 08410 Aluminum Storefronts; coordinate finish hardware.
B. Section Includes: Finish hardware for hollow steel, wood, and aluminum doors .
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any
internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B. Owner furnished Access Control System; coordinate installation of rough-in and preparation of
electrical devices and hardware for Owner installed ACS.
C. Owner will furnish final key cores and final keying.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum 3 years’
experience.
C. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 2 years’
experience, with AHC designation.
D. Hardware Installer: Employ a qualified carpentry person to perform the work of this Section.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable building code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101, NFPA 80, and NFPA 252.
C. Comply with provisions of ANSI A117.1 and Texas Accessibility Standards to accommodate
handicapped persons.
D. Provide hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for fire rated assemblies of types
which comply with requirements of door and frame labels.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
C. Provide product data on specified hardware.
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01340.
E. Submit manufacturer's certification that fire rated hardware meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01780.
B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their key code.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01780.
08710- 2
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects 651 Mayhill Road
NMA 18016 Issued for Bidding and Construction November 19, 2018
B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related
to preventative maintenance.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match
hardware schedule.
C. Deliver permanent keys to Owner direct from hardware supplier.
D. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310.
B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of
internal reinforcement for door hardware.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide 2 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780.
1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Hardware shall be complete with all necessary screws, bolts, anchors or other fastenings for
proper application of suitable size and type, and match hardware as to materials and finish.
B. Not all items listed are required for this project. Coordinate with schedule for specific
requirements.
2.2 HINGES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Hager Hinge Co., St. Louis, MO.
2. McKinney, Scranton, PA.
3. Stanley Hardware Division of The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT.
B. Butt Hinges:
1. Comply with ANSI A156.1 and A156.7.
2. Five knuckle designs with square corners.
3. Full mortise type.
4. Flat button tip and matching plug.
5. Non-removable pins for out-swinging exterior doors and for interior reverse bevel doors
equipped with locking device; safety stud also acceptable. Non-rising pin for other doors.
6. Non-ferrous construction at locations exposed to exterior atmosphere.
7. Heavy weight for doors 3’-4" width and over and for fire rated doors over 8’-0" height.
Standard weight at other doors.
8. Anti-friction or ball bearing type for doors equipped with closers.
9. Anti-friction or ball bearing type for doors (3’-0") width and over which are not equipped with
closers.
10. Plain bearing type for doors less than 3’-0" width which are not equipped with closers.
D. Minimum Number Hinges, Butt style:
1. Doors 5’-0" or less in height: One pair.
2. Doors over 5’-0" and not over 7’-6": 1-1/2 pair.
3. Doors over 7’-6": One for each additional 2’-6" height or fraction thereof.
4. Dutch doors: 2 pair.
E. Minimum Size and Gage:
08710- 3
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects 651 Mayhill Road
NMA 18016 Issued for Bidding and Construction November 19, 2018
1. Doors 3’-0" width or less: 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.134 gage
2. Doors over 3’-0" up to 3’-4": 5 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.146 gage).
3. Doors over 3’-4": 5 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.190 gage.
4. Fire rated doors over 8’-0" height: Sized as indicated above, except not less than 0.180
gage.
5. Doors scheduled for spring hinges: 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.134 gage).
2.3 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES
1. Hager Roton or approved equal.
2. 780 Heavy Duty Series
3. Thrust bearings along hinge length on 2-9/16” centers.
4. Staggered screw holes.
2.4 CYLINDERS and PERMANENT CORES
A. Provide cylinders for locksets, deadlocks, exit devices, and other control and locking devices
indicated in Hardware Sets.
B. Furnish permanent cores keyed to factory-registered extension of Owners existing Best series
interchangeable core cylinder system.
C. Cores shall be Solid brass construction to provide high quality and long cylinder life.
D. Removable Core: 7 pin tumbler interchangeable core design removable by a control key.
1. Brass cylinder body having a head cap of brass, bronze or stainless steel
finished to match locking trim.
2. Equip cylinders with appropriate rings.
3. Equip with proper tail piece for mortise and or rim cylinders.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Best Access Systems.
No Substitutions
F. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
G. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim
ring.
H. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
I. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush
and be free spinning with matching finishes.
J. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.
K. Equip cylinders with appropriate rings.
L. Finish cylinders and rings to match trim.
2.5 KEYS AND KEYING
A. Consult with Owner’s authorized representative and prepare detailed keying schedule
accordingly.
B. Keying:
1. Provide Best interchangeable core cylinders designed so that cores can
quickly and easily be changed by non-technical personnel by using a special
control key.
C. Construction Keying:
1. Furnish exterior door lock sets with keyed alike removable
construction core cylinders for use during construction.
2. Restrict distribution of construction keys. Maintain record of persons who
have received keys and deliver copies of record to Contracting Officer
upon request.
3. Provide permanent cores to owner prior to substantial completion.
4. Owner shall store them securely until needed. At substantial completion and at
08710- 4
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
Contracting Officer direction, remove construction cores and replace with
permanent cores in presence of Owner.
5. Provide keys to Owner and return construction cores to manufacturer.
D. Permanent Keying: Master locks and cylinders are to match the Best Key System as
instructed by owner.
E. Provide keys of Nickel Silver Material in Following Quantities:
1. Grandmaster-keys (MGK): Six (6)
2. Master keys (MK - each set): Six (6)
3. Change-keys (per lock): Two (2)
4. Removable Core Control Keys: Six (6)
5. Construction Master keys: Ten (10)
6. Construction Control Keys Two (2)
F. Identification and Control:
1. Stamp all keys with do not duplicate, or as otherwise instructed by owner.
G. Furnish visual control system; coordinate provisions with Owner. Stamp or emboss keys with
identification code.
H. Deliver construction master keys to Project site. Forward other keys directly from
manufacturer to Owner. Ship master keys, and grandmaster-keys via prepaid registered
mail. Ship change keys via prepaid freight.
2.6 LOCKING AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Basis of Design: products specified are manufactured by Best Corporation.
1. Yale Security, ASSA ABLOY, Lenoir City, TN.
2. Corbin Russwin, ASSA ABLOY, Berlin, CT.
3. Sargent, ASSA ABLOY, New Haven, CT.
4. Schlage, Ingersol-Rand, Indianapolis, IN.
5. Best Access Systems, Indianapolis, IN.
B. Mortise Locksets:
1. Best 40H Series with lever and rose, 7 pin.
2. ANSI A156.13, Grade 1.
3. Functions:
a. Entrance
4. Acceptable Products for cast or forged Lever with Rose Trim:
a. Yale 8800FL Series x PBR Lever.
b. Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series x PSA Lever.
c. Sargent 8200 Series x LNP Lever.
d. Schlage L9000 Series x 17A Lever.
e. Best 40H Series x 14H Lever.
5. Features:
a. Backset: 2-3/4 inches.
b. Faceplate: 8 by 1-1/4 inches, adjustable from flat to bevel of 1/8 inch in 2
inches, finished to match trim on hinge side of door.
c. Latch Bolt: Two-piece anti-friction, 3/4 inch throw.
d. Strike: ANSI standard 4-7/8 inch height, 1-1/4 inch curved lip.
e. Provide strikes with proper lip length to protect trim of the frame, but not to
project more than 1/8 inch (3.2) beyond frame trim or the inactive leaf of a
pair of doors.
f. Finish to match trim on hinge side of door
08710- 5
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Cylindrical Locksets and Latchsets:
1. ANSI A156.13, Grade 1.
2. 7 pin cylinder core to match Owners standard.
3. Functions
a. Entrance
b. Classroom
c. Privacy
d. Passage
4. Acceptable Products:
a. Best 93K series with 16D lever and rose.
b. Yale 5400 LN Series 4000 Grade 1 Monroe trim levers
c. Schlage ND Series with Athens lever and rose.
d. Corbin Russwin CL3300 series with Armstrong lever
e. Sargent 10 Line series with B lever trim.
D. Deadbolts:
1.Best T Series Deadbolts – or equal.
2.Backset: 2 3/4 inches
3.Cylinders: ANSI A156.36-2010 Auxiliary Locks, Grade 1
4.Deadbolt: 1” throw, 5/8” x 7/8” solid stainless-steel bolt.
E. Standard: Comply with ANSI A156.2, Series 1000, Grade 1.
1. Backset: 2-3/4 inches.
2. Faceplate: 8 by 1-1/4 inches, adjustable from flat to bevel of 1/8 inch in 2 inches,
finished to match trim on hinge side of door.
3. Latch bolt: Two-piece anti-friction, 3/4-inch throw.
4. Dead bolt: 1-inch throw.
5. Strike:
a. ANSI standard 4-7/8-inch height, 1-1/4 inch curved lip.
b. Equip with wrought or plastic box.
c. Finish to match trim on hinge side of door.
2.7 ELECTRIC STRIKES
Coordinate installation with HM frame and electrical rough-in.
A. At rim type exit devices: HES 9600
B. At non-fire rated cylindrical and mortise locksets: HES 8000
C. At fire rated cylindrical and mortise locksets: HES 8300
2.8 SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. LCN Closers, Princeton, IL.
2. Norton Door Controls, Charlotte, NC.
3. Sargent, New Haven, CT.
4. No other substitutions allowed.
B. Acceptable Products:
1. LCN 4040 Series.
2. Sargent 350
3. Norton 8500
C. Standard: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.
D. Required Features:
1. Manufacturer’s standard cast iron or cast aluminum construction.
2. Heavy duty, double lever arm type.
08710- 6
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Regular or parallel arm mounting.
4. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring, fully hydraulic.
5. Closing speed and latching speed controlled by independently operated valves.
6. Adjustable spring power allowing adjustment up to 50% in field to suit individual door
conditions.
7. Adjustable backcheck for interior and exterior units.
8. Maximum operating force of 8.5 pounds for exterior doors, 5 pounds for interior
doors, and 15 pounds for label doors.
9. Size as recommended by manufacturer for door size and weight.
10. Hold open and deadstop features where indicated in Hardware Sets.
E. Accessories:
1. Manufacturer’s standard full-size metal or non-metallic cover.
2. Furnish with necessary arms, tracks, brackets, plates, shoes, and other accessories
to suit door and frame conditions.
3. Finish accessories to match cover.
F. Mounting: Room side of door. Also refer to hardware locations.
2.9 EXIT DEVICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Von Duprin, Inc., Indianapolis, IN.
B. Acceptable Products:
1. Von Duprin 99 Series rim device at single doors and surface mounted vertical rod at
pair of doors, touch bar design with 99L key locks and #07 levers as indicated in
Hardware Sets.
2. Stanley 200 Series Heavy Duty rim type.
3. Approved equal.
C. Standards:
1. Comply with ANSI A156.3, Grade 1.
2. Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc. listed for "Accident Equipment List - Panic Hardware"
at exit assemblies.
3. Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc. listed for "Fire Exit Hardware" at labeled assemblies.
D. Mullion Finish: Factory paint. Color as selected by Architect.
2.10 DOOR STOPS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corp., Reading, PA.
2. Brookline Industries, Inc., Chicago, IL.
3. Builder’s Brass Works Corp., Los Angeles, CA.
4. Glynn-Johnson, Chicago., IL.
5. Hiawatha, Inc., Bloomington, MN.
6. H.B. Ives, Wallingford, CT.
7. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co., Hawthorne, CA.
8. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood, PA.
9. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc., (Trimco), Los Angeles, CA.
B. Provide door stops at each door leaf, except not required at doors equipped with overhead
stops/holders, or doors equipped with closers having dead-stop features whether
scheduled or not.
C. Door stops consist of stops to prevent doors from striking building components or
equipment.
D. Floor Stops:
1. Dome type.
a. Use only at storage, janitor, mechanical equipment, and electrical rooms and
other locations indicated in Hardware Sets.
08710- 7
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
b. Equip with appropriate riser where scheduled for areas indicated to receive carpet
or thresholds.
c. Acceptable Product: Trimco #1212.
2. Heavy Duty type:
a. Use at HM doors and other locations indicated in Hardware Sets.
b. Heavy duty, high impact
c. Acceptable Product: Rockwood 463
E. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops
and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide,
arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of
heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for
proper operation and function.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
2.11 ELECTRONIC DOOR CONTROLS
A. Electromagnetic Hold Open Devices:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Dorma Door Controls Inc., Reamstown, PA.
b. Rixson-Firemark, Franklin Park, IL.
c. Yale Security Inc., Charlotte, NC.
2. Operation: Fail-safe.
3. Voltage: 24 volts DC.
4. Acceptable products:
a. Single Door, head mounted, Dorma EML 1000.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Manufacturing Corp, Reading, PA.
2. Brookline Industries, Inc., Chicago, IL.
3. Builder’s Brass Works Corp., Los Angeles, CA.
4. Door Controls International, Ann Arbor, MI.
5. Glynn-Johnson, Chicago, IL.
6. Hiawatha, Inc., Bloomington, MN.
7. H.B. Ives, Wallingford, CT.
8. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co., Hawthorne, CA.
9. Rixson-Firemark, Franklin Park, IL.
10. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood, PA.
11. Stanley Hardware Division of The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT.
12. Trego Industries, Inc., Red Oak, TX.
13. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. (Trimco), Los Angeles, CA.
B. Flush Bolts:
1. Manual design equivalent to Ives 458-1/2 at non-labeled metal or wood doors.
2. Manual design equivalent to Ives 358 at labeled wood doors.
3. Manual design equivalent to Ives 458 at labeled metal doors.
4. Equip with extension bolts of lengths to locate operating mechanism at 12 inches
above floor for bottom unit and not over 72 inches above floor for top unit.
5. Equip bottom bolts with dust proof strike equivalent to Ives 489. Provide Ives 487
plate where floor mounted; plate not required at thresholds.
C. Push Plates:
08710- 8
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Rockwood RM1030 H “PUSH” 4” X 22” US 32D
D. Pull Plates:
1. Rockwood RM 3100 Door Pull. 1” diameter, 22” overall length, 16” center to center;
US32D finish.
E. Coordinators:
1. Provide aluminum filler bar, prime painted; field paint to match door frame.
2. Acceptable Product: Glynn-Johnson COR Series, Model No. COR-FB-BX with FB
Series filler.
F. Silencers:
1. Type: Preformed neoprene or rubber.
2. Location and quantities:
a. Pairs of doors: Two at header.
b. Single doors: Three at strike jamb.
c. Weatherstripped doors: Not required.
d. Smoke sealed doors: Not required.
3. Acceptable Product: Ives 20.
2.13 WEATHERSTRIPPING, SEALS AND THRESHOLDS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. A. J. May Corp., Houston, TX.
2. National Guard Products, Inc., Memphis, TN.
3. Pemko Inc., Ventura, CA.
4. Reese Enterprises, Inc. Rosemount, MN.
5. Ultra Industries, Commerce, CA.
6. Zero International, Inc. Bronx, NY.
B. Smoke Seals:
1. Type: UL rated, surface applied, self-adhesive, polypropylene or silicone rubber
strips.
2. Color: Black.
3. Acceptable product: Pemko S88 Siliconseal.
C. Astragals
1. Type: Steel, adjustable, surface mounted; push side.
2. Acceptable Product: Pemko 351 Series.
D. Thresholds:
1. Type: Extruded aluminum.
2. Size: Refer to Door Schedule.
3. Acceptable Product: NGP 890 with vinyl bumper.
E. Weatherstripping:
1. Type: Extruded aluminum with neoprene bulb.
2. Acceptable product: NGP 131NSA.
F. Sweep Strips:
1. Type: Extruded aluminum with neoprene seal.
2. Acceptable Product: NGP 100VA.
2.14 FINISHES
A. Except where indicated otherwise in Hardware Sets, comply with following:
B. Typically: 626 Brushed Chrome, 630 stainless steel.
C. Surface Mounted Closers: Spray-painted to match other hardware.
D. Special care is to be taken to make uniform the finish of all various manufactured items.
08710- 9
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. Extruded aluminum products, except for thresholds and specified gasketing, are not
acceptable.
2.15 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Key Control Systems, Inc., Bechtelsville, PA.
2. Lund Equipment Co., Inc., Bath, OH.
3. Telkee, Inc., Glen Riddle, PA.
B. Cabinet: Surface mounted hinged panel type cabinet manufactured from cold-rolled furniture
steel, electro-welded construction, with manufacturer’s standard baked enamel finish. Equip
with pin tumbler locking mechanism. Sized to contain indexed keys for Project, plus 50
percent expansion.
C. Key Control System: Dual tag indexed system complete with numbered labels and numbered
tags, permanent key tags, working key tags, key loan and receipt system, three way cross
index system, key gathering envelopes, and instruction manual.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by
the manufacturer.
B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI,
ANSI/NFPA 80, BHMA and DHI.
E. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
F. Conform to ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for the handicapped.
G. All butts, locks, plates, strikes, etc., shall be neatly and accurately mortised flush, properly
placed and accurately aligned for smooth and quiet operation without sticking, binding,
hanging, or rattling. All doors shall be hung with equal clearance at jambs and heads. Adjust
all hardware properly and leave in smooth operating condition.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure correct operation and function.
B. Ensure weatherstripping and seals do not inhibit closing and positive latching of door.
C. Lubricate moving or operating components as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use
graphite type lubrication if none other is recommended.
D. Replace defective materials or units, which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
Reinstall items found improperly installed.
E. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, readjust and re-lubricate hardware items as
necessary.
08710- 10
Door Hardware
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.4 SCHEDULE
Group #1: Door #’s: 125.1, 125.8, 125.9, 125.16 (3-0x7-0x1 3/4 HM Door x HM Frame)
Each door to have:
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Exit Device – Rim type
1 Rim Cylinder
1 Closer
1 Kick plate 10”x2” LWD
1 Door Stop
1 Threshold
1 Door Bottom
1 Weatherstrip
Group #2: Door #’s 123.1 (4-0x7-0x1 3/4 HM Door x HM Frame)
Each door to have:
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Mortise Lockset-Classroom Function
1 Kick plate
1 Door Stop or Wall Bumper (as required)
3 Silencers
Group #3: Door #’s 127.1 (3-0x7-0x1 3/4 HM Door x HM Frame)
Each door to have:
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Mortise Lockset-Classroom Function
1 Kick plate
1 Door Stop or Wall Bumper (as required)
3 Silencers
Group #4: Door #’s 123.1, 125.2, 125.3, 125.4, 125.5, 125.6, 125.7, 125.10, 125.11, 125.12, 125.13,
125.14, 125.15 (Overhead Doors)
Each door to have: No additional hardware required.
END OF SECTION
Division Nine
Finishes
09110- 1
Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 09110
NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 General
Requirements and Drawings are applicable to this Section.
B. Section Includes, but is not limited to:
1. Metal studs and furring.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
2. Section 09252 - Gypsum Board
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A635 - Standard Specification for Sheet Steel.
2. C754 - Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-
Attached Gypsum Board.
B. Association References:
1. Gypsum Association GA 216, "Recommended Specifications for the Application and
Finishing of Gypsum Board"
2. Comply with "Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" published by the Metal
Lath/Steel Framing Association.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: Fabricate and install systems as indicated but not less than that required
to comply with ASTM C754 under the following conditions:
1. Gypsum board partitions:
a. Standard systems: Maximum deflection of 11240 of partition height.
b. Systems to receive water resistant gypsum board or backer board: Maximum
deflection of 1/360 of partition height.
2. Interior suspended ceilings and soffits: Maximum deflection of 1/360 of distance between
supports.
3. Exterior soffits: Withstand minimum positive and negative pressure of 20 psf with
maximum deflection of 1/360 of distance between supports.
4. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where fire resistance classifications are indicated, provide
materials and application procedures identical to those listed by UL or tested according to
ASTM E119 for type of construction shown.
5. Acoustical Ratings: Where sound ratings are indicated, provide materials and application
procedures identical to those tested by manufacturer to achieve Sound Transmission
Class (STC) scheduled or indicated in accordance with ASTM E90.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data sheets on the following materials. Data sheets shall be
marked to indicate the product and sizes used.
1. Metal Framing and Furring Materials
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
09110- 2
Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
A. Qualifications:
1. Single Source Responsibility:
a. Obtain metal framing and furring materials from a single manufacturer.
B. Reference Standards:
1. Applicable requirements of ASTM C754 for installation of steel framing.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of Section 01660 - Storage and Handling Requirements.
B. Acceptance at Site
1. Deliver material to site promptly without undue exposure to weather.
2. Deliver in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand,
type and grade.
C. Storage and Protection
1. Protect materials from contamination, dampness, freezing, or overheating in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. .
2. Store above ground in dry, ventilated space.
3. Protect materials from soiling, rusting and damage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Project Environmental Requirements
1. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of material
manufacturers for environmental conditions before, during, and after installation.
2. Maintain illumination as required for proper installation of material.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Comply with requirements of Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated herein, provide products of one of the listed
manufacturers.
1. United States Gypsum Company (USG), 125 South Franklin, Chicago, IL.; (800) 874-4968;
www.usg.com.
2. National Gypsum Co., 2001 Rexford Rd., Charlotte, NC; (800) 628-4662; www.national-
gypsum.com.
3. Georgia Pacific Corp, 133 Peachtree St. N.E., Atlanta, GA; (800) 284-5347;www.gp.com.
4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630 - Product Substitution Procedures.
2.2 METAL FRAMING AND FURRING MATERIALS
A. Metal Studs and Runners:
1. Grade: ASTM C645, "C" shaped, provide 25 gage studs, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Corrosion protection: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525.
B. Studs:
1. Shape: CH or as standard with manufacturer.
2. Gage: 25 gage. Provide 20 gage for jamb and lintel components.
3. Depth: 2½” where shown on plans.
4. J runners: 24 gage, size as required for coordination with studs.
5. Provide 18 gage studs at walls to receive cement backer board with ceramic tile facing.
6. Provide 16 gage tracks for all studs.
7. At door and borrowed light frames, provide 3 - 25 gage minimum studs at each jamb.
Where wall is indicated or specified to be typically framed with 20 gage studs, provide 2 -
20 gage studs at each jamb.
09110- 3
Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Metal Furring Channels:
8. Hat-shaped: ASTM C645, 7/8 inch high, 25 gage, with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per
ASTM A525.
a. Provide 20 gage at furring to receive tile backer board.
9. Acceptable products: USG - DWC-25 (Ceramic Tile); USG - DWC-20 (Tile Backer Board).
10. Resilient: Manufacturer's standard type designed to reduce sound transmission; 1/2 inch
deep, 25 gage steel with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525.
a. Provide at locations where furring is on cmu walls in band, choir, and auditorium spaces
for sound control.
D. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide as required for complete installations.
E. All connections from light gauge studs to structural steel or metal deck shall be made using a
Verticlip (1-888-474-4876) using the following applications:
a. Exterior load bearing or non load bearing stud to beam, or floor: SLS or SLB
b. Exterior non load bearing stud to metal deck: SL or VTX.
c. Interior non load bearing stud to metal deck: SLD or VTD.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Tolerances:
1. Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8'-0" variation from plumb or level in exposed lines of surface.
C. Shim as required to comply with specified tolerances.
D. Install framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with ASTM C840 requirements that apply to
framing installation.
E. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies
to support fixtures, equipment, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings or similar
construction.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which Work is to be
installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with provisions of Section 01730 - Execution.
3.4 METAL SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Runners
1. Align and secure runner tracks accurately to partition layout at both floor and ceiling.
2. Provide fasteners appropriate to substrate construction as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Metal Studs
1. Position metal studs vertically in the runners, spaced as indicated.
2. Place studs so that flanges face in same direction.
3. Cut studs % inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
4. Align and plumb partition framing accurately.
5. Where partitions abut ceiling or deck construction or vertical structural elements,
provide slip or cushion type joint between partition and structure as recommended
by stud manufacturer to prevent transfer of structural loads or movements to
partitions, and to provide lateral support.
6. Provide horizontal bracing where necessary for lateral support.
09110- 4
Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
7. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or
glass fiber strips between studs and wall.
8. Coordination:
a. Space the studs at 16" o.c. for compliance with pertinent regulations, to give
proper support for the covering material, and as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Coordinate and provide required backing and other support for items to be
mounted on the finished covering.
c. Coordinate requirements for pipes and other items designed to be housed
within the partition and wall systems.
9. Secure each stud to top and bottom track with screw, except at deflection track.
10. For walls over 12 feet in height, install 1-1/2" channel stiffeners at 4 feet O.C.
vertically.
11. Metal studs at door jamb shall be triple and shall extend full height of wall, with
bridging above doors.
12. Provide continuous horizontal strap bracing both sides of studs or horizontal
blocking continuous between studs within 12" of deflection track.
C. Chase walls
1. Position steel studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other.
2. Cut cross-bracing from gypsum board 12 inches high by chase wall width.
C. Backer plates and blocking
1. Where handrails, grab bars, cabinets, wall-mounted door stops, or other wall-hung
items are attached to partitions, install backer plates or wood blocking accurately
positioned and firmly secured to metal studs, whether or not such backer plates or
blocking are indicated on Drawings.
2. Do not use wood blocking in fire-rated construction.
E. Leveling
1. By use of grout, or by other means approved by the Architect, provide continuous
solid bearing under floor runner members of steel stud partitions and walls.
2. Level in a manner to provide uniform interface with ceilings and other overhead
construction.
F. Hat Channel Furring
1. Attach hat-shaped furring channels either vertically or horizontally with fasteners
through alternate wing flanges (staggered).
2. Space furring channels at 24 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. Where
furring is indicated to receive backer board, water resistant gypsum board with
ceramic tile, or veneer plaster, space at 16 inches on center.
3. Install furring channels within 4 inches of floor line and ceiling line.
G. Sound Attenuating Partitions
1. At sound attenuating partitions, set floor runners in two 1/4" diameter continuous
beads of acoustical sealant complying with provisions of Section 07920 of these
Specifications.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Correct damage and defects which may telegraph through finished work.
B. Leave Work smooth and uniform.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Cleaning
1. Comply with requirements of Section 01740 - Cleaning.
09250- 1
Gypsum Drywall
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Scope: This work comprises constructing the gypsum drywall partitions, soffits and ceilings and
includes finishing the exposed face panel joints.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFICE ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 07210: Building Insulation
B. Section 09110: Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing
C. Section 09900: Painting
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Materials: Store drywall boards on the job site above ground on level flooring in weather
tight shelter and in manufacturer's original unopened wrappings. Drywall must remain dry at all times.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Board shall be the following used as indicated on the Drawings:
1.Moisture Resistant Gypsum wallboard, 48” wide x 5/8” thick, tapered and conforming to ASTM CX at all
wall locations.
B. Fasteners for securing wallboard shall be Type S screws made for fastening gypsum wallboard to metal
studs.
C. Metal corner beads, control joints, and other accessories shall be galvanized steel.
D. Metal studs shall be:
1. 25 gauge, galvanized steel in lengths and widths indicated on Drawings.
2. 20 gauge, galvanized steel in lengths and widths indicated on Drawings.
E. Furring Channels: Roll-formed from 25 ga. electro-galvanized steel with un-hemmed edges.
F. Screws: Drywall screws, Type S Bugle Head at standard studs, Type S-12 Bugle Head at exterior wall
studs.
G. Reinforcing Tape: Cross laminated, spark perforated fiber tape.
H. Joint Compound: Equal to USG All-purpose Joint Compound.
I. Trim Accessories: Provide corner beads, control joints and metal edges as recommended by the
drywall manufacturer, similar to USG #100 and #200 Series or approved equal.
J. Control Joints: standard V type, galvanized at all locations as indicated and typically detailed.
K. Joint Topping: Vinyl based all purpose finishing material.
09250- 2
Gypsum Drywall
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
L. Sound Attenuating Blankets: 3-1/2" thick, unfaced, minimum one lb./c.f. density, meeting the
following standards:
1. A.S.T.M. E84: 25/50 maximum.
2. A.S.T.M. C518: R-Value of 3.20 per inch of thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Gypsum Wallboard:
1. Apply gypsum wallboard to supports with long dimension parallel to supports, all abutting ends
and edges occurring over framing members flanges. Wallboard of the maximum practical
length shall be used to minimize end joints. All end joints shall be neatly fitted and staggered.
Joints on opposite sides of the partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs.
Wallboard shall be cut neatly to fit around all outlets and switch boxes.
2. Attach gypsum wallboard to supports w/screw type and spacing as required by manufacturer.
3. Joint compound and perforated tape shall be used on all face joints and internal angles formed
by the intersections of walls. Final application of joint compound will be sanded smooth.
Apply compound in three coats at screw holes, sanding between coats.
4. Provide metal trim, corner beads and expansion joints as shown on the drawings and/or as
required, in single lengths. At least two coats of joint compound shall be applied over beads
and each coat feathered out onto panel faces.
5. Utilize casing beads whenever boards abut dissimilar materials or end at other than interior
corners. Utilize control joints at locations indicated herein and also vertically from each upper
door frame corner to 6" above finished ceiling.
6. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 201, GA 216, GA-600 and U.S.G. “Gypsum
Construction handbook”.
7. Erect board vertically (except that board may be erected horizontally for curved walls) with
ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Stagger end joints to occur at different locations
on opposite sides of wall. Apply board to suspended ceilings with long dimension at right
angles to framing.
8. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over
firm bearing. Abut boards without forcing. Neatly fit ends and edges of boards and make cuts
and penetrations so that paper facing and gypsum core are not damaged.
9. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing and nails to wood
studding. Stagger fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges. Space
fasteners as recommended in U.S.G "Gypsum Construction Handbook".
10. Double Layer Applications: Use gypsum backing board for rust layer, placed perpendicular to
framing or furring members. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions.
Place second layer parallel to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.
11. Install cementitious backing board over stud framing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
09250- 3
Gypsum Drywall
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
12. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum ceiling
board with sealant.
13. Place control joints at changes in back-up material, at maximum 20'-0" o.c. in exterior walls,
and at maximum 30'- 0" o.c. at interior partitions. Provide at corners of all doors and borrowed
lite (window) openings. In ceilings, install at maximum 30'-0" o.c. each way. Provide fire
resistant protections behind control joints in fire rated assemblies. Verify final locations with
Architect prior to installation.
14. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where
gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
15. ON fire rated assemblies, seal all penetrations and make air-tight. Refer to Section 07840 for
firestopping requirements and materials.
16. Thicken partitions to eliminate wall surface jogs for the full length of the wall within a room to
conceal structural members, pipes, panels, specialty items, and accessories.
17. Coordinate door and other frame thicknesses as required.
18. Workmanship: The completed gypsum wallboard surfaces shall be smooth, level or plumb,
and acceptable to the finish material applicators. All joint treatment on exposed wallboard
shall be invisible after painting.
B. Partition
1. Erect partitions with studs aligned to be plumb and true. Anchor studs top and bottom with
runners, shoes and clips.
2. Attach floor runners to concrete slabs using shielded screws or poser driven fasteners. Locate
fasteners at corners, at runner ends, and spaced not to exceed 24" o.c.
3. Under drywall ceilings, attach metal runner to ceiling and position studs to engage the ceiling
runner. Elsewhere, extend studs above the ceiling and brace securely to the floor or roof
structure above with a continuous top runner and channel braces. For fire rated partitions and
where specifically detailed or noted, extend studs full height to the floor or roof structure above.
4. Space studs as shown and noted but not more than 16" o.c. Locate studs not more than 2" from
abutting partitions and partition corners. Anchor studs to runner flanges with positive screw
engagement where located at corners and at door frame jambs. Make necessary splices with an
8" nested lap and one screw in each flange.
5. At doorjambs of doorways up to 4'-0" wide, double the studs or reinforce with 20 ga. steel studs.
Fasten reinforcing studs to the anchor clips on each door frame with bolts or screws. Place
horizontally over each frame a cut-to-length section of runner track and attach the screws to the
adjacent vertical studs. Do not allow vertical joints at corners of doorjambs. Cut sheets to allow
for vertical joints to be located above center 1/3 of door frame.
6. In chase wall construction, set studs opposite each other with the flanges in the same direction
and cross brace between the rows of studs with three pieces of metal studs attached to each pair
of studs at the quarter points with drive screws.
C. JOINT TREATMENT
09250- 4
Gypsum Drywall
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and comers to produce surface ready to receive
finishes. The intent of this paragraph is to provide the highest quality of joint treatment work
consistent with commercial construction. Leave surfaces smooth, uniform, and free of fins,
depressions, ridges, cracks, and other imperfections.
2. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
3. Levels of Finish:
a. Comply with GA-214; italicized commentary is excluded; replace words "may" and
"should" with "shall."
b. Locations to receive Level 4 finish: Areas to be painted.
c. Locations to receive Level 3 finish: Areas to receive moisture resistant gypsum board
used as a tile substrate.
d. Locations to receive Level 2 finish: Fire-rated, sound-rated, and smoke-rated assemblies
in ceiling plenums and concealed areas.
e. Locations to receive Level I finish: Non-fire-rated, non-sound-rated, and non-smoke-
rated assemblies in ceiling plenums and concealed areas.
Level1:
No taping, finishing, or accessories required. All joints and interior angles shall have tape set in
joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are
acceptable.
Level2:
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint
knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads
and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess
joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of
the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound
and shall satisfy the conditions of this level.
Level 3:
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and shall be
immediately wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and
interior angles. One additional coat of joint compound shall be applied over all joints and interior
angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint
compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
Level 4:
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and shall be
immediately wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and
interior angles. Two separate coats of joint compound shall be applied over all flat joints and one
separate coat of joint compound shall be applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and
accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound
shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
Level 5:
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and shall be
immediately wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and
interior angles. Two separate coats of joint compound shall be applied over all flat joints and one
separate coat of joint compound shall be applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and
accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. A thin skim coat of
joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose and applied
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, applied to the entire surface. The surface
shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
09250- 5
Gypsum Drywall
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D. TOLERANCES
1. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
3.2 CLEANING
A. After installation, clean all dust and debris from work area.
END OF SECTION
09900- 1
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE:
A. This work comprises furnishing labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for and
reasonably incidental to on the job painting and finishing.
1. Paint and finish the following materials, fittings and equipment items which are exposed to
view in interior occupied areas and outside, with exceptions as noted below.
a. Iron, steel and galvanized metal
b. Wood
c. Hollow metal doors and frames
c. Gypsum wallboard and gypsum ceiling board.
d. Existing construction.
e. Mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, grilles and registers.
f. Electrical equipment, cable trays, conduit and panel boards.
2. No painting is required on the following:
a. Factory finished toilet compartments.
b. Architectural aluminum.
c. Acoustic board ceilings.
3. To avoid possible confusion, the Contractor shall examine the drawings for Mechanical and
Electrical work. It is understood that all materials installed throughout the building that require
painting shall be painted under this section of the specifications.
A. DEFINITION: For purposes of this painting specification, the following areas and spaces are not
considered finished, occupied areas and there will be no painting therein except as may be
specifically scheduled in the Paint Schedule that follows:
1. Mechanical chases.
2. Spaces above suspended ceilings.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit to the Architect two 12" x 12" samples of each paint color that is scheduled on
the Color Schedule prepared by the Architect. These samples may be on heavy cardboard or
similar material and shall be made with the actual mixed paints to be used on the job.
B. Paint Schedule: If painting materials other than those specified are proposed for use, the
Contractor shall submit to the Architect a complete schedule of materials to be substituted. This
schedule, in triplicate, shall list materials by manufacturer, brand name, and type for each surface
to be finished.
1.3. DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products
with 3 years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years experience.
C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label
09900- 2
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
analysis on label of containers.
1.5. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development
rating requirements for finishes.
B. Comply with applicable city, county, state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding
maximum V.O.C. (Volatile Organic Compound) content of all coatings.
1.6. TESTS
A. Provide periodic testing with Wet Film Thickness gage to verify that proper thickness of finish
coatings is being applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Paints:
1. Sherwin Williams
2. Kelly Moore
3 ICI Dulux
2.2. MATERIALS
A. Paint materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be first quality and the
product of a single manufacturer.
B. Spackling compound, fillers, thinners, and additives shall be compatible in use as recommended
by the manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces prior to applying paint. Verify that surface preparation is complete to the point
that finishes may be properly applied.
B. Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry. Application of finishes over rust, dirt, and foreign substances will
be cause for rejection.
3.2. PREPARATION OF SURFACES, GENERAL
A. Completely mask, remove, or otherwise adequately protect hardware, accessories, machined
surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with surfaces to be painted.
B. Thoroughly clean surfaces involved before applying paint or other surface treatment.
C. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
D. Patch nail holes and dimples with spackling compound. Flush spackling compound with
adjoining areas and sand to produce a smooth even surface.
3.3. PREPARATION OF WOOD SURFACES
A. Clean wood surfaces until they are free from dirt, oil and other foreign substances.
09900- 3
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Smooth finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the proper sand paper.
C. Sand wood between coats, where necessary, to produce a smooth finish unless specifically noted
to be left rough.
D. Apply one coat of sealer to knots and sap stains.
E. Putty nail holes after the prime coat. On stained work color the putty to match.
3.4. PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly with solvent until they are completely free from dirt, oil, grease and
other foreign substances. Allow to dry thoroughly before applying paint.
B. Treat new galvanized metal surfaces with a chemical etching compound as recommended by the
paint manufacturer. Remove excess etching solution and allow to dry completely before applying
first coat of paint.
C. Fill open joints, cracks and crevices on steel buck frames with metal putty and sand smooth before
painting.
3.5. PAINT APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions.
B. Paint grilles, registers, diffusers and other prefinished items where the factory prefinish is not in
accordance with the painting schedule and Architect's color selection.
C. Apply paint to grilles, registers, diffusers, steel joists, all exposed miscellaneous steel items by
spraying only.
D. Access doors or panels, electric panel board covers, exposed pipes, exposed ducts and raceways
shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces except where color coding is specified.
E. Apply paint and finish materials with brush or roller unless specified otherwise.
F. Primer, where indicated on the painting schedule, may be omitted where shop coat primer has
been applied. Touch-up metal surfaces with specified primer as required. Do not apply
subsequent coats of paint to bare metal.
G. Apply paint finishes evenly to a minimum dry mil thickness of 4 mils in the number of coats
specified unless noted otherwise in the painting schedule.
H. Apply two coats sealer to rebates and cutouts for glass and grilles and to tops and bottoms of
wood doors immediately after fitting.
I. Between coats, sand enamel finish on wood and metal surfaces to produce a smooth, even finish.
Use #220 grit sandpaper or finer.
J. Tint priming coats and undercoats to approximate shade of final coat to assure uniformity of color
in the finish. Touch up suction spots and "hot spots" before applying the last coat to produce an
even result in the finish coat.
K. Apply the finish coat on gypsum board and concrete masonry surfaces with rollers.
L. Name and instruction plates on mechanical and electrical equipment shall not be painted.
09900- 4
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
Protect by masking off before painting.
3.6. FIELD INSPECTION
A. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected and approved by the
Architect. Only inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the
number of coats applied.
B. Provide and use dry film thickness gauge as approved by the Architect to determine the dry film
thickness (DFT) of paint applied.
3.7. EXTRA STOCK
A. Upon completion of this work, provide one gallon of each type and color of paint used and one
quart of each color stain. Clearly label and tightly seal containers.
3.8. V.O.C. (VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND) COMPLIANCE
A. Products listed in following schedule and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be
formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C.
content. Utilize products that have been specially formulated to need such requirements.
3.9. PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Masonry walls, concrete masonry units, interior surfaces. (new construction)
1 coat - S.W. PM Block Filler B25 series
1 coat - S.W. Wall and Wood Primer B49 Series
1 coat - S.W. PM 200 Alkyd Egg Shell Enamel.
B. Concrete masonry units, interior surfaces. (wash bay)
1 coat - S.W. PM Heavy Duty Block Filler B42 series
1 coat - S.W. Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B73-300 Series
1 coat - S.W. Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B73-300 Series
C. Interior Metal: (New Construction)
1. Hollow Metal doors and frames:
1 coat - S.W. Kem Kromik (Spray) B50 series or S.W. Kromik Primer (Brush) E41 series
2 coats - S.W. PM 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
D. Exterior Metal:
Primer not required on items delivered on shop primed items.
1. Formed galvanized steel items such as roof hatches, flashings, and the like:
1 coat - S.W. Galvite Primer
2 coats - M. Latex B47 Series
2. Hollow metal door frames, hollow metal doors, and like items:
1 coat - S.W. Kromik Primer (Brush) E41 series (Bare Steel)
2 coats - S.W. Industrial Enamel B54 Series
3. Items of mechanical and electrical machinery and equipment which are not completely
factory finished.
1 coats - S.W. Industrial Enamel B54 Series
E. Precast Concrete:
09900- 5
Painting
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Precast concrete panels-exterior surfaces:
1 coat - Thorocoat textured coating. Medium texture.
2 coats - Thorosheen acrylic emulsion.
2. Precast concrete panels-interior surfaces:
1 coat - S-W Loxon Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W8300 (8 mils wet, 3.2 dry)
1 coat - S.W. Wall and Wood Primer B49 Series
1 coat - S.W. PM 200 Alkyd Egg Shell Enamel.
3. Existing concrete surfaces:
Clean all existing surfaces indicated for repainting with degreaser and high pressure wash to
remove all dirt and grime.
1 coat: S-W Loxon Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W8300 (8 mils wet, 3.2 dry)
1 coat - S.W. PM 200 Alkyd Egg Shell Enamel.
F. Dry Fallout Spray
Interior exposed structure, roof deck (including bar joists, steel beams, sprinkler pipe, electric
conduit, electric boxes, HVAC equipment, columns
a. Sherwin-Williams, Waterborne Acrylic Flat Dryfall B24W1.
b. Or equivalent with same performance and warranty. Sub-contractor takes responsibility for
product performance.
1 coat: Primer: Spot prime with rust inhibitive metal primer as required
1 coat Dryfall Paint
G. Colors shall be selected by Architect from full range of colors.
H. Application shall be made in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
09961 - 1
High Performance Coatings- Exterior Metal
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 09961
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of high-performance coating
systems to items and surfaces scheduled.
1. Includes painting of exposed exterior metal (steel handrails, H.M. doors, H.M. door
frames, exposed steel canopies, equipment platforms and elsewhere as indicated to be
painted and not galvanized).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
2. Gloss ranges used in this Section include the following:
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. High gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
5. Environments: The following terms are used in Part 2 of this Section to distinguish
between
different corrosive exposures:
6. "Moderate environments" are corrosive industrial atmospheres with intermittent exposure
to high humidity and condensation, occasional mold and mildew development, and
regular cleaning with strong chemicals. Environments with exposure to heavy
concentrations of chemical fumes and occasional splashing and spilling of chemical
products are moderate environments.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each coating system indicated. Include primers.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify. each
material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each material specified.
B. Certification by manufacturer that products supplied comply with requirements indicated that
limit the amount of VOCs in coating products.
C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers.
2. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
3. List of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for
location and application.
4. Submit samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture:
a.Ferrous and Nonferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-(100-mm-) square samples of
flat metal and two 8-inch-(200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and
finish.
09961 - 2
High Performance Coatings- Exterior Metal
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed high-
performance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for
Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of
coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate
finish of approved sample Submittals.
1. Architect will select surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each
type of coating and substrate.
a. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label with the following information:
1 . Name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags
and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying
coatings.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F(7 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1 . Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified
before proceeding with or continuing coating operation.
2. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are
enclosed and temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra high-performance coating materials from the same production run as materials
applied and in quantities described below. Package coating materials in unopened, factory-
sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal.(3.785 L) or 1 case, as
appropriate, of each material and color applied.
09961 - 3
High Performance Coatings- Exterior Metal
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated in the
coating system descriptions.
B. Manufacturers' Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the coating system
descriptions by shortened versions of their names shown in parenthesis:
1. System for Metal Substrates:
a. Carboline Company.
b. Tnemec Company, Inc.
2.2 COATINGS MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various high-performance
coatings specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not
acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. VOC Classification: Provide high-performance coating materials, including primers, undercoats,
and finish-coat materials, that have a VOC classification of 450 g/L or less.
2.3 COLORS
A. Colors: Custom colors as selected by Architect.
2.4 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEMS
A. Galvanized Metal: Provide the following finish systems over galvanized metal surfaces:
1. Moderate Environment (Semigloss Finish): One finish coat over an intermediate coat
and a primer.
a. Primer: Epoxy primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer,
minimum 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
1) Carboline: 888 2-Component Cross-Linked Epoxy.
2) Tnemec: Series 27 F. C. Typoxy Polyamide Epoxy.
b. Topcoat: Aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at spreading rate recommended
by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 5.0 mils(0.038 to 0.102
mm).
1) Carboline: Carboline 133 HB Aliphatic Polyurethane.
2) Tnemec: Series 1075 Endura-Shield.3-5
2. Moderate Environment (GlOSS Finish): One finish coat over an intermediate coat and a
primer.
a. Primer: Epoxy primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer,
minimum 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
1) Carboline: 888 2-Component Cross-Linked Epoxy.
2) Tnemec: Series 27 F. C. Typoxy Polyamide Epoxy.
b. Topcoat: Aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at spreading rate recommended
by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 5.0 mils(0.038 to 0.102
mm).
1) Carboline: Carboline 134 HB Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane.
2) Tnemec: Series 1074 Endura-Shield.
B. Carbon Steel (steel not galvanized): Provide the following finish systems over carbon steel
(steel not galvanized) metal surfaces:
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS - EXTERIOR
09961 - 4
High Performance Coatings- Exterior Metal
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1, Moderate Environment (Semigloss Finish): One finish coat over an intermediate coat
and a primer.
a. Primer: Epoxy primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer,
minimum 4.0 to 6.0 mils OFT.
1} Carboline: 893 2-Component Cross-Linked Epoxy.
2) Tnemec: Series 27 F. C. Typoxy Polyamide Epoxy.
b. Topcoat: Aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended
by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 5.0 mils(0.038 to
0.102
mm).
1) Carboline: Carboline 133 HB Aliphatic Polyurethane.
2} Tnemec: Series 1075 Endura-Shield.3-5
2. Moderate Environment (Gloss Finish): One finish coat over an intermediate coat and
a primer.
a. Primer: Epoxy primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer,
minimum 4.0 to 6.0 mils OFT.
1) Carboline: 893 2-Component Cross-Linked Epoxy.
2) Tnemec: Series 27 F. C. Typoxy Polyamide Epoxy.
b. Topcoat: Aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended
by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 5.0 mils(0.038 to
0.102
mm}.
1) Carboline: Carboline 134 HB Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane.
2) Tnemec: Series 1074 Endura-Shield.
C. Nonferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over nonferrous-metal surfaces.
1. Moderate Environment (High-Gloss Flnish): One finish coat over an intermediate
coat
and a primer.
a. Primer: Zinc-rich primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer
to achieve a dry film thickness of 3.0 mils.
1) Carboline: Carbo Zinc 11 HS.
2) Tnemec: Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
b. Intermediate Coat: Two-component, cross-linked epoxy applied at spreading
rate
recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 3 mils.
1) Carboline: Carboline 893.
2) Tnemec: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline.
c. Topcoat: Two-component acrylic aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of
2.0 mils.
1) Carboline: Carbothane 134 HS.
2) Tnemec: Series 1074 Endura-Shield.
2. Moderate Environment (Semigloss Finish): One finish coat over an intermediate coat
and a primer.
a. Primer: Epoxy primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer.
1) Carboline: Rustbond Penetrating Sealer SG.
09961 - 5
High Performance Coatings- Exterior Metal
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2) Tnemec: Series 27 F. C. Typoxy Polyamide Epoxy.
b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 3.0 to 5.0 mils (0.076 to 0.127
mm).
1) Carboline: 890 2-Component Epoxy.
2) Tnemec: Intermediate coat not required.
c. Topcoat: Aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended
by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 1.5 to 4.0 mils (0.038 to
0.102
mm).
1) Carboline: 133 HB Aliphatic Polyurethane.
2) Tnemec: Series 1075 Endura-Shield.
PART 3· EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. With Applicator present, examine substrates and conditions under which high-performance
coatings will be applied, for compliance with coating application requirements.
1.Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces to
receive coatings are thoroughly dry.
2.Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that
particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are provided
to
ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers.
1.If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following from
the primer Applicator before proceeding:
a.Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions.
b.Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials specified.
2.Notify Architect about anticipated problems before using the coatings specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to
be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
1.After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers
skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying high-performance coatings, clean substrates of substances that
could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.
1.Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and reprime
substrate.
2.Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not
been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC
recommendations.
09961 - 6
High Performance Coatings- Exterior Metal
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
a.Blast-clean steel surfaces as . recommended by coating manufacturer and
according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE NO.2.
b.Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash
coat before priming.
c.Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire brush, solvent clean, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.
3.Nonferrous-Metal Substrates: Clean nonferrous and galvanized surfaces according to
manufacturer's written instructions for the type of service, metal substrate, and
application required.
a.Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
4.Gypsum Board:
a.Apply [oint tape and compound to joints, fastener heads, dents and surface flaws
as specified in Section 09260. Sand smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Clean sanded areas of dust with clean damp rag.
D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1.Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2.Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if
necessary, strain coating material before using.
3.Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
E. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
the
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied.
2.Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.
3.Coating colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the coating system
descriptions.
4.Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.
5.The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, grilles, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
a.Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
b.Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged
items to match exposed surfaces.
B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1.The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application
method.
a.Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
09961 - 7
High Performance Coatings- Exterior Metal
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
b.Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer.
c.Where manufacturer's written instructions require sanding, sand between
applications to produce a smooth, even surface.
d.Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or
feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat does
not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
2.If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
edges, corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to ensure that
they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for material applied and of appropriate size
for the surface or item being coated.
a.Apply primers and first coats by brush unless manufacturer's written instructions
permit using roller or mechanical applicators.
b.Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film.
c.Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness,
or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks.
2.Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3.Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply
coating if permitted by
manufacturer's written instructions and governing regulations.
a.Use spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for material
and texture required.
b.Apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats.
c.Do not double back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two coats
in
one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer.
D.Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no
thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime coated by
others.
1.Recoat primed and sealed substrates if there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects caused
by
insufficient sealing.
2.Gypsum Board: Sand primer with 100 grit or finer sand paper. Remove dust from
sanding with clean wet rag.
F. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner
deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:
1.Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material
09961 - 8
High Performance Coatings- Exterior Metal
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
2.Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required
by Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Absorption.
c. Accelerated weathering.
d. Accelerated yellowness.
e. Color retention.
f. Alkali and mildew resistance.
g. Abrasion resistance.
h. Apparent reflectivity.
i. Washability.
j. Dry opacity.
k. Recoating.
I. Skinning.
3.Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials
being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces
coated with rejected materials. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove
rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with specified
materials, the two coatings are not compatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
1.After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent
finished surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating
operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
1.Provide 'Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing coating
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work.
2.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
END OF SECTION 09961
Division Eleven
Equipment
11001 - 1
Equipment Provided and Installed by Owner
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 11001
EQUIPMENT PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE:
The following equipment items shall be provided by the Owner under separate contract:
A.The Owner shall assume the responsibility for requiring all suppliers of Owner-furnished
items to be totally responsible for the delivery, unloading, handling, uncrating, and setting
into place without disrupting job progress or causing any delay due to labor relations.
Equipment shall be ready for connection assemblies as noted.
B.The Contractor shall advise the Owner of the proper scheduling and time to install all listed
equipment.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS:
The Owner shall furnish, where necessary, shop drawings and/or installation details and
instructions for the equipment furnished for full coordination. When shop drawings are required
they shall be provided as recommended in Section 01340 - Submittals of this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT:
A. Oil and Fluid System:
Equipment to be:
Provided by....................... OWNER
Installed by........................ OWNER
Connected by.................... OWNER
B. Bridge Crane:
Equipment to be:
Provided by....................... OWNER
Installed by........................ OWNER
Connected by.................... OWNER
C. Communication System:
Data
Telephone
Television Cable
Equipment to be:
Provided by....................... OWNER
Installed by........................ OWNER
Connected by.................... OWNER
Raceways by..................... Electrical Contractor
11001 - 2
Equipment Provided and Installed by Owner
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D.Security System:
Cameras
Equipment to be:
Provided by....................... OWNER
Installed by........................ OWNER
Connected by.................... OWNER
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 All rough-in and final electrical connections to all equipment shall be as follows, in accordance with
manufacturer's directions, and in accordance with applicable codes.
A.DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL:
1.Provides for all outlets, circuitry with proper current characteristics, panel and breaker
capacities as shown on drawings or specified under this work.
2.All final connections shall be made by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Division Fifteen
Mechanical
Division 15
Table of Contents
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
15075 Mechanical System Identification
15140 Hangers and Supports
15260 Piping Insulation
15290 Ductwork Insulation
15330 Automatic Fire Protection System
15410 Plumbing Piping Systems
15440 Plumbing Fixtures
15480 Domestic Water Heaters
15570 Gas-Fired Makeup Air Units
15580 Gas Fired Heaters
15651 Refrigerant Piping
15675 Ductless AC Split Systems
15760 Electric Heaters
15830 Power Ventilators
15850 Air Inlet and Outlet Devices
15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
END
15050 - 1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Intent of Contract Drawings and Specifications is to obtain complete, functional, code compliant systems, tested, adjusted, and ready for operation. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, equipment, tools, etc. for the complete installation of the HVAC, plumbing, and related work as indicated on the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall check, verify, and coordinate work with other trades. Include modifications, relocations or adjustments necessary to complete work or to avoid interference with other trades.
C. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and are to be used to determine project scope and a minimum level of quality. The Contract Drawings are not to be used as the actual working construction drawings. The Contractor’s approved submitted shop drawings, coordinated with other trades, shall be used for actual system installation.
D. Alternates and Substitutions: 1. Contractor shall include, with accepted Alternates and Substitutions, all provisions necessary to adjust work affected. 2. With any Alternate or Substitution, Contractor shall include costs to effected trades such as structure, electrical requirements, etc. 3. Alternates shall be accepted alternates by Owner’s Representative 4. Substitutions shall be approved product manufacturers other than Contract Drawings scheduled Basis of Design.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his work with all other trades to avoid conflict and permit a neat and orderly appearance of the entire installation. The Contractor shall, in advance of the work, furnish instructions to the General Contractor as to his requirements for equipment and material installation of any kind, whether or not specifically mentioned on drawings or in the specifications, and shall include recesses, chases in walls, and all required openings in the structure. Should furnishing this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cuttings are found to be required, the cost of the same shall be charged to this Contractor.
B. Installations found to be in conflict with work of other trades, as a result of neglected coordination, shall be removed and reinstalled in new locations designated by the Architect at no additional expense to the Owner.
C. To achieve coordination, Contractor shall contact the Architect and obtain necessary information to design his system to fit into allotted spaces without interfering with work by other trades.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Work: 1. Provide cast-in-place concrete for mechanical systems as required by Contract Documents unless otherwise noted.
B. Rigging: 1. Provide all labor and materials to safely hoist and rig all equipment indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Contractor shall secure all required permits prior to rigging work. 3. Contractor shall protect all personnel, property, building and site from damage. 4. Rigger shall be experience and shall comply with OSHA requirements.
15050 - 2 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Painting: 1. Contractor shall paint all exposed metals included in the mechanical systems. This includes but is not limited to piping, supports, metal effected by construction, etc. This includes natural gas pipe on roof. 2. Contractor shall paint all plumbing vent pipes exposed to exterior. Color shall match roof. 3. Contractor shall paint all flue pipes and combustion air intake pipes exposed to exterior. Color shall match roof. 4. All painting shall be performed by qualified personnel and be applied by manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Protection of Property: 1. During construction, Contractor shall provide means to protect building and equipment from damage. 2. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times. Contractor shall repair all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his own work persons. Contractor shall also protect his own work from damage. Upon completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition 3. Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and materials until he has received written notice from the Architect or Engineer that his work has been accepted. 4. Contractor shall provide temporary partitions to safely isolate areas of construction. 5. Roofs shall be protected with 3/4” plywood installed over entire work areas and paths of travel. 6. Interior floors and walls in areas where equipment travels shall be properly protected. 7. Contractor shall repair any property damage caused by mechanical installation at no cost to Owner.
E. Equipment Supports: 1. Contractor shall provide all supports, steel, etc. required to properly install equipment. 2. Equipment shall be installed securely and shall be level. 3. Contractor shall coordinate equipment supports with building structure.
F. Welding Work: 1. Welding work shall be performed by certified welders and shall be of good quality. 2. Welders shall comply with all project safety procedures. Area shall be cleared of all combustible materials and a fire extinguisher shall be within reach of the welder’s “fire watch” helper. 3. Welding and gas tanks shall be properly secured and protected.
G. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform cutting and patching required for complete installation of systems. Patch and restore all work cut or damaged to original condition. This includes openings remaining from removal or relocation of existing system components. 2. Do not pierce beams or columns without permission and direction of structural engineer.
H. Excavation and Backfill: 1. Backfill all trenches beneath concrete floors within building and beneath concrete slabs, walks and drives with appropriate fill and compact to same density as surrounding area. 2. Backfill shall be tamped in layers or puddled under and around pipes to prevent settlement or lateral movement and shall contain no ashes, cinders, refuse, organic
matter, or other corrosive materials. 3. Rocks shall not be placed in trenches. 4. In trenches cut through rock, tamped backfill shall be used for at least 6 inches under and around the pipe and for at least 2 feet above the pipe.
15050 - 3 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Rules and regulations of all State and Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction and utility companies, in force at time of execution of Contract shall become part of this Specification.
B. Contractor shall conform to the following applicable rules and regulations: 1. International Building Code. 2. International Mechanical Code. 3. International Plumbing Code. 4. International Fire Code. 5. International Fuel Gas Code. 6. International Energy Conservation Code. 7. National Electric Code. 8. Life Safety Code. 9. Requirements and code amendments of local building department, fire department, utility company and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 10. National Fire Protection Association Standards. 11. American Society of Mechanical Engineers Pressure Code. 12. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations.
C. Contractor shall obtain all permits and include all permit costs in bid. Contractor shall schedule all inspections with local authority and shall deliver all certificates to the Owner.
D. The most stringent code shall apply in differences between applicable codes.
E. Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up before it has been duly inspected, tested and approved by the authorized inspectors having legal jurisdiction over his work. Should he fail to observe the above, he shall uncover his work and, after it has been inspected, tested and approved, recover it at his own expense.
F. Any work performed by the Contractor that does not comply with applicable codes shall be corrected and the Contractor shall bear all costs for required corrections.
1.5 UTILITIES
A. Contractor shall coordinate connection to site utilities.
B. Contractor shall verify the existence, connection size, and elevation of all utilities.
C. Contractor shall verify location of other underground systems prior to digging.
D. Upon award of project, Contractor shall notify Engineer of any cost to extend natural gas serve to project site by local utility.
1.6 QUALITY
A. Perform all work in accordance with good industry practice and shall be of first quality. The good appearance of the work shall be of equal importance to its mechanical operation. Lack of quality workmanship shall be considered sufficient reason for rejection of a system in whole or in part.
B. All systems shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. Routing of ductwork, above ground piping, wiring, etc. shall be parallel with right angles.
1.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Equipment shall be neat and level.
B. Install equipment in locations shown on approved construction shop drawings. Avoid conflicts with structure and other trades.
15050 - 4 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Install so that all equipment can be easily serviced by access doors, by unions and isolation valves in piping and/or other methods as required. Maintain all code required clearances and manufacturer’s recommended access. Install equipment piping and ductwork to maintain access for maintenance personnel.
D. All equipment shall be clearly labeled with tag number scheduled on drawings.
E. All equipment shall have OSHA required safety guards.
F. Equipment installed on roofs shall be 10 feet from parapet or install a safety rail per International Mechanical Code.
G. Equipment installed on supports greater than 30 inches above adjacent walking surface shall have 36 inch wide platforms with safety railing on all sides requiring service access per the International Mechanical Code.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit a minimum six (6) copies to the Architect and Engineer for review and approval all manufacturer’s product data sheets and construction shop drawings.
B. Manufacturer’s product data sheets shall be specific to the equipment being provided. Equipment to be provided shall be clearly identified and labeled with the equipment tag number matching the Contract Drawings.
C. All refrigeration, fan and pumping equipment, such as condensing units, heat pumps, packaged rooftop units, pumps, fans, etc. shall include manufacturer’s computerized selections with specific project conditions. General catalog data is not acceptable.
D. In addition to major scheduled equipment, Contractor shall submit product data sheets on plumbing fixtures, plumbing specialties, sheet metal construction standards, piping materials, insulation materials, vibration eliminators, and other mechanical items important to system operation. Refer to individual specification sections for additional submittal items.
E. Contractor shall submit construction shop drawings for equipment locations, ductwork layout, and piping layout. Shop drawings shall include coordination with all other trades, equipment clearances, duct and pipe dimensions, elevations, balancing devices, etc. that shall be used for actual system fabrication and installation. Contractor shop drawings shall be 1/4 inch per foot scale on 24”x36” or 30”x42” sheets.
F. Submittals shall include all accepted alternates and substitutions. All necessary adjustments due to alternate or substitution shall be included.
G. Contractor shall submit Temperature Controls drawings and wiring diagrams.
H. Fire Protection Contractor shall submit sprinkler system components, hydraulic calculations, and sprinkler system layout. Drawings, calculations, and components shall be approved by Engineer, local Authority Having Jurisdiction, and Owner’s insurance company prior to beginning fire protection work.
I. Initial and final Test and Balance Reports shall be reviewed and approved by Engineer.
J. Engineer’s review and comments on submittals does not relieve Contractor’s responsibility to comply with requirements of Contract Documents.
K. All approved submittals, including comments, shall be scanned into PDF format for final close-out documents. Refer to Close-Out Documents paragraph.
1.9 ASSISTANCE TO TEST AND BALANCE FIRM
A. The Mechanical and Controls Contractors shall assist the Test and Balance (TAB) firm to perform system balancing. Contractors shall provide necessary manpower to correct identified deficiencies in a timely manner to perform TAB.
15050 - 5 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Not every measuring and balancing device desired by the TAB may be indicated or noted on the Construction Documents. Prior to system start-up, the Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the TAB firm. Mechanical Contractor shall install, at no additional cost to Owner, any balancing dampers, temperature and pressure test ports, etc. as requested by the TAB Firm to perform complete system balance.
C. Refer to Test and Balance Section for Mechanical Contractor’s responsibilities.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall guarantee for one (1) year after acceptance by Owner all equipment, materials, and workmanship to be free from defect. Contractor shall provide equipment, parts and labor to repair, replace or alter systems or parts of systems found defective at no extra cost to Owner.
B. Refer to each section for any extended equipment warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Work shall not be covered or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
B. If work is enclosed or not visible, Contractor shall expose systems for inspection at their own cost.
3.2 START-UP
A. All systems and equipment shall be started, tested, adjusted and turned over to Owner ready for operation. Follow manufacturer's pre-start-up check-out, start-up, trouble shooting and adjustment procedures.
B. Contractor shall provide services of technician knowledgeable in start-up and check-out of types of systems and equipment on project. Provide start-up services by manufacturer's factory technician where specified or where Contractor does not have certified personnel. Coordinate start-up with all trades.
C. Documentation of start-up conditions and equipment performance shall be included in Owner’s Operations Manual.
D. Clean and lubricate all equipment prior to acceptance by Owner.
3.3 FINAL APPROVAL
A. Prior to final acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect "certificates of approval" signed by all legally constituted authorities, stating that the systems, as installed, have been inspected and tested and meet all governing code requirements.
3.4 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS
A. Record Drawings: 1. Contractor shall neatly produce from field marked drawings a complete "as-built" record set of drawings, which shall show every change from the original Contract Drawings and the exact "as-built" locations and sizes of the work provided. This set shall include locations, dimensions, elevations, shut-off valves, etc. 2. The Contractor shall neatly provide a final set of “as-built” drawings. Contactor shall provide one (1) hard copy and one (1) CD of portable document format (PDF) scan files of “as-built” drawings to Owner.
15050 - 6 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Contractor shall provide to Owner one (1) hard copy and one (3) CDs of portable document format (PDF) scan files of the following: 1. Equipment Operations Manual, which includes all equipment submittals, brochures, repair parts lists, manufacturer’s maintenance instructions, and contact information on local manufacturer’s representatives. 2. All approved submittals with comments. 3. All approved shop drawings. 4. All permits and inspection reports. 5. All warranties. 6. Final Test and Balance Report. 7. Charts and diagrams for all valves, dampers, and controls. C. Contractor shall provide one (1) copy Close-Out PDF CD listed above to the Engineer and to the architect.
3.5 COMPLETION
A. Upon completion of work Contractor shall remove all tools, scaffolding, trash from site. Contractor shall walk through job site and remove debris from work areas, including above ceiling, leaving a clean project site.
B. Contractor shall provide training to owner’s operating personnel on installed systems.
C. It is the intent of this specification for the Contractor to provide the Owner a complete, functional, code compliant system.
END OF SECTION
15075 - 1 Mechanical System Identification Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall install identification labels or tags on all mechanical equipment, piping systems, dampers, valves, etc. as specified in this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 – Scheme for the identification of piping systems.
B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
A. Stencil Paint: 1. Oil-based, alkyd enamel, black color. 2. Stencil of pipe is permitted in concealed locations only.
B. Marker System: 1. Manufacturer's standard, preprinted with color coding, lettering size and length of color field according to ASME A13.1. 2. Use pressure-sensitive type unless "snap-on" or "strap-on" type is specified in Part 3.
C. Valve Tags: 1. Minimum 1-1/2" diameter, 0.032" thick, polished brass.
D. Laminated Plastic Nameplates: 1. ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore. 2. Nameplates shall be approximately 1-1/2" x 4", 1/16" thick, and have 1/2" high lettering. Face of plastic nameplates shall be black with white letters. 3. Fasteners shall be self-tapping, stainless steel screws or contact type with permanent adhesive.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corporation.
B. Seton
C. Brimar Industries, Inc.
15075 - 2 Mechanical System Identification Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. After painting and/or covering is completed, identify equipment and piping as indicated. Locate identification as conspicuously as possible except where such would distract from finished area.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Install pipe identification on each system. Place flow directional arrows at each pipe identification location.
B. Identify all piping (except medical gas) not less than once every 20 ft, not less than once in each room, at each branch, adjacent to each access door or panel, at each valve and on both sides of walls or floors penetrated by piping.
C. In concealed areas, piping may be identified by stenciling. Height of lettering shall be same as pipe diameter up to maximum of 1" in height. When finished color of piping is dark, stenciling shall be on white background.
D. Exposed pipe shall be identified with marker system. Markers shall be "snap-on" or "strap-on" type depending on applicable pipe size.
E. All drain pans shall be labeled on the visible bottom side every 20 feet with “Code Required Secondary Drain System.”
F. All buried gas lines, such as natural gas, shall have underground plastic pipe markers installed 12 inches below finished grade directly above the pipe.
3.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify valves with brass tags bearing system identification and valve sequence number in 1/2" black characters. Attach tag to valve body with brass jack chain and "S" hook.
B. Valve numbers shall be prefixed with corresponding piping system identification in 1/4" black letters.
C. Valve tags are not required at terminal devices unless valves are greater than 10 ft from device or located in another room not visible from terminal unit.
D. Furnish typewritten valve schedule indicating valve number, fixtures, equipment or areas served by each numbered valve and incorporate in O&M Manuals.
E. Furnish typewritten framed chart under glass or clear plastic indicating fixtures, equipment or areas served by each numbered valve and mount same as directed by Engineer.
3.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify major equipment, including air handling units, fans, boilers, chillers, heat exchangers, air terminal devices, pumps, water heaters, unit heaters tanks, compressors, water treatment devices etc.
B. Identify equipment with large laminated plastic nameplates.
C. Identify control equipment and panels with laminated plastic nameplates.
D. Locate motor nameplates for easy reading. Relocate or provide new nameplates on motors if original nameplates are not located for easy reading.
E. Install label with 2 inch high letters on each fire damper, smoke damper, and combination fire/smoke damper. If documents include a damper numbering system, provide label on damper with specific damper number. Install red sticker on ceiling below all fire dampers and smoke dampers.
15075 - 3 Mechanical System Identification Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.5 ACCESS PANEL IDENTIFICATION
A. Furnish typewritten charts with identification and location of all access panels serving equipment and valves and incorporate in O&M Manuals.
3.6 WARNING LABELS
A. Install tag or sign with required warning message at the following locations: 1. Emergency Eye Wash Stations. 2. Emergency Shower Stations. 3. Hazardous Material Locations. 4. Exposed Hot Surface Locations. 5. Tripping Hazard Locations. 6. Exposed Moving Part Locations. 7. Other Potentially Dangerous Locations.
B. All installations shall comply with OSHA requirements.
END OF SECTION
15140 - 1 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15140
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, and services to completely install the pipe hanger and supports as described in this specification.
B. Dissimilar metals shall not be in contact without a dielectric isolator.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electro-Deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
B. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
C. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM A1011 – Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
E. MSS SP58 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
F. MSS SP69 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. 15410 – Plumbing Piping Systems
C. 15820 – Ductwork Accessories
D. 15890 - Ductwork
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturer’s name, part number, and applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.
B. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP 58.
C. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.
D. Support of pipe, tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data on all hanger and support devices, including shields and attachment methods. Product data to include, but not limited to materials, finishes, approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information.
15140 - 2 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger and support systems shall be as manufactured by Cooper B-Line, HOLDRITE or approved equal.
B. Materials installed in return air plenum spaces shall comply with ASTM E-84 25/50 smoke and flame requirements. HOLDRITE products shall be Flame Fighter model.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers: 1. Uninsulated pipes 2 inch and smaller: a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170. b. Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger, B-Line B3690. c. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198R or hinged ring hanger, B3198H. d. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173 with B3222. e. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104 or B3100. f. HOLDRITE #257-P, or 287-P 2. Uninsulated pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger: a. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3100. b. Pipe roll with sockets, B-Line B3114. c. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, B-Line B3110. 3. Insulated pipe- Hot or steam piping: a. 2 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 series. b. 2-1/2 inch and larger pipes: 1). Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle. B-Line B3110 with B3160-B3165 series. 2). Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle, B-LineB3114 with B3160-B3165 series. 4. Insulated pipe- Cold or chilled water piping: a. 5 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 series. b. 6 inch and larger pipes: 1). Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle, B-Line B3114 with B3160-B3165 series. 2). Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle. B-Line B3110 with B3160-B3165 series.
B. Pipe Clamps:
1. When flexibility in the hanger assembly is required due to horizontal movement, use pipe clamps with weldless eye nuts, B-Line B3140 or B3142 with B3200. For insulated lines use double bolted pipe clamps, B-Line B3144 or B3146 with B3200. 2. Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. HOLDRITE
support systems or approved equivalent. 3. Dissimilar metals shall not be in contact without a dielectric isolator.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gage roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum, B-Line B22 strut or stronger as required.
2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B2000 Series.
15140 - 3 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. For pipes subjected to axial movement: a. Strut mounted roller support, B-Line B3126. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines. b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B-Line B2417. 4. When multiple parallel piping is installed on a trapeze platform the spacing between such platforms shall comply with the spacing below. The total weight of piping and components upon each trapeze span shall not exceed the manufactures’ load rating. Load ratings must include a minimum 2X safety factor. HOLDRITE EZ-Strut or approved equal for piping 2 inch and under.
D. Close Cell Insulated Pipe Supports: 1. The pipe support system shall be of high compressive strength material inserts imbedded in closed cell elastomeric foam and covered with metal cladding. 2. Insulation inserts shall be used in conjunction with friction insulation tape to inhibit slip due to thermal expansion, contraction, and/or vibration. 3. Pipe hanger and support assemblies shall be equal to B-Line Armafix.
E. Wall Supports: 1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller: a. Carbon steel hook, B-Line B3191. b. Carbon steel J-hanger, B-Line B3690. c. HOLDRITE Stout Bracket System. 2. Pipes larger than 4 inch: a. Welded strut bracket and pipe straps, B-Line B3064 and B2000 series. b. Welded steel brackets, B-Line B3066 or B3067, with roller chair or adjustable steel yoke pipe roll. B-Line B3120 or B3110. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.
F. Floor Supports: 1. Hot piping under 6 inch and all cold piping: a. Carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel base stand sized for pipe elevation. B-Line B3093 and B3088T or B3090 and B3088. Pipe saddle shall be screwed or welded to appropriate base stand. 2. Hot piping 6 inch and larger: a. Roller stand with base plate, B-Line B3117SLor B3118SL. b. Adjustable roller support and steel support sized for elevation, B-Line B3124.
G. Vertical Supports: 1. Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B3373. 2. For vertical mid-span supports of piping 4 inch and under, use HOLDRITE Stout
Brackets with HOLDRITE Stout Clamps or two-hole pipe clamps (MSS Type 26).
H. Copper Tubing Supports: 1. Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters. Dissimilar metals shall be isolated. a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170CT. b. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198RCT or hinged ring hanger
B3198HCT. c. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173CT with B3222. d. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104CT. 2. For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps, B-Line B3373CT or B3373CTC. 3. For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized for copper
tubing, B-Line B2000 series, or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps, B-Line BVT series. 4. Fixture stub-outs to be supported using HOLDRITE Copper Bonded Pipe Support System or approved equal.
15140 - 4 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
I. Plastic (polymer) Pipe Supports: 1. V-Bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18 gage continuous support channel, B-Line B3106 and B3106V, to form a continuous support system for plastic pipe or flexible tubing.
J. Supplementary Structural Supports: 1. Design and fabricate supports using structural quality steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by Cooper B-Line. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gage ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 steel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch or greater as required by loading conditions. Submit designs for pipe tunnels, pipe galleries, etc., to engineer for approval. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.
2.3 UPPER ATTACHMENTS
A. Beam Clamps: 1. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel. Clamp type shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load configuration. 2. C-Clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws, B-Line B351L, or B3036L. Top flange c-clamps shall be used when attaching a hanger rod to the top flange of structural shapes, B-Line B3034 or B3033. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendation for setscrew torque. Retaining straps shall be used to maintain the clamps position on the beam where required. 3. Center loaded beam clamps shall be used where specified. Steel clamps shall be B-Line B3050, or B3055. Malleable iron or forged steel beam clamps with cross bolt shall be B-Line B3054 or B3291-B3297 Series as required to fit beams. 4. Overhead pipe runs of 1 inch and less to utilize HOLDRITE #125 or #121 Series brackets.
B. Concrete Inserts: 1. Cast in place spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable; either steel or malleable iron body, B-Line B2500 or B3014. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have means for attachment to forms. Select inserts to suit threaded hanger rod sizes, B-Line N2500 or B3014N series. 2. Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable. Channels shall be 12 gage, ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural quality carbon steel, complete with styrofoam inserts and end caps with nail holes for attachment to forms. The continuous concrete insert shall have a load rating of 2,000 lbs/ft. in concrete, B-Line B22I, 32I, or 52I. Select channel nuts suitable for strut and rod sizes. 3. Place cast-in-place anchors prior to concrete pour. For small-bore piping, use HOLDRITE #125 series brackets or approved equal.
C. Rod Attachment Concrete Plate: 1. Steel attachment plate for rod to concrete ceiling. Shall allow vertical adjustment of hanger rod. 2. Equal to B-Line model B3085.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SUPPORTS
A. For refrigeration, air conditioning, hydraulic, pneumatic, and other vibrating system applications, use a clamp that has a vibration dampening insert and a nylon inserted locknut. For copper and steel tubing use B-Line BVT series Vibraclamps, for pipe sizes use BVP series.
B. For larger tubing or piping subjected to vibration, use neoprene or spring hangers as required.
15140 - 5 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. For base mounted equipment use vibration pads, molded neoprene mounts, or spring mounts as required. Acoustical isolations 2 inch and under to be tested by an ISO 3822 Certified Testing Facility. Vibration isolation products as manufactured by B-Line, Vibratrol systems or HOLDRITE.
D. Loop and Clevis Hangers: 1. Elastomer-lined vibration hangers for water lines, drain lines and sanitary waste lines 4 inch and smaller us HOLDRITE #300 - #301 isolated steel loop swivel hangers or HOLDRITE #320 - #30 isolated J-hangers. 5 inch and larger pipe, isolate hangers using HOLDRITE #270 or #271 isolation liner in combination with standard loop or clevis hangers.
E. Small Bore Pipe/Tube Suspension (2 inch and under): 1. For piping mounted to adjacent structure or supplemental support bracketry (e.g., HOLDRITE Stout Bracket or HOLDRITE EZ-Strut/EZK), use HOLDRITE “Silencer System” #250, #255, #261, #262, #263, #264, #280, or #285.
F. Through-Stud / Joist Penetrations: 1. Provide resilient support for all HVAC and plumbing water and drain piping which pass through framing penetrations or similar potential contact locations. No such piping shall come into rigid contact with the building. 2. HOLDRITE “Silencer System” #250, #255, #261, #262, #263, #264, #270, #271, #280, #285.
G. Trapeze: 1. HOLDRITE “Silencer Series” #250, #255, #280, #285, with HOLDRITE EZ-Strut #EZ-1, #EZ-2 or #EZK, or #257-P #287-P when using standard strut/channel.
H. Riser Clamp and Equipment Isolation: 1. Load Range: Risers that exert loads from 10-50 psi use HOLDRITE Silencer #274 or #276. For heavier loads, use HOLDRITE Silencer # 275 or #278 with 10 gage steel bearing plate (included), to ensure loading does not exceed 50 psi.
I. Sinks, lavatories, toilet, tub/shower, drinking fountains, showers, tub/showers, janitor sinks, hot water tanks washer outlet boxes, ice maker boxes and other horizontal and vertical installations shall be accomplished through the use of HOLDRITE Silencer Series #250, #255, #261-#264, #270, #280 or #285.
J. Drop-eared 90 to be supported and isolated by use of HOLDRITE Stout Bracket in conjunction with the HOLDRITE #265
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed.
B. Shields shall be 180 degree galvanized sheet metal, 12 inch minimum length, 18 gage minimum thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated pipe, B-Line B3151.
C. Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum thickness, sized for insulation thickness. Saddles for pipe sizes greater than 12 inch shall have a center support rib.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Indoor Finishes: 1. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper colored epoxy paint, B-Line Dura-Copper®. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall be used where necessary. 2. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with
ASTM B633 OR shall have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish, B-Line Dura-Green®.
15140 - 6 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 SS Grade 33 G90 OR have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish, B-Line Dura-Green®.
B. Outdoor and Corrosive Area Finishes 1. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be hot dip galvanized or stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor or corrosive use. 2. Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be type 304 stainless steel with stainless steel hardware.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Non-Fire Rated Floor: 18 gage galvanized steel. 2. Non-Fire Rated Walls: 18 gage galvanized steel. 3. Fire Rated Penetrations: UL Listed prefabricated fire rated sleeves, equal to Metraflex or HOLDRITE HydroFlame Series sleeves.
B. Exterior Wall Pipe Sleeves: 1. Mechanical Pipe Seal: a. Pipe wall penetration seals shall be of the modular link type. b. Seals shall consist of a series of interlocking, molded synthetic rubber links, with heavy-duty plastic pressure plates, and corrosion resistant nuts and bolts. c. Seals shall be designed to provide a hydrostatic seal between the pipe and wall penetration. d. Seals shall be sized and selected per manufacturer recommendations. e. Mechanical pipe seals shall be fabricated of an EPDM elastomer for general service. f. Provide stainless steel hardware as required. g. Mechanical pipe seals shall be equal to Metraflex model Metraseal. 2. Wall Sleeve (steel): a. Cast in place concrete wall sleeves shall be fabricated from galvanized heavy wall welded or seamless carbon steel pipe. b. All sleeves to have a 2 inch wide, full perimeter water stop, welded on both sides. c. Wall sleeves shall be equal to Metraflex model WSCSG.
C. Duct Sleeves: 1. Round Duct: 18 gage galvanized steel. 2. Rectangular Duct: 18 gage galvanized steel. 3. Rated Duct Penetration (without damper): a. At all rated wall penetrations without a damper, install 2.5 inch 18 gage galvanized metal flange at point of penetration. Install UL Listed firestop, complying with ASTM E814, per FireStop Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install per International Mechanical Code, International Plumbing Code, and manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Pipe shall be adequately supported by pipe hanger and supports specified in PART 2 PRODUCTS. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to accommodate insulation thickness.
C. Horizontal steel piping shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3 and 4, excerpts of which follow below:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (INCHES) ROD DIAMETER (INCHES) MAXIMUM SPACING (FEET)
15140 - 7 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
½ to 1-1/4 3/8 7
1-1/2 to 2 3/8 10 2-1/2 to 3 1/2 12
3-1/2 to 4 1/2 14
5 to 6 3/4 16
8 3/4 19
10 7/8 20
12 7/8 20
14 1 20
16 1 20
D. Horizontal copper tubing shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3 and 4,
excerpts of which follow below:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (INCHES) ROD DIAMETER (INCHES) MAXIMUM SPACING (FEET)
½ to 3/4 3/8 5
1 to 1-1/4 3/8 6
1-1/2 to 2 1/2 8
2-1/2 1/2 9
3 1/2 10
4 1/2 11
5 1/2 13
6 5/8 14
8 3/4 16
E. No direct contact of dissimilar metals. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as HOLDRITE isolated steel loop hangers model #300 - #310, HOLDRITE isolated steel J-hanger model #320 - #330. HOLDRITE #270 isolated liner may also be applied to steel loop hangers or HOLDRITE #271 isolation liner may be applied to clevis hangers. Also approved are plastic coated hangers, copper colored epoxy paint, or non adhesive isolation tape B-Line Iso-pipe. Galvanized felt isolators sized for copper tubing may also be used, B-Line B3195CT.
F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be braced in accordance with CISPI 301-09 by use of HOLDRITE #117 No-Hub Pipe Restraints or approved equal.
G. Install hangers to provide a minimum of 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
H. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
I. Trim hanger rod where maximum 1 inch of rod is exposed.
J. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Support vertical pipes at every floor. Wherever possible, locate riser clamps directly below pipe couplings or shear lugs.
K. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide trapeze hangers as specified in Part 2. Trapeze hangers shall be spaced according to the smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports according to schedule in section 3.1.
L. Do not support piping from other pipes, ductwork or other equipment that is not building structure.
15140 - 8 Hangers and Supports Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
M. Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. These shall be HOLDRITE support systems or approved equal.
3.2 SLEEVES
A. Floors: 1. One inch stub above floor and caulk. 2. Future level floor plate, caulk.
B. Walls: Stuffing insulation and caulk pipe or duct to adjacent wall.
C. Finished Surfaces: Chrome escutcheons.
D. Rated Penetrations: UL Listed system equal to fire rating.
END OF SECTION
15260 - 1 Piping Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15260
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install insulation on pipe systems for a complete, code compliant system. 1. Piping insulation, jacketing and accessories. 2. Equipment insulation and jacketing or coatings. 3. Laminated self-adhesive water and weather seal.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM).
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE).
C. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA.)
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
F. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL).
G. Greenguard.
H. Greenseal.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. 15410 – Plumbing Piping Systems.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity (k-value) : BTU-in./ (hr•ft²•°F)
B. Greenguard: Greenguard Environmental Institute, independent testing of products for emissions of respirable particles and Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs), including formaldehyde and other specific product-related pollutants. Provides independent, third-party certification of IAQ performance. Certification is based upon criteria used by EPA, OSHA and WHO.
C. Greenseal certified low VOC limits.
D. IAQ: Indoor Air Quality
E. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency
F. WHO: World Health Organization
G. ASJ: All Service Jacket
H. SSL: Self-Sealing Lap
I. FSK: Foil-Scrim-Kraft; jacketing
J. PSK: Poly-Scrim-Kraft; jacketing
K. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
L. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.
15260 - 2 Piping Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: To include product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire test response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation installed indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation installed outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
B. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of tapes, adhesives, mastics, cements and insulation materials.
C. Follow manufacturer’s recommended handling practices.
D. Supply fiberglass products that assure excellent IAQ (Indoor Air Quality) performance through Greenguard Certification whenever possible.
E. Fiber Glass and Mold: Fiber glass insulation is not a food source for mold growth. However, mold can grow on almost any material when it becomes wet and contaminated with organic materials. Carefully inspect any insulation that has been exposed to water. If it shows any sign of mold growth it must be discarded. If the material is wet but shows no sign of mold, it should be dried rapidly and thoroughly. If it shows signs of facing degradation from wetting, it should be replaced.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All insulation thicknesses and densities shall comply with the International Energy Conservation Code or the latest edition of ASHRAE 90.1.
B. All materials installed in concealed areas utilized as a return air plenum space shall comply with NFPA 90A flame and smoke requirements.
C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury or mercury compounds.
D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 parts per million (ppm) when tested according to ASTM C 871.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Owens Corning
B. Johns Manville
C. Knauf
D. CertainTeed
E. Armaflex
F. K-Flex
15260 - 3 Piping Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Type ‘A’ Pipe Insulation:
1. Glass fiber, 1000°F, meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585 and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible.
a. Thermal Conductivity K-value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 btu-in/hr-ft^2F at 75°F mean temperature.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000°F. c. Compressive Strength: not less than 120 PSF @ 10% deformation for 2” thickness per ASTM C 165. 2. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
B. Type ‘B’ Pipe Insulation: 1. Rigid glass cell insulation composed of millions of completely sealed glass cells. a. Material shall have zero water vapor permeability and shall be moisture resistant. Permeability rating of 0.00 perm-in when tested in accordance with ASTM E96.
b. Material shall be non-combustible and meet ASTM E84 requirements for smoke and flame development index.
c. Thermal Conductivity K-value: ASTM C 335, 0.29 btu-in/hr-ft^2F at 75°F mean temperature. d. Maximum Service Temperature 900 degrees F. 2. Rigid glass cell insulation shall be equal to FoamGlas as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips
C. Type ‘C’ Pipe Insulation: 1. Closed cell elastomeric, flexible insulation in tubular or sheet form, equal to AP Armaflex. Insulation shall meet requirements of ASTM C534. 2. Insulation material shall have closed cell structure to prevent moisture from wicking. Insulation shall be manufactured without the use of CFCs, HFCs, or HCFC, shall be formaldehyde free, low VOCs, fiber free, duct free and resists mold and mildew. 3. Material shall have a flame spread index of less than 25 and a smoke developed index of less than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTE E84. During test, product shall not melt or drip flaming particles. Flame shall be progressive. 4. Materials shall have minimum thermal conductivity of 0.25 btu-in/h-ft2-F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518. 5. Materials shall have a maximum water vapor transmission of 0.08 perm-inches when tested in accordance with ASTM E96.
D. Fitting Insulation: 1. Pre-formed fiberglass, preformed perlite, mitered fiberglass, mitered perlite or calcium silicate in lieu of PVC systems. These fittings shall be further protected by field-applied fitting covers or metal fittings as necessary.
2.3 FACTORY APPLIED JACKETS
A. Indoor Applications: 1. ASJ/SSL: All service jacket with self-sealing lap. White-kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with glass fibers; conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type 1; vapor retarder; with a self-sealing adhesive. 2. ASJ: All service jacket. White-kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with
glass fibers; conforming to ASTM C 1136; vapor retarder. 3. FSK: Foil scrim kraft. Aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforced scrim with kraft backing; conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type 1; vapor retarder. 4. PSK: Poly scrim kraft. Metalized polypropylene, fiberglass reinforced scrim with kraft backing; conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type 1; vapor retarder.
15260 - 4 Piping Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.4 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A. PVC: ASTM-84 25/50 compliant, indoor or outdoor UV-resistant fittings, jacketing and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system consists of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with fiber glass inserts. Fiber glass insert has a thermal conductivity k-value of
0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Closures: stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer’s recommendations. Equal to Proto or Speedline.
B. Metal: Aluminum, 0.016” thick or Stainless Steel, 0.010” thick in smooth, corrugated, or
embossed finish with factory-applied moisture barrier. Overlap shall be 2” minimum. Fittings shall be die-shaped with factory-applied moisture barrier.
C. Laminated Self-Adhesive Water and Weather Seals: permanent acrylic self-adhesive system; weather resistant, high puncture and tear resistance; meeting or exceeding requirements of UL 723; applied in strict accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that all piping and equipment are tested and approved prior to insulation installation.
B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and without foreign material before applying insulation materials.
3.2 GENERAL INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All
materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, building codes, and industry standards.
B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation.
C. On cold surfaces where a vapor retarder must be maintained, insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other
projections secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
D. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings, or sleeves except where firestop or firesafing materials are required.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and circumferential joints staggered.
3.3 PIPING INSULATION
A. Locate all seams in the least visible location.
B. Insulation installed on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed.
C. All ends must be firmly butted and secured with appropriate butt-strip material. On high-
temperature piping, double layering with staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed.
D. Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required. Insulation inserts shall be no less than the following lengths:
1½" to 2½" IPS 10" long 3" to 6" IPS 12" long 8" to 10" IPS 16" long 12" and over IPS 22" long
15260 - 5 Piping Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. For piping exposed in mechanical rooms or high traffic areas, insulation shall be protected from abuse by the use of appropriate thickness of PVC jacketing or metal jacketing.
F. For piping exposed to the elements, jacketing shall be UV resistant PVC with a minimum thickness of 0.020”, or 0.016” thick aluminum or stainless steel with a factory applied moisture barrier. Fitting covers shall be of similar materials. The insulation and jacketing shall be held firmly in place with a friction type Z lock or a minimum 2” overlap joint. All joints shall be sealed completely along the longitudinal seam and installed so as to shed water. All circumferential joints shall be sealed by use of preformed butt strips; minimum 2” wide or a minimum 2” overlap. Butt strips shall overlap the adjacent jacketing a minimum ½” and be completely weather sealed. PVC Jacketing shall be limited to a maximum 20” OD of the insulation when exposed to direct sunlight. A 6" to 10" unsealed slide joint shall be installed every 25 to 30 lineal feet for the thermal expansion of the pipe and jacketing. Where distance between fittings exceeds 8 lineal feet, an unsealed slide joint of 6" to 10" shall be installed. Insulation thickness for piping covered by PVC Jacketing shall be such that the
surface temperature of the PVC does not exceed 125°F.
G. Cold Piping Insulation
1. On below freezing applications and in high abuse areas, the ASJ jacket shall be protected with a PVC vapor retarding outer jacket. In addition, exposed ends of the insulation shall be sealed with a vapor retarder mastic installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section joint and at each fitting to isolate any water incursion. 2. On chilled water systems operating in conditions of Design RH of 90% and above, it is
recommended that the same guidelines be followed as listed above for below freezing applications.
3.4 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Install insulation on piping, valves, fittings, tanks, and all other components of the following systems as scheduled.
PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION TYPE PIPE SIZE (INCHES) INSULATION THICKNESS (INCHES)
Domestic Cold Water ‘A' ½” to 1-1/2” 3/4”
2” and greater 1”
Domestic Hot Water ‘A' ½” to 1-1/2” 1”
2” and greater 2”
HVAC Condensate Drain ‘A’ or ‘C' All Sizes 3/4"
Refrigerant Piping ‘C' All Sizes 1-1/2"
END OF SECTION
15290 - 1 Ductwork Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15290
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install duct insulation for a complete and code compliant system. 1. Duct insulation. 2. Internal Duct Liner. 3. Jacketing and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM).
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE).
C. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA.)
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
F. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL).
G. Greenguard.
H. Greenseal.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. 15890 – Ductwork and Vents.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity (k-value) : BTU-in./ (hr•ft²•°F)
B. Greenguard: Greenguard Environmental Institute, independent testing of products for emissions of respirable particles and Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs), including formaldehyde and other specific product-related pollutants. Provides independent, third-party certification of IAQ performance. Certification is based upon criteria used by EPA, OSHA and WHO.
C. Greenseal certified low VOC limits.
D. IAQ: Indoor Air Quality
E. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency
F. WHO: World Health Organization
G. ASJ: All Service Jacket
H. SSL: Self-Sealing Lap
I. FSK: Foil-Scrim-Kraft; jacketing
J. PSK: Poly-Scrim-Kraft; jacketing
K. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
L. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.
15290 - 2 Ductwork Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: To include product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials.
B. Samples and mock-ups of systems shall be provided as required.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire test response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation installed indoors: Flame-spread index less than 25 and smoke-developed index less than 50. 2. Insulation installed outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
B. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of tapes, adhesives, mastics, cements and insulation materials.
C. Follow manufacturer’s recommended handling practices.
D. Supply fiberglass products that assure excellent IAQ (Indoor Air Quality) performance through Greenguard Certification whenever possible.
E. Fiber Glass and Mold: Fiber glass insulation is not a food source for mold growth. However, mold can grow on almost any material when it becomes wet and contaminated with organic materials. Carefully inspect any insulation that has been exposed to water. If it shows any sign of mold growth it must be discarded. If the material is wet but shows no sign of mold, it should be dried rapidly and thoroughly. If it shows signs of facing degradation from wetting, it should be replaced. Air handling insulation used in the air stream must be discarded if exposed to water.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All ductwork insulation shall comply with the International Energy Conservation Code. 1. Ductwork insulation installed within the building’s insulation envelope shall have a minimum R-6 insulating value. 2. Ductwork insulation installed outside the building’s insulation envelope shall have a minimum R-8 insulating value.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury or mercury compounds.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Owens Corning
B. Johns Manville
C. Knauf
D. CertainTeed
2.2 EXTERNAL INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket: 1. Duct Wrap meeting ASTM C 553 Types I, II and III, and ASTM C 1290; Greenguard compliant; flexible, limited combustible.
a. K-value: ASTM C 177, 0.29 at 75°F mean temperature.
15290 - 3 Ductwork Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
b. Maximum Service Temperature: faced: 250°F; unfaced: 350°F. 2. Vapor Retarder Jacket: FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 3. Installation: Maximum allowable compression shall be 25%. 4. Securement: Secured in place using outward cinching staples in combination with appropriate pressure sensitive aluminum foil or PSK tape, or in combination with glass fabric and vapor retarder mastic. 5. Density:
a. Concealed Areas: Minimum 0.75 PCF. b. Exposed Areas: Minimum 1.0 PCF.
B. Rigid Fiber Glass Exterior Board: 1. Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigid. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450°F. 3. Concealed Areas: a. Density: Minimum 3 PCF.
b. K-value: ASTM C 177, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 4. Exposed Areas: a. Density: Minimum 6 PCF.
b. K-value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75°F mean temperature. c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II in combination with protective jacket where necessary.
C. Closed Cell Insulation: 1. Closed cell elastomeric, flexible insulation in sheet form, equal to AP Armaflex. Insulation shall meet requirements of ASTM C534.
2. Insulation material shall have closed cell structure to prevent moisture from wicking. Insulation shall be manufactured without the use of CFCs, HFCs, or HCFC, shall be formaldehyde free, low VOCs, fiber free, duct free and resists mold and mildew. 3. Material shall have a flame spread index of less than 25 and a smoke developed index of less than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTE E84. During test, product shall not melt or drip flaming particles. Flame shall be progressive. 4. Materials shall have minimum thermal conductivity K value of 0.25 btu-in/h-ft2-F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518. 5. Materials shall have a maximum water vapor transmission of 0.08 perm-inches when tested in accordance with ASTM E96.
D. Fiberglass Ductwork is not permitted.
2.3 OUTDOOR DUCTWORK JACKETS
A. Field Applied: 1. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016” thick in smooth, corrugated, or embossed finish with factory applied moisture barrier. Overlap shall be 2 inches minimum. 2. PVC Jacket: Proto Corporation Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant, white. Closure shall be
solvent weld adhesive or per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Laminated Self-Adhesive Water and Weather Seals: applied per manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. Factory Applied: 1. VentureClad Duct Jacketing System. a. 5-ply weather and abuse resistant with self sealing lap.
b. Zero permeability per ASTM E96-05. c. Puncture resistance 35.4 kg per ASTM D1000. d. Tear strength 4.3 lb per ASTM D624. e. Thickness 14.5 mils.
f. Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width.
C. Closed Cell Insulation:
15290 - 4 Ductwork Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Laminate composite layer of foil and polymer, 5 mils thick, shall be factory bonded to closed cell insulation. Material shall be weather and UV resistant. 2. Coating shall be silver or white and shall be equal to ArmaTuff by Armaflex. 3. Install with sealant per manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Either ductwork or insulation shall be installed so as to shed water and not allow standing water.
2.4 INTERNAL DUCT LINER A. Duct Liner conforming to ASTM C 1071 Type I and NFPA 90A & 90B; Greenguard compliant, or rigid plenum liner complying with ASTM C 1071 Type II and NFPA 90A & 90B.
K-value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75°F mean temperature. B. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423 Type A Mounting, 0.45 or higher for ½" product, 0.70 or higher for 1" product. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 6000 FPM for Type I product, 5000 FPM for Type II product.
D. The air stream surface mat facing shall be treated with an EPA registered anti-microbial agent conforming to ASTM C1338.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that all ductwork and equipment are tested and approved prior to insulation installation.
B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and without foreign material before applying insulation materials.
3.2 GENERAL INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All
materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, building codes, and industry standards.
B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation.
C. On cold surfaces where a vapor retarder must be maintained, insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other
projections secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
D. All duct insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings, or sleeves except where firestop or firesafing materials are required.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and circumferential joints staggered.
3.3 EXTERNAL FIBER GLASS DUCT WRAP
A. Install Duct Wrap to obtain specified R-value using a maximum compression of 25%.
B. Firmly butt all joints.
C. The longitudinal seam of the vapor retarder must be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches.
D. All penetrations and damage to the facing shall be repaired using pressure sensitive tape matching the facing, or mastic prior to system startup. Pressure sensitive tapes shall be a minimum 3 inches wide and shall be applied with moving pressure using a squeegee or
other appropriate sealing tool. Closure shall have a 25/50 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating per UL 723.
15290 - 5 Ductwork Insulation Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. Duct Wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of rectangular ductwork over 24” wide using mechanical fasteners on 18” centers. Care shall be exercised to avoid over compression of the insulation during installation. Unfaced Duct Wrap shall be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches and fastened using 4” to 6” nails or skewers spaced 4“ apart, or secured with a wire/banding system. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to the Duct Wrap.
3.4 INTERNAL DUCT LINER
A. Duct Lining shall be applied in strict accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standard Metal & Flexible” and NAIMA’s “Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard”.
B. Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Length of mechanical fasteners shall be selected in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation as listed on each product. Mechanical fasteners shall be installed perpendicular to the duct surface, and in no instance shall the pin compress the liner more than 1/8" relative to the nominal thickness of the insulation. All fasteners should comply with the guidelines of NAIMA’s Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard and the Mechanical Fastener’s Standard MF-1-1975. Quantity of fasteners shall meet manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
C. Adhesive shall conform to ASTM C 916. Adhesive shall be applied to the sheet metal with a 100% coverage. All exposed edges of the duct liner shall be coated with the same adhesive. All rips and tears shall be repaired using an adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916. All internal duct areas shall be covered with duct liner.
D. Transverse joints shall be firmly butted with no gaps and coated with adhesive. Longitudinal corner joints shall be overlapped and compressed.
E. Ductwork shall be sized to accommodate duct liner and provide free area as noted by duct sizes on drawings.
3.5 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Install ductwork per the following schedule.
B. Install outdoor ductwork jacket at exterior locations exposed to the elements.
END OF SECTION
DUCT SERVICE INSULATION TYPE INSULATION THICKNESS (INCHES)
Air Conditioning Supply and Return Ductwork External Duct Wrap or Board with Vapor Barrier R8 External Wrap = 2” R8 External Board = 1.5” Exhaust Ductwork None None
15330 - 1 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15330
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Certified sprinkler Contractor shall design and install a complete, operable, code compliant fire sprinkler system for the building renovations. Modifications to the existing system and riser assembly shall be made, as required, to serve the new building areas from the existing fire service line currently serving the building. It shall be the responsibility of the bidding fire protection contractor to survey existing conditions and include all necessary work for a functional code-compliant system serving the existing dry-pipe systems serving the existing warehouse and office areas, and also a new wet-pipe sprinkler system to serve the new building renovated areas.
B. The Contract Drawings indicate only the location of the existing fire riser location. It shall be the responsibility of the certified sprinkler Contractor to prepare shop drawings indicating the entire automatic fire sprinkler system.
C. Any pipe sizes indicated are to be considered minimum. Where sizes are not indicated, the certified sprinkler Contractor shall provide the sizes as necessary to meet all code requirements.
D. Sprinkler system shall protect the entire building. System shall be designed to hazard classifications listed with local Fire Marshal approval. 1. Offices Light Hazard 2. Warehouse Light Hazard
E. Provide sprinkler system protection to exterior canopies or overhangs where required by NFPA 13 or local Fire Marshal.
F. Areas subject to freezing shall be protected by a dry pipe sprinkler system.
G. Provide fire department connections within 100 feet of a fire hydrant and within 50 feet of a fire lane. Variation from these distances shall be approved by the local Fire Marshal.
H. Contractor shall determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from site water flow test data. For hydraulic calculations, Contractor shall pay for new site water flow test performed.
I. Install indicating valve at each riser. Valves shall be locked and electrically supervised.
J. Provide approved double detector check valve assembly at sprinkler system water supply connection as required by local Fire Department.
1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Codes and Standards: 1. NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 14, Standpipe and Hose Systems. 3. NFPA 24, Private Fire Service Mains 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 5. Current Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Guide. 6. Welding performed to ASME Standards. 7. International Building Code. 8. International Fire Code. 9. Local Fire Department Requirements.
B. Hydraulic calculations, product data sheets, and sprinkler system shop drawings shall be approved by local Authority Having Jurisdiction, Owner’s Fire Insurance Company, and Engineer prior to beginning work.
15330 - 2 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The fire sprinkler system shall be designed by a Contractor licensed in the State of Texas and under direct supervision of a Responsible Managing Employee holding a current Class III N.I.C.E.T. certification or by a Registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. System Design Drawings: Indicate pipe sizes, materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.
B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including manufacturer’s catalog information. Submit performance ratings rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. 1. Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings, submittals, and other documentation, by the sprinkler identification or model number as specifically published in the appropriate agency listing or approval. Trade names or other abbreviated designations shall not be allowed.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds requirements specified and required codes.
D. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times. Contractor shall repair all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his own work persons. Contractor shall also protect his own work from damage. He shall close all pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. He shall protect all his equipment and materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical injury. Upon completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition
B. Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and materials until he has received written notice from the Architect or Engineer that his work has been accepted.
1.6 UNINSPECTED WORK
A. Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up before it has been duly inspected, tested and approved by the authorized inspectors having legal jurisdiction over his work. Should he fail to observe the above, he shall uncover his work and, after it has been inspected, tested and approved, recover it at his own expense.
1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete "as-built" record set of drawings, which shall show every change from the original approved shop drawings and the exact "as-built" locations and sizes of the work provided under this Section of the specifications. This set shall include locations, dimensions, depth of buried piping, shut-off valves, etc. On completion of the work, this set of prints shall be delivered to the Architect.
1.8 FINAL APPROVAL
A. Prior to final acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect "certificates of approval" signed by all legally constituted authorities, stating that the systems, as installed, have been inspected and tested and meet all governing code requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
15330 - 3 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
A. Contractor shall guarantee the automatic fire sprinkler systems unconditionally for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. If, during this period, any materials, equipment, or any part of the systems fail to function properly, Contractor shall make good the defects promptly and without any expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
A. Below Ground: 1. Ductile iron pressure pipe, mechanical joint, Class 52, 150 psi working pressure, ANSI A21.51. 2. C-900 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC), DR18, Class 150, ASTM D3139, AWWA C900.
B. Above Ground: 1. Steel pipe, black, Schedule 10, ASTM A53 or A135. 2. Steel pipe, black, Schedule 40, ASTM A53 or A135. 3. Steel pipe with wall thinner than Schedule 10 is not permitted. 4. CPVC pipe is not permitted.
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Below Ground: 1. Ductile iron fittings, ANSI Standard A21.10. 2. PVC Fittings: AWWA C907 PVC injected molded gasketed for pressure applications (150 psi), ASTM D3139.
B. Above Ground: 1. Cast iron threaded, Class 125, 175 psi WOG pressure rating, ANSI B16.4. 2. Cast iron flanged, Class 125, 175 psi WOG pressure rating, ANSI B16.1. 3. 2 inch and smaller sizes, precision cold drawn steel with elastomer O-ring seals, 175 psi CWP pressure rating, UL Listed and FM approved. Equal to Victaulic Pressfit®. 4. 5. Grooved: a. Ductile iron short-pattern with flow equal to standard fittings, 300 psi CWP pressure rating, ASTM Specification A536. b. Fitting, gasket, and coupling shall be furnished by same manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. c. Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic and Gruvlok. d. Reducing couplings will not be permitted. 6. Wrought copper fittings, pressure rated, solder type, ANSI B16.22. 7. Hole cut bolted branch outlets shall be full-bodied outlet. Equal to model 920/920N by Victaulic.
2.3 JOINTS
A. Below Ground: 1. Mechanical joint for ductile iron pressure pipe and fittings; rubber gaskets, ANSI A21.11. 2. Push-fitting bell and spigot joint with gasket, ASTM F477.
B. Above Ground: 1. Screwed joints: Tapered pipe threads, ANSI Standard B1.20.1. 2. Flanged: a. Cast iron, 250 psi WOG pressure rating, ANSI Standard B16.1. b. Square head machine bolts with semi-finished hexagon nuts, ASTM Specification A183. c. Neoprene gasket.
3. Mechanical coupling: a. Grooved couplings shall be of same manufacturer as used for grooved fittings.
15330 - 4 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
b. Ductile iron in conformance with ASTM Specification A536, equal to Victaulic No. 75 or rigid mechanical coupling with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads, installation-ready type. Equal to Victaulic Style 009-EZ or-equal to Victaulic style No. 005, ASTM A-536. 1). Rigid couplings shall be fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset contact. (Tongue and recess type couplings, or any coupling that requires exact gapping of bolt pads on each side of the coupling at specified torque ratings, are not allowed.) c. Gaskets: 1). Wet systems: Grade E EPDM gasket, ASTM Specification D2000. 2). Dry systems: Victaulic "FlushSeal.” d. Rigid or zero flex type couplings shall be used when operating pressures may cause piping to move out of place or sway on hangers. Flexible couplings may be used where piping is properly braced or clamped into rigid position for flexibility and seismic applications.
2.4 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and supports shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory and shall comply with NFPA 13. 1. In grooved installations, use equal to Victaulic Style 009, 005, and 07 rigid couplings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads, which permit support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13.
B. Seismic Supports: 1. In areas classified as seismic by the International Building Code, all sprinkler system piping shall be braced to withstand seismic movement per the requirements of NFPA 13. 2. Pipe sway bracing shall be installed to resist lateral and longitudinal seismic loads and to prevent unrestrained vertical movement per the requirements of NFPA 13. This shall include 4-way bracing of all building risers to the building structure. 3. Flexible couplings shall be installed where required to provide expansion capability, and for earthquake protection per the requirements of NFPA 13. 4. Clearances around all system piping between building components and other trades shall be strictly maintained per the requirements of NFPA 13.
2.5 VALVES
A. All valves shall be UL Listed or FM Approved for application.
B. Gate Valve: Outside screw and yoke (OS&Y), bronze body and trim or ductile iron body bronze mounted and rated for 175 psi non-shock cold water working pressure, equal to Nibco Series 609 or Victaulic Series 771 (grooved ends).
C. Check Valve: 1. Non-slam: 175 psi, iron body, bronze seat, stainless steel clapper and spring with replaceable rubber seal, equal to Nibco series 480. 2. 250 psi, grooved end ductile iron body, welded-in nickel or PPS coated seat, stainless steel spring and shaft, elastomer seal or disc coating, equal to Victaulic Series 717.
3. Swing: 175 psi, iron body, bronze trim, replaceable rubber seat, equal to Nibco series 403.
D. Butterfly Valve: 1. Indicating type: 300 psi WOG, equal to Nibco series 3510 or Victaulic Series 705W (grooved end). a. Operator shall be weatherproof, with factory-wired supervisory switches and
handwheel. 2. Non-indicating type: 175 psi WOG, equal to Nibco series 3510. 3. Lug type: 250 psi non shock cold water, ductile iron body. suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange.
15330 - 5 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Grooved end type: 300 psi non shock cold water, ductile iron body, elastomer coated disc with integrally cast stem, suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure.
E. Test and Drain Valves: 1. Threaded bronze globe type with composition disc, 175 psi WOG, equal to Nibco KT-65 for piping assemblies built on site. 2. Combined test and drain valve, equal to Victaulic style 720 TestMaster II.
F. Drain Valves: 1. Screw-in bonnet bronze globe valves, rated to 175-psi non-shock cold water working pressure. 2. Low point drain valves shall have, in addition, 3/4" brass nipple with 3/4" male hose threads and cap.
G. Indication Signs: 1. All control, drain, and test connection valves shall be provided with permanently marked weatherproof metal or rigid plastic identification signs. 2. The identification sign shall be secured with corrosion-resistant wire, chain, or other approved means. 3. The control valve sign shall identify the portion of the building served.
H. Valves installed in galvanized piping shall be bronze.
I. Acceptable Manufacturers: Central, Nibco, Milwaukee, Mueller, Reliable, Victaulic, Kitz, or Viking, model equal to number listed.
2.6 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges shall be installed in each system riser.
B. Pressure gauges shall be installed above and below each alarm check valve or system riser check valve where such devices are present.
2.7 DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. The double check detector assembly shall consist of two independently operating, spring loaded check valves, two UL/FM, OSY resilient wedge gate valves, and bypass assembly.
B. The bypass assembly consists of a meter, a double check including shutoff valves and required test cocks.
C. Each cam-check shall be internally loaded and provide a positive drip tight closure against reverse flow. Cam-check includes a stainless steel cam arm and spring, rubber faced disc and a replaceable seat.
D. The body shall be manufactured from 300 series stainless steel, 100% lead free, through the water way, with a single two-bolt grooved style access cover.
E. No special tools shall be required for servicing.
F. Double Check Detector Assembly shall be an Ames Fire & Waterworks 3000SS series or approved equal by local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Febco is an approved manufacturer.
G. Install in riser room or concrete vault as noted on plans and required by local Fire Marshal.
2.8 DRY PIPE VALVE
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Viking, Central, Reliable, or Victaulic (grooved end).
B. Each dry pipe valve assembly shall be independent of each other and must contain separate valves and accessories.
C. Dry pipe valve shall be mechanical advantage check valve assembly.
D. Dry valve internal components shall be replaceable without removing the valve from the installed position.
15330 - 6 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. Dry valve shall be externally resettable.
F. Required air pressure shall be 13 psi / 90-kPa.
G. Each system shall include, but not be limited to the following components: 1. Dry pipe valve. 2. Standard dry pipe valve trim. 3. Alarm pressure switch. 4. Supply control valve. 5. Air supervisory pressure switch. 6. Air supply control valve. 7. Electric accelerator for fast response time.
H. Air Compressor: 1. Air compressor shall be UL listed 2125 for dry sprinkler systems. 2. Compressor shall be oil-less, piston type with no lubrication required. 3. Compressor shall be motor mounted with pipe mounting bracket. 4. Air compressor shall be equal to Gast. 5. Water motor alarm gong shall be included with dry pipe valve.
2.9 WATERFLOW ALARM
A. A water motor alarm shall be connected to each alarm valve and shall discharge to a brass alarm gong located on the exterior of the building. The alarm valves shall be Underwriters' Laboratories approved, wet type, connected to water supply and indicated on the Shop Drawings. Each alarm valve shall be provided with a circuit closer. Valves shall conform to the equipment of NFPA 13, complete with retarding chamber and pressure switch.
B. Provide at sprinkler risers, McDonnell UL approved line size water flow alarm switches. See Division 16 for electrical signal connection by Electrical and Fire Alarm Contractors.
2.10 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: 1. UL 405, 175-psig minimum pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connections. 2. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
B. At the low-point near each fire department connection, install a 90-degree elbow with drain connection to allow for system drainage to prevent freezing. Elbow equal to Victaulic #10-DR.
2.11 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Ceilings Areas: Fully Concealed with white caps. Heads shall be quick response type in light hazard areas per NFPA 13.
B. Exposed Areas: Upright type with chrome plated finish.
C. Sidewall Areas: Sidewall type with chrome plated finish.
D. Extended Coverage: Use when necessary due to construction limitations.
E. Dry System Heads: Heads used in dry pipe systems shall be approved by manufacturer for dry system application.
F. Automatic sprinkler heads used under or on finished ceilings or wall shall be equipped with a metallic escutcheon plate of the same finish at the sprinkler head. Utilized recessed escutcheons when possible.
15330 - 7 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Escutcheons and guards shall be listed, supplied, and approved for use with the sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer.
G. Sprinklers shall be glass-bulb type, with hex-shaped wrench boss integrally cast into the sprinkler body to reduce the risk of damage during installation. 1. Wrenches shall be provided by the sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the hex-shaped wrench boss integrally cast in the sprinkler body.
H. Sprinkler head temperature rating shall be for specific area hazard and be based on maximum ambient temperature of the environment per NFPA 13.
I. Sprinkler heads installed in freezers, coolers, or unconditioned medical gas bottle rooms shall be freeze proof pendent or sidewall type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends, remove burrs and bevel or groove plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges, grooved joint couplings or unions.
D. Flush entire system of foreign matter
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems, NFPA 14 for standpipe and hose systems, and NFPA 24 for service mains. The Certified Contractor shall provide proper sizes, materials and installation per approved calculations as required in the appropriate NFPA Standard.
B. Sprinkler risers shall be located within five (5) feet of the building perimeter or as required by local Fire Marshal. Sprinkler water supply pipe shall not be installed beneath building structure beyond this distance. Install concrete thrust blocks at underground pipe change of direction.
C. Provide a water flow switch for each sprinkler zone. Install control valve with supervisor switch and water flow switch in easily accessible locations.
D. Qualified and trained personnel, experienced with the products involved, and the recommended methods of preparation, shall prepare all piping and fittings. All cuts, threads and grooves shall be made according to applicable codes, standards and accepted good practices. Pipe shall be free of damage, flaws and burrs. Threads and grooves shall not be excessively shallow or deep. Fittings shall be made onto pipe no tighter than necessary. Contractor shall replace cracked or broken fittings, without exception. Excess thread sealants and oils shall be removed before shipment to job site.
15330 - 8 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).)
E. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.
F. All penetrations of rated walls, floors, or assemblies shall include fire stopping seal complying with ASTM E814.
G. The Contractor is responsible for all cutting and patching work required for this installation. Locations shall be marked carefully and holes shall be no larger than necessary for the pipe involved. Hole size shall be strictly limited to a size, which can be covered by a standard sized escutcheon. The Contractor at no additional cost to the owner shall patch misaligned and oversized holes. Cutting/drilling of exterior wall shall require the re-insulation and packing of the opening to meet original R-value and prevent air infiltration. Any cutting of structure shall be subject to approval by the Architect. Beams, decks and other structural components shall not be cut or altered in any way unless previously approved.
H. Contractor shall be responsible for all welded joints and any qualifying procedures or certification required for welders and related personnel. Welding methods shall meet or exceed the requirement described in NFPA 13
I. Holes in pipe for welded outlets shall be cut to full inside diameter of fitting, prior to welding in place. Holes shall be free of slag and welding residue, and of smooth, continuous bore. Fittings shall not penetrate internal diameter of run piping. Holes shall be cut by hole saw or other rotary bit. Torch cutting of holes is strictly prohibited.
J. All supports shall be UL listed and comply with NFPA 13. Support all piping from building’s structural elements.
K. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. Entire sprinkler system shall be installed in such a manner so that it can be drained in accordance with NFPA 13. Drains shall be located at suitable points as approved by Architect. No primary or auxiliary drain shall be located in any public area or electrical room. All drains shall discharge into exterior or dedicated plumbing receptors.
L. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. Provide Fire Department test station, piped to drain.
M. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall directly outside sprinkler riser room.
N. Place pipe runs to minimize obstructions with other work. Coordinate with General, Mechanical, and Electrical Contractors.
O. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. Location of exposed pipe in occupied spaces shall be coordinated with architect.
P. Coordinate heads within architectural ceiling grid. Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. Avoid conflict with lights and HVAC diffusers. 1. A stainless steel flexible drop system, equal to Victaulic EX-Flex, may be used to properly locate sprinkler heads. The drop system shall be supplied with required supporting members and bracing.
Q. Do not install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of fluid. Never install sprinklers with cracked bulbs.
R. The sprinkler bulb protector shall be removed by hand after installation. Do not use tools or any other device(s) to remove the protector that could damage the bulb in any way.
S. Apply paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head and cover plates do not receive field paint finish. Remove cover when painting work is complete.
15330 - 9 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
T. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, parking to comply with required NFPA access and to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
U. No work shall be covered or enclosed until inspected, tested, and approved by Architect and authority having jurisdiction. Should any work be concealed before inspection, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover such work and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, provide for all repairs as may be necessary to restore any other affected work to its original and proper condition.
V. Upon completion of the work specified, and at other times during the progress of the work when required, the Contractor shall remove all surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from this work, and shall leave the entire building and involved portions of the site, insofar as the work of these Sections are concerned, in a neat, clean and acceptable condition.
W. The Sprinkler Contractor shall be held responsible during the installation and testing periods of the sprinkler system for any damage to the work of others, to the building, its contents, etc., caused by leaks in any sprinkler equipment, by unplugged or disconnected sprinkler pipes, fittings, etc., or by overflow. Sprinkler Contractor shall pay for necessary replacements or repairs to items damaged by such leakage.
3.3 SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
A. Flushing Connections: Provisions shall be made to facilitate the flushing of the system. A flushing connection shall be provided at the end of each cross main terminating in 2 inch and larger pipe. Each flushing connection shall have a 2 inch capped nipple not less than 4 inches long.
B. Drain Connections: Provisions shall be made to drain all pockets or low points occurring in the piping systems. The two inch system drainpipe shall be arranged to discharge to the exterior of the building unless prohibited by regulatory authorities. The discharge point shall be low on exterior wall and away from normal pedestrian travel paths.
C. Test Connections: The Sprinkler Contractor shall provide a test connection at the highest point in the main portion of each sprinkler system. Each test connection shall be provided with a 1inch pipe and valve. The test pipe shall be connected to a sprinkler pipe at least 1-1/4 inches in size and shall discharge outside the building through a 1/2-inch smooth bore brass outlet where it can easily be seen.
3.4 TESTING AND FLUSHING
A. All piping in this installation shall be thoroughly cleaned and tested during the progress of the work, at the completion of the work, or at other times as may be required. All piping shall be hydrostatically tested per NFPA 13 to meet the approval of the local Fire Department or Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. The Sprinkler Contractor shall complete a standard Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for all above ground piping and forward same to the building owner at completion of all testing. C. No piping shall be concealed before being tested. All joints shall be inspected for leaks during the test, and any leaks, which develop, shall be repaired and the complete test repeated. D. Leaks shall be repaired by disassembly, correction and reassembly only. Caulking of joints will not be permitted and leaking joints must be remade. Stuffing boxes on all valves shall be repacked with new packing and made tight. Systems shall be tested and repaired until all requirements are met. E. Testing shall be done at the expense of the Sprinkler Contractor, with all required equipment
furnished by him.
3.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
15330 - 10 Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
A. Two complete sets of equipment maintenance manuals shall be assembled in 3-ring binders and placed in the sprinkler room. Binders shall include all manufacturer’s cuts and maintenance information on equipment used in this fire protection installation.
B. Equipment shall include: valves, check valves, flow switches, tamper switches, hose equipment and all other relevant fire protection equipment which could require future maintenance.
END OF SECTION
15410 - 1 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install the following as shown on Contract Drawings for a complete, code compliant system. 1. Domestic water systems. 2. Sanitary drainage systems. 3. Natural gas piping systems. 4. Plumbing specialties.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification.
C. Section 15140 – Hangers and Supports
D. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
E. Section 15440 – Plumbing Fixtures.
F. Section 15480 – Domestic Water Heaters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical data for the following: 1. Pipe, fittings, and joints 2. Valves 3. Cleanouts 4. Floor drains and floor sinks 5. Backflow preventers 6. Hydrants 7. Hammer arrestors 8. Trap primers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY SEWER AND SANITARY VENT PIPE, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS
A. Interior and Exterior Underground: 1. Cast iron a. Pipe: Hub and spigot pipe, service weight, ASTM A74. b. Fittings: Hub and spigot fittings, service weight, ASTM A74. c. Joints: Neoprene rubber compression gaskets, ASTM C564. 2. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall bear the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 301 Standard and be listed with NSF International. 3. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) a. Pipe: 1). Schedule 40, Class 12454-B (PVC 1120), ASTM D1785 and ASTM D 2321. 2). DWV pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665. b. Fittings: Socket fitting patterns, ASTM D3311. c. Joints: Primer, ASTM F656; solvent cement, ASTM D2564. d. Buried PVC pipe installations shall comply with ASTM D2321.
15410 - 2 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Interior Above Ground: 1. Cast Iron a. Pipe: Hubless cast iron pipe, CISPI 301. b. Fittings: Hubless cast iron fittings, ASTM A-888, CISPI 301. c. Joints: 1). Heavyweight Couplings: No-hub couplings with 0.060 inch thick stainless steel clamps, ASTM C-1540, Mission Heavyweight, Husky Series 4000 or Clamp-All Hi-Torq 125. 2). Standard Duty Couplings: No-hub couplings with stainless steel clamps, CISPI 310, Mission No-Hub or Clamp-All Hi-Torq 80. 3). All Standard Duty couplings shall meet CISPI 310 and be listed by NSF International. d. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall bear the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 301 Standard and be listed with NSF International. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) a. Pipe: Schedule 40, Class 12454-B (PVC 1120), as identified in ASTM D 1784. All pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. b. Fittings: Drain, waste and vent (DWV) pattern fittings, ASTM D2665; socket fitting patterns, ASTM D3311. Pipe and fittings shall conform to National Sanitary Foundation Standard 14. c. Joints: Primer, ASTM F656; solvent cement, ASTM D2564. d. PVC shall not be used in above ceiling areas utilized as a return air or supply air plenum.
2.2 WATER SERVICE PIPE, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS (Outside Building Perimeter)
A. Underground 2-1/2" and Smaller: 1. Copper Pipe: Copper tube, Type K, soft (annealed) temper, ASTM B88. 2. Copper Fittings: Copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.18; wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.26. 3. Joints: Lead free (<0.2%) solder, ASTM B32, flux, ASTM B813.
B. Underground 3" and Larger: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): C-900 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC), DR18, Class 150, ASTM D3139, AWWA C900 Pipe: 2. PVC Fittings: AWWA C907 PVC injected molded gasketed for pressure applications (150 psi), ASTM D3139. 3. Joints: Push-fitting bell and spigot joint with gasket, ASTM F477.
2.3 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS
A. All domestic water system shall be NSF 61 Compliant for hot and cold domestic water.
B. Buried (interior below slab): 1. Copper Pipe: Copper tube, Type K, soft (annealed) temper, ASTM B88. 2. Tubing shall be continuous with no joints or fittings below slab.
C. Above Ground:
1. Pipe: a. Copper tube, Type L, hard drawn, ASTM B88. b. Stainless steel pipe, Type 316L, ASTM A312, ASTM A778, Schedule 10. 2. Fittings: a. Copper (2-1/2” and Smaller): 1). Cast bronze, solder joint, pressure rated, ANSI B16.18.
2). Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure rated, ANSI B16.22. b. Copper or Bronze Pressure Seal Fittings (2” and Smaller): 1). Acceptable where approved by local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2). Housing: ASTM B 75 Alloy C12200 Copper or Bronze with a minimum of
78-percent copper and a maximum of 15-percent zinc.
15410 - 3 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3). O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM, with compression crimp applied on upstream and downstream side of EPDM seal bead. 4). Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 5). Minimum 200-psig CWP working-pressure rating with a maximum of 250 deg F. 6). Engineered fittings equal to Viega Propress or Nibco Press System. c. Copper (3” and Larger): 1). Wrought copper, ASTM B75 or ASTM B152 and ASME B16.22, roll grooved, copper-tube dimensioned. 2). Copper alloy CDA 836(85-5-5-5), sand cast per ASTM B584 and ASME B16.18, roll grooved, copper tube dimensioned. d. Stainless Steel: 1). Systems shall be NSF 61 Certified for hot and cold domestic water. 2). Socket weld type, couplings and fittings. 3). Victaulic Vic-Press 304 couplings and fittings (2 inch and Smaller). 4). Victaulic ASTM A403 or A312 grooved end fittings. 5). 316 Stainless Steel Pressure Seal Fittings 3. Joints: a. Copper (2 inch and Smaller): Lead free (<0.2%) solder, ASTM B32, flux, ASTM B813. b. Copper (2.5 inch and Larger): 1). Brazed, BcuP-5 type, AWS A5.8, 1250°F minimum melting point. 2). Roll grooved with ductile iron housing couplings, ASTM A536 with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads. Heat-treated carbon steel bolts, ASTM A449 and A183 rated to a minimum 200 psig working pressure, EHP gasket rated to +250 deg F, and enamel coated. Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Victaulic Style 607. Copper-tube dimensions. (Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted). Entire fitting shall be NSF61 classified for potable water use. c. Stainless Steel (2 inch and Smaller): 1). 316 Stainless Steel Pressure Seal Fittings a). Systems shall be NSF 61 Certified for hot and cold domestic water use. b). Acceptable where approved by local Authority Having Jurisdiction. c). Housing: 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A312 or A778.
d). O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM, with compression crimp applied on upstream and downstream side of EPDM seal bead. e). Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. f). Minimum 200-psig CWP working-pressure rating with a maximum of 250 deg F. g). Engineered fittings equal to Viega Propress Stainless or Victaulic
Vic-Press. d. Stainless Steel (2.5 inch and Larger): 1). Systems shall be NSF 61 Certified for hot and cold domestic water use and reated to a minimum 200 psig working pressure.
2). Grooved joint with ductile iron housing couplings, ASTM A536. Heat treated carbon steel bolts, ASTM A449 and A183, EPDM gasket, and
enamel coated. Rigid type, with housing keys designed to clamp the bottom of the groove. Victaulic Style 89 or flexible type Victaulic Style 77 with galvanized coating. 3). Grooved joint with stainless steel housing couplings, ASTM A351.
Stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593, EPDM and gasket. Rigid type, with housing keys designed to clamp the bottom of the groove, Victaulic Style
489, or flexible type Victaulic Style 77S. Entire fitting shall be NSF 61 Certified for hot and cold domestic water use.
15410 - 4 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4). Pipe shall be grooved using a Victaulic grooving tool equipped with RX roll sets, specifically designed for stainless steel pipe. Use rigid type couplings. Use flexible couplings only for accommodating thermal expansion, contraction and/or attenuation.
2.4 HVAC CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE A. Pipe: 1. Copper tube, Type M, hard drawn, ASTM B88. B. Fittings: 1. Cast bronze, solder joint, pressure rated, ANSI B16.18. 2. Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure rated, ANSI B16.22. C. Joints: 1. Copper: Lead free (<0.2%) solder, ASTM B32, flux, ASTM B813.
2.5 NATURAL GAS PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A. Exterior Below Ground: 1. Pipe: Thermoplastic polyethylene tubing, PE 2406 or PE3408, ASTM D1248 and ASTM D3350, SDR-11, rated for 80- psig working pressure at 73°F, ASTM D2513. 2. Fittings: ASTM D2683, socket fusion (2” and smaller), ASTM D3261, butt fusion (2-1/2” and larger). Use transition fitting at joints between polyethylene tubing and steel with protective coating. Transition fittings shall have socket joint on polyethylene tubing side and plain beveled end on steel side. 3. Joints: Socket fusion. 4. Trace Wire: No. 12, copper 600 volt, THHN insulation.
B. Above Ground (2” and Smaller):: 1. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A53, Type F, Schedule 40, carbon steel. 2. Fittings: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 Class 150, black malleable iron, threaded. 3. Joints: Threaded.
C. Above Ground (2-1/2" and Larger): 1. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S, Schedule 40, carbon steel. 2. Fittings: ASTM A234 Grade WPB/ANSI B16.9, Schedule 40, seamless, carbon steel, welded. 3. Joints: Welded.
D. Service Entrance Pipe Covering: 1. Coat service entrance pipe with flexible polymer film with coal tar and synthetic elastomeric coating of 36 mil thickness or extruded high density polyethylene factory applied coating of 30 mil thickness. 2. Fittings shall be wrapped with 10 mil polyethylene tape, ANSI A21.5, double layer, half-lapped. 3. Minimum dielectric strength shall exceed 12 kV. 4. Apply primer below polymer film or polyethylene tape.
2.6 COMPRESSED AIR PIPE, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS
A. Copper (2-1/2” and Smaller): 1. Pipe: Copper tube, Type L, hard drawn, ASTM B88. 2. Fittings: a. Cast bronze, solder joint, pressure rated, ANSI B16.18. b. Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure rated, ANSI B16.22. 3. Joints: Lead free (<0.2%) solder, Bridgit or Silvabrite, ASTM B32, flux, ASTM B813. 4. Nipples: Red brass pipe, threaded.
B. Copper (3” and Larger):
1. Pipe: Copper tube, Type L, hard drawn, ASTM B88. 2. Fittings: a. Cast bronze, solder joint, pressure rated, ANSI B16.18. b. Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure rated, ANSI B16.22.
15410 - 5 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Joints: Brazed, BcuP-5 type, AWS A5.8, 1250°F minimum melting point.
C. Steel (2” and Smaller):: 1. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A53, Type F, Schedule 40, carbon steel. 2. Fittings: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 Class 150, black malleable iron, threaded. 3. Joints: Threaded.
D. Steel (2-1/2" and Larger): 1. Pipe: Carbon steel ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S, Schedule 40, carbon steel. 2. Fittings: a. ASTM A234 Grade WPB/ANSI B16.9, Schedule 40, seamless, carbon steel, welded. b. ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A234 Grade WPB steel; or factory-fabricated steel; grooved ends, equal to Victaulic. 3. Joints: a. Welded. b. Grooved mechanical couplings: Ductile iron, ASTM A536. Fabricated in two parts, securely held together by two or more track head, square or oval neck bolts, ASTM A449 and A183. Gaskets shall be synthetic rubber product recommended by manufacturer for intended use. 1). 2 inch through 12 inch: Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly, with grade EHP gasket rated to +250 deg F / 120 deg C. c. Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads to provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. Victaulic Style 107/07. d. Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Three flexible couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector. The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the vibration. Victaulic Style 177/77. 1). 14 inch through 24 inch: Victaulic AGS series with lead-in chamfer on housing key and wide width FlushSeal gasket. e. Rigid Type: Housing key shall fill the wedge shaped AGS groove and provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. Victaulic Style W07. f. Flexible Type: Housing key shall fit into the wedge shaped AGS groove and allow for linear and angular pipe movement. Victaulic Style W177. 1). Flange Adapter: Flat face, ductile iron housings with elastomer pressure
responsive gasket, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. Victaulic Style 741 / W741.
E. Aluminum Pipe: 1. The pipe shall be of rigid and manufactured in Aluminum alloy 6063-T5 conforming to ASTM B241. The pipe shall be extruded and calibrated within the tolerances required to be used with the quick-connect fittings. The extruded pipe shall conform to
EN755.2, EN755.8 and EN573.3 standards. The exterior will be of blue Qualicoat® blue powder coat lacquer; RAL 5012. 2. Connectors shall be of quick-to-connect type. The connectors shall utilize a gripping ring technology with a half-turn release nut mechanism and shall incorporate a lateral
dismantling feature for the rigid pipe and the fittings. a. Pipe size 1.5 inch pipe size and smaller shall be manufactured in engineering
grade plastic (PA 6.6 or PA 12 + 30% glass fiber reinforced) with gripping teeth manufactured in stainless steel Z10 CN 17-7E2 and with IRHD50 nitrile seals. b. Pipe size 2 inch and 2.5 inch connectors shall be quick-to-connect using a double clamp ring technology with a threaded release nut mechanism. They
shall provide a lateral dismantling feature for the rigid pipe. Connectors shall be manufactured in black surface treated aluminum AS9U3 with a clamp ring
manufactured in aluminum AS9U3 and with IRHD70 nitrile seals.
15410 - 6 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
c. Pipe size 3 inch and 4 inch connector fittings shall be formed from 304 Stainless Steel and conform to ASTM A774 specifications. All fittings shall be connected using clamp and cartridge technology with a reusable mechanical connection. The clamp shall be manufactured of Zinc treated steel with the cartridge manufactured in engineering grade polymer with seals of Nitrile IRHD50. The bracket shall be of a patented design and quick to install by drilling hole(s) on the rigid pipe.3.3.1 The bracket shall be of a single body design and shall incorporate a compact integrated swan neck and an integrated water retention system.
2.7 VALVES
A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES 1. Nibco. 2. Conbraco - Apollo 3. Watts 4. Victaulic 5. Jomar
B. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. National Standard Foundation NFS Standard 61.
C. BALL VALVES: 1. Two piece, full port, forged brass or bronze ball valves with stainless steel stem and trim: Equal to NIBCO Model T-585-80-LF. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig c. CWP Rating: 600 psig . d. Body Design: Two piece steel with threaded body packnut design(no threaded stem designs allowed) with adjustable stem packing. e. Body Material: Bronze ASTM-B584 Alloy C844. f. Ends: Threaded or Solder. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented for expansion. j. Port: Full
D. BUTTERFLY VALVES: 1. Single flange, Class 150, full-lug, high performance butterfly valves: Equal to NIBCO Model LD2000. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-68, API 609 seat pressure and temperature ratings. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: Ductile iron.
e. Stem: One-piece stainless steel. f. Seat: Graphite and modified molded in EPDM seat. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze, offset design 3. Grooved End Butterfly Valves: a. Copper Tubing: Victaulic Series 608. 1). CWP Rating: 300 psig.
2). Body Design: Copper-tube dimensioned grooved ends; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure. 3). Body Material: Cast bronze. 4). Stem: Integrally cast with disc.
5). Disc: Ductile iron. 6). Disc Coating: EPDM or Nitrile to suit application.
15410 - 7 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. BRONZE CHECK VALVES 1. Swing Check Valves: Class 125 bronze swing check valves with nonmetallic PTFE Disc. Product: Equal to NIBCO Model T-413-B . a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Y-pattern Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or Solder. f. Disc: PTFE. 2. Grooved End Bronze Lift Disk Check Valves a. 200 psig CWP cast red bronze body check valve with TFE disc. Product Victaulic PL-510. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Double union in-line, vertical or horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B584, bronze. e. Ends: Permalynx (Push-to-Connect) f. Disc: TFE.
2.8 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Josam 4. Wade 5. Watts 6. Precision Plumbing Products
B. Cleanouts: 1. Finished Floor Cleanouts: Cleanout with cast iron ferrule, adjustable top, nickel-bronze round scoriated cover and frame, bronze taper-thread plug; equal to Josam 55000-1-22/J.R. Smith 4020. 2. Finished Tile Floor Cleanouts: Cleanout with cast iron ferrule, adjustable top, nickel-bronze square scoriated cover and frame, bronze taper thread plug: equal to Josam 55000-SQ-22. 3. Exterior Floor Cleanouts: Cleanout with cast iron ferrule, adjustable top, special duty scoriated cover and frame, bronze taper thread plug; equal to Josam 55000-22. 4. Wall Cleanouts: Cleanout with cast iron counter sunk ferrule, bronze or brass taper-thread plug, secured stainless steel access cover; equal to Josam 58600-CO-22/J.R.
Smith 4452.
C. Floor Drains (Round): 1. Floor drains shall be in accordance with ASME A112.21.1. Provide with bronze grid strainer and caulked or no-hub connection. Floor drains shall be cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, ½” primer tap with plug, bottom outlet and invertible non-puncturing flashing collar with weep holes. Include 5 inch round nickel-brass
strainer. Include trap primer connection; equal to Josam 30000-50-5A/J.R. Smith 2005.
D. Hammer Arrestors: 1. Water hammer arrestors shall be piston-compressed air column type, with sealed air chamber. Install in accessible location or provide access panel: equal to Precision Plumbing Products System Rated Plus.
E. Hydrants: 1. Non-Freeze Wall Hydrants shall include vacuum breaker and backflow preventer. Include brass body construction, chrome plated brass finish, ¾ inch hose thread nozzle, replaceable EPDM seat, one piece valve plunger, mounting box, loose tamper
resistant key. Complies with ASSE 1019; equal to Watts HY42. 2. Non-Freeze Wall Hose Bib with handle. Include brass body, cast iron wheel, ¾” pipe
connection, anti-siphon vacuum breaker equal to Woodford Model 17.
15410 - 8 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Non-Freeze Post Hydrants shall include a metal wheel handle. The valve housing shall include drain holes to fully drain casing when hydrant is shut off. No water shall remain in casing exposed to freezing. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. Equal to JR Smith model 5910.
F. Backflow Preventers: 1. Backflow prevention locations shall comply with International Plumbing Code. 2. Reduced Pressure Zone Assembly (2 inch and under): Bronze RPZ consists of a pressure differential relief valve located in a zone between two positive seating check valves. Include two shutoff ball valves, test cocks, protective strainer. Complies with ASSE 1013: Watts 009-QT-S or equal. 3. Reduced Pressure Zone Assembly (Lager than 2 inch): Cast iron RPZ consists of a pressure differential relief valve located in a zone between two positive seating check valves. Include tow rising stem OS&Y valves, test cocks, protective strainer. Complies with ASSE 1013: Watts 909-OSY. Include flood protection shutdown control valve to prevent excess flow through drain pipe: Watts 113-6RFP or equal. a. Install 4 inch floor sink with trap primer at backflow preventer drain line. 4. Double Check Valve Assembly: Install only where permitted by local authority or noted on drawings. Bronze body, two positive seating check modules with captured springs and rubber seats. Include two shutoff ball valves. Complies with ASSE 1012: Watts 007 or equal. 5. Coffee Maker, Ice Machine, and Carbonated Beverage Machines: Install an ASSE 1022 approved 316 stainless steel dual check valve assembly. Assembly shall be lead free and all components shall be NSF approved. All rubber components shall comply with FDA food additive regulations. Dual check valve shall protect water supply from carbon dioxide gas and carbonated water. Assembly shall include wye pattern inlet strainer. The dual check valve assembly shall be Watts SD-3 or equal. 6. Equipment Dual Check Valves: Install at required equipment connections required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. The dual check backflow preventer shall meet the domestic requirements of ANSI/ASSE Standard 1024, and bear the seal of approval. It shall be bronze-bodied and include not less than one union, with the union nut drilled to accept a tamper-proofing lock wire. A brass identification tag indicating direction of flow shall be securely attached to the valve body by corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners. The dual check shall be Watts Series 7 or equal.
G. Water Pressure Reducing Valves: 1. Pressure Reducing Valves ½” to 1” Pipe Size: a. A Water Pressure Reducing Valve with integral strainer shall be installed in the
water service pipe near its entrance to the building where supply main pressure exceeds 60psi to reduce it to 50psi or lower. b. The valve shall feature a bronze body where suitable for water supply pressures up to 400psi. The combined metal components of the valve contacted by potable water shall contain less than one half of one percent (0.5%) lead by weight.
c. Provision shall be made to permit the bypass flow of water back through the valve into the main when pressures, due to thermal expansion on the outlet side of the valve, exceed the pressure in the main supply. d. Water Pressure Reducing Valve with built-in bypass check valves shall be
acceptable. e. Approved valve shall be listed to ASSE 1003 and IAPMO and certified to NSF
61-8 and CSA B356. f. Valve shall be equal to Watts Regulator Company Series LF N55B-M1.
H. Trap Primer Valves: 1. Pressure activated by 5 to 10 psi pressure drop, provides 5 ounces of water to up to
four traps. Install per manufacturer’s instructions, proper slope, and maximum distances. Provide lockable access panel where necessary: Precision Plumbing
Products Model P1 or equal. 2. Single Trap Priming Below Lavatory:
15410 - 9 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
a. Tailpiece Trap Priming Assembly includes ½” stainless steel flexible tubing, wall escutcheons to drain trap. Precision Plumbing Products Model LTP-1500. b. Under-Lav Trap Primer Valve installed off cold water angle stop. Includes internal vacuum breaker. Precision Plumbing Products Model ULP-500LP. 3. Flow activated trap primer device. Precision Plumbing Products Model Prime-Pro. 4. Flush valve activated trap primer device. Flush valve tube and connection equal to Precision Plumbing Products model FVP-1VB.
I. Trap Guards: 1. Where approved by local Authority Having Jurisdiction, a trap guard may be used in lieu of a trap primer valve. 2. Trap guard shall be a normally closed elastomeric device utilized to prevent the evaporation of the trap seal. Trap guard shall prevent sewer gases from backing up into habitable areas. Trap guard shall open with fluid flow to allow liquid drainage to flow through and into building drain. 3. Device shall be equal to Trapguard as manufactured by Provent Systems, Inc.
J. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: 1. Thermostatic tempering valve shall be constructed of solid brass. The valve shall feature advanced paraffin-based actuation technology and union connections for ease of maintenance. 2. All internal components shall be corrosion-resistant. 3. Valve shall feature integral checks to prevent cross-flow and inlet screens to filter out debris. 4. The valve shall be CSA B125 certified, ASSE 1016 and ASSE 1070 listed. 5. Control temperature shall be adjustable between 80°F - 120°F (27 - 49°C). 6. The valve shall feature a vandal-resistant lockable handle to prevent tampering. 7. Mixing valves serving local plumbing fixtures shall have a capacity of 12.0 gpm at 45psi differential. Valve shall perform to a minimum flow of 0.5 gpm to ASSE 1016 and ASSE 1070. Local mixing valve shall be Powers' HydroGuard Model LM495 or equal. 8. Mixing valves serving water heater shall a capacity of 23.0 gpm at 45psi differential. Valve shall perform to a minimum flow of 0.5 gpm to ASSE 1016 and ASSE 1070. Local mixing valve shall be Powers' HydroGuard Model LM490 Series or equal. Refer to drawings for pipe connection size. 9. Central Hi/Lo Thermostatic Mixing Valve: a. Thermostatic tempering valve shall be constructed of solid brass. The valve shall feature advanced paraffin-based actuation technology and union
connections for ease of maintenance. b. All internal components shall be corrosion-resistant. c. Valve shall feature integral checks to prevent cross-flow and inlet screens to filter out debris. d. The valve shall be CSA B125 certified, ASSE 1016 and ASSE 1070 listed. e. Control temperature shall be adjustable between 80°F - 120°F (27 - 49°C).
f. The valve shall feature a vandal-resistant lockable handle to prevent tampering. g. Lo mixing valve shall provide accurate temperature control down to 1.0 gpm. h. Central Mixing valve shall a capacity of 27.0 gpm at 10 psi differential. Valve shall perform to a minimum flow of 1.0 gpm to ASSE 1016 and ASSE 1070.
Local mixing valve shall be Powers' HydroGuard Model XP SH1432 Hi/Lo or equal. Refer to drawings for pipe connection size.
10. Mixing valve pipe connections shall be installed strictly per the manufacturer’s instructions. Connect domestic cold water and domestic hot water.
K. Natural Gas Pressure Regulators 1. Outdoor and Indoor Vented Applications:
a. Valve Body: Cast iron with 125 psig working pressure. b. Spring and Lower Case: Die cast aluminum.
c. Orifice: Stainless Steel. d. Fulcrum Pin: Aluminum or brass.
15410 - 10 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
e. Valve Seat/Stem: One piece molded Buna-N seat pad and fiberglass reinforced nylon stem. f. Throat Support Stem Guide: Cast aluminum integral to lower case. g. Diaphragm Plate: Plated steel. h. Diaphragm: Nylon fabric reinforced Buna-N. i. Vent and Valve: Precision fit polyethylene valve and seat. j. Corrosion Protection: Cases dip primed chromate conversion coating and topcoat enamel. k. Internal Relief Valve: Set to relieve at approximately 7 inch WC above normal outlet pressure setting. l. Individual or branch line pressure regulation shall be equal to Sensus (formally Rockwell) model 143-80. m. Building service pressure regulation shall be equal to Sensus model 243. n. Contractor shall select unit capacity and spring range based on gas flow and pressure data on Contract Drawings. o. Install full size vent to exterior. p. Install per manufacturer’s instructions and provide gas shut off valve prior to regulator.
2.9 ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACE
A. All water piping subject to freezing, install self-regulating electrical heat trace cable on exposed pipes. Pipes shall be insulated.
B. Heat trace shall be single pass 5 watts per linear foot of pipe. Provide the following components, equal to .Raychem, for a complete operating system: 1. Heater Cable. 2. Power Connection Kit 3. Junction Box (NEMA 4X). 4. Inline/Tee Splice Kit 5. Attachment Tape. 6. Caution Labels. 7. Electronic Digital Controller with 30mA ground fault protection and alarm contacts. 8. Obtain all heat tracing system cable & components from a single source from a single manufacturer.
C. Heat trace equipment and installation shall be UL Listed.
D. Heat Trace controller shall have integral Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP), 30 mA. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor. 1. Heat Trace controller shall include auxiliary dry contacts for alarm notification to the Building Automation System. 2. Controller shall be equal to Raychem model ECW-GF.
E. The self-regulating heating cable shall include: 1. Two 16 AWG nickel plated bus wires. 2. Radiation cross linked polyolefin heating core. 3. Radiation cross linked polyolefin primary dielectric insulation.
4. 14 AWG tinned copper metallic braid. 5. Polyolefin outer jacket.
F. Heating cable shall be sized for freeze protection according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
G. Electrical Connections: 1. Provide manufacturer’s electrical connection, end seal, splice and tee kits. Connection
kits shall not require the removal of core material from around bus wires (RayClic or equal). 2. Heating line voltage shall operate without the use of transformers. 3. Heating cable circuit shall be protected by a ground fault device for equipment
protection.
15410 - 11 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Component enclosures shall be NEMA 4X. 5. All electrical connections shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor.
H. Installation: 1. Install electrical heat trace system per manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Wrap cable around valves and fittings. 3. Set electronic digital controller at 40 degrees (adjustable) for freeze protection.
I. Manufacturer’s Warranty 1. Manufacturer shall warrant all goods listed below for two (2) years from date of purchase against faulty workmanship and use of defective materials when such goods are properly installed, operated, and maintained according to product documentation. a. Heating cables, connection kits & accessories b. Thermostats, controllers, panels contactors, sensors and accessories
J. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Raychem 2. Thermon
K. Qualifications and Certifications: 1. Manufacturer to show minimum of ten (10) years of experience in manufacturing electric self-regulating heating cables. 2. Manufacturer shall be ISO-9001 registered. 3. Manufacturer to provide products consistent with UL 515, CSA 22.2 No 130-03 and IEEE 515.1 requirements. 4. The system (heating cable, connection kits, and controller) shall be UL Listed, CSA Certified and FM Approved for freeze protection of aboveground water lines.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with applicable codes, manufacturer's instructions and standard industry practices.
B. Slope horizontal sanitary drain lines as noted on Contract Drawings with minimum of 1/8" per foot, except piping 2" diameter or smaller which shall be run at minimum 1/4" per foot slope.
C. Install piping parallel with building lines and at heights, which do not obstruct any architectural feature. Install overhead piping as high as possible.
D. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).
E. All penetrations of rated walls, floors, or assemblies shall include fire stopping seal complying with ASTM E814.
F. Exterior buried pipes shall be installed below the local frost line.
G. Interior buried water pipes below building slab shall be continuous tubing with no joints or fittings.
H. Vent pipe for complete drainage by gravity to waste pipes. Vent terminations shall be set true and level. Coordinate with roofing contractor to prevent damage to roofing membrane. Flashing shall be in accordance with requirements of roofing manufacturer.
15410 - 12 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
I. Offset or reroute piping as required to clear interferences. Coordinate locations of plumbing piping with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances.
J. Do not route piping through electrical rooms and avoid routing above panel boards, or switchboards.
K. Set floor drains true and level and protect properly throughout construction.
L. Set roof drains and overflow drains true and level. Coordinate closely with roofing contractor to prevent damage to roofing membrane. Flash shall be as required by roofing manufacturer.
M. Trap each fixture and piece of equipment requiring sanitary drainage connections. Trap seals shall be standard depth, except when deep seals are required by code. Traps shall be set true and level and located within the limits of code requirements.
N. Provide dielectric, non-conducting connections when joining dissimilar metals.
O. No direct contact of dissimilar metals. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact from pipe to hanger.
P. Install cleanouts at locations shown on the Contract Drawings and as required by Plumbing Code. This includes change of directions, beginning of drain line, base of stacks, minimum each 100 feet, etc. Install double cleanouts at each drain exit point of building.
Q. Install hammer arrestors at all flush valve and quick closing valve locations.
R. Install isolation valves on water piping system at branch line take-offs.
S. Install shut off valve in water supply pipe prior to all hose bibs and hydrants.
T. Install shut off valve at each equipment connection.
U. Install gas shut off valve at each gas meter, building pipe entrance, pressure regulator, and at each equipment connection.
V. Install natural gas regulator when required to provide manufacturer’s equipment inlet gas pressure. Vent all interior gas regulators full size to the exterior.
W. Do not install natural gas pipe below a building or structure.
X. Install check valves in hot and cold water supply lines serving mop sinks, hand spray hoses, mixing faucets, and other devices which may result in cross contamination between hot and cold water systems.
Y. Install trap primer valve to serve all floor drains and hub drains.
Z. Install pressure reducing valves on inlet water supply line and elsewhere as required to regulate system pressure.
AA. Install access panels for valves at all hard surface locations.
3.2 BACKFILL
A. Loose earth free from rocks, broken concrete, and other rubble, shall be placed in the trench in 6-inch layers and tamped in place until the crown of the pipe is covered by 12 inches of tamped earth. The backfill under and beside the pipe shall be compacted for pipe support. Backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe so that the pipe remains aligned. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 TESTING
A. Sanitary Sewer System: Gravity sewer system tests shall consist of plugging the end of the building sewer at the point of connection with the public sewer, filling the building sewer with water, testing with not less than a 10-foot head of water above highest point of system and maintaining such pressure for 60 minutes
15410 - 13 Plumbing Piping Systems Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Domestic Water System: The entire water system shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure not less than the working pressure of the system; or by an air test of not less than 50 psi for a continuous period of 24 hours. The water utilized for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply.
C. Natural Gas System: The entire natural gas system shall be tested and proved tight under a air pressure not less than 150% the working pressure of the system or 50 psi for a continuous period of 24 hours. The water utilized for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply.
3.4 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
A. New potable water systems shall be purged of deleterious matter and disinfected prior to utilization. 1. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet. 2. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million (50mg/L) of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200mg/L) of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours. 3. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system. 4. Disinfection procedures shall comply with International Plumbing Code.
3.5 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A. Sanitary Building Sewer 1. Coordinate sanitary sewer building drain connection locations and elevations with utility contractor and Civil plans. 2. Field measure and coordinate exact location and elevation for connection to existing sanitary sewer system. 3. Provide two way cleanouts at each connection point to site sanitary sewer system.
B. Domestic Water Supply 1. Prior to connecting to building, purge municipal water supply by discharging water at nearby fire hydrant until the water is clean and free of debris. 2. Install building shut off valve. 3. Provide backflow prevention as required. 4. Provide pressure reducing valves if supply water pressure is greater than 80 psig.
C. Natural Gas Service 1. Coordinate new natural gas serving and meter location with local gas company. 2. Plumbing contractor shall install all gas piping after meter. 3. Provide pressure regulators as noted on Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
15440 - 1 Plumbing Fixtures Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures and accessories for a complete, functional, code compliant system.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME A112.19.2 and 19.6 for vitreous china fixtures.
B. Drinking fountains and water coolers shall conform to NSF 61, Section 9.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Mop Sinks 1. Crane/Fiat
B. Electric Water Coolers 1. Elkay 2. Halsey Taylor 3. Oasis
C. Emergency Eye Washes 1. Bradley 2. Guardian
D. Trim 1. Chicago Faucet 2. American Standard 3. Elkay 4. Delta Commercial 5. Symmons 6. Powers 7. T&S Brass 8. McGuire Manufacturing 9. Moen Commercial
2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1. Plumbing fixtures specified on the drawings.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture per manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location, countertop width (front to back) and size fixtures and openings prior to ordering.
C. Install fixtures level and secure fixtures in place with proper support. Seal fixtures to wall and surface with color matching sealant.
D. Install check valves on the hot and cold water connection to the following fixture types to prevent cross contamination: 1. Mop sinks. 2. Hand held spray hoses.
15440 - 2 Plumbing Fixtures Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. All fixtures that may cause hot and cold water cross contamination.
3.2 FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Details for exact fixture mounting heights and clearances.
B. In the absence of Architectural fixture mounting height information, follow the following Standard and Adult Accessible Mounting Height Table:
Standard ADA Adult ADA
Fixture Mounting Height Mounting Height Notes
Water Closets 15 inches to top of seat 17 to 19 inches top of seat Lever opposite grab bars
Urinals 22 inches to top of rim 17 inches to top of rim
Lavatories & Sinks
36 inches to top of lavatory basin rim or sink counter height. 34 inches to rim or counter Insulate exposed drain and supplies
Water Coolers 38 inches top of rim 36 inches top of spout Bi-level, cane apron.
1. Table is an installation guide. Refer to Architectural Drawings for exact plumbing fixture mounting heights. 2. Refer to American Disabilities Act for access clearance, knee clearance and all other installation requirements.
3.3 Rough-In Schedule:
Fixture Waste Vent Cold Water Hot Water
Water Closet (flush valve) 4" 2" 1" --
Urinal 2" 1-1/2" 3/4" --
Lavatory 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2"
Sink 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2"
Water Cooler 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2" -
Shower 2” 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2"
Mop Sink 3" 2" 3/4" 3/4"
END OF SECTION
15480 - 1 Domestic Water Heaters Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15480
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install domestic water heaters as scheduled on Contract Drawings as part of a complete, functional, code compliant system.
B. All wetted materials shall be FDA approved for potable water use.
1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Underwriters’ Laboratories: All equipment shall be UL listed and include affixed label.
B. International Plumbing Code.
C. International Mechanical Code.
D. International Energy Conservation Code.
E. American Gas Association.
F. National Fire Protection Association.
G. ASHRAE 90.1.
H. U.S. Food and Drug Administration.
I. American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASME Standards.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall guarantee product performance a period of two (2) years after date of owner’s acceptance.
B. Tank type water heaters shall have a three (3) year manufacturer guarantee that the tank will not leak or the water heater shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER
A. The tankless electric water heater shall be equipped with a bare wire nichrome type heating element housed in fiberglass reinforced high temperature plastic containment. The housing of the unit shall be made of high impact polycarbonate plastic.
B. The flow switch that operates the heating element shall be of the mechanical pressure differential type. The unit shall be equipped with a safety high-limit switch with automatic reset. The water connections shall be designed for standard 9/16"-24 flexible hose type connectors.
C. The unit shall ship with a AWG #12 wire harness with a length of 2 ft.
D. Mount unit on wall with rubber grommets to reduce vibration.
E. Instant water heater shall include manufacturer’s ASSE 1070 mixing valve.
F. Electric instantaneous water heater shall be equal to Emax model MT004120T.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Eemax 2. Chronomite 3. Stiebel-Eltron
15480 - 2 Domestic Water Heaters Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.2 POTABLE WATER EXPANSION TANKS
A. Expansion tanks shall be rated for potable water. Pressure rating shall be 150 psi. The potable water expansion tank shall be of drawn steel construction. It shall have a Butyl diaphragm separating the air chamber from the water containing chamber. Inlet connector shall be brass. Materials of manufacture for the diaphragm shall be FDA approved for potable water. Watts model DET or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Water heater installation and all piping shall comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Install ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. Route copper drain pipe to open site over floor drain or mop sink with splash guard. Exterior locations shall be 6 inches above finished grade with 90 degree elbow pointed downward.
C. Install shut off ball valves and dielectric unions at water supply inlet and hot water outlet connections.
D. Install condensate drain per manufacturer’s instructions.
E. Provide ASSE 1070 mixing valve at each sink/lavatory to limit supply water temperature to 110 degrees Fahrenheit unless otherwise noted on Contract Drawings. 1. Connect domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping strictly per manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Maintain manufacturer’s listed clearances. Allow sufficient clearance for inspection, servicing, repair, replacement, and visibility of all gauges.
G. Water heaters installed in areas with an ignition source, such as garages and manufacturing areas, shall be a minimum 18 inches above finished grade. Tank type water heaters shall be mounted on a non-combustible platform.
H. Install expansion tank rated for potable water. Expansion tank pressure rating shall be equal or greater to that of the water heater. Refer to Contract Drawings for tank size.
3.2 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Install, locate and pipe expansion tanks per manufacturer’s instructions. Install shut off valve between the tank and the system to isolate for charging. When charging is complete, open valve and remove handle.
END OF SECTION
15570 - 1 Gas-Fired Makeup Air Units Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15570
GAS FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install natural gas fired make-up air units as scheduled on Contract Documents for a complete, functioning, code compliant system. 1. Roof Mounted Direct-Fired Make-up Air Units.
1.2 REGULATORY
A. International Mechanical Code.
B. International Fuel Gas Code.
C. American Gas Association.
D. Underwriter’s Laboratories: Unit shall include affixed label.
E. Make-up air unit shall be ETL listed as follows: 1. ANSI Z83.4 for 100% make-up systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF MOUNTED DIRECT FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS
A. General: 1. Direct fired Make-Up Air Unit shall be 100% outside air type with no recirculation as scheduled on Contract Drawings. 2. Unit shall have Horizontal configuration. 3. Unit shall be rated for outdoor, roof mounted installation. Include manufacturer’s roof curb. 4. Unit shall be natural gas, indirect fired type.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer’s 1. Greenheck. 2. Captive Aire 3. Reznor 4. Sterling 5. Other manufacturer’s pre-approved by Engineer prior to bidding.
C. Casing: 1. Unit shall be of internal frame type construction of galvanized steel. All frames and panels shall be G90 galvanized steel. 2. Where top panels are joined there shall be a standing seam to insure positive weather protection. All metal-to-metal surfaces exposed to the weather shall be sealed, requiring no caulking at job site. All components shall be easily accessible through removable doors. 3. Unit casing shall be double wall with 1 inch internal fiberglass insulation. Insulation in accordance with NFPA 90A and tested to meet UL 181 erosion.
D. Direct Gas Fired Burner: 1. Shall be ETL Certified as a component of the unit. 2. Shall have an integral combustion gas blower. 3. Shall have fault sensors to provide fault conditions to optional digital controller or building controls.
15570 - 2 Gas-Fired Makeup Air Units Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Shall have 4-pass tubular heat exchangers, constructed of aluminized steel. Heat exchanger tubes shall be installed on the vest plate by means of swaged assembly, welded connections are not acceptable. Heat exchanger tubes shall be supported by a minimum of two fabricated assemblies that support the tubes and also permit expansion and contraction of the tubes. 5. Heat exchanger shall have a 5 year extended warranty. 6. Furnace control shall be single furnace with control as scheduled on Contract Drawings. a. Shall be encased in a weather-tight metal housing with intake air vents. Large, metal lift-off or hinged door shall provide easy access to the enclosed vest plate, control circuitry, gas train, burner assembly and exhaust blower.
E. Fan Section: 1. Centrifugal fans shall be double width, double inlet. 2. Fan and motor shall be mounted on a common base and shall be internally isolated. 3. All blower wheels balanced. 4. Ground and polished steel fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently lubricated ball bearings (up to size 118) or ball bearing pillow blocks (size 120 and larger). 5. Bearings shall be a minimum (L10) life in excess of 100,000 hours at maximum cataloged speeds.
F. Filter Section: 1. Filters shall be mounted in a V-bank arrangement such that velocities across the filters do not exceed 550 feet per minute. 2. Filters shall be easily accessible through a removable access panel.
G. Motors and Drives: 1. Motors shall be energy efficient, complying with EPACT standards, for single speed ODP and TE enclosures. 2. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty type, matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. 3. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. 4. Pulleys shall be cast and have machined surfaces, 10 horse power and less shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley.
H. Electrical: 1. All internal electrical components shall be prewired for single point power connection. 2. All electrical components shall be UL listed, recognized or classified where applicable and wired in compliance with the National Electrical Code. 3. Control center shall include variable frequency drive or motor starter (as scheduled),
control circuit fusing, control transformer for 24 VAC circuit, integral disconnect switch and terminal strip. 4. Contactors, Class 20 adjustable overload protection and single phase protection shall be standard.
I. Variable Frequency Drive: 1. Include factory variable frequency drive where scheduled on Contact Drawings.
J. Controls: 1. Unit shall include internal control panel. 2. Unit factory controls shall include the following: a. Transformer for120 volt control power supply. b. Discharge Temperature Control with factory discharge air temperature sensor. c. Freeze Protection with discharge duct stat with a timer to prevent discharge of
cold air into building. d. Inlet air sensor to de-energize gas system if inlet air is above desired supply setpoint.
15570 - 3 Gas-Fired Makeup Air Units Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install gas fired Make-Up Air Units per manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Maintain manufacturer’s required clearance from combustibles.
C. Maintain manufacturer’s required clearances for maintenance access and filter changes.
D. Roof mounted units shall installed level on manufacturer’s roof curb.
E. Install flexible duct connection to unit.
F. Coordinate with plumbing contractor for natural gas connection.
END OF SECTION
15580 - 1 Gas Fired Heaters Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15580
GAS FIRED HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install natural gas fuel fired heaters as scheduled on Contract Documents for a complete, functioning, code compliant system.
1. Gas-Fired Radiant Tube Heaters
1.2 REGULATORY
A. International Mechanical Code.
B. International Fuel Gas Code.
C. American Gas Association.
D. Underwriter’s Laboratories: Unit shall include affixed label.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW INTENSITY INFRA RED TUBE HEATERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Re-verber Ray 2. Others pre-approved by Engineer.
B. Construction: 1. Heater’s control housing shall be totally enclosed with a corrosion resistant enameled steel exterior. The controls shall be easily serviceable by removing one panel. The main burner assembly shall be constructed of stainless steel. 2. Heater’s combustion chamber shall be 4 inch O.D. 16 gage aluminized with titanium coated (150-200MBH) or aluminized coated steel, finished with a high emissivity rated, corrosion resistant, black coating. 3. Heater’s radiant emitter tube shall be 4 inch O.D. 16 gage.aluminized steel finished with a high emissivity rated, corrosion resistant, black coating. 4. The heater’s combustion chamber and radiant emitter tube shall incorporate a 4 inch slip-fit, interlocking connection in which the upstream tube slides into the next tube and is held by a bolted clamp. 5. The silicon carbide igniter shall be readily accessible and serviceable without the use of tools. 6. Reflectors shall be 0.025 polished aluminum with a multifaceted design which includes reflector end caps. Reflectors shall be rotatable from 0 to 45 degrees when required. The heater’s reflector hanging system shall be designed to permit expansion while minimizing noise and/or rattles. Reflectors shall be assembled to the heater without the use of tools. 7. The heaters shall utilize a downstream turbulator baffle for maximum thermal efficiency. 8. Heaters shall be equipped with a sight glass allowing a visual inspection of igniter and burner operation from the floor. 9. The two-stage radiant tube heaters shall be designed such that outside combustion air may be supplied without the use of additional supply fans. An air intake collar shall be supplied as part of the burner control assembly to accept a 4 inch O.D. supply duct.
C. Burner: 1. The two-stage radiant tube heater’s normal sequence of operation shall include a defined input differential. Heater must be CSA Design Certified to operate at an input differential of at least 30% between the low fire and high fire modes. 2. Heaters shall be equipped with a direct silicon carbide ignition system with a three (3)-time ignition trial to sensing mode and an infinite trial after sensing mode. Power supplied to
15580 - 2 Gas Fired Heaters Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
each burner shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. Flame sensing shall be via an independent sensing rod and circuit. 3. The control assembly shall be Design Certified by CSA, shall provide main burner regulation, and shall be of the redundant type. 4. Heater controls shall include a safety differential pressure switch to monitor combustion air flow, so as to provide complete burner shutdown due to insufficient combustion air or flue blockage. 5. The heater shall incorporate a self-diagnostic ignition module, include an external LED readout display, and recycle the heater after an inadvertent shutdown. 6. The heater’s control system shall be designed to shut off the gas flow to the main burner in the event either a gas supply or power supply interruption occurs. The heater’s blower motor shall be thermally protected and the motor’s impeller shall be balanced. 7. The heater’s air flow control system shall provide a 45 second pre-purge prior to initiating burner operation and a 90 second post-purge upon completion, effectively removing all products of combustion from heat exchanger and/or radiant tubes. 8. Heater control assembly shall include staging indicator lights that define the units operating input ranges. 9. No condensation shall form as a result of combustion in the combustion chamber or radiant tubes while at operating temperatures. 10. The thermostats shall be two-stage operating on 24 volts. 11. Total heater shutdown shall occur in the event of circuit control lockout, including burner operation and combustion air blower. An interruption of power (reset thermostat) will restart the firing sequence. 12. The heater controls shall provide a 90 second post-purge as an integral part of the control assembly.
D. Clearances: 1. Minimum clearance from combustibles on each side shall be per manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Maintain manufacturer’s clearance to access panels for maintenance. 3. Mount heater above manufacturer’s minimum recommended height.
E. Support: 1. Suspend from chains with rigid connection to structure to prevent swinging.
F. Combustion Air and Vent Piping: 1. Install PVC vent pipe through roof or sidewall as shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Where required, install combustion air intake pipe through roof or sidewall as shown on Contract Drawings.
3. Discharge vent pipe shall be double wall Type ‘B’ vent. Provide roof cap or sidewall cap as shown on Contract Drawings. 4. All piping shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install gas fired heaters per manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Maintain manufacturer’s required clearance from combustibles and minimum mounting heights.
END OF SECTION
15651 - 1 Refrigerant Piping Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15651
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install all refrigerant piping as required for complete, functional, code compliant HVAC system.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI B16.22: Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
B. ASTM B88: Seamless Copper Water Tube.
C. ASTM B280: Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
D. ASHRAE 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. ASTM B88 Type L hard drawn copper tube, cleaned and capped in accordance with ASTM B280, and marked "ACR", with ANSI B16.22 wrought copper or forged brass solder-type fittings.
B. Use only new material, free of defects and scale, and meeting the latest revision of ASTM specifications as listed in this specification.
2.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING ACCESSORIES
A. Provide all refrigerant piping specialties with a maximum working pressure of full vacuum to 450 psig and a maximum working temperature of 225 deg F. For systems using R-410A, provide all refrigerant piping specialties with a maximum working pressure of full vacuum to 850 psig and a maximum working temperature of 225 deg F.
B. Flexible pipe connectors: Double braided bronze hose flexible pipe connectors with solder end connections.
C. Filter Dryers: For circuits 15 tons and over provide angle pattern filter dryers with replaceable core. For circuits below 15 tons provide straight pattern filter dryers without replaceable core.
D. Sight glasses: Two piece brass construction with solder end connections. Include color indicator for sensing moisture.
E. Solenoid Valves: Two way normally closed with two piece brass body, full port, stainless steel plug, stainless steel spring, teflon diaphragm and solder end connections. Provide replaceable coil assembly.
F. Hot Gas Bypass Valves: Provide with integral solenoid valve, external equalizer connection and adjustable pilot assembly.
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Brass body, bronze disc, neoprene seat, bronze bonnet, stainless steel spring and solder end connections.
H. Charging Valves: Provide ¼” SAE brass male flare access ports with finger tight, quick seal caps. Provide 2-inch long copper extension sections.
I. Check valves: Spring loaded type with bronze body, bronze disc, neoprene seat, bronze bonnet, stainless steel spring and solder end connections.
15651 - 2 Refrigerant Piping Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All refrigerant piping shall be sized and installed per manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences.
C. Slope horizontal pipe in direction of refrigerant flow. Slope hot gas pipe away from compressor. Slope suction pipe toward compressor.
D. Support all pipe not more than 8 foot spacing and anchor properly.
E. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panel boards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment
F. Install all valves and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified and/or detailed. Make connections to all equipment installed by others where that equipment requires the piping services indicated in this section.
G. All solder joints to be ASTM Grade 4 or 5 and have a melting point of approximately 1250 degrees F. Solder impurities shall not exceed 0.15%. Tubing to be new and delivered to the job site with the original mill end caps in place. Clean and polish all joints before soldering. Avoid prolonged heating and burning during soldering. Purge all lines with nitrogen during soldering. Provide manual shut-off and check valves as required.
H. No refrigerant is to be vented directly to the atmosphere except that which may escape through leaks in the system during leak testing. During evacuation procedures, use equipment designed to recover and allow recycling of the refrigerant.
I. Leak test the system by charging the system to a pressure of 10 psig with an HFC refrigerant, with the compressor suction and discharge valves closed and with all other system valves open. Increase pressure to 300 psig with dry nitrogen. Rap all joints with a mallet and check for leaks with an electric leak detector having a certified sensitivity of at least one ounce per year. Seal any leaks that may be found and retest.
J. After completion of the leak test, evacuate the system with a vacuum pump to an absolute pressure not exceeding 1500 microns while the system ambient temperature is above 60°F. Break the vacuum to 2 psig with the refrigerant to be used in the system. Repeat the evacuation process, again breaking the vacuum with refrigerant. Install a drier of the required size in the liquid line, open the compressor suction and discharge valves, and evacuate to an absolute pressure not exceeding 500 microns. Leave the vacuum pump running for not less than two hours without interruption. Raise the system pressure to 2 psig with refrigerant and remove the vacuum pump.
K. Charge refrigerant directly from original drums through a combination filter-drier. Each drier may be used for a maximum of three cylinders of refrigerant and then must be replaced with a fresh drier. Charge the system by means of a charging fitting in the liquid line. Weigh the refrigerant drum before charging so that an accurate record can be kept of the weight of refrigerant put in the system. If refrigerant is added to the system through the suction side of the compressor, charge in vapor form only.
L. Install closed cell insulation on all refrigerant pipes.
END OF SECTION
15675 - 1 Ductless AC Split System Units Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15675
DUCTLESS AC SPLIT SYSTEM UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install duct-less split air conditioning systems as scheduled on Contract Drawings. System shall consist of a ceiling or wall mounted indoor fan coil unit, outdoor condensing unit, and controller.
B. System shall include dehumidification feature.
C. Refrigerant shall be R410A.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and shall bear the ETL label.
B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).
C. The units shall be rated in accordance with Air-conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute’s (AHRI) Standard 240 and bear the AHRI Certification label.
D. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001, which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO).
E. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. Both liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor units.
F. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor section.
G. System efficiency shall meet or exceed 14.5 SEER when part of a 1:1 (indoor/outdoor) system.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. 15651 – Refrigerant Piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s product data and performance for each system.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. The units shall have a manufacturer’s parts and defects warranty for a period one (1) year from date of installation. The compressor shall have a warranty of 6 years from date of installation. If, during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the discretion of the manufacturer. This warranty does not include labor.
15675 - 2 Ductless AC Split System Units Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
A. Mitsubishi
B. Daikin
C. LG
D. Samsung
2.2 WALL MOUNTED DUCT-LESS INDOOR UNIT
A. Indoor Unit Cabinet: 1. The indoor casing shall have a white finish. 2. Multi directional drain connection and refrigerant piping, offering three (3) direction pipe alignments for all refrigerant piping and two (2) direction pipe alignments for condensate draining shall be standard. 3. Provide a metal back mounting bracket that secures the indoor unit firm to the wall.
B. Indoor Fan: 1. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with a line-flow fan direct driven by a single motor. 2. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and be powered by a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the airflow direction from left to right. 4. Units having capacity greater than 18,000 BTUH shall have a wide vane feature to distribute airflow over a 150 degree angle from right to left to provide comfort over a wider area. 5. An integral, motorized, multi-position, horizontal air sweep flow louver shall provide for uniform air distribution, up and down. 6. The indoor fan shall operate at one of three (3) selectable speeds: High, Medium and Low.
C. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of easily removed disposable pleated type.
D. Evaporator Coil: 1. The indoor unit coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner groves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A sloped, corrosion resistant condensate pan with drain shall be provided under the coil.
E. Control: 1. The unit shall have a wireless controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The wireless controller shall have a Power On/Off switch, Mode Selector – Cool, Dry, Heat, Auto Modes, Temperature Setting, Timer Control, Fan Speed Select and Auto Vane selector. 3. The indoor unit shall perform Self-diagnostic Function and Check Mode switching. 4. Temperature changes shall be by 1ºF increments with a range of 59 - 89ºF. 5. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of sensing return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from the wireless or a wired controller, providing emergency operation and
controlling the outdoor unit. 6. The system shall be capable of automatically restarting and operating at the previously selected conditions when the power is restored after power interruption.
15675 - 3 Ductless AC Split System Units Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
7. Control system shall control the continued operation of the air sweep louvers, as well as provide On/Off, System/Mode function.
2.3 CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNIT
A. Indoor Unit: 1. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Indoor unit shall include factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The 4-way supply air flow can be field modified to 3-way and 2-way airflow to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations. 5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold resistant filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 21 inches of lift. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.
B. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. Three auto-swing settings shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two sides allowing for simpler corner installation. 4. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting supply air. 5. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. 6. Provide optional outside air duct connection kit where outside air is scheduled.
C. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive cross flow fan type with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208-230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output of 90 watts. 3. The air flow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
D. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.
E. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded
into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be
11/16 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with a 21 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.
7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line to facilitate superheat control and PID temperature control logic.
15675 - 4 Ductless AC Split System Units Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
F. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208-230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.
G. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. A full array of fault diagnostics shall be accessible via the wired remote controller.
2.4 OUTDOOR UNIT
A. Outdoor Unit Cabinet: 1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized, finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection.
B. Outdoor Fan: 1. The outdoor unit shall be furnished with a direct drive propeller type fan. 2. The outdoor unit fan motor shall be a direct current (DC) motor and have permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The outdoor fan motor shall be mounted for quiet operation. 4. The outdoor fan shall be provided with a raised safety guard to prevent contact with moving parts. 5. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow.
C. Condenser Coils: 1. The outdoor unit condenser coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The condenser coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. 3. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be regulated by means of an electronically controlled, precision, expansion valve.
D. Outdoor Compressor: 1. The compressor motor shall be direct current (DC). 2. The compressor shall be of a high performance hermetic; inverter driven, variable speed, rotary type. 3. Magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor. 4. The compressor shall be capable of changing speed to follow the variations in total demand as determined by the suction gas pressure measured in the condensing unit. Samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so the high/low pressures detected are read every 20 seconded and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity shall be controlled to eliminate deviation from target value. 5. The capacity control range shall be 24% to 100% with 20 individual capacity steps.
6. The outdoor unit shall have a refrigerant accumulator. 7. Oil separators and an intelligent oil management system shall be included. 8. The compressor shall be equipped with an internal thermal overload, crankcase heater, and high pressure safety switch. 9. The compressor shall be mounted so as to avoid the transmission of vibration.
15675 - 5 Ductless AC Split System Units Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Refrigerant shall be R410A. 2. The outdoor unit must have the ability to operate over the full range with a maximum height difference of 40 feet and have refrigerant tubing length of 65 feet. 3. There shall be no need for line size changes. Traps shall not be used. No additional refrigerant oil shall be required.
F. Electrical: 1. The indoor unit be powered directly from the outdoor unit using a 3-wire connection plus ground. 2. The indoor unit shall not have any supplemental electrical heat elements. 3. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) compressor motor control for maximum efficiency. 4. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit and outdoor unit.
G. Condensate Pump: 1. Provide integral condensate pump kit.
H. Low Ambient Operation: 1. Unit shall be capable of cooling operation at 20 degrees Fahrenheit outdoor air temperature.
I. Factory Testing: 1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. 2. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, control circuit board, fan and fan motor. 3. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. 4. Indoor unit shall be charged with dry air before shipment from factory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. Maintain manufacturer’s recommended spacing between other units and from walls.
B. Secure and install unit level.
C. Install outdoor unit on 4” thick concrete pad.
D. Install refrigerant piping. Refrigerant piping shall be sized based on manufacturer’s instructions. Refer to Refrigerant Piping Section.
END OF SECTION
15760 - 1 Electric Heaters Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15760
ELECTRIC HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install electric heaters as scheduled on the Contract Drawings for a complete, functional, code compliant part of the HVAC system.
1. Electric Unit Heaters
1.2 QUALITY ASSUANCE
A. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) listed with affixed label.
B. National Electric Code (NEC).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
A. Indeeco
B. Q-Mark
C. Markel
2.2 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
A. Cabinet: 1. Cabinet shall be fabricated of die formed 18 gage steel and finished with durable powder coated paint. 2. Stamped louver periphery inlet grille shall maintain even airflow over heating elements. Adjustable louvers and an outward drawn venturi shall provide accurate control of discharge airflow. 3. Include a large hinged access door that extends the width of the heater and is locked in position by quarter turn fasteners.
B. Elements: 1. Elements shall be all steel tubes with highest quality nickel-chromium resistance wire embedded in compacted efficient dielectric to ensure proper heat transfer. 2. Steel helical fins shall be machine crimped and brazed to tube for effective transfer of heat.
C. Motor: 1. Motors shall be totally enclosed, all angle industrial rated. 2. Motor shall be single phase with voltage rating same as heater voltage rating. 3. Three to twenty kilowatt units shall have single speed permanently lubricated thermal protected unit bearing motor. 4. Twenty five to fifty kilowatt units shall have two speed thermally protected motors with sleeve bearings. Sleeve bearing motors shall be lubricated for 5 years continuous or 10-year intermittent use.
D. Wiring: 1. Heaters shall be designed for a single circuit with elements, motor and control circuits wired in accordance with latest National Electric Code and UL, Inc. Standard 2021. 2. All three-phase heaters have balanced phases.
15760 - 2 Electric Heaters Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. Limit Controls: 1. All heaters shall have built in fan purge to dissipate residual heat from elements on heater shutdown. 2. Automatic reset thermal cutout shall shut down elements and motor if safe operating temperatures are exceeded.
F. Controls: 1. Contactor and control circuit transformers, where required, shall be factory installed and wired. 2. Three to twenty kilowatt units shall have single stage control. Larger units shall be controlled as two stage operation with a two stage thermostat. 3. Thermostat shall be wall mounted or unit mounted.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install heater per manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Maintain manufacturer’s required distance to combustible materials
C. Install unit heaters horizontal airflow only. Minimum installation height above the floor shall be six feet.
END OF SECTION
15830 - 1 Power Ventilators Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15830
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install power ventilator equipment as indicated on Contract Drawings for a complete, code compliant, functioning system.
1. Roof-Mounted Exhaust Fans
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
B. 15890 – Ductwork
C. Electrical Disconnect shall be integral to fan and furnished by manufacturer. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fan shall be manufactured at an ISO 9001 certified facility. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories UL 705 with affixed label. Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance.
B. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate which shall indicate manufacturer, model number, serial number, design CFM, static pressure, and maximum fan RPM.
C. Fan wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit for approval the equipment manufacturer’s product data sheets of specific equipment being provided.
B. Each equipment selection shall be clearly identified with tag number from Contract Drawings.
C. Include manufacturer’s computerized selection for each piece of equipment based on project specific conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Loren Cook
B. Greenheck
2.2 ROOF EXHAUST FANS
A. Manufacturer’s Fan shall be a spun aluminum, roof mounted, belt driven (where scheduled), centrifugal exhaust ventilator. Refer to fan schedule on Contract Drawings for direction of discharge.
15830 - 2 Power Ventilators Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be aluminum support structure. The aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. The discharge baffle shall have a rolled bead for added strength. A two piece top cap shall have stainless steel quick release latches to provide access into the motor compartment without the use of tools. An integral conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections. The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gage steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. These components shall be enclosed in a weather tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream.
C. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100 percent aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency.
D. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron pillow block housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150 percent of the installed motor horsepower. The variable pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM.
E. Direct drive, 120 volt fans shall include manufacturer’s speed control for balancing.
F. Provide factory roof curb, integral electrical disconnect, gravity backdraft damper, and birdscreen.
G.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ventilators shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Fans shall have flexible duct connections.
C. Maintain at least 10 foot separation from edge of roof.
D. Electrical disconnect shall be integral to fan by manufacturer. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor.
E. Fans shall be controlled as scheduled on Contract Drawings. Connect to building digital time clock.
END OF SECTION
15850 - 1 Air Inlets and Outlets Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15850
AIR INLET AND OUTLET DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install all air devices as scheduled on Contract Drawings. 1. Exhaust Air Grilles 2. Louvers
B. All mechanical louvers shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
B. 15820 – Ductwork Accessories
C. 15890 - Ductwork
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Noise Criteria values representing the device’s NC curve shall be published by the manufacturer. Throw values for terminal velocities of 150, 100, and 50 fpm shall be published along with corresponding pressure drop.
B. Performance tests shall have been conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standards 70-91 and 113-90.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit for approval manufacturer’s product and performance data for each piece of equipment.
B. Equipment selections shall clearly identify equipment or device tag number from the Contract Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Titus
B. Krueger
C. Price
D. Nailor
E. Metal-Aire
2.2 PAINTING
A. The finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H.
B. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250 hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied.
15850 - 2 Air Inlets and Outlets Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.3 EXHAUST GRILLES
A. Return and exhaust grilles shall be for the sizes and mounting types as scheduled on the Contract Drawings Return grilles must provide a free area of at least 90%. Outer borders shall be constructed of heavy extruded aluminum with a thickness of 0.040-0.050 inch and shall have countersunk screw holes for a neat appearance. Border width shall be 1¼ inches on all sides and shall be interlocked at the four corners to form a rigid frame. Aluminum grid shall be, ½ x ½ x 1 inch high, single piece grille. Do not stack two grilles.
B. Steel grilles shall have ¾-inch blade spacing and be of the sizes and mounting types scheduled on the Contract Drawings. The fixed deflection blades shall be available parallel to the long or short dimension of the grille. Construction shall be of steel with a 1¼-inch wide border on all sides. Screw holes shall be countersunk for a neat appearance. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds.
1. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested cross section to meet published test performance data. Blades shall be firmly held in place by mullions from behind the grille and fixed to the grille by welding in place. Blade deflection angle shall be available at 35°.
2.4 LOUVERS
A. Furnish and install extruded aluminum, wind driven rain resistant, stationary drainable louvers with horizontally mounted sight proof blades as sized on Contract Drawings.
B. Frame and blades shall be constructed of extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5. Minimum wall thickness shall be nominal 0.081 inches. Coordinate depth of frame with installation location. Frame shall have a minimum a depth of 5 inches. All louver components shall be assembled in factory.
C. Blades shall be sight proof, double drainable, horizontally mounted on 2 inch nominal centers.
D. Bird Screen shall be aluminum 3/4 inch x 0.051 inch expanded, flattened mesh.
E. Louver performance data shall be based on testing 48 inch x 48 inch size unit accordance with AMCA 500-L: 1. Free Area: 44 percent, nominal. 2. Free Area Size: 6.99 square feet . 3. Maximum Recommended Air Flow Thru Free Area: 1,139 fpm. 4. Air Flow: 7,962 cfm. 5. Maximum Pressure Drop (at 1,139 feet per minute): 0.21 inches w.g.
F. Wind Driven Water Penetration Performance shall be based on testing 39 inch x 39 inch core area, 41 inch x 44 inch nominal size unit in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 1. Wind Velocity: 29 mph. 2. Rainfall Rate: 3 inches/hour. 3. Air Volume: 6,207 cfm. 4. Core Velocity: 588 fpm. 5. Free Area Velocity: 1,139 feet per minute. 6. Water Resistance Effectiveness: 99.3% (AMCA Class A). 7. Discharge Loss Classification (Intake Test): Class 2.
8. Airflow velocity shall be below the louver’s tested water penetration point.
G. Install sheet metal blank-offs where louver openings exposed.
H. Louver color shall be selected by Architect prior to ordering. Architect may have contractor paint louvers to match building trim.
I. Louver shall be equal to Ruskin model EME520DD.
J. Acceptable manufacturers are Ruskin, Pottorff and Greenheck.
15850 - 3 Air Inlets and Outlets Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air devices as shown on Contract Drawings and according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Ductwork branch connections to diffusers or grilles to shall match air device’s collar sizes.
C. Seal connections between ductwork and device to be air tight. Do not stretch, kink or restrict flexible ductwork. Flexible duct connections shall be perpendicular to air device to allow smooth airflow.
D. Install manual air balancing dampers at the branch duct serving each individual supply air device, return air devices, and exhaust air device.
E. Install insulation on the backs of all supply and return air devices.
F. Provide trim kit for all air devices installed in hard surfaces.
G. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate actual ceiling diffuser locations with architectural reflected ceiling grid, lights and sprinkler heads. If there is a conflict, the contractor shall submit a formal request for information (RFI) for direction before installing devices.
END OF SECTION
15950 - 1 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work included in this Section consists of the furnishing of all labor, instruments, tools and services required in connection with the Testing and Balancing (TAB) of the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems as described in the mechanical specifications and/or shown on the mechanical plans, or reasonably implied.
B. The Test and Balance (TAB) of the HVAC systems shall be performed by an independent, impartial Technical Firm who is a member of Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC) and whose operations are limited to the field of professional TAB. 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall include the cost of the TAB work in the mechanical bid.
C. Acceptable AABC Test and Balance Firms: 1. Delta T 2. Air Balancing Company 3. Air Engineering and Balance. 4. Dallas Test & Balance 5. Engineered Air Balance 6. Other AABC Firms approved by Engineer.
D. The TAB Firm is responsible to and shall submit all reports directly to the Engineer and/or Owner. TAB reports shall be Certified.
E. TAB services shall result in the optimum temperature, airflow and noise levels in the conditioned spaces of the project.
F. The following basic components of the HVAC systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced: 1. Air Distribution Systems 2. Air Moving Equipment 3. Heating Systems (HVAC) 4. Control Systems Verification
G. Airflow at air devices shall be balanced to plus or minus 5% from design airflow quantities. Required Pressure relationships shall be maintained.
H. Document Review 1. The TAB Firm shall be responsible for reviewing the HVAC plans and specifications relating to the TAB services for proper arrangement and adequate provisions of devices for testing and balancing. 2. TAB Firm shall review all balancing and measuring device locations shown or specified in the Contract Documents. TAB Firm shall coordinate with Mechanical Contractor for additional desired devices to be installed. 3. TAB Firm shall review HVAC manufacturer's submittal data relative to balance ability. 4. TAB Firm shall review submitted HVAC automatic temperature control sequences for conformity to the specifications.
I. Prior to Construction, TAB Firm shall review documents and notify Mechanical Contractor of required locations for balancing devices for TAB Firm to perform work.
J. Prior to system start-up, the TAB Firm shall inspect the system installation and verify that all necessary balancing and measuring devices are all locations to perform a complete system balance.
K. Test and Balance Firm shall witness the performance of each unit’s sequence of operation. Documentation of this process shall be included in the final Test and Balance Report.
15950 - 2 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
L. Three (3) copies of final report shall be submitted to the Owner or his representative indicating a summary of actual operating data and any abnormal operating conditions. The report will contain all required information as described within this specification.
1.2 SERVICES OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall start up and test all materials and equipment which normally require testing. All piping, etc., shall be tested to meet code requirements or the specification requirements, whichever is the more stringent. All equipment shall operate a sufficient length of time at the Mechanical Contractor's expense to prove to the Engineer and/or Owner that the equipment is free from mechanical defects, runs smoothly and quietly and performs satisfactorily to meet the requirements set forth in the mechanical plans and specifications.
B. In order that all HVAC systems can be properly tested, adjusted and balanced, the Mechanical Contractor shall operate the HVAC systems at his expense for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB, and shall further operate and pay all costs of operation during the TAB period. Operating expenses to be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Utility costs; electrical, water, gas, etc. 2. Personnel costs to start, operate and stop all HVAC equipment. 3. All start-up labor and material costs. 4. All maintenance costs.
C. The plans and specifications have indicated valves, dampers and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of testing and balancing the HVAC systems to obtain optimum operating conditions. It will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to install these devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable. The TAB firm shall be consulted if there is a questionable arrangement of a control or adjustable device. Should any such device not be readily accessible, the Contractor shall provide access as required by the TAB firm.
D. Not every measuring and balancing device desired by the TAB may be indicated or noted on the Construction Documents. Prior to system start-up, the Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the TAB firm. Mechanical Contractor shall install, at no additional cost to Owner, any balancing dampers, temperature and pressure test ports, etc. as requested by the TAB Firm to perform complete system balance.
E. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide and coordinate the services of qualified, responsible sub-contractors, suppliers, and personnel as required to correct, repair or replace any and all deficient items or conditions found before and during the TAB period.
F. As a part of this Project Contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall make any changes in the sheaves, belts, motors, dampers, valves, pump impellers or the addition of dampers and/or valves as required to correctly balance the HVAC systems as required by the TAB firm at no additional cost.
G. Provide sufficient time in Project Contract completion schedule to permit the completion of TAB services prior to Owner occupancy of the Project.
H. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish without charge to the TAB Firm: 1. One set of mechanical specifications and all addenda. 2. All pertinent change orders. 3. Two complete sets of mechanical plans with latest revisions. 4. "As-installed" drawings. 5. Approved control diagrams and submittals.
6. Approved manufacturer's submittals for all HVAC equipment.
15950 - 3 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
I. The Mechanical Contractor shall have all HVAC systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB Firm that the project is ready for TAB services. So certify in writing to the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner that such a condition exists. Complete operational readiness prior to commencement of TAB Services shall include the following: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors and windows, ceilings installed, etc., to permit the obtaining of projected actual operating conditions. 2. Air Distribution Systems: a. Verify installation for conformity to design of all supply, return and exhaust ducts. Document and certify that all duct leakage tests as required by the mechanical specifications have been performed and the test results are within specified limits. b. Verify that all volume dampers, smoke dampers and fire dampers are properly located, functional and open. c. Verify that minimum outside air, maximum outside air, return air and relief air dampers provide tight closure, open fully and have smooth and free operation. d. Verify that all supply, return, exhaust and transfer diffusers, grilles and registers are installed as indicated on the mechanical plans. e. Verify that the correct size and type of terminal boxes are installed as indicated on the mechanical plans, and that they are operational. f. Verify that all built-up air handling systems, air handling units, etc. and associated apparatus such as heating coils, cooling coils, filter sections, etc., have been blanked and sealed to eliminate bypass air around the coils, filters, etc. or leakage of air into or out of the unit. g. Install clean filters at each air handling unit and maintain these filters for the complete period that the subject system is being tested, adjusted, and balanced. h. Verify that all (supply, return, relief and exhaust) fans are operational including: proper fan rotation, free from vibrations and proper belt tension. i. Verify that all motor starter overload heater elements are of proper size and rating. j. Make a record of actual motor amperage and voltage and verify that they do not exceed nameplate ratings. 3. Automatic Controls: a. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper
sequences, air and water resets, firestat, safeties, etc. b. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for designed operating conditions with the exception of room thermostats or sensors which shall be calibrated at the completion of TAB services with cooperation between TAB Firm and controls contractor. 4. Deficiency Report:
a. TAB Firm shall develop a Deficiency Report of observed items that prevent the system from properly functioning or being balanced. b. TAB Firm shall provide Deficiency Report to the Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor, and Architect.
c. The Mechanical Contractor shall correct deficiencies observed and documented by the TAB Firm in a timely manner to allow the overall project
schedule to be achieved.
J. The Automatic Temperature Control contractor and/or Energy Management System contractor shall thoroughly check all controls, sensors, operators, sequences, etc. before notifying the TAB agency that the Automatic Temperature Controls and Energy Management
System are operational. The Automatic Temperature Control contractor and/or Energy Management System contractor shall provide technical support (technicians and necessary
computers) to the TAB agency for a complete check of these systems.
15950 - 4 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
K. The scope of the TAB work as defined herein is indicated in order that the Mechanical Contractor will be apprised of his responsibility regarding the coordination and assistance required to complete the Project Requirements for final TAB. The TAB Firm will be responsible to the Engineer and/or Owner for the satisfactory execution of the TAB services.
1.3 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM
A. TAB Firm Qualifications 1. The Firm shall be one which is organized to provide independent professional testing, adjusting and balancing services. The firm shall have a minimum of one (1) Professional Engineer licensed in the State of the project with current registration. 2. The Firm will have operated a minimum of five (5) years, under its current Firm name. 3. All personnel used on the job site shall be either TAB engineers or TAB technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the Firm for a minimum of six (6) months prior to working on this specific project. 4. TAB Firm shall submit the following to the Engineer and/or Owner for approval prior to commencing services: a. Name and biographical data of the Professional Engineer and all personnel to be assigned to this project. b. Proof of company operation for minimum of five (5) years.
B. TAB Firm Responsibilities 1. Liaison: The TAB personnel on the job shall act as liaison between the Engineer, Owner and Contractor. 2. Early Inspection: Inspect the installation of mechanical piping systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the HVAC systems during the construction phase relating to proper arrangement and adequate provisions for TAB. Prior to system start-up, TAB Firm shall notify Mechanical Contactor if any additional balancing dampers, temperature and pressure test ports, etc. are necessary to perform a complete system balance. 3. TAB Firm shall develop Deficiency Report of observed items that prevent the HVAC system from properly functioning or being balance. A copy of Deficiency Report shall be provided to the Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor, and Architect.
C. TAB Firm Services 1. The TAB personnel shall test and balance the HVAC systems to provide optimum temperature, airflow and noise conditions in the conditioned spaces in the building while the HVAC equipment is operating efficiently. 2. The Firm shall be responsible for testing, balancing and logging actual data on all air distribution and air moving equipment, pumps, heating and cooling equipment and the operating conditions of all motors, etc. as indicated in this specification. a. DX Split Systems: 1). Verify that the outside dampers are operational and move freely. 2). Verify that filters are clean. 3). Verify correct fan rotation. 4). If belt driven, verify proper belt tension and that fan and motor sheaves
are properly aligned. 5). Verify that all AHU safeties are operational (smoke detector, etc.) 6). Verify correct size and rating of motor overload protection. 7). Verify fan motor is not overloaded; amperage readings do not exceed motor nameplate rating. 8). Determine total supply and return air. Air quantities to be determined by
duct traverse if duct configuration permits and air velocity is 1000 feet per minute or greater. 9). Balance air distribution system (see Air Inlet and Outlet Devices).
15950 - 5 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
10). If air volume is less than design and motor capacity is available, adjust fan or fans to supply and return design CFM. If new sheave or sheaves and belts are required, data will be submitted to the Mechanical Contractor for replacement. 11). If applicable, determine the required static pressure and submit the static pressure control setpoint to control contractor for setting. 12). Test and balance the minimum outside air and return air CFM relationship to design. 13). Test and record entering and leaving air temperature of electric heating coil to verify design heating capacity, if applicable. 14). Verify all temperature control devices are set and calibrated at design setpoint. b. Air Distribution Devices 1). Preset all volume dampers in the 100% open position. 2). Determine and verify proper air pattern deflection devices have been installed. Verify airflow direction is as noted on Contract Drawings, if applicable. 3). Read out all air distribution devices served by their source (Terminal Box, Fan Coil Unit, Constant Volume Air Handling Unit, Supply Fan, Exhaust Fan, etc.). 4). Balance all air distribution devices proportional to design CFM. 5). Balance source to design CFM. 6). Verify that all air distribution devices are within plus or minus 5% of design. c. Exhaust Fans 1). Verify correct fan rotation. 2). If belt driven, verify proper belt tension and that fan and motor sheaves are properly aligned. 3). Verify that all safeties and interlocks are operational. 4). Verify correct size and rating of motor overload protection. 5). Verify fan motor is not overloaded; amperage readings do not exceed nameplate rating. 6). Determine total air. Air quantities to be determined by duct traverse if duct configuration permits and air velocity is 1000 feet per minute or greater. 7). If air volume is less than design and motor capacity is available, adjust
fan to design CFM. If new sheave or sheaves and belts are required, data will be submitted to the Mechanical Contractor for replacement. 8). Balance air distribution system (see Air Distribution Devices). 3. During the balancing process, all abnormalities or malfunctions of equipment or components discovered by the TAB personnel, shall be reported promptly to the Architect/Engineer, Owner, General Contractor, and Mechanical Contractor so that
the condition can be corrected expediently. After corrective measures are completed, perform any additional balancing required, as a result of the corrections. 4. The temperature controls shall be verified for calibration and proper relationship between control devices. The Mechanical Contractor shall be advised of any
instruments out of calibration so that the Automatic Temperature Controls Contractor can recalibrate, using data supplied by the TAB Firm. The Controls Contractor shall
assist the TAB Firm as required.
15950 - 6 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
5. If comfort and/or required conditions are not being maintained after testing and balancing to design conditions, the HVAC system shall be rebalanced within the limitations of the equipment installed to obtain comfort and/or required conditions. The design intent is to provide air conditioning equipment to meet the design criteria. Conditions may vary from the initial design criteria, which could include but not be limited to, general construction, mechanical installation, actual occupancy conditions, etc. It is the intent of this specification that the maximum capacity of the equipment installed be utilized to compensate for these variations in trying to obtain comfort and/or required conditions. If comfort and/or required conditions cannot be obtained, submit a report giving specific data regarding the problem condition. 6. Make a total of three (3) inspections within ninety (90) days after occupancy of the building, and rebalance if required, to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout. Inspections to be coordinated with Architect/Engineer and Owner and shall be documented with a supplemental report containing data and information as required. 7. Make an inspection during the opposite season from that in which the initial balancing was made and at that time make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustment required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. The opposite season inspection shall be coordinated with the Architect/Engineer and Owner. This inspection shall be documented with a supplemental report containing any pertinent data and information regarding any modified balance.
D. The TAB Report 1. The TAB report shall incorporate all performance data for the HVAC systems. The intent of the final report is to provide a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operating personnel. 2. All measurements and recorded readings (of air, water, electricity, etc.) that appear in the report must be made on site by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB Firm. 3. The TAB report shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Title b. Index c. Preface: A general discussion of the system, an outline of normal and ventilation modes of operation, any unusual operating conditions and any deficiencies not corrected. d. Instrumentation List: A list of instruments used by type, model, range and
calibration date. All instruments must be calibrated within 6 months prior to starting date of TAB services. Calibration of all instruments shall be maintained throughout the TAB services. e. Data: All test and balance data indicating design and actual conditions of operation for each device and/or piece of HVAC equipment. f. Split System Units:
1). Manufacturer, model, size and serial number. 2). Design and actual CFM (Supply, Return and Outside). 3). Design and actual RPM. 4). Static pressure entering and leaving filters, coils and fan.
5). Motor nameplate data. 6). Motor starter data and motor overload protection size and rating.
7). Actual motor amperage and voltage (all phases). 8). Filter; type, size and quantity. g. Air Distribution Devices 1). Manufacturer, model and size.
2). Location. 3). Design and actual CFM (cooling and heating).
4). Air distribution devices where a velocity indicating instrument is used to determine CFM; required and actual velocity in FPM. (When hood used
to determine CFM, only CFM recorded.)
15950 - 7 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
h. Exhaust Fans 1). Manufacturer, model and size. 2). Design and actual CFM. 3). Design and actual RPM. 4). Design and actual static pressure. 5). Motor nameplate data. 6). Motor starter data and motor overload protection size and rating. 7). Actual motor amperage and voltage (all phases).
E. Instructions to Operating Personnel 1. TAB Firm shall instruct the operating personnel regarding the following: a. Systems Operation. b. Unusual Operating Conditions. c. System Troubleshooting Procedures.
F. Guarantee 1. Provide extended warranty of twelve (12) months after occupancy during which time the Engineer and/or Owner may, at his discretion, request check of the balance of any HVAC equipment. Provide TAB technicians to assist as required in making such tests. When any device is found not balanced in accordance with the mechanical plans and specifications, that HVAC system shall be completely rebalanced as directed by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner at the TAB firm's expense.
END OF SECTION
Division Sixteen
Electrical
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE BAY EXPANSION
To The
FLEET SERVICES FACILITY
for the
City of Denton
Denton, TEXAS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects
Project No. 18014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000 General Electrical Requirements .......................................................................................
16060 Grounding and Bonding .....................................................................................................
16070 Supporting Devices ............................................................................................................
16080 Electrical Identification .......................................................................................................
16120 Conductors and Cables ......................................................................................................
16130 Raceways and Fittings .......................................................................................................
16140 Wiring Devices ...................................................................................................................
16405 Enclosed Motor Controllers ................................................................................................
16410 Enclosed Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers ........................................................
16420 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards .................................................................................
16460 Dry Type Transformers ......................................................................................................
16490 Fuses.….. ...........................................................................................................................
16500 Lighting Fixtures .................................................................................................................
16990 Special Systems .................................................................................................................
16000 - 1
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16000: GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Intent of drawings and specifications is to obtain complete systems tested, adjusted, and ready for
operation.
B. Include incidental details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation
and operation.
C. Check, verify and coordinate work with drawings and specifications prepared for other trades.
Include modifications, relocations or adjustments necessary to complete work or to avoid
interference with other trades.
D. Included in this contract are electrical connections to equipment provided by others. Refer to
Architectural, Mechanical, final shop drawings, and Owner’s existing equipment available
information for equipment being furnished under other sections for exact locations of electrical
outlets and various connections required.
E. Where architectural features govern location of work, refer to architectural drawings.
F. All work shall be performed in “neat and workmanlike” manner as defined in ANSI/NECA 1,
Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Temporary Services:
1. Provide temporary power distribution for construction efforts requiring power for tools,
lighting, and start-up/testing of permanent electrical powered equipment prior to permanent
connection to the electrical system. All 120 volt and 240 volt temporary power receptacles
for tools and equipment shall be protected by ground fault circuit interrupters.
B. Concrete Work:
1. Provide cast-in-place concrete as required by contract documents unless otherwise noted.
2. Concrete shall comply with Division 3 - Concrete.
3. Provide anchor bolts, metal shapes and templates required to be cast in concrete or used to
form concrete for support of electrical equipment.
C. Painting:
1. Painting of electrical equipment will be done under Division 9 unless specified otherwise or
is to be furnished with factory applied finish coats.
2. Furnish equipment with factory applied prime finish unless otherwise specified.
3. If factory finish on equipment furnished by Contractor is damaged in shipment or during
construction, refinish equipment to satisfaction of Architect.
16000 - 2
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Rules and regulations of Federal, State and local authorities and utility companies, in force at
time of execution of contract shall become part of this specification.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Agencies or publications referenced herein refer to the following:
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute
2. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
3. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
4. EIA Electronic Industries Association
5. FCC Federal Communications Commission
6. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
7. IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
8. IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
9. NEC National Electrical Code
10. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
11. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
12. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
13. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
14. TIA Telecommunications Industries Association
15. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
B. Work shall be in accordance with latest edition of codes, standards or specifications unless
noted otherwise.
1.6 LISTING
A. All material installed on project shall bear UL label or be UL listed, unless UL label or listing is
not available for that type of material.
B. Other nationally recognized testing agencies, acceptable to AHJ, are approved.
1.7 ENCLOSURES
A. Typical NEMA Enclosures and Usage
1. NEMA 1 - Indoors. Falling dirt.
2. NEMA 2 - Indoors. Falling dirt. Falling liquids. Light splashing.
3. NEMA 3 - Outdoors. Sleet, snow, rain. Windblown dust.
4. NEMA 3X - Same as NEMA 3 plus corrosion resistant.
5. NEMA 3S - Same as NEMA 3 plus mechanism operable when ice covered.
6. NEMA 3SX - Same as NEMA 3S plus corrosion resistant.
7. NEMA 3R - Outdoors. Rain, snow, sleet.
8. NEMA 3RX - Same as NEMA 3R plus corrosion resistant.
9. NEMA 4 - Outdoors. Rain, sleet, snow. Wind blown dust. Hose down.
10. NEMA 4X - Same as 4 plus corrosion resistant.
11. NEMA 4 - Indoors. Falling dirt. Falling and light splashing liquids. Flying dust, lint and
fibers. Hose down.
16000 - 3
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
12. NEMA 4X - Same as NEMA 4 plus corrosion resistant.
13. NEMA 5 - Indoors. Falling Dirt. Falling Liquids. Settling dust, lint and fibers.
14. NEMA 6 - Outdoors. Rain, snow, sleet. Windblown dust. Hose down. Temporary
submersion.
15. NEMA 6P - Same as NEMA 6 plus corrosion resistant. Prolonged submersion.
16. NEMA 6 - Indoors. Falling dirt. Falling and light splashing liquids. Flying dust, lint and
fibers. Hose down. Temporary submersion.
17. NEMA 6P - Same as NEMA 6 plus corrosion resistant. Prolonged Submersion.
18. NEMA 7 - Indoors. Class I, Division 1 or 2, Groups A, B, C or D. (Flammable gas).
19. NEMA 9 - Indoors. Class II, Division 1 or 2. Groups E, R, or G. (Combustible dust).
20. NEMA 12 - Indoors. Falling Dirt. Falling liquids. Flying dust, lint and fibers. Oil or coolant
seepage.
21. NEMA 13 - Same as NEMA 12 plus oil or coolant spraying or splashing.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings (Product Data):
1. Refer to Division 1 requirements for submittal procedures.
2. Submit shop drawings for equipment and systems as requested in the respective
specification sections.
3. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items submitted.
4. Include proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated in
specification and shown on drawings.
5. When manufacturer's reference numbers are different from those specified, provide correct
cross-reference number for each item. Submittals shall be clearly marked and noted
accordingly.
6. When luminaires, equipment and items specified include accessories, parts and additional
items under one designation, submittals shall be complete and include all required
components.
7. Submit electrical equipment room layouts drawn to scale, including equipment, raceways,
accessories and clearance for maintenance.
8. Submit shop drawings or product data within thirty (30) days after signing contracts.
Submittals must be approved before installation of materials and equipment.
9. Submittals, which are not complete, not permanent, or not properly checked by Contractor,
will be returned without review.
B. Certificates and Inspections:
1. Obtain and pay for inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and deliver
certificates approving installations to Owner unless otherwise directed.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Refer to Division 1 requirements.
2. Upon completion of work but before final acceptance of system, submit to Architect for
approval, 3 copies of operation and maintenance manuals in loose-leaf binders. If "one
copy" is larger than 2" thick or consists of multiple volumes, submit only one set initially for
review. After securing approval, submit all 3 copies to Owner.
3. Manuals shall be organized by specification section number and shall have table of contents
and tabs for each piece of equipment or system.
4. Manuals shall include the following:
16000 - 4
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
a. Copies of all shop drawings.
b. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions. Include parts lists of all
items or equipment. Where manufacturer's data includes several types or models,
applicable type or model shall be designated.
c. CD ROM's of O&M data with exploded parts lists where available.
d. Phone numbers and addresses of local parts suppliers and service companies.
e. Internet/WEB page addresses where applicable.
f. Wiring diagrams.
g. Start up and shut down procedure.
h. Factory and field test records.
i. Additional information, diagrams or explanations as designated under
respective equipment or systems specification section.
5. Instruct Owner's representative in operation and maintenance of equipment. Instruction
shall include complete operating cycle on all apparatus.
6. O&M manuals and instructions to Owner shall be provided prior to request for final payment.
D. Record Documents:
1. Refer to General Conditions of Contract. Prepare complete set of record drawings.
2. Use designated set of prints of contract documents as prepared by Architect to mark-up for
record drawing purposes.
1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Building Access:
1. Arrange for necessary openings in building to allow for admittance of all apparatus.
B. Coordination:
1. Provide power wiring and motor control wiring, except temperature control wiring, for motors
and electrically powered or electrically controlled equipment, as indicated on electrical
contract documents.
2. Connect and wire equipment complete and ready to operate according to wiring diagrams
furnished by various trades.
3. Starters, disconnects, relays, wire, conduit, pushbuttons, pilot lights and other devices
required for power and control of motors or electrical equipment shall be provided by
Electrical Contractor except as specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications.
4. Where starters or other devices, such as variable frequency drives, are furnished by others
they shall be connected and wired by this Contractor.
5. This Contractor's drawings and/or specifications show number and rating of motors
furnished by others, together with their actuating devices. Should any change in size, rating
or means of control be made to any motor or other electrical equipment after contracts are
awarded, Contractor responsible for change shall immediately notify this Contractor.
Additional costs due to these changes shall be the responsibility of Contractor initiating the
change.
6. Equipment and wiring shall be selected and installed for conditions in which it will be
required to perform. (i.e., general purpose, weatherproof, rain tight, explosion proof, dust
tight, or any other special type as required.)
C. Cutting and Patching:
1. Perform cutting and patching required for complete installation of systems unless otherwise
noted. Patch and restore all work cut or damaged to original condition.
16000 - 5
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Provide all materials required for patching unless otherwise noted.
3. Do not pierce beams or columns without permission of Architect and then only as directed.
If openings are required through walls or floors where no sleeve has been provided, hole
shall be core drilled to avoid unnecessary damage and structural weakening. Radiographic
imaging shall be performed as necessary to identify reinforcing steel locations.
D. Housekeeping and Cleanup:
1. Periodically as work progresses and/or as directed by Architect, remove waste materials
from building and leave area of work broom clean. Upon completion of work, remove tools,
scaffolding, broken and waste materials, etc. from site.
1.10 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee for one year after acceptance by Owner all equipment, materials, and workmanship
to be free from defect.
B. Repair, replace or alter systems or parts of systems found defective at no extra cost to Owner.
C. In any case, wherein fulfilling requirements of any guarantee, if Contractor disturbs any work
guaranteed under another contract, restore such disturbed work to condition satisfactory to
Architect and guarantee such restored work to same extent as it was guaranteed under such
other contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Direct reference on the drawings or in the specifications of model numbers of a certain
manufacturer is not intended to imply exclusion from consideration of similar or equivalent
products of other manufacturers provided they comply with the following:
1. The item shall physically conform to the space constraints and the surrounding conditions
and completely fulfill the function for which it is intended.
2. Complete catalog cut-sheets, specification sheets, and descriptive data shall be submitted
for engineering approval prior to the purchase of such items.
2.2 HOISTING AND RIGGING
A. Each contractor shall furnish all required rigging and hoisting equipment and personnel for the
installation of his work and for any removal of existing equipment. Each contractor shall be
responsible for ensuring that any equipment that is too large to pass through doorways and
access ways, or is too heavy to transport across the structure, is brought to the job and set in
place before the spaces are enclosed and in pieces as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Verify elevations and measurements prior to installation of materials.
B. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic, indicating general arrangement, approximate sizes,
general locations of equipment and outlets. Electrical contractor shall verify dimensions in field;
adjust to manufacturer’s Shop Drawings. Do not scale from drawings.
16000 - 6
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Architectural and structural drawings supersede electrical drawings. Electrical contractor shall
determine that work of this Division can be accommodated within spaces provided. Architect
shall be notified of any interference before starting installation.
3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1
C. Store in a clean, dry space.
D. Maintain factory wrapping or provide cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris,
and traffic.
E. Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
F. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish. Lift only with lugs
provided for the purpose.
3.3 FLOOR, WALL, ROOF AND CEILING OPENINGS
A. Coordinate location of openings, chases, furred spaces, etc. with appropriate Contractors.
Provide during progress of construction all sleeves and inserts that are to be built into structure.
B. Temporary sleeves, if used to form wall openings, shall be removed prior to installation of
permanent materials. Permanent sleeves for wall penetrations shall be minimum 24 ga
galvanized sheet metal unless otherwise noted.
C. Steel sleeves, when required, shall be Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe with integral water stop.
D. For core drilled holes, size and location shall be reviewed and approved by Structural Engineer
prior to execution.
E. Submit product data and installation details for penetrations of building structure. Submittal shall
include schedule indicating penetrating materials, (steel conduit, PVC conduit, cables, cable
tray, etc.), sizes of each, opening sizes and sealant products intended for use.
F. Where penetrations of fire-rated assemblies are involved, seal penetrations with appropriate
firestopping systems as specified.
G. Submit complete penetration layout drawings showing openings in building structural members
including floor slabs, bearing walls, shear walls, etc. Indicate and locate, by dimension, all
required openings including those sleeved, formed or core drilled. Drawings shall be approved
prior to preparing openings in structural member.
H. Openings for penetrations shall be minimum 1/2" larger on all sides than outside dimensions of
raceways or cables. However, where fire resistant penetrations are required, size openings in
accordance with recommendations of firestopping systems manufacturer.
I. Seal non fire-rated floor penetrations with non-shrink grout equal to Embeco by Master Builders,
or urethane caulk, as appropriate.
J. Seal non-rated wall openings with urethane caulk.
K. Where penetrations occur through exterior walls into building spaces, use steel sleeves with
integral water stop, similar to type "WS" wall sleeves by Thunderline Corporation. Seal annular
16000 - 7
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
space between sleeves and pipe with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seals by Thunderline
Corporation, or sealing system by another manufacturer approved as equal by Architect.
Sealing system shall utilize Type 316 stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts.
L. Provide chrome or nickel plated escutcheons where raceways pass through walls, floors or
ceilings and are exposed in finished areas. Size escutcheons to fit raceways for finished
appearance. Finished areas shall not include mechanical/electrical rooms, janitor’s closets,
storage rooms, etc., unless suspended ceilings are specified.
3.4 EQUIPMENT ACCESS
A. Install raceways, junction and pull boxes, and accessories to permit access to equipment for
maintenance. Relocation of raceways, or accessories as required, to provide access shall be
provided at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Install equipment with ample space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment.
Provide ready accessibility to equipment and wiring without moving other equipment, which is to
be installed or which is already in place.
C. Access doors in walls, chases, or inaccessible ceilings will be provided under other sections of
the specifications, unless otherwise indicated. Access doors shall be for the purpose of
providing access where equipment requiring servicing, repairs or maintenance is located in
walls, chases or above inaccessible ceilings.
D. Locate electrical outlets and equipment to fit details, panels, decorating or finish at space.
Architect reserves the right to make minor position changes of outlet locations before work has
been installed.
E. Verify door swings before installing room lighting switch boxes and install boxes on latch side of
door unless otherwise noted
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Provide supporting steel not indicated on drawings as required for installation of equipment and
materials including angles, channels, beams, hangers, etc.
B. Concrete anchors, used for attachment to concrete, shall be steel shell with plug type. Plastic,
rawhide or anchors utilizing lead are not allowed.
C. Do not support equipment or luminaires from metal roof decking.
3.6 SUPPORT PROTECTION
A. In occupied areas, mechanical rooms and areas requiring normal maintenance access, certain
equipment must be guarded to protect personnel from injury.
B. Provide minimum 1/2" thick Armstrong Armaflex insulation or similar product applied with
Armstrong 520 adhesive on lower edges of equipment, including bus duct, cable tray, pull boxes
and electrical supporting devices suspended less than 7 ft above floors, platforms or catwalks in
these areas.
C. Threaded rod or bolts shall not extend beyond supporting element and shall be protected as
described above.
3.7 HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for all floor-mounted equipment.
16000 - 8
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Pads shall be minimum 4 inches high and be minimum 2 inches wider and longer than the
equipment it supports.
3.8 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Contractor shall perform acceptance testing. Equipment to be tested is noted as "Testing By
Electrical Contractor" in technical specification sections. Tests shall be as outlined in technical
specification sections.
B. When testing is to be witnessed by Architect/Engineer or Inspector, notify them at least 10 days
prior to testing date.
C. When equipment or systems fail to meet minimum test requirements, replace or repair defective
work or materials as necessary and repeat inspection and test. Make repairs with new
materials.
D. This Contractor is responsible for certifying in writing equipment and system test results.
Certification shall include identification of portion of system tested, date, time, test criteria and
name and title of person signing test certification documents.
E. Maintain copies of certified tests, including those for any failed tests, at project site. At
completion of project, include copies of test records and certifications in O&M Manuals.
3.9 START-UP
A. All systems and equipment shall be started, tested, adjusted and turned over to Owner ready for
operation.
1. This includes "Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed" (OFCI) and "Contractor-Furnished,
Contractor-Installed" (CFCI) systems and equipment.
B. Follow manufacturer's pre-start-up checkout, start-up, trouble shooting and adjustment
procedures.
C. Contractor shall provide services of technician/mechanic knowledgeable in start-up and
checkout of types of systems and equipment on project.
D. Provide start-up services, by manufacturer's representative where specified or where Contractor
does not have qualified personnel.
E. Coordinate start-up with all trades.
3.10 CLEANING
A. After installation is complete, Contractor shall clean all systems.
B. Vacuum debris from panelboards, switchboards, motor starter and disconnect switch
enclosures, junction boxes and pull boxes two weeks before energization and again prior to
completion.
C. Where louvers are provided in switchgear or transformer enclosures, vacuum louvers free of
dust and dirt.
D. Clean luminaire lenses and lamps at time of installation and clean lens exteriors just prior to final
inspection.
16000 - 9
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
E. Thoroughly clean equipment of stains, paint spots, dirt and dust. Remove temporary labels not
used for instruction or operation.
END OF SECTION
16060 - 1
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16060: GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide a complete grounding system for services and equipment as required by State Codes,
NEC, applicable portions of other NFPA codes, and as indicated herein.
B. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 5 ohms.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit the following:
a. Location of system grounding electrode connections.
b. Connection type.
c. Grounding Electrode Conductor material, size and stranding.
d. Ground rod size and material.
B. Test Reports:
1. Test reports of resistance to earth for equipment installed shall be submitted for each
electrode and for system as a whole.
2. Testing shall be done based on "Fall-of-Potential" method.
3. Each test report shall include:
a. Date of test, soil moisture content, and soil temperature
b. Test operator
c. Instrument or other test equipment used
d. Electrode designation or location matching that on shop drawings
e. Ground impedance in ohms
f. Assumptions made - if required
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ground rods shall be a minimum of 5/8” diameter x 10’-0” length copper clad steel, unless noted
otherwise.
B. Ground connectors shall be irreversible compression type above grade and exothermic welded
type below grade.
16060 - 2
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
C. Grounds in concealed, outdoor or in damp/wet locations shall meet IEEE 837 requirements and
shall be UL 467 listed.
D. Grounded conductors (system neutral) shall be copper with white or gray insulation.
E. Equipment grounding conductors shall be copper with green insulation for conductor sizes #6
AWG and smaller. Equipment grounding conductors larger than #6 AWG shall have black
insulation wrapped with green tape at the terminations and at every point where the conductor is
accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING
A. Service grounds shall be permanently attached before permanent building service is energized.
B. Equipment grounds shall be permanently attached prior to energizing equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Connections shall be exposed and visible for inspection at all times. Do not install insulation
over ground connections.
B. Metal water pipe, by itself, is not an adequate grounding electrode and must be supplemented
by another electrode system. Bond system together.
C. Install ground rods 1 ft minimum below grade. Where multiple ground rods are installed,
minimum spacing between adjacent rods shall be 10’-0”.
D. Grounding connections shall be made on surfaces, which have been cleaned of paint, dirt, oil,
etc., so that connections are bare metal to bare metal contact.
E. Grounding connections shall be tight and shall be made with UL listed grounding devices,
fittings, bushings, etc.
F. Duplex receptacles of any amperage shall be grounding type and shall have separate grounding
contact. Install separate jumper between grounding terminal on device and metallic box.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Green wire grounding conductor shall terminate in panelboard at green wire ground bus.
B. Multiple conductors on single lug shall not be permitted. Each grounding conductor shall
terminate on its own terminal lug.
C. An equipment grounding conductor shall be provided with phase conductors in conduit,
regardless of the type of conduit used.
1. Conductor to provide ground continuity between equipment or device and conduit-raceway
system.
D. Provide separate green wire grounding conductor for each branch circuit neutral originating from
panelboards.
E. Bond equipment ground to components of raceway system, such as junction boxes, starter or
disconnect switch enclosures, equipment cases, etc.
16060 - 3
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
F. Grounding conductors for branch circuits shall be size indicated in NEC, except minimum size
grounding conductor shall be No. 12 AWG.
G. Each branch panel feeder shall have an identified equipment grounding conductor originating at
the point of service and terminating at ground bus in panelboard.
1. Size as indicated in NEC except in no instance smaller than No. 8 AWG.
H. Grounding conductor is in addition to neutral conductor and in no case shall neutral conductor
serve as grounding means.
I. Bond lower end of exhaust ducts, vent stacks, etc., which pass through roof.
J. Provide No. 6 AWG grounding conductor from telephone service entrance equipment to
grounding electrode system.
K. Provide grounding conductor from secondary side of each transformer to grounding electrode
system as required for separately derived system.
3.4 TESTING
A. Test ground resistance prior to energizing any electrical equipment.
3.5 INSPECTION
A. Prior to backfilling, completed system shall be inspected by the Authority Having Jurisdiction,
unless specifically waived in writing.
END OF SECTION
16070 - 1
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16070: SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
B. Section 16460 - Dry Type Transformers (600 Volts and Below)
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all supporting devices as specified and as required for proper support of conduit and
electrical equipment.
B. Support for all conditions of operation to prevent excess stress and allow for proper expansion
and contraction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for all applicable equipment:
1. Manufacturer's name
2. Model numbers
3. Materials of construction and load ratings (lbs)
4. Schedule of hangers and support devices with support spacing
5. Details for supplementary steel utilized for trapeze or special designed supports.
6. Structural attachments, inserts and concrete anchors
7. Equipment mounting devices
8. All other appropriate data
1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Support materials shall be steel or stainless steel unless specifically indicated.
B. Hangers, support devices and hardware shall be steel and shall have factory standard primed,
galvanized or electroplated finish for indoor application, and hot-dipped galvanized finish for
outdoor application. Coat cut edges, welds or any damaged finish with galvanized paint.
C. Where conduit can be conveniently grouped to allow trapeze type supports, supporting steel
shall be by means of standard structural shapes.
D. Punching, drilling, or welding of building structural steel is not allowed unless approved by
Structural Engineer.
E. Application of concrete inserts and concrete anchors shall be reviewed and approved by
Structural Engineer prior to installation.
16070 - 2
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
F. Any proposed weld attachments to building structure shall be reviewed by Structural Engineer
prior to execution of work. Execution of this work may be assigned to General Trades
responsible for building structural steel. Cost for this work, however, will remain the
responsibility of this Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
A. Provide all supporting steel, not indicated on structural drawings, that is required for installation
of Electrical equipment and materials, including angles, channels, beams, etc. to suspend or
floor support equipment.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (Metallic)
A. Manufacturers: Erico, B-Line, or approved equal.
2.3 HANGER RODS (Metallic)
A. Rods shall conform to the latest MSS Standards. Furnish rods complete with adjusting and lock
nuts.
B. Rods shall have electro-plated zinc or hot dip galvanized finish, except as indicated otherwise in
corrosive areas.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, size rods for individual hangers and trapeze supports as indicated
in the following schedule. Total weight of equipment shall not exceed limits indicated.
Maximum Load (lbs.) Rod Max. Pipe Size
Not exceeding 650°F Service
Temp.
Diameter (inches) With Single Rod
610 3/8 2"
1130 1/2 3"
1818 5/8 5"
2.4 BEAM CLAMPS
A. Beam Clamps: Anvil Fig. 218, 228 and 292.
B. Top Beam Clamps: Anvil Fig. 227.
C. C-Clamps: Anvil Fig. 86, 92 or 93. Provide clamps with retaining clips.
D. Proset system, proseal plug and fire-fill for sleeved and cored holes.
2.5 CONCRETE INSERTS (WOODEN FORMED CONCRETE)
A. Anvil Fig. 281, or 282, suitable for rod diameter and weight supported.
2.6 CONCRETE INSERTS (METAL DECK FORMED CONCRETE)
A. B-Line Fig. B3019, or Powers "Bang-It.
16070 - 3
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.7 CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Hilti, Powers or Red Head.
B. Flush or shell type, meeting description in Federal specification FF-S-325, Group VIII, Type 1 for
expansion shield anchors, similar to Hilti HDI/HDI-L. Anchors shall be zinc plated in accordance
with ASTM B633, Sc. 1, and Type III.
C. Select anchors with minimum safety factor of 8.0.
2.8 CONTINUOUS INSERT CHANNELS
A. Manufacturers: Unistrut, Anvil, B-Line, or Kindorf. Brackets inserts and accessories shall be
suitable for channel insert selected.
B. Length and support capabilities to be suitable for supporting in vicinity.
2.9 METAL FRAMING SUPPORT SYSTEM (STRUT SYSTEM)
A. Manufacturers: Unistrut, B-Line Strut Systems, Power-Strut, and Kindorf.
B. Channels shall have epoxy paint or electro-galvanized finish.
C. Channels shall not be lighter than 12 ga.
2.10 ROOF-TOP CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturer: Cooper B-Line Dura-Blok
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Support conduit from building structural members using concrete inserts, beam clamps, ceiling
plates, wall brackets. At no time shall hangers and supports overload building structural
members.
B. Select and size building attachments properly in accordance with manufacturer's published load
rating information.
C. Coordinate hanger and support installation to avoid work of other trades.
D. Suspend hangers by means of hanger rods. Perforated band iron and flat wire (strap iron) are
not allowed.
E. Conduit shall not be supported by other conduit.
F. Conduit shall not be supported by wire.
G. Do not support equipment or conduit from metal roof decking.
H. Refer to Section 16000 - General Electrical Requirements for requirements of personnel injury
protection guards for supporting devices.
I. Conduits within metal framed walls shall be supported within 2’-0” of each box or fitting and on
6’-0” centers or less.
16070 - 4
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.2 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. Concrete insert application, size, loading, and placement shall be reviewed and approved by
Structural Engineer prior to installation.
B. Coordinate with General Contractor for placement of inserts before concrete pour. Minimize
use of inserts and anchors after concrete placement.
3.3 BEAM CLAMPS
A. Provide locknut for hanging rod at clamp.
B. C-clamps are allowed for rod size 1/2" or smaller.
C. C-clamps are not allowed for project having seismic hazard level A, B or C.
3.4 TRAPEZE SUPPORTS
A. Construct trapeze supports with struts, angles, or channels and hang them by inserts or welded
beam attachments and rods.
3.5 ROOF-TOP CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Use for all piping on roof.
3.6 CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Anchor application, size, and placement shall be reviewed and approved by Structural Engineer
prior to installation.
END OF SECTION
16080 - 1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16080: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
B. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
C. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
D. Section 16420 - Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product.
B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate color, lettering style, and graphic features
of identification products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
A. Stencil Paint:
1. Oil-based, alkyd enamel, black unless otherwise noted.
B. Marker System:
1. Manufacturers: Brady USA, Ideal, Marking Services Inc. (MSI), Seton, or approved equal.
C. Laminated Plastic Nameplates:
1. ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black
surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore.
2. Nameplates shall have minimum 1/4" high lettering.
3. Face of nameplate to be black and letters to be white, except emergency power equipment
nameplates are to have red face with white letters.
4. Fasteners shall be small metal screws, pop rivets or contact-type with permanent adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. After painting is completed, identify equipment as indicated. Locate identification as
conspicuously as possible except where such would distract from finished area.
16080 - 2
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates shall be securely attached to non-concealed junction box covers of the following:
1. Electrical Distribution System
2. Fire Alarm System
B. Engraved plastic nameplates shall be securely attached to:
1. Panelboards
2. Switchboards
3. Motor Starters
4. Each separately mounted circuit breaker or disconnect switch
5. Each overcurrent device in distribution panelboards
6. Each transformer
7. Each automatic transfer switch
8. Each variable frequency drive
C. 4" round, 4" square and 4-11/16" junction boxes concealed above ceilings shall be identified
with circuits contained using neat lettering on cover with permanent type black marking pen.
Label shall include panel name along with branch circuit numbers included.
D. Nameplates shall identify equipment or load controlled and/or function and shall be the same as
indicated on contract documents. Voltages shall be shown on panelboard nameplates.
E. Motor starter nameplates shall include motor designation and horsepower.
F. Submit identification to Engineer for approval. Engineer reserves the right to modify
identifications prior to shop drawing approval.
G. Group conductors as to circuits and arrange in neat manner in pull boxes, cabinets and
panelboards. Group, bind together with nylon ties and identify conductors as to feeder or
branch circuit. Phase identification shall be consistent throughout system.
H. Identify each conductor of all systems at each panel, pull box and at each outlet with
permanently attached, wrap around, adhesive markers.
I. Identification of junction boxes and conductors shall include panelboard, switchboard or motor
control center, circuit number, phase, control circuit number or other appropriate number or
letter that will expedite future tracing and trouble shooting.
J. Conduit, boxes and enclosures for emergency and fire alarm circuits shall be marked so as to
be readily identified as part of emergency system.
3.3 PANEL CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Furnish typewritten indices for each branch circuit and lighting panelboard clearly identifying the
load served by each circuit.
END OF SECTION
16120 - 1
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16120: CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16080 - Electrical Identification
B. Section 16130 - Raceway and Fittings
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Conductor and conduit sizes in these contract documents are based on copper wire, and only
copper wire shall be used.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL83 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires and Cables.
B. UL44 - Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables
C. UL486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper Conductors.
D. UL4868 - Wire Connectors for use with Aluminum Conductors.
E. UL486C - Splicing Wire Connectors.
F. UL1569 - Metal-clad cable.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for:
1. Wire
2. Connectors
3. Supports
4. Pulling Compounds
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURER:
A. Conductors for use at 600 volts or below shall have 600 volt rated insulation.
1. Wire No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid.
2. Wire No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.
B. Motor control wiring:
1. Type THHN insulation.
16120 - 2
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Shall be stranded copper.
C. Wiring in fixture channels:
1. Type THHN insulation.
D. Feeder Circuit Wiring:
1. Type THWN or XHHW insulation rated for wet location.
2. 75°C rated cable, or 90°C rated cable sized at 75°C rating for connection to 100% rated
devices.
E. Branch Circuit Wiring:
1. Use Type THHN, THW-2, THWN-2 or XHHW-2 insulation.
F. Metal Clad Cable (Type MC)
1. Metal clad cable shall be used for lighting fixture whips, not to exceed 6ft.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCING-SCHEDULING
A. Do not install conductors until building is enclosed and weather tight.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Color code power wiring as follows:
1. 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire: phase A-black, phase B-red, phase C-blue, neutral-white,
ground conductor-green, isolated ground conductor – green with yellow stripe.
2. 480Y/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire: phase A-brown, phase B-orange, phase C-yellow, neutral-
gray, ground conductor-green.
3. The insulation color for conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall match the color code
described above throughout the entire length of the conductor.
4. Conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be color coded with plastic tape as described above on
each end, in each enclosure,, and at every joint, tap, or splice.
B. Install conductors in conduits and raceways in such manner that insulation will not be damaged
or undue strain placed on conductors.
1. Lubricants shall be UL listed.
C. Branch circuit wires in panels shall be neatly arranged with surplus wire cut off and wires tied
with non-metallic ties.
1. Metallic ties not permitted.
2. Splices within panels shall not be permitted.
D. Conductors shall be attached to terminal screw or lug per UL listing.
E. Joints, taps and splices sizes No. 10 and smaller:
1. Ideal-Nut Connectors or Scotchlok Spring connectors of appropriate size and type.
2. Provide label on each conductor to identify panel name and circuit number.
F. Joints, taps and splices sizes No. 8 AWG and larger:
1. Aluminum/copper compression connectors.
a. Install with hydraulic compression tool.
16120 - 3
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
b. Provide label on each conductor to identify panel name and circuit number.
G. Plastic snap-on splice insulators are not allowed.
H. Support conductors in vertical raceways, exceeding 20’-0” above finished floor, using OZ type
"S" cable supports for 600 volt conductors.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Wire, cable boxes and reels shall bear the date of manufacture.
1. Date of manufacture shall not precede contract date by more than one year.
B. Minimum conductor sizes shall be as follows:
1. No. 12 - Branch circuits of any kind.
C. Limit conduit fill to a maximum of 6 current carrying conductors, unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Conductors for the life safety system shall be installed in separate raceways and enclosures
from each other and all other power system wiring.
3.4 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING
A. 208Y/120 volt circuits over 100 ft in length: Increase wire size one size for each 100 ft of length.
Increase conduit size as required.
B. 480Y/277 volt circuits over 150 ft in length: Increase wire size one size for each 150 ft of length.
Increase conduit size as required.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Testing shall be performed by Electrical Contractor
B. Perform electrical acceptance testing on all 600 volt feeders serving panelboards, switchboards
and secondary voltage service entrance equipment.
1. Acceptance testing shall include the following:
a. Verify tightness of bolted connections to manufacturer’s specified torque
values.
b. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground
and adjacent conductors.
1) Applied potential to be 1000 volts DC for one minute.
2) Minimum insulation resistance shall be 50 megohms.
3) Correct any deviations between adjacent phases and values below
minimum.
c. Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection.
d. Perform phase rotation test.
C. Cables, which are found defective, shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to Owner.
END OF SECTION
16130 - 1
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16130: RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16070 - Supporting Devices
B. Section 16990 – Special Systems
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit
B. UL 6 - Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit
C. UL 360 - Liquid-tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical
D. UL 514B - Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
E. UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduits
F. UL 651A - Type EB and A PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit
G. UL 1242 - Intermediate Metal Conduit
H. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies
I. NEMA FB 2.10 - Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with Non-Flexible
Electrical Metal Conduit and Tubing
J. NEMA FB 2.20 - Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with Flexible Electrical
Metal Conduit and Tubing
K. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chlorides (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit
L. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit
M. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
N. ANSI C80-1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated (GRS)
O. ANSI C80-3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing Zinc Coated (EMT)
P. ANSI C80-5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Q. ANSI C80-6 - Intermediate Metal Conduit - Zinc Coated (IMC)
16130 - 2
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for:
1. Conduit
2. Couplings and fittings
3. Boxes
4. Floor boxes
5. Conduit seals
B. Provide list of conduit types indicating where each type is used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit:
1. Heavy wall tubing with hot dipped galvanized coating
2. Connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings. Bushings to be steel with
integral insulator except conduits 2" and below may have high impact thermoset Phenolic
insulating bushings.
3. Couplings shall be threaded steel.
B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) Conduit:
1. Intermediate grade metallic tubing with zinc coating
2. Connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings. Bushings to be steel with
integral insulator except conduits 2" and below may have high impact thermoset phenolic
insulating bushings.
3. Couplings shall be threaded steel.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit:
1. Thin wall tubing with zinc coating
2. Couplings and connectors shall be threaded steel, watertight gland compression type or
steel, concrete tight, set screw type.
3. All connectors shall have insulated throat.
D. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit:
1. Heavy wall rigid, schedule 40 or schedule 80, listed for underground encasement and
above ground applications.
2. Use primer/cleaner on glued joints.
E. PVC Coated Conduit:
1. RGS or IMC Conduit
2. 40 MIL PVC exterior coating
3. 2 MIL Urethane coating on interior and threads
4. Plastic tread protector caps
F. Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Electro-galvanized single strip steel.
G. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
16130 - 3
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Electro-galvanized single strip steel with PVC coating.
2.2 BOXES
A. Galvanized steel or cast type outlet boxes to accommodate device indicated by symbol, in
conformance with code requirements, number and size of conductors and splices and
consistent with type of construction.
B. Surface mounted boxes shall have the appropriate cover, raised device covers on 4" square
and 4-11/16" boxes and handy box covers on handy boxes, etc.
C. Boxes in block shall have device covers that are square drawn or square cut.
D. Boxes in tile shall have square cornered tile covers.
E. Use round drawn device covers on boxes in lath and plaster walls or dry wall only.
F. Front edge of device boxes must be set flush with the finished wall surfaces except on walls of
non-combustible materials where the boxes may have maximum set back of 1/4".
G. Exterior wall boxes or wet location boxes shall be gasketed type cast boxes with matching
cover.
H. Gangable type boxes shall not be used.
I. Box ears, with tapped holes, must turn into the box opening.
J. Floor outlet boxes – Refer to Specification 16140 – Wiring Devices.
K. Junction or pull boxes and covers:
1. Code gauge steel with galvanized or sheradized finish with covers secured by galvanized
machine screws.
2. Sufficient size to allow code required minimum cable bending radii to be rolled.
3. Knock out punches shall be used for required holes.
4. Use factory manufactured boxes only.
5. Field fabricated boxes not allowed without prior approval of local Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ).
L. Conduit Bodies:
1. For use with RGS, IMC or EMT
2. Malleable Iron
3. Cast aluminum - copper free
4. PVC coated
5. Covers
a. Stamped steel
b. Cast steel or aluminum
c. Stainless Steel Screws
d. Neoprene Gaskets
2.3 SUPPORT
A. Conduit supports for horizontal or vertical single runs:
16130 - 4
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
1. Hot dipped galvanized heavy-duty sheet steel straps, mineralac clamps or channel system
with appropriate components.
2. Spring type pressure clamps may be used with conduit through 3/4".
B. Conduit supports for horizontal and vertical multiple runs:
1. Channel systems with appropriate components.
a. Horizontal runs to be supported with appropriate sized rods.
b. Vertical runs anchored to structure.
2. Spring type pressure clamps may be used with conduit through 3/4".
C. Vertical conduit runs 1-1/4" and larger passing through floors shall be supported at each floor
with pipe riser clamps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Furnish information to General Contractor as to size and location of built-in openings required.
B. Do not cut, remove or pierce general or mechanical insulation, fire rated walls, ceilings or
steelwork without prior permission and instruction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit
1. Provide for proper application, installation, and location of inserts, supports and anchor bolts
for satisfactory raceway system.
2. Where any component of the raceway system is damaged, replace it or provide new
raceway system.
3. Run conduits concealed to avoid adverse conditions such as heat and moisture, to permit
drainage, and to avoid materials and equipment of other trades.
4. Maintain minimum clearance of 6" from hot water pipes, flues and any high temperature
piping or ductwork.
5. Avoid exposed conduit runs. Conduit may be run exposed where it is impractical or
impossible to conceal or where specific approval is obtained.
6. Run all conduit grouped and parallel or perpendicular to the building axes.
7. Do not route exposed conduits over ovens or other high temperature machinery or in
contact with such equipment. Maintain as much spacing as possible away from such
equipment.
8. Exposed conduits to be offset at boxes.
9. Conduit shall not be permitted to be installed in concrete except where noted on the plans.
10. Conduit shall not be permitted to be installed in structural or topping floor slabs without
written approval from the structural engineer.
11. Ream conduit smooth at ends, cap upon installation, rigidly attach to structural parts of
building and securely fasten to outlet boxes, panel cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes,
splicing chambers, safety switches and other components of the raceway system.
12. Independently support or attach raceway system to structural parts of construction.
Suspended ceiling systems shall not be considered as structural parts of the construction
for conduit support.
16130 - 5
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
13. Conduit, conduit systems or boxes shall not be supported or secured by wire, but shall be
supported by devices manufactured specifically for this purpose.
a. Plastic tie-wrap is not permitted.
14. Conduits supported on channel systems shall be secured on each channel with appropriate
clamps.
15. Conduit installed in metal stud walls must be secured to prevent rattling by using Caddy
clamps. Install clamps within 2’ of each box and at every 6’ on center.
16. Devices in exterior or load-bearing walls may be fed by horizontal conduit runs. Horizontal
bends in conduit around corners is not allowed. Other devices shall be fed vertically from
above.
17. Provide spare capped conduits for flush-mounted panelboards consisting of three 3/4"
conduits to the ceiling space above, and three 3/4" conduits to the ceiling space below floor
slab.
18. Provide empty raceways 2-1/2" and over with No.10 galvanized fishwire.
19. Provide nylon pull cord in conduit smaller than 2-1/2".
20. Coordinate through-roof conduits with roofing contractor.
21. Minimum conduit size: 1/2", except as noted.
22. Home runs: minimum 3/4" conduit, except as noted.
23. Minimum size for flexible metal conduit is 1/2" except where type MC cable is specifically
permitted in these specifications.
24. Minimum size for liquid tight flexible metal conduit is 1/2".
25. Provide conduit expansion and deflection fittings in all conduit runs imbedded in or
penetrating concrete where movement perpendicular to the axis of the conduit may be
encountered.
26. Provide conduit expansion fittings complete with bonding jumpers in conduit runs, which
cross expansion joints in structure and conduit runs mechanically attached to 2 separate
structures.
27. On work exposed to weather or in damp locations fittings shall be made weathertight.
28. Conduit and boxes attached to building surfaces, which may be damp, shall be spaced out
to avoid rust and/or corrosion using fittings approved for use.
29. Provide conduit seals where conduits pass from interior to exterior of the building, in moist
areas in accordance with NEC, where conduits enter a room which at any time is subject to
lower or higher temperatures and where conduits enter a room which at any time is subject
to internal air pressures above or below normal.
30. Seal conduits entering or passing through areas that are "hazardous (classified) areas" as
defined in NEC - Art 500.
B. Boxes:
1. Set outlet boxes parallel to construction and independently attached to same.
2. Adjust flush type boxes to set level with finished surface.
3. Back to back and through-the-wall boxes are not acceptable.
4. Provide multi-ganged boxes where 2 or more devices are in same location, unless
otherwise noted.
5. Box Support:
a. Mount boxes straight.
b. In stud walls provide horizontal bracing at top or bottom of box for 3 or more gang
device boxes.
c. For up to 2 gang device boxes, provide stud support one side, with short piece of stud.
16130 - 6
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
d. Boxes in masonry walls shall be solidly mortared in.
e. Tie wire supported boxes are not acceptable.
f. For one and two gang box support, manufactured bracket supports shall be an
accepted alternate.
6. Provide partitions in multi-ganged boxes where different types of devices are installed, or
devices installed operate at different voltages.
7. Mount boxes in block walls at block joint nearest to indicated height.
C. With prior approval by the Engineer, raceway runs may be field changed to obtain better
installation.
D. Provide PVC coated conduit in areas with corrosive atmosphere as noted on plans.
E. Conduit clamps, mounting hardware, supports, hangers, etc., shall be made of stainless steel
when located in "wet" or wash-down areas.
3.3 COMMUNICATIONS
A. Minimum communications raceway size shall be 1" conduit, unless otherwise noted on
drawings.
B. Provide one conduit from each communications box. Horizontal conduit runs between wall
boxes are not allowed.
C. Terminate conduit stub ups above closest accessible corridor ceiling or at the building structure
in areas with exposed ceilings.
D. Provide insulated bushings on each end of conduits.
E. Provide flush two-gang box with single gang plaster ring for each communications outlet or as
noted on drawings.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit:
1. RGS Permitted:
a. Installations below grade (and under slabs where approved).
b. All locations except corrosive atmospheres.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit:
1. EMT conduit shall be permitted:
a. Interior dry locations
C. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) Conduit:
1. IMC conduit permitted:
a. Interior dry locations
b. Hazardous locations
c. Locations exposed to weather
d. Locations requiring mechanical protection.
D. Nonmetallic Rigid Conduit:
1. Nonmetallic rigid conduit shall be permitted for:
16130 - 7
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
a. Direct burial, in sand fill on bottom and top, minimum burial depth of 36”.
b. Corrosive atmospheres where specifically indicated to be used.
E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Use liquid tight flexible conduit, not over 4 ft in length, for final connections to:
a. Equipment in wet locations.
b. Equipment with vibration isolation mounting.
c. Equipment housing ferromagnetic cores or with integral moving components, capable of
generating noise or vibrations including transformers and motors.
d. Pumps and associated equipment.
e. Instruments and control devices.
F. Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Use flexible metal conduit not over 6 ft in length for final connections for:
a. Equipment in dry locations.
b. Equipment in dry locations with vibration isolation mounting.
c. Final connections to recessed luminaires in lengths not to exceed 6 ft.
G. PVC Coated Conduit
1. PVC coated conduit shall be used:
a. In corrosive atmospheres as noted on plans.
b. In exterior environments needing additional protection.
2. Use PVC coated elbows.
END OF SECTION
16140 - 1
WIRING DEVICES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16140: WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
B. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Provide devices such as switches, receptacles, plates, etc., as shown on drawings and
specified.
B. All openings shall be covered with either devices and matching plates, solid blank plates or
blank plates with bushed opening.
C. Unless otherwise noted, wiring devices of same type shall be from same manufacturer.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Federal Spec. W-C-596F Federal Specifications for Electrical Power Connections.
B. ANSI NEMA WD-6 Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.
C. NEMA WD-1 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.
D. UL 20 - General Use Snap Switches.
E. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for equipment under this Section.
B. Plate sample.
C. Weatherproof cover plate samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Items specified:
1. Toggle Switches
2. Duplex Receptacles
3. Plates
4. Occupancy Sensors
16140 - 2
WIRING DEVICES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
5. Wallswitch Occupancy Sensors
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Leviton part numbers are indicated throughout this specification.
This is provided with the intent of showing the level of quality required for each device. Unless
specifically stated otherwise, products from alternate manufacturers will be accepted provided
they are a comparable product of the same level of quality and capable of performing the
intended function.
1. Leviton
2. Greengate
3. Pass & Seymour
4. Hubbell
5. General Electric
6. Arrow Hart
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Switches:
1. Switches shall be industrial grade 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, AC, quiet type, unless
otherwise noted.
a. Single pole - Leviton 1221-2
b. Double pole - Leviton 1222-2
c. Three-way - Leviton 1223-2
d. Four-way - Leviton 1224-2
2. Switches shall be white colored. Switches shall be UL verified to Federal Specification W-
S-896.
3. Lighted handle switches shall be 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, AC, with red handle.
a. Single pole – Leviton 1221-LH.
4. Wall switch occupancy sensors shall be dual technology type equal to Greengate #OSW-
DT-0601-MV
B. Receptacles
1. Receptacles shall be industrial grade 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex, nylon face, grounded,
with separate grounding screw and NEMA 5-20R plug configuration.
a. Standard receptacle shall be Leviton 5362
2. Receptacles shall be white colored.
3. Receptacles shall be grounded.
4. Switched receptacles shall have upper half switched and lower half not switched.
5. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) receptacles 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex, with feed-
through design to protect downstream devices.
a. GFCI receptacles shall be commercial grade.
2.3 WALL PLATES
A. Wall plates shall be smooth, 302 stainless steel throughout the project.
B. Weatherproof covers, which are weatherproof when receptacle is in use, shall be commercial
grade powder-coated cast zinc and shall be suitable to type of box to be covered.
1. Vertical weatherproof receptacle covers shall be Leviton 5979-0GY.
2. Horizontal weatherproof receptacle covers shall be Leviton 5999-0GY.
16140 - 3
WIRING DEVICES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Indicated dimension are to center line of device.
B. Install devices at heights scheduled below, and as indicated on drawings.
1. Switches 48” to top of device
2. Receptacles 48” to top of device
C. Install duplex wall receptacles vertically with ground contacts up except where shown otherwise
or where space problem occurs.
D. Install devices above counters 2" to bottom above countertop or backsplash. Install at same
height all devices above any one counter or fixed cabinet. Verify locations prior to rough-in.
E. Install special purpose receptacles and switches and fixed equipment connections according to
shop drawings and rough-in drawings to be furnished by trade(s) providing such equipment.
Verify locations prior to rough-in.
F. Install lighting switches vertically on latch side of door within 6" of frame edge.
G. Install devices plumb, level with finished surfaces and free from blemishes.
H. Identify receptacles, other than 20A, 120V with "Brady" clear vinyl polyester tape with black
lettering.
1. Label shall indicate receptacle voltage, phase, and amperage at top of cover plate, and
panel and circuit number at bottom of cover plate.
I. Identify all 20A, 120V duplex receptacles with black lettering.
1. Lettering shall indicate receptacle panel and circuit number at bottom of cover plate.
END OF SECTION
16405 - 1
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16405: ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual motor controllers
B. Magnetic motor controllers
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA® 70 - National Electrical Code® (NEC®).
B. UL® 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.
C. UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
D. NECA, "Standard of Installation" - published by National Electrical Contractors Association.
E. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
G. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
H. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure
details.
B. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting
of Product.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
16405 - 2
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLER
A. Square D - Class 2510 Type F.
1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, ac general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage
controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, and toggle
operator.
2. Enclosure: ANSI®/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS: MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS - NON-REVERSING
A. Square D - Class 8536 Type S.
1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, ac general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction
motors rated in horsepower.
2. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz.
3. Coil: Be of encapsulated type.
4. Poles: Three, as indicated.
5. Size: as indicated.
6. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts. Contact
inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring.
7. Wiring: Straight-through wiring with all terminals clearly marked.
8. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS
a. Melting Alloy: One-piece thermal unit construction. Thermal units shall be
interchangeable. Overload relay control circuit contact shall be replaceable.
Thermal units shall be required for starter to operate.
b. Solid State: Trip current rating will be established by selection of overload relay
and shall be adjustable (3 to 1 current range). The overload shall be self-
powered, provide phase loss and phase unbalance protection, have a
permanent tamper guard, and be ambient insensitive. It will also be available in
Trip Class 10 or 20 and have a mechanical test function.
c. Outputs: Unit will be designed for addition of either a normally open or normally
closed auxiliary contact and be field convertible.
d. Reset: Unit shall offer both manual reset and remote reset using an external
module.
9. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation.
B. Product Options and Features
1. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in
contact.
2. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type.
3. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150.
4. Push Buttons: Unguarded type.
5. Indicating Lights: LED type.
6. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
7. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
8. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 150VA minimum, in each motor starter.
Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
16405 - 3
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.3 MANUFACTURERS: MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS - TWO-SPEED
A. Square D - Class 8810 Type S
1. Description: Include electrical interlock between SLOW and FAST speeds. Starters shall be
electrically and mechanically interlocked to prohibit both starters being energized
simultaneously.
2. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz.
3. Coil: Be of encapsulated type.
4. Poles: Three, as indicated.
5. Size: as indicated.
6. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts.
7. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring.
8. Wiring: Straight-through wiring with all terminals clearly marked.
9. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS
a. Melting Alloy: with one-piece thermal unit construction. Thermal units shall be
interchangeable. Overload relay control circuit contact shall be replaceable.
Thermal units shall be required for starter to operate.
b. Solid State: Trip current rating will be established by selection of overload relay
and shall be adjustable (3 to 1 current range). The overload shall be self-
powered, provide phase loss and phase unbalance protection, have a
permanent tamper guard and be ambient insensitive. It will also be available in
Trip Class 10 or 20 and have a mechanical test function.
c. Outputs: Unit will be designed for addition of either a normally open or normally
closed auxiliary contact and be field convertible.
d. Reset: Unit shall offer both manual reset and remote reset using an external
module.
10. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation.
B. Product Options and Features:
1. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in
contact.
2. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type.
3. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150.
4. Push Buttons: Unguarded type.
5. Indicating Lights: LED type.
6. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
7. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
8. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 150VA minimum, in each motor starter.
Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install enclosed controllers plumb.
C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle.
16405 - 4
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
D. Install fuses in fusible switches.
E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
F. Provide a laminated label on each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate
horsepower, along with panel name and circuit number.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2.
END OF SECTION
16410 - 1
ENCLOSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16410: ENCLOSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16490 - Fuses
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section covers disconnect switches located remote from motor control centers or
panelboards for disconnection of power to fixed electrical equipment.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
C. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches.
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
E. UL 489 - Standard for Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for equipment provided under this specification section.
B. Submittal shall be catalog cut sheet indicating: voltage, amperage, HP ratings, enclosure type,
dimension, fuse clip features, terminal lugs and all accessories including interlock devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Square D, Siemens, Cutler-Hammer, or General Electric.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. All safety disconnect switches shall be heavy duty type.
B. Switch Interiors:
1. Shall have switch blades that are visible in "OFF" position when switch door is open.
2. Current carrying parts shall be plated.
3. Shall have removable arc suppressors to permit easy access to line side lugs.
16410 - 2
ENCLOSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Lugs shall be front removable and UL listed for 60°C or 75°C, aluminum or copper
conductors.
C. Switch Mechanism:
1. Quick-make, quick-break.
2. Provisions for at least 3 padlocks to lock switch in "OFF" position.
3. Dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of switch door when handle is in "ON"
position, and to prevent closing of switch mechanism with door open.
4. Defeat mechanism to bypass interlock.
5. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure.
6. Handle position shall indicate whether switch is "ON" or "OFF".
D. Ratings:
1. Ampacity as indicated on drawings.
2. Horsepower rated.
3. All switches shall be rated at 480V minimum, unless specifically indicated as 240V rated on
drawings.
4. Switches Rated 30A through 600A:
a. Shall be equipped with Class J fuses where required to be fused.
b. Short circuit rating, when equipped with Class J fuses shall be 200,000 rms symmetrical
amperes.
5. 800 and 1200 ampere switches:
a. Provisions for Class L fuses
b. Short circuit rating of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
E. Accessories:
1. Provide solid neutral assembly on units where required.
2. Provide equipment ground kit on all units.
3. Provide factory installed fuse puller on fused units.
F. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 1, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4, NEMA 4X, and NEMA 12 as required
by environmental conditions or as indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide a disconnect switch at each motor as required by NFPA
70, regardless of who provided the motor.
B. Disconnect switches shall be installed on the line side of all controls and taps to ensure safety
during maintenance and repair operations.
C. Disconnect switches shall be installed on the line side of variable frequency drives, unless the
drawings indicate otherwise.
D. Disconnect switch mounting height shall be a minimum of 36" above grade or roof line.
E. All disconnect switches shall be provided with a phenolic label on the front indicating the piece
of equipment that is being controlled. Refer to Specification Section 16080 – Electrical
Identification for label requirements.
16410 - 3
ENCLOSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. All testing shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor.
END OF SECTION
16420 - 1
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16420: LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
B. Section 16070 - Supporting Devices
C. Section 16080 - Electrical Identification
D. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
E. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide Lighting and Appliance panelboards as indicated on drawings and as scheduled.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 407 - Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards.
B. NEMA AB-1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
C. NEMA AB-3 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application.
D. NEMA PB-1 - Panelboards.
E. NEMA PB-1.1 - General Instructions For Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
G. UL486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.
H. UL486B - Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors
I. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
J. UL 67 - Electric Panelboards.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for all equipment provided under this specification
section.
B. Shop drawings shall include:
1. Manufacturers data on panelboards including, but not limited to, voltage, number of phases,
frequency, and short-circuit and continuous current ratings.
2. Layout drawings, including dimensions and circuit breaker arrangement, of all panelboards.
16420 - 2
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, Siemens, Cutler Hammer, or General Electric.
B. A single source manufacturer is required for all electrical equipment.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
1. Panelboards shall:
a. Have copper or aluminum bussing.
b. Have full ampacity bussing throughout and shall be full size in regard to number of
possible pole spaces. 42 poles per section except where shown to be less.
c. Be identified with phases reading left to right, and circuits alternately numbered left to
right - odd number on left, even on right.
d. Be door-in-door construction.
e. Have fully rated short circuit rating equal to or greater than equipment rating shown in
documents. Series rating shall not be permitted.
f. Be labeled with short circuit current rating.
g. Be factory assembled.
B. Minimum dimensions shall be 20" wide x 5 3/4" deep.
C. Provide gutter and wiring space to meet codes and standards requirements.
D. Electrical Contractor shall instruct manufacturer as to where additional wiring gutter space is
required, i.e., top, bottom, right, left or combination.
E. Panelboards mounted adjacent to one another in finished exposed spaces shall have identical
panel and trim height.
F. Fronts shall be complete with cylinder type lock and catch and all cylinders shall be keyed alike.
Provide 2 keys per panelboard to Owner at project completion.
G. Panelboard cabinets including boxes and fronts shall be code gage galvanized steel.
H. The ampere rating of all devices shall be visible without removal of the dead front cover.
2.3 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURER
A. Lugs for incoming feeders shall be for use with copper or aluminum conductors.
B. Main lugs or main breakers may be top or bottom mounted to coordinate with incoming feeder
entrance location selected by Electrical Contractor.
C. Circuit breakers shall be molded case quick-make, quick-break, with thermal magnetic trip.
D. Multi-pole breakers shall have common internal trip. Handle-ties are not permitted.
E. All circuit breakers used on multi-wire branch circuits shall have a common trip mechanism.
F. Breakers shall have ampere rating as scheduled.
G. All circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.
16420 - 3
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
H. Provide uninsulated grounding bus bar in each panel.
1. Bus bar shall have lug or lugs for grounding conductor from switchboard or distribution
panel.
2. 42 or same number as poles in panel, screw type terminals for connection of equipment
grounding conductors.
3. Terminals shall be sized for No.12 through No. 6 wire.
4. Bus bar shall be welded or bolted to back of panel cabinet.
I. Neutral bus shall not be used as grounding bus or vice versa. Neutral conductors shall
terminate in neutral bus and grounding conductors shall terminate in grounding bus.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Final locations, sizes and mounting of panelboards shall be reviewed to verify the existence of
code required minimum working space clearances prior to installation.
B. Install panelboards and enclosures, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and
in compliance with recognized industry practices.
C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring they are permanently and
mechanically anchored.
D. Top breaker handle: Maximum of 6 ft above finished floor.
E. Tighten connectors and terminals in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published
torque tightening values.
F. Prior to energization of panelboards, check phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation
resistance levels.
G. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short-circuits.
H. Panelboard shall have typewritten circuit schedule installed inside cover of each panelboard.
I. Schedule shall be covered with clear plastic and shall include description of connected loads,
room numbers, room name, area, or item served for each branch circuit.
J. Label spare circuits as "SPARE".
K. Room numbers used shall be those used by Owner except as otherwise directed by Architect.
L. All panelboards shall be identified with a phenolic label to match the designation used in the
contract drawings. Refer to Specification Section 16080 – Electrical Identification for label
requirements.
M. Leave spare breakers in OFF position.
N. Surface panels to have enamel finished trim in manufacturer's standard color.
3.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING
A. Prior to final inspection clean panelboard interiors, adjust trims, covers, hinges and locks and
refinish marred or scratched covers to original condition.
16420 - 4
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Balance the lighting or continuous load on panelboards so the phases are balanced to within
10% of each other. Reconnect or redistribute circuits and/or circuit breakers to achieve
balanced condition.
C. Submit ammeter readings for all lighting panelboard feeders indicating normal operating load
and phase balance.
END OF SECTION
16460- 1
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16460: DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16070 - Supporting Devices
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C57.12.55 - Dry Type Transformers in Unit Installations, including Unit Substations -
Conformance Standard
B. ANSI C57.12.70 - Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and Power Transformers
C. NEMA ST20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications
D. UL 1561 - Dry Type General Purpose and Power Transformers
E. NEMA TP-1, EPA EnergyStar
F. DOE CsI3
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for equipment provided under this section.
B. Transformer shop drawings for each size and type unit supplied shall include:
1. Physical dimensions, including weight.
2. kVA rating, tap connections and locations.
3. Insulation class and temperature rise by resistance.
4. Efficiency values measured at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100% linear load.
5. Efficiency values measured at 50% non-linear load.
6. Impedance values including X/R ratio and %Z.
7. Sound level.
8. "K" factor rating.
9. NEMA rating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, Siemens, Cutler Hammer, General Electric, or ACME
C3.
16460- 2
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Transformers (25 kVA - 300 kVA)
1. Three phase transformers shall be 60 hertz, with primary and secondary windings and
voltages as indicated. KVA ratings and impedances shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
2. Transformers shall be convection air cooled, 3-coil, 2 winding type with minimum of four 2-
1/2% full capacity primary taps with two above nominal and two below nominal rating.
3. 115°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient shall apply to transformers from 15 kVA to
112.5 kVA and shall be capable of carrying 15% continuous overload without exceeding
150°C rise.
4. 80°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient shall apply to transformers above 112.5 kVA
and shall be capable of 30% continuous overload without exceeding 150°C rise.
5. Top of enclosure shall not exceed maximum temperature of 50°C above 40°C ambient.
6. Manufacturer shall guarantee that sound levels will not exceed:
a. 45 dB for 15-50 kVA transformers
b. 50 dB for 51-150 kVA transformers
c. 55 dB for 151-300 kVA transformers
7. Insulating material shall be in accordance with NEMA ST20 standard for 220°C UL
component recognized insulation system.
8. Ventilation openings shall be designed to prevent accidental access to live parts.
9. Efficiencies shall meet or exceed NEMA TP-1 when operated from 25% - 100% rated load.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Transformer coils shall be continuous wound construction and impregnated with non-
hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish.
B. Cores shall be high-grade silicon steel, non-aging with high magnetic permeability, low eddy
current losses and low hysteresis. Magnetic flux densities shall be below saturation point. Core
laminations shall be clamped with steel members.
C. Coil conductors shall be continuous copper or aluminum with terminations brazed or welded up
to 75 KVA and bolted 112.5 KVA and above.
D. Provisions shall be made to isolate core and coil from enclosure. There shall be no metal-to-
metal contact. Rubber vibration absorbing mounts shall be used to isolate base of enclosure
from core and coil assembly.
E. Visibly ground transformer neutral to enclosure with flexible grounding conductor.
F. Entire transformer enclosure shall be degreased, cleaned, phosphatized, primed and finished
with baked enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Transformers shall be mounted as scheduled on the drawings. Suspended units shall be
mounted on brackets supplied by the manufacturer, if such are available. If not available, shop
drawings of the proposed brackets shall be submitted prior to fabrication or purchase.
16460- 3
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
B. Provide ample space for air circulation around all sides in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Connections shall be:
1. At sides near bottom
2. Made with liquid tight flexible metal conduit in length not to exceed 3 ft.
D. The installation shall be performed to minimize the transfer of vibration from the transformer to
its surroundings.
3.2 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Prior to final inspection, adjust taps to coincide with load and utility voltages.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Testing shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor.
END OF SECTION
16490- 1
FUSES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16490: FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16410 - Enclosed Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers
B. Section 16420 - Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes nonrenewable cartridge fuses, rated 600V and less, for use in switches,
panelboards, switchboards, motor controllers, and motor-control centers.
B. Voltage and amperage ratings:
Class Volts Amperage
J 600 0-600
L 250 or 600 601-6000
RK1 250 or 600 0-600
RK5 250 or 600 0-600
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
B. UL 198C - High Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting Type.
C. UL 248 - 1-Low Voltage Fuses - General Requirements
D. UL 248 - 8 - Class J Fuses
E. UL 248 - 10 - Class L Fuses
F. UL 248 - 12 - Class R Fuses
G. UL 512 - Fuse Holders
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type being provided:
1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
3. Time-current curves and related data.
16490- 2
FUSES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. The following are acceptable manufacturers:
1. Bussmann
2. Gould Shawmut
3. Littelfuse
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating
consistent with circuit voltage.
2.3 FUSEBLOCKS
A. Thermoplastic base. UL flammability: 94VO
B. Clip reinforcing springs, 100 amps and above.
C. 200,000 A. RMS Sym withstand rating.
D. Copper or aluminum connections.
2.4 TOUCH SAFE FUSEHOLDERS
A. Thermoplastic. UL flammability: 94VO
B. Cover over fuses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examination utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Main Service: Class L or Class J, as applicable.
B. Feeders: Class L or Class J, as applicable.
C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 or Class RK5.
D. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1 or Class RK5.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
3.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Fuses: At the completion of construction, provide three (3) spare fuses of each rating installed
to the Owner.
16490- 3
FUSES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused device.
END OF SECTION
16500- 1
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16500: LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
B. Section 16070 - Supporting Devices
C. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
D. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to drawings for Lighting Fixture Schedule.
B. Luminaires shall be provided complete with necessary accessories for proper installation.
C. Catalog numbers shown in luminaire schedule are basic luminaire types. Additional features,
accessories and options not specified or scheduled shall be included.
D. Provide lamps for luminaires of size and type as recommended by luminaire manufacturer and
as scheduled.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA/IESNA 500 - Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting
Systems (ANSI).
B. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems (ANSI).
C. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility.
D. UL 935 - Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
E. UL 1029 - High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballast.
F. UL 1598 - Luminaires
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to complying with requirements of Section 16000 - General Electrical Requirements
shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all equipment provided under this specification
section.
2. Where specific finish or color is not specified and options exist, submit color or finish
samples to Architect for selection.
16500- 2
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
3. Shop drawings shall include manufacturer's product data, installation instructions,
maintenance data, parts list for each luminaire accessories, and mounting details for linear
and suspended luminaires.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Luminaires:
1. Shall be as specified on luminaire schedule on the drawings. Comparable items of
luminaire manufacturers other than that listed on the luminaire schedule will be considered
if complete information, including photometric data, is submitted.
B. LED Fixtures
1. LED fixture Manufacturers shall provide the LED specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule
or meet (or exceed) the performance specifications of the LED Manufacturers listed below.
a. Lumiled
b. Cree
c. Nichia
d. Toyoda Gosei
e. Gelcore
f. Osram Sylvania – OptoSemiconductor
C. Emergency Ballasts:
1. Bodine, Dual-Lite, Exide.
D. Product Substitution:
1. Approval of other manufacturers considering their products equal will be subject to the
following:
a. Equal manufacturers are required to meet specifications of specified luminaires and
lenses in regard to ceiling opening size and shape, housing, trim/door appearance and
construction, general overall appearance, efficiency, manufacturer's published
photometric data, lamp size, lamp quantity, lens thickness, brightness control and lamp
hiding characteristics.
b. Provide equivalent performance to specified luminaires considering application in
environment and intended usage by Owner.
c. Manufacturers shall submit complete luminaire, lamp, and lens data for evaluation
and/or submit sample luminaires for approval.
d. Samples shall:
1) Be submitted only at request of Engineer
2) Be complete with specified lamp(s)
3) Be ready for installation, and inspection
4) Be shipped prepaid
5) Remain available as example of construction, finish, color tolerance,
photometrics, and general quality of other luminaires of respective type to be
installed on project.
e. Luminaires inferior to the specified products, as judged by Architect/Engineer, will be
rejected and their installation will not be permitted.
16500- 3
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
f. Submit complete photometric report of submitted sample with specified lamp type and
wattage including tabulated candlepower, coefficient of utilization, and iso-footcandle
diagram.
g. Photometric report shall be in accordance with published IES testing procedures, in
independent testing laboratory, and certified by registered Electrical Engineer. Data
may also be supplied in the form of a data file on a CD in IES format for use in a
recognized computer lighting program.
2.2 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURER
A. Luminaires:
1. Verify types of ceiling construction with General Contractor prior to releasing luminaires for
fabrication and delivery and provide luminaires adapted to ceiling construction used.
2. Coordinate recessed luminaire mounting appurtenances, flanges and trims with
construction of ceiling in which luminaire is to be recessed. Provide correct luminaire
mounting assembly.
3. Provide luminaires with finish as described in the luminaire schedule. Finish shall be
applied by the luminaire manufacturer unless noted otherwise. Verify final finish
requirements before releasing luminaires for fabrication.
4. Painted recessed luminaires and surface luminaires shall be painted after fabrication or
"post painted".
5. Troffer lenses shall be 0.125" thick as measured by industry standards, unless otherwise
noted.
6. Acrylic lenses shall be 100% virgin acrylic material.
7. Recessed troffers with doors shall have spring-loaded door cam latches.
8. Luminaire schedule shows required style of outdoor luminaire, pole heights where poles are
required, and basic IESNA distribution pattern required. Include fittings, brackets, mounting
plates, etc., for proper installation.
B. LED Luminaires
1. All Solid-State Lighting Products in the form of Luminaires, including LED lamps, shall be
manufactured and tested based on Approved Methods for the Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting products as stated in the LM-79-08
2. Manufacturer shall provide photometric performance data on luminaires in accordance with
ANSI/IES LM-63-02: ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of
Photometric Data and Related Information.
3. The LED luminaire manufacturer shall provide the name of the LED source manufacturer
incorporated into the luminaire.
4. All LED luminaire manufacturers shall provide luminaire efficacy calculated from the initial
lumen output of the luminaire that has reached thermal stability operating in an ambient
temperature of 25°C and based on the total power of the LEDs and driver circuit.
5. The LED luminaire shall have a complete 5 year warranty from date of installation.
6. The LED Luminaire manufacturer shall keep a detailed record of the LED’s bin version and
all of its associated components in order to match specification and performance in the
future, shall it be necessary to replace any of its parts should the equipment malfunction.
7. Lumen depreciation and failure shall be derived from extrapolation or calculation in
accordance with TM-21-11 (Lumen Depreciation Lifetime Estimation Method for LED Light
Sources) based on performance data collected per IES-LM-80.
a. Temperature cycle shock test
b. Voltage switching test
16500- 4
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
c. Ambient temperature test at 45°C
8. LED fixture Manufacturers shall provide specified LED fixture characteristics such as:
a. Color Temperature for “White” LEDs
b. LED Distribution Angle
c. Quantity of LEDs per PCB
d. Luminous Intensity or Luminous Flux per device
e. Operating current and voltage
f. Dimming Capability
g. Input and System Wattage
9. LED fixture Manufacturers shall meet LED source manufacturer’s recommendations for:
a. Thermal dissipation
b. Operating temperature range for both the LED and Power Supply
c. Storage temperature range for both the LED and the Power Supply
d. Operating Voltage & Current
e. Peak Pulse Forward Current
10. LED fixture Manufacturers shall provide a Driver (power supply) that supplies required
current with voltage range covering the forward voltage as well as variability.
11. Fixtures shall be constructed to allow for the PCB, Driver and electrical components to be
easily accessed and replaced without being removed from the mountings or disassembling
adjacent construction.
2.3 LED Power Supplies
A. LED fixture Manufacturers shall provide a Driver (power supply) that supplies required current
with voltage range covering the forward voltage as well as variability.
B. Fixtures shall be constructed to allow for the printed circuit board (PCB), Driver and electrical
components to be easily accessed and replaced without being removed from the mountings or
disassembling adjacent construction.
C. Performance Requirements
1. LED power supplies shall operate LEDs within the current limit specifications of the
manufacturer.
2. LED power supplies shall operate from 60Hz or 50Hz input source and have input power
factor above 90% and a minimum efficiency of 70% at full rated load of the driver.
3. LED power supplies shall have short circuit and overload protection.
4. LED power supplies shall have a minimum starting temperature of -20F.
5. LED power supplies shall have a maximum case temperature rating of at least 70°C.
6. Power supply output shall be regulated to +/-5% across published load range.
7. LED power supply shall have a class A sound rating.
D. Regulatory Requirements
1. LED power supplies shall be UL 1310/8750 Recognized.
2. Power supplies intended for commercial applications shall comply with the requirements of
the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Title 47 CFR part
15, non-consumer (class A) for EMI/RFI (conducted and radiated).
3. Power supplies designated by the manufacturer for residential applications must meet FCC
requirements for consumer use (FCC 47 CFR Part 15/18 Consumer Emission Limits).
16500- 5
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
4. Power supply shall comply with IEEE C.62.41-1991, Class A operation. The line transient
shall consist of seven strikes of a 100 kHz ring wave, 2.5 kV level, for both common mode
and differential mode.
5. LED power supply shall contain no PCBs (polychlorinated biphenyl)
E. Additional Requirements
1. LED power supply shall carry a 5 year warranty from date of manufacturer against defects
in material or workmanship, including a replacement, for operation at or below the maximum
case temperature specification.
2. Manufacturer shall have a 15 year history of producing power supplies for the North
American and International market.
3. Dimmable power supplies shall be controlled by a class 2 low voltage DC 0-10V device and
shall be capable of operating from 100-1%, dimming range.
4. Dimmable power supplies shall allow the light output to be maintained at the lowest control
setting (prior to off) without dropping out or without noticeable flickering.
5. LED fixture Manufacturers shall provide a Driver (power supply) that supplies stable DC
current with voltage range covering the forward voltage as well as variability.
F. For LED fixtures being dimmed with a 0-10vdc signal, the LED fixture Manufacturer shall provide
a Dimming Module that is compatible with the fixture, the driver, and the dimming system. All
devices shall adhere to standards as defined in IEC 60929). LED Dimming Module
Manufacturers for 12vdc and 24vdc shall be:
1. Advance “Xitanium” or as recommended by the LED fixture Manufacturer.
2. Osram/Sylvania - Optotronic “OT DIM” or as recommended by the LED fixture
Manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1. Deliver luminaires in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings.
2. Store luminaires in original packaging.
3. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme
temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground.
4. Handle luminaires carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not
install damaged units or components; replace with new.
5. Protection wrapping on louvered (parabolic) luminaires shall be removed before installation
of furniture, but after finish work is complete.
B. Sequencing and Scheduling:
1. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and
raceways, to properly interface installation of luminaires with other work.
2. Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling
during remainder of construction.
C. Installation of Luminaires:
1. Install luminaires, lamps, lenses, etc., after building is enclosed, weather tight and
environmental conditions are nominally same as expected for complete spaces.
16500- 6
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
2. Lamps, glassware, reflectors and refractors shall be clean and free of chips, cracks and
scratches.
3. Install luminaires at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with luminaire
manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices.
4. Recessed luminaires shall be supported from the structure with 12 gage wire hangers, 2 per
luminaire, at diagonally opposite corners. Additionally, luminaires shall be attached to
ceiling grid to resist horizontal force equal to weight of luminaire.
5. Provide luminaires and/or luminaire outlet boxes with hangers to properly support luminaire
weight.
6. Coordinate with General Contractor to provide additional ceiling grid support wires to
support luminaire weight.
7. Metal decking shall not be pierced for luminaire support.
8. Provide channel and support for recessed luminaires in plaster ceilings. Provide plaster
frames. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling.
9. Provide approved fire rated enclosures around luminaires in fire rated ceilings.
10. Recessed downlight type luminaires installed in grid ceilings shall be supported by Caddy
517 Series suspension bars or similar support from luminaire manufacturer.
11. Recessed troffers shall be held in place by Caddy 515 Series support clips or similar clips
from luminaire manufacturer.
12. Recessed luminaires in suspended ceilings shall have final connections made with a length
of ½” minimum flexible metal conduit not in excess of 72" in length with THHN conductors
and green ground conductor.
13. Install flush mounted luminaires properly to eliminate light leakage between luminaire frame
and finished surface.
14. Industrial type luminaires in unfinished areas which are near obstructions, such as ducts
and pipes, shall be suspended so that bottom of luminaire is no higher than bottom of
obstruction.
15. Lighting outlets shall not be located until locations of obstructions are determined and
outlets shall be accessible after installation of other equipment.
16. Brace pendant hung luminaires installed near ducts or other construction so they do not
swing into obstructions.
17. Tighten connectors and terminals to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors
and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486 A and B.
18. An additional support is required for surface mounted luminaires greater than 2 ft in length
in addition to the outlet box luminaires stud.
19. Surface luminaires installed on grid ceilings, non-feed support, shall be by Caddy IDS
independent support clips and 12-gage wire installed to structure.
20. Exit signs and surface luminaires installed in grid ceilings shall be supported and fed from
Caddy 512 Series electrical box hangers, on similar support from luminaire manufacturer,
with additional 12 gage wire installed from box to structure.
21. Coordinate stem, rod, chain, or aircraft cable hanger lengths with job conditions to obtain
proper mounting height of pendant hung luminaires.
22. Luminaires shall be installed level.
23. Wall mounted luminaires including exit lights shall be fed through luminaire
Stud/Hickey/Nipple assembly with provisions to prevent luminaire turning.
24. Provide inscription for exit and stairway signs to conform to codes or as scheduled.
16500- 7
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
25. Furnish templates, layout data, and material weights to General Contractor for use in
providing outdoor luminaire bases. Data shall be supplied in sufficient time so work is not
delayed.
26. Install luminaires, poles, hardware, etc., for complete system.
D. Field Quality Control:
1. At Date of Substantial Completion, replace lamps which are not working and lamps which
are not operating properly, as judged by Architect/Engineer.
2. Verify proper orientation of directional luminaires prior to installation. This includes wall
washers, cove lighting, floodlights, exterior area lights and adjustable accent luminaires.
Where orientation cannot be ascertained from drawings or manufacturer's literature, request
clarification in writing from the Architect/Engineer.
E. Adjusting and Cleaning:
1. Clean luminaires of handling marks, dust, dirt, construction debris, etc. This includes
lamps, lenses, reflectors, and louvers, in addition to finished surfaces.
2. Cleaning and touch-up work shall be performed in accordance with luminaire
manufacturer's recommendations with particular efforts made to avoid marring or hazing
specular finishes.
3. Damaged luminaires or components shall be replaced with new.
4. Keep luminaires clean and protected for remainder of construction period.
5. Luminaires having adjustable aiming settings shall be initially set according to drawing
requirements and/or Engineer's instruction prior to substantial completion. Provide final
aiming adjustment in presence of Owner's representative per Architect/Engineer’s guidance.
END OF SECTION
16990 - 1
SPECIAL SYSTEMS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
SECTION 16990: SPECIAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
B. Section 16130 - Raceways and Fittings
1.2 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 1 General
Requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install special systems as shown on the drawings and as specified in this section.
B. Special systems included are as follows:
1. Fire alarm system extension.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete manufacturer’s specification data on each item of equipment, devices, and the
utilization of each device in the special systems.
B. Provide a description of the operation of the special system.
C. Provide a description of the essential items of the installation and a functional description of the
completed special system.
D. Provide catalogue cut sheets of any new devices or products being provided.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractors shall field verify the location, type, and condition of the special system within the existing
building. The Contractor’s bid shall include all costs required to revise the existing system and
expand the system as required for the building modification and addition. All required conductors
shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Approval of submitted equipment data does not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide the detailed functional requirements of this
specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all required equipment necessary to connect the new and
relocated fire alarm system components to the existing Notifier fire alarm and detection system. All
devices shall be installed and arranged to comply with all applicable state and local code
requirements. The added components of the system shall be furnished complete, including
equipment, conduit, wiring, and interconnection, as required, to other systems. The Contractor shall
submit manufacturer’s catalogue data and wiring diagrams of approval prior to purchase and
installation. All equipment shall be approved prior to installation and the system layout approved by
16990 - 2
SPECIAL SYSTEMS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All equipment shall be as manufactured by Notifier, to match the
existing system, and shall be UL listed. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
published instructions.
B. Smoke detectors shall be addressable, photoelectric type.
C. Manual pull stations shall be addressable and shall be surface mounted, double action. Break glass
units shall not be used. Install at 48” above finished floor to top of device.
D. Audio/visual and visual notification appliances shall be units similar to those presently installed in the
existing building.
E. Cabling shall be plenum rated red fire alarm wiring. All cabling in exposed ceiling areas shall be
installed in red EMT conduit. All cabling exposed to, or subject to, physical damage shall be
installed in EMT conduit.
F. Addressable photoelectric duct type smoke detectors shall be installed in each air handling unit
supplying in excess of 2000 CFM to shut down this equipment upon an alarm condition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install all equipment, devices, conduit, and cabling in a manner that exhibits a high
quality of workmanship.
B. The installation of all work shall be neat. Coordinate with other trades in order to provide a well-
coordinated installation. Avoid conflicts with other trades. This Contractor shall perform minor
device relocations as necessary to accommodate other equipment or preserve the appearance of
the facility.
C. All devices and components shall be installed as required by the special system manufacturer.
D. All exposed wiring run above ceiling shall be routed in a neat and workmanlike manner along the
building axis. Cabling shall be bundled together and secured to the structure through the use of
bridle rings or j-hooks installed on four foot centers.
3.2 DIAGRAMS, DRAWINGS, AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS
A. Furnish copies of each of the following items marked as “as-built” as part of the project records for
the Owner.
1. A simplified block diagram of each special system giving the essentials of the installation and
the functional relation of the equipment.
2. A complete instruction book including block and schematic diagrams, wiring diagrams, technical
description of the components, and settings for all normal uses of the systems.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Upon completion of the initial test and adjustment of the system by the Contractor, and after the
diagrams and instruction manuals have been provided, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and
Engineer in writing that the special systems fulfill this specification and are complete and ready for
inspection.
B. The Contractor shall demonstrate operation of each major component and function requirement as
specified herein. If any portion of the system does not function properly, further testing shall be
16990 - 3
SPECIAL SYSTEMS
Nelson + Morgan, Architects Service Bay Expansion
NMA 18014 Fleet Services Facility
performed to determine whether it complies with the applicable specifications. If further adjustments
are necessary, the demonstration shall be halted and corrections shall be made. Demonstrations
shall not resume until the system operates properly.
3.4 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE
A. All equipment shall be guaranteed to be free of defective components and faulty workmanship in
accordance with the guarantee set forth in other sections of the work. If any materials become
defective within the above period, they shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional expense
to the Owner, Architect or Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in the operation, care, and
maintenance of the equipment included in this installation. This shall be performed before the
installation will be considered to be complete.
C. The Contractor shall provide complete maintenance service for a period of one (1) year after final
acceptance of the installation under this section of work. This service shall include at least two (2)
visits to the site for verification of the operation of the system and adjusting of the equipment as
necessary.
END OF SECTION